artin
LIBRARY
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA
GIRT OK
R&etved
Accessions
Shelf No.
PRINCIPIA LAT INA; '
INTRODUCTION
LATIN LANGUAGE
BT ,
CHARLES D'URBAN MORRIS, M. A.,
RECTOR OP TRINITY SCHOOL, NEW YORK. FORMERLY FELLOW OF ORIEL COLLEGE, OXFORD.
0" TH«
W7ERS1TY;
NEW
PUBLISHED BY MASON BROTHERS,
5 AND 1 MEECER STREET.
1 8 t > 0 .
Entered, according to the Act of Congress, in the year I860, by
MASON BROTHERS, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District of New York.
0. A. ALVORD, STEREOTYPES AND PRINTER, XEW YORK.
PREFACE.
THIS book is the result of a conviction that if the Latin language is to be well learned in the time usually devoted to its study in this country, it is necessary that the whole subject should be simplified, and that if possible the number of separate facts which have to be remem- bered should be diminished. It is not denied that many of the grammars and introductory exercise books in general use contain sufficiently full and correct statements of these separate facts, but it is believed that in none of them are the facts classified in the most scientific way, and that in none is the most judicious method adopted of presenting them to the youthful mind. It seems to be considered that boys have plenty of time to learp, first the Latin equivalent for an English word for one thing, its mode of declension or conjugation for another, its gender for a third, and the quantity of its vowels for a fourth, and that it is unnecessary to try to present the facts in such a way as that in recollecting one they shall recollect all. It seems again not to have occurred to the framers of- the books in use that the lengthy statement of rules of syntax not only renders the acquisition of them by young people a work of enor- mous labor, and of nearly infinite time, but that the same lengthy statement almost certainly precludes the efficient use of them when acquired. For what teacher, even the most indefatigable, can call upon his pupils to give the rules for the various constructions of nouns and verbs which occur in a lesson, when the mere enunciation of them in the most rapid and unthinking way involves as great an expenditure of time as can be devoted to the whole recitation ? The consequence of this want of condensation is believed to be, in most cases, that prac- tically the only analysis to which a lesson is subjected is that which is commonly called " parsing;" i. e., no more is in general attempted than to ascertain whether the pupils know in what case, tense, or mood any noun or verb appears. This, though of course an absolutely essential element in the true grammatical analysis, can only be regarded as subsidiary to that higher insight which understands the logical, nay, the almost mathematical necessity of the employment of one form rather than another. But in order to attain this insight, pupils must have their attention continually called afresh to the illustrations of various
IT PREFACE.
constructions as they occur in their lessons ; and to effect this, it is necessary that they should be furnished with simple, definite, and condensed phraseology, which can be applied without needless loss of time, as often as it is required, i. e., as often as constructions to which it is applicable occur in a lesson.
The aim of this book is then twofold: first, to present the facts of declension and conjugation in their most distinct and scientific aspect ; second, to systematize and condense the rules of syntax applicable to simple and compound sentences, and to offer such a concise nomen- clature, as may without any more expenditure of time than is usually devoted to " parsing," admit of the rules being called for and given until they are indelibly impressed on the understanding.
In this preface will be given —
(1.) A statement of the principle upon which this book is con- structed.
2.) A brief defence of this principle upon philological grounds.
3.) A statement of the advantages of teaching Latin in this way.
4.) Answers to objections which may be made to the adoption of this principle in practice.
(5.) A statement of other points in which this book differs from most introductory Latin books which have preceded it.
(6.) Remarks upon the way in which the writer hopes the book may be used.
§ 1. OF THE PRINCIPLE UPON WHICH THIS BOOK IS CONSTRUCTED.
In this book all inflected words, whether substantives, adjectives, pronouns, or verbs, are presented in that shape in which they may be supposed to have existed before any suffixes were appended to them, to mark distinctions of case, tense, person. &c. This primary form, which is called the stem in this book, has been named in some German and English books the crude form: that is, the form in which the word ex- ists before it is fitted to take its place in the spoken or written language ; it is unfit for use, because it is destitute of all means of showing in what relation it stands to other words with which it is connected in a sen- tence. Instead, then, of presenting to pupils the nominative case singular as the simplest and primary form of a noun, or the first person singular of the present tense of the indicative mood as the simplest form of a verb, in this book the stems of both are given as the forma which must be carried in the mind as the simple representatives of the corresponding English words. For example, instead of teaching pupils to call to mind vultus as the simple equivalent of the English noun '•face," or rego as the simple equivalent of the English verb "rule," this book tells them to regard the stems vultu- and reg- as the simple equivalents of the English words ; and to look upon the formed words, vultus, rego, as comprehending, beside the simple meaning, particular indications of the place in a sentence which each of them is fitted to fill.
PREFACE.
§ 2. OF THE PHILOLOGICAL TRUTH OF THE PRINCIPLE.
This subject can of course be but briefly touched upon in this book, which aims only at providing elementary instruction in Latin for young . pupils. It must suffice here to say, that it is admitted by all modern philologers that all inflected Latin or Greek words consist of a base, or crude form, or stem, and suffixes or endings. This fact was brought prominently to notice by the introduction into modern Europe of a knowledge of the Sanscrit language and grammar. Now in all San- scrit grammars it is the practice to give first the naked or unformed word, and then the endings, which, when attached to it, in accordance with the complex laws of euphony which prevail in that language, fit it to fill a place in the spoken or written language. Professor Key of the London University was the first to propose (in 1830), to apply the same method to the classical languages; and he subsequently published a Latin grammar arranged upon this principle.
All inflected words then having stems or crude forms, of course these stems must end either in a consonant or in one of the five vowels. Of substantives we have in this way a complete set of classes answering to the five declensions of ordinary grammars :
Nouns with stems ending in a fall into the first declension. " " " o " " second "
« (i K u u « fourth "
" " " i " " fifth "
« » «< i ii u third it
" " " a consonant " " "
So also for verbs we have the same natural distribution ; there is not, however, any class of verbs with stems ending in o.
Verbs with stems ending in a fall into the first conjugation. " " " e " " second "
" " " i " " fourth "
" " " u " " third "
" " '" a consonant " " "
It is thought that in nearly all these cases' the presence of the char- acteristic letter of each declension and conjugation will be easily enough detected by even a cursory examination. Those who wish to see the grounds of these assumptions fully discussed may consult (7. L. Struve, iiber die Lateinische Declination und Conjugation ; or of more acces- sible books, Donaldson, Varronianus, chap. viii. ; or Anthoris edition of Zumpt's Grammar, appendix V. ; or Key, Latin Grammar, appendix I.
PREFACE.
§ 3. OF THE ADTANTAGES OP TEACHING LATIN IS THIS WAT.
Teachers who may adopt this method of Latin instruction will find that it possesses among others the following advantages :
(1.) It insures certainty as to the declension or conjugation of each word which abides in the memory of the pupil.
(2.) In a large majority of instances it insures the same certainty in regard to the gender of substantives.
(3.) It brings prominently to notice the distinction between what is radical in an inflected word and what is a merely formative and temporary addition to it.
(4.) It affords much more clearly than the old method can do, an insight into the laws of derivation and composition ; and particularly so in the case of those words which have passed into the modern lan- guages.
(5.) It admits of a separate treatment of the cases of nouns, and the tenses and moods of verbs to a greater extent than is at least attempted in books constructed on other methods.
"We will speak of each of these points separately.
(1.) The experience of all teachers must have shown them how liable boys are to error in the inflection of nouns and verbs. Unless, beside the nominative case of a noun, the pupil has in his mind the genitive also, there is no security that he will not inflect a noun of the second declension, for example, like the fourth. And even if he recollect the genitive case, he may yet in some cases, consistently with the rules of his grammar, go wrong. For instance, a boy is taught by Andrews and Stoddart that the words which make their genitive singular in ei are of the fifth declension. He may naturally, therefore, when he sees the words alvel, cunel, Dei. pilei, &a, inflect them like rel, fidel. It is clear, that if upon the method adopted in this book, a boy. by remem- bering one word, can be more certain of declining a noun rightly than he can upon the old method by remembering two, the new system must be adjudged the palm of superiority, if economy of time and labor be of any moment. As Professor Key says, " The words puer, linter, pater, are only deceitful guides to the declension until we know some other case or cases, whereas the crude forms puero-, lintri-, pair-, at once give a direction which cannot be mistaken. A treacherous similarity exists between equus, virtus, and senatus, between servos and arbos, between dies and paries ; but there is no chance of the pupil referring to the same declensions cqua-, virtut-, and senatur, or servo- and arbos-, or die- and pai'let-"
(2.) It will be found that if nouns be fixed in the memory in their stem-form, they admit of being grouped into classes as to gender, of a much wider extent than if their nominative cases only be remembered. If the teacher will look at the simple general rules for gender given in
PREFACE. vii
the introduction, and will then cast his eye over the vocabulary to this book, in which only those nouns have their gender marked which can- not be determined by these general rules, he will see how great an abridgment of labor in this matter is effected by adopting the method of this book.
(3.) All teachers will admit, that the one thing needful for pupils who Study the Latiii or Greek languages is, that they should arrive at a cer- tain and intuitive knowledge that a noun or verb in one form has an absolutely different use and different properties from the same word in another form. Surely, then, that method, which presents in the most distinct way the formative and the radical parts of words, must be en- titled to the preference of all who really desire to accomplish perfectly what they profess to teach.
(4.) The general doctrine of derivation is much more clearly exhibited upon the method of this book than on that of those which proceed upon the old system. To quote again Professor Key — ''From the sub- stantives clvi-, fide-, tribu-, we more readily proceed to the adjectives, clvlli-, fideli-, tribuli-, than we can from the nominatives, clvis, fides, tribus. Again, the diminutives, ndvicula-, virguncula-, diecula-, sucula-, ratiuncula-, are with little difficulty referred to the crude forms, ndvi-, virgon-, die-, su-, ration-." " Our English adjectives, re-al, reg-al, gradu-al, manu-al, vertic-al, nation-al, are less easily referred to the nominative res, rex, gradus, manus, vertex, natio, than to the crude forms which present themselves at once to the eye. The same, or nearly the same, is true of the words lapid-ary, avi-ary, sanguin-ary, salut-ary, station-ary."
(5.) It is an incidental but very great advantage of the method adopted in this book, that it is necessary to treat of the cases and tenses separately. All the best books constructed upon the old system give a declension, and then short sentences in which the various cases are introduced, in order that by having to use them the pupils may be made to remember the forms. In this way they may get a vague, general notion of the meaning of a case ; such, for instance, as that if an Eng- lish noun is preceded by "of" it must be in the genitive case, if by " to" it must be in the dutive case. But in this book the forms of the nominative and accusative cases, which stand in the simplest relation to each other and the verb, are alone at first Introduced ; and the num- ber of exercises upon these is so great that pupils cannot fail, while learning the forms, to acquire an indelible impression that each of these is fitted for a certain peculiar office in a sentence. And so, when these are fully understood, sentences come which are rendered more complex by the use of the genitive case and no other ; and thus the pupils, fully understanding the use of the nominative and accusative, are able to direct all their thoughts to the meaning and use of the strange case. The same thing holds with regard to the other cases, the tenses of
viii PREFACE.
the verb, and its moods. But enough has been said to call the atten- tion of teachers to this matter.
§ 4. ANSWERS TO OBJECTIONS WHICH MAT BE MADE TO THE ADOP- TION OF THIS METHOD.
These possible objections resolve themselves into two, one having reference to teachers, and the other to pupils.
It may be said, that before teachers can make use of this book they must learn their Latin over again. This, however, is only a first-sight and superficial view. Any one who takes the least pains to understand the principles set forth in the second section of this preface, must see that the ordinary division into declensions and conjugations is riot ignored or overthrown in this book, but that the system adopted here and that of the grammars exactly coincide as regards the particular words which either would class together. The only difference is, that in this book the division is based upon a clear and positive principle, in the grammars it is merely arbitrary and empirical. It is certain, that an}- one who is competently acquainted with Latin, acquired upon the old system, if he will take the pains to write half-a-dozen exercises, taken at ran- dom at dine rent parts of the work, looking out all the words in the vocabulary, will be perfectly able to use it, as far as any peculiarity of its method is concerned.
Then, as to pupils, it may be said : " How, if they are taught Latin upon this system, will they be able to hold their own in college classes, the larger part of which, to say the least, have been trained to parse words upon an entirely different method ?" In answer to this it may be said, that the objection has been refuted by abundant experience. Boys who are taught as this book recommends that they should be, are taught to be equally familiar with words in their crude-form shape, and in the form in which they are ordinarily presented. So that, in the writer's experience, no boy has ever had the least difficulty in using an ordinary dictionary when it has been placed in his hands. It is believed that if the directions as to the use of this book, given in this preface and in the subsequent parts of it, are adhered to, not only will no difficulty be found in getting boys to analyze words in the ordinary method, but that those who are trained in this way will be actually more ready at that work than those who have been taught upon the received system.
§ 5. OF SOME OTHER POINTS 'WHEREIN THIS BOOK DIFFERS FROM MOST OF ITS PREDECESSORS.
(1.) In this book the tenses of the verb have a double name given them, which mark not only the time they denote, but also the character of the action, whether imperfect, perfect, or intended. This change ne- cessitates the introduction of no new names, but merely a re-distribution of the old ones ; and it is sanctioned though not adopted by McClintock
IX
and Crooks, by Andrews and Stoddard, and in effect by all the modern grammarians. It is strange that, while so many have admitted the truth, so few have seen that the adoption in practice of terms which express it would be necessarily a more compendious method of teach- ing it, than the systematic use of names which ignore it. No one who has not tried the more complete phraseology can justly estimate the degree to which the use of the tenses, particularly of those of the sub- junctive mood, is made simple and easy to the understanding of young people.
(2.) The cases are arranged in the tables in a different order from that generally adopted. It is believed that a glance at the tables, as given in this book, will satisfy an unprejudiced mind of the great advantage of thus placing in juxta-position cases of identical or similar forms. But for those to whom authority is every thing, it would seem to be enough to say that the order used in this book is that deliberately preferred and adopted by Professor Madvig of Copenhagen.
(3.) It has been attempted in this book to condense rules of syntax as far as possible into single words, and thus not only to lighten the labor of pupils, but to render it possible to bring more constantly into practice the knowledge of syntactical principles which has been acquired.
(4.) There have been hardly any new names introduced into this book. It is thought that the term logical, applied to a class of pronouns, and nominal, used to designate propositions when standing as the object or subject of a verb, will justify their admission by their convenience. The only word for which any apology seems necessary here is " sub- junction," which has been adopted to denote those conjunctions which attach dependent sentences to independent ones. It is believed to be a very convenient and simple addition to the ordinary grammatical nomenclature ; but if it be still regarded by any as an offence, it may be looked upon as only a syncopation for subordinating con] junctions.
(5.) Another peculiarity of this book is, that in it the long vowels only have their quantity marked, the short quantity being assumed in all cases as the normal condition of a vowel, unless the long quantity is expressly asserted to belong to it. It is thought, that by the adoption of this method, the difference of the quantity of the vowels in a word is brought out more strikingly than if every syllable has some mark over it : and it is quite possible to insist on the pupils keeping the long vowels in their exercises always marked, and to correct these ; while it would be nearly impossible to scrutinize sufficiently an exercise in which all the vowels were marked.
PREFACE.
§ 5. ON THE METHOD OF USING THIS BOOK
There will be found throughout this book constant suggestions to teachers as to the way in which it is thought best that particular points should be made clear to the understanding of pupils. But it may be well here to speak more generally about the method in which the writer hopes this book may be used.
(1.) It is not designed that any thing in this book should be learned by heart, except the tables, &c., which are specially mentioned as being given to be committed to memory. It is the practice of some teachers, when lists of words or vocabularies are given, to expect pupils to come to recitation prepared to repeat those lists as well as with the exer- cises written and learned. It is thought that such labor must be very distasteful to pupils, and it certainly is wholly useless. It is not in- jurious but rather profitable for young people, when they have to trans- late a given exercise, to have before their eyes a list of the principal new words contained in it. A boy has, suppose, to translate a Latin sen- tence. He finds himself ignorant of the meanings of two words in it; but he sees those words in the vocabulary prefixed to the lesson; and he learns their meaning while his faculties are in their most ex- cited state, and are most likely to retain whatever they take hold of. It is, however, a good plan, after the lesson has been read and analyzed, for the teacher to call upon the class to give the Latin for the most im- portant words that have occurred in it. The experience of the writer proves that boys can acquire the meanings of a number of words in this way with ease to themselves, and quite as rapidly as they could do, if a large part of their time and labor wer.' expended in committing lists of words to memory.
(2.) The tables of the formation of the cases, which occur in the early part of the book, should in no case be learned by heart. It is thought that a mature mind will at once perceive their import. But young people may at first find a little difficult}1- in understanding the arrangement. The teacher should therefore go over each of these tab- ular statements with his pupils as they occur, and should see that they know how they are to be read. They are intended merely as a guide for the pupil in writing his exercises, until by this practice they be- come fastened in his memory.
(3.) As this book teaches the proper inflection of nouns and verbs by reference to the letter in which the stem ends, it is considered of the last importance that every means should be taken to see that pu- pils know the stems of the words in their reading exercises. In order to secure this it is recommended that the reading lesson should be used in the following way : After any one sentence has been translated by one pupil, the whole of the class should be called upon to indicate (by holding up the hand, or by remaining seated) whether they are pre-
PREFACE. xi
pared to give the stem (and the gender of substantives) of each inflected word in the sentence. When it is thus ascertained who profess acquaint- ance with the subject (the pupils who decline to be called upon either standing up or not holding up their hands) the teacher can rapidly call upon one pupil after another to give the stem (and gender) of each word in the sentence successively. An illustration may perhaps make this clearer: Suppose the sentence to be the 4th of Exercise 2. After one boy lias translated it, let the teacher say, ''Now, who can read the stems and give the genders of the words in this sentence? Those boys who cannot will stand up." When the class is by this, or any other method, divided into two sections, the teacher may call upon any one of the volunteers, thus, "Smith." Smith is expected to answer, "Fllio-, masculine." "Jones." Jones answers, "Cani-, common/1 "Brown." Brown answers, " quaer-." The same method should then be pursued iu examining the class as to the construction of the words in that sen- tence before proceeding to the next. And as soon as the pupils have learned the declension of any one class of nouns, they should immedi- ately after reading the stems be called upon to volunteer in the same way to decline each word in succession, or as many as their present acquirement enables them to go through; and then the teacher should select some boy at random to repeat the declension, and should see that all those who have professed their inability to do the same, have the page of their book open before them, on which that declension is found, that they may follow with the eye the declension which the other pupil is repeating. If a system of marks is in use, all the pupils who volunteer to do any thing which is required, may be allowed to score one, provided it prove that they were justified in their con- fidence. They may, in nearly all cases, be safely allowed to keep this record for themselves, and to tell at the end of the lesson how many questions they have answered or could have answered, it being under- stood that each boy who volunteers to answer and then fails, or would huve failed if called upon, is to rub oft' one of his preceding marks. If the teacher himself, or one of his pupils for him, keeps a record of the total number of questions asked (counting each word declined, and each stem recited as a separate question), the marks of each pupil can of course easily be reduced to any required standard. The above me- thod of questioning is recommended as the best with which the writer is acquainted for arresting and sustaining the attention of a large class. And for learning the declensions he has no doubt that it is a far better way to insist that the boys who do not know, should have the page with the declension open before their eyes, while the other bojrs are declining, than merely to tell them to come better prepared to the next lesson.
(4.) When any grammatical principle is explained, the teacher should make his pupils look at several of the succeeding English sentences in which it is involved, and then ask questions in regard to it in the same way, before expecting them to translate any sentences. For exam-
xii PREFACE.
pie, at page 85, note 2d. there is a suggestion made to enable pnpfls to determine the case of the relative pronoun. Let the teacher first make one of his pupils read that passage aloud, and then go over some half-dozen of the next English sentences, and call upon several boys in succession to apply the rule in those cases. This will, it is be- lieved, be found the best and a sufficient method in the case of all the other syntactical principles explained.
(5.) In correcting written exercises, the teacher may in the same way call for the exercise of some one boy at random, and having examined this, he should read aloud to the class the correct Latin, mentioning, as well as expressing by his voice,* the long vowels. And lie should then require each boy who has any thing different from the words as correctly read, to rise in his place and remain standing till the teacher has had an opportunity of going round the class, calling upon each boy separately to state his error, and explaining to him individually the grounds of it Or he may, perhaps better, call upon the class in gen- eral to volunteer to explain the mistakes. He should by all means always insist on his pupils marking all the long vowels in their ex- ercises.
(6.) After the three stems of the verbs are understood, and the in- finitive mood is introduced, it will be well for the pupils to be ready to give the parts of the verb indifferent ways on alternate days. Thus, on one day in reading aloud the stems, when they come to a verb, say amavit, they should be made to give its parts thus, ama-, amav-, amato-;
* In order that the teacher should be able himself to mark by his voice the dif- ference of the quantity of vowels, and to make his pupils do the same, it is believed to be absolutely essential that each vowel should always be made 10 have the same sound: and, as'there can be no doubt that what is called the continent-il method of sounding them is more correct than that which prevails lor the most part here, and nearly uni verbally in England, it is here recommended that that method be, as well as may be, adopted.
That is,
should be sounded as a in hat. 5 should be sounded aso in tone.
" a in ah. u u u \nfull.
" e in let. fi " " " oo iiifoot.
'• a in mate. au " u ou in mouse.
" i in it. ae " ** " ay in ay e.
" ee in meet. oe " " " oi in toil.
u o in on.
It also recommended that the consonants c and g should always have their hard sound given them, and that,? should always be pronounced as y.
An admirable little book, called "Roman Orthoepy,"1 by Professor E'chardson, of Rocboster University, may, with great profit, be consulted on this subject. The professor is not, however, responsible for the choice of the English words used above to illiterate the Litiin sounds, and he would not sanction all of tln-m. But the above tal.le is. believed to prtsent a series which admits of a practically observable difference being made between the long and short vowels: and one o'r two slight iniccuracies may be excused if th.s be the case.
PREFACE. xiii
and on the next they should parse the same verb, saying, amo, amare, amavl, amdtum.
(7.) It will be observed that the Latin reading exercises cease at Lesson GILT. It is intended, that wlien pupils have reached that point they shall, except in cases of unusual proficiency, begin to read the Outlines of Roman History, which will be found immediately before the final vocabulary. There is constant reference therein made by num- bers to the grammatical principles explained in the previous part of the book. This might have been done much more fully. Little more, how- ever, is intended than to show how the writer wishes that little history to be used in connection with the rest of the book. The references will serve to keep fresh in mind the rules of syntax1 before explained, while, at the same time, they will fulfil the best uses of notes, by enabling pupils, while making out their lessons, to ascertain the construction, and often the meaning, of the phrases they meet with. As the Latin of that little history is in general very good and simple, it is believed that if a teacher has the courage to make his pupils learn the whole of it by heart, though he may thereby spend a little more time over it than others, he will have done more to give his class a correct and living sense of the genius of the language, and to facilitate their further progress, than if he made them commit to memory the whole of the syntax of Andrews and Stoddard's Grammar.
It is believed, that if these methods be adopted, the lessons given in this book will seldom be found too long for a single recitation by a class of moderate size. But if the teacher finds them so, he may best curtail the writing exercise, not that for reading; for this book is not intended to teach the art of Latin composition. If he have not time to go through all the reading sentences, he may make his class prepare the whole, and then take up as many sentences as he has time for in any order. It should, of course, always be understood, that the object of each lesson is to insure and to give evidence of a complete acquaintance, on the part of the pupils, with all the facts and principles theretofore spoken of. The judicious teacher will not allow himself to be under the tyranny of any book, but will shorten or lengthen the period during which a class is kept over one lesson, according to the proficiency of the average of the members of it.
The above suggestions as to the method of teaching in general, and the use of this book, are offered without any design of dictating to teachers whose experience may have provided them with means which they deem better. But the writer is conscious that at the commence- ment of his own career as a teacher he would have accepted with grat- i'ude any such hints. Ho has a keen remembrance of labor honestly and earnestly spent, while little or no fruit was the result, because it
xir PREFACE.
was not judiciously employed. He hopes, therefore, that those into whose hands this book may come, will accept these suggestions as they are offered; that is, riot as being absolutely the best, but as being a great deal better than others which the writer has in former times acted upou.
It is hoped that the length of this preface will not prevent its being read. It seemed necessary, in putting forth a book which has so many points of difference from its predecessors, to speak at large upon these, and to anticipate some of the objections which may be made to it.
It only remains for the writer to express his obligations to previous laborers in the same field. He is particularly indebted to Robsoris Constructive Latin Exercises ; and he has had constantly in his hands the Latin Grammars of Key, Kiihntr, Madvig, Zumpt, and Billroth. He has besides to acknowledge much aid and many valuable suggestions from his friends and coadjutors, Mr. R. Holden, M. A., and Mr. \V. M. Ferriss, M. A.
Since a large part of the present work was stereotyped, the writer observed an announcement in one of the London papers of a forthcoming Latin book by Dr. TV. Smith, the editor of the Classical Dictionaries. &c., which is to bear the same name as the present work. As the name chosen for this book was selected because it was thought to be reason- ably expressive of its character, it has not been deemed either necessary or expedient to change it.
TRINITY SCHOOL, NEW YORK, Dec. 3, 1859.
CONTENTS.
INTRODUCTION xxi
I. Nominative and accusative cases sin- gular. Active person-endings . X II. Changes of guttural and dental stems
before * ... .4
IV. Changes of letters in the stems before
syllabic endings .... 6 V. Stems which do not take the ending
S to make the nominative singular . 7 VI. Compound words. List of prefixes . 9 VII. Conjugation of the present imperfect
tense, indicative mood. . . .11 VIII. Adjectives. Doctrine of Agreement . 13 IX. Past imperfect tense . . . .15 X. Nominative and accusative cases plu- ral 17
XII. Formation and use of adverbs . .20
XIV. Nominative and accusative cases of
neuter nouns . . . . .23 XV. Future imperfect tense . . .24 XIX. Prepositions. List of those which
govern an accusative . . .29 XX. Statement of the chief uses of the ac- cusative case . . . .30 XXI. General meaning and uses of the gen- itive case . . . . .32 XXII. Formation of the genitive case singu- lar and plural . . . . .33
xvi CONTEXTS.
XXIX. General meaning and uses of the dative
ease ...... 41
XXX. Formation of the dative case singular
and plural . . . . .43
XXX Y. General meaning and uses of the abla- tive case. List of preposition* which govern the ablative . . .48
XXXVI. Formation of the ablative case singu-
lar and plural . . . .50
XXXVIII. Vocative case ..... 52
XXXIX. Degrees of comparison . . .53 XL. Adjectives compared irregularly . 56 XLII. Comparison of adverbs . . .57 XL11I. The three imperfect tenses indicative
of the verb es- . . . .58
XLIV. Genitive and dative of the f>ossessor.
Dative of the end . . . .60
XLV. Comparative degree followed by quam
or by the ablative . . . .61
XL VI. Perfect tenses, particularly of the ac-
tive voice ..... 62
XLVII. Present perfect or aorist. Second stem
made by the ending -V . . .65 XLVIII. Compound sentences. Conjunctions . 66 XL1X. Pronouns: particularly the personal
and possessive pronouns . . .68 LT. Second stem made by the ending u . 71 L1I. Demonstrative pronouns. Declension
of ho-. Apposition . . .72 LIII. Second stem made by the ending s . 74 L1V. Declension of illo-, and isto- . . 76 LV. 7/0-, and illo-, used for " the latter,"
"the former" ... .77
LVI. Second stern made by reduplication . 78 LVII. logical pronouns. Declension of eo- . 79 LVIII. Second stem made by lengthening the
root-vowel . . . . .81
L1X. Declension of ev-dem . . 82
LX. Second stem the same as the first . 83
CONTENTS. xvii
LFSSON PAGK
LXI. Secondary sentences, particularly ad- jectival sentences. Declension of the relative pronoun quo- . . .84 LXITI. Perfect tenses of es- . . . . 8J3 LXIV. Adverbial sentences . . . .88 LXVI. Conjugation of potes-, and prodes- . 91 LXV1I. Meaning of the passive voice. Pas- sive person-endings. Conjugation of the imperfect. tenses passive. Abla- tive of the agent . . . .92 LXIX. Participles; particularly the perfect
participle passive . . . .96
LXX. Ablative absolute . . . .97
LXXI. Perfect passive tenses . . .99
LXX 1 1 1. Deponent verbs 101
LXXVI. Historical present. Passive verbs used
impersonally . . . . .105 LXX VI 1 1. Imperfect participle active . .106 LXXX. The injinitive mood : its general use,
and forms . . . . .110 LXXXI. Tenses of the infinitive. Semi-depo- nent verbs 112
LXXXTT. Nominal sentences. Nominal asser- tions . . . . . .114
LXXXIII. Use of the genitive case to denote a
-point of character . . . .117
LXXXVII. Interrogative sentences. Fact-ques- tions . . . . . .119
LXXXVIII. Word-questions. Interrogative pro- nouns . . . . . .121
XC. Declension of utro-, alio-, &c. . .123 XCI. Imperative sentences. The forms of
the imperative mood . . .124 XCTT. Use of the present imperative . . 126 \ XCIII. Use of the future imperative . . 127 / XCIV. Form and use of the gerund . .128 XCVI. Employment of the gerundive for the
gerund 130
iii CONTEXTS.
LWBOW PAvJB
XCXV'llI. Use of the gerundive with es-, to de- note obligation . . . .133 XCIX. Impersonal use of the gerundive with
es- 135
CI. Supines. Use of the accusative su-
pine . . . . . .137
CII. Use of the ablative supine. Future
infinitive passive . . . .138
CIV. General use and forms of the subjunc- tive mood 141
CV. Tables illustrative of the relations of various sorts of sentences, and of the use of the moods . . .145 CVI. The subjunctive in secondary senten- ces. Final sentences . . .148 CVIII. Consecutive sentences . . .151
CX. Future infinitive expressed by fore ut
with the subjunctive . . .153 CXI. Subjunctive after quo-minus, &c. . 154 CXII. Subjunctive after qu~m . .155
CXIV. Subjunctive in adjectival consecutive
sentences . . . . .156 CXYI. Subjunctive in descriptive sentences . 158 CXVII. Causal sentence s (adjectival) . .158 CXVIII. Causal sentences (adverbial) . . 159 CX1X. Temporal sentences .... 160 CXX. Latin equivalents for participial ex- pressions . . . . .162 CXXTT. Nominal questions . . . .164 CXX111. Disjunctive questions, principal and
nominal . . , . . .165 CXXIV. Nominal commands .... 166 CXXV. Subjunctive used for the imperative
in principal commands . . .167 CXX VI. Other uses of the subjunctive in prin- cipal sentences . . . . ] 68 CXXVIII. Subjunctive in secondary sentences,
attached to nominal ones, <fcc. . 170 CXXJX. Of the ordtio obl'iqua . . .171
CONTENTS. xix
PAGE
CXXXl. The irregular verbs vol-, nol-, mdl- . 174 CXXX i I. The irregular verb fer- . . r 176 CXXXUL The irregular verbs/- and i- . .178 CXXX IV. Nominal questions of the first and
third persons . . . . .179 CXXX VI. The indicative mood in secondary sen- tences in ordtio obUqua . . .181 CXXX VII. Impersonal verbs of feeling . .182 CXXXIX. The impersonal verbs lice- and libe- . 184 CXL. The impersonal verbs dece- and oporte- 185 CXLL The impersonal verbs interes- and
refer- .186
CXLIII. Of conditional propositions . .188 CXLVI1F. The indefinite pronoun quo- . .192 CXL IX. The other indefinite pronouns, partic- ularly quo-que . . . .193 CL. The indefinite pronouns quo-vis and
quo-libet . . . . .195
CLI. The indefinite pronoun quo-dam . 196
CL1I. The indefinite pronoun aliquo- . .197
CLIII. The indefinite pronoun quo-quam . 198
Tables of declensions . . .200
Outlines of Roman History . . 209
Vocabulary . . . . .235
Synopsis of the Latin Conjugations, 282
INTRODUCTION.
IT is intended in this introduction to give some simple statements on points of general grammar, a perfect ac- quaintance with which is taken for granted in this book. There are also included in it remarks on some of the pe- culiarities of the Latin language, which, as being of gen- eral application, it has been thought desirable to insert here, rather than to disperse them through the book. The statements which are here made are, it will be seen, very brief and they are not enforced by examples and illus- trations : as it is thought that for many pupils who com- mence the study of Latin such elucidation of these sim- ple principles would be needless ; while, for the rest, the judicious teacher will find in the first half-dozen English exercises ample material for his use in illustrating what is here said. The study of the euphonic changes in Latin consonants and vowels may be deferred till the pupil has reached the sixth lesson.
1. A sentence is a thought expressed in words.
2. Words are of various kinds, or may be arranged in different classes, according to the parts they are fitted to play in a sentence. These classes are called " parts of speech" We shall only mention the three principal classes here.
3. A noun is a word which names something. This is called in the grammars " a noun substantive," but is in this book called " a noun," simply.
xxii INTRODUCTION.
4. A verb is a word which asserts something ; or which tells what things do or suffer.
5. An adjective is a word which describes something ; or which tells the quality of things.
6. &. proposition is a sentence which contains an asser- tion.
7. Every proposition consists of two parts, a subject and a predicate.
8. The subject is that about which the assertion is made.
9. The predicate is all that which is asserted.
10. An active verb is one which asserts that the subject does an action; as, "I run."
11. A static verb is one which asserts that the subject is in some state; as, "the boy sleeps."
12. With all active verbs the subject marks the quar- ter from which the action proceeds.
13. The object is that towards which an action is di- rected.
14. In English we know which noun is to be regarded as the subject of a sentence by its position before the verb' and which is to be regarded as the object by its position after the verb.
15. In Latin we know which noun is to be regarded as the subject and which as the object by particular endings attached to the nouns, which are thus fitted for taking each place.
INTRODUCTION. xxiii
1 6. A Latin word before it is fit to take a place in a sentence is called a stem; and if the word be a noun, it is called a noun-stem.
17. A noun or adjective when it is fitted to take its place in a sentence, is said to be in a case.
18. When a noun has had the ending attached to it which fits it to stand as the subject, it is said to be in the nominative case.
1 9. When a noun has had the ending attached to it which fits it to stand as the object, it is said to be in the accusative case.
20. The nominative case, then, with an active verb, marks the quarter from which the action proceeds.
21. The accusative case, with an active verb, marks the quarter towards which the action proceeds.
The following illustration may perhaps be useful in impressing these latter statements on the .minds of the pupils.
The arrow denotes the action of a verb.
Subject (nominative) > Object (accusative).
22. The stems of nouns and verbs end of course either in one of the five vowels, a, e, i, o, u, or in a consonant ; and stems are called in this book a-stems, e-stems, i-stems, o-stems, w-stems, or consonant-stews, according to the letter in which they end.
23. Verbs are said to be in either the first, the second, or the third person.
24. If the subject of the verb is the person speaking, — i. e., if the subject asserts something about himself — the verb is said to be in the first person; and in English is marked by the word I or -we before it.
xxi? INTRODUCTION.
25. If the subject of the verb is the person spoken to, the verb is said to be in the second person . • and in Eng- lish is marked by the word thou, or you, or ye, before it.
26. If the subject of the verb is not either the person, speaking or the person spoken to, the verb is said to be in the third person ; and in English is marked by the word he, or she, or it, or they, or any noun before it.
27. Verbs are said to be either in the singular or the plural number.
28. If the subject is only one person or thing, the verb is said to be in the singular number.
29. If the subject is more than one person or thing, the verb is said to be in the plural number.
30. Tenses are those forms which verbs take in order to mark the different times, in reference to which asser- tions are made.
31. If the assertion is made in reference to present time (as to-day), the verb is said to be in a present tense.
32. If the assertion is made in reference to past time (as yesterday], the verb is said to be in a past tense.
33. If the assertion is made in reference to future time (as to-morrow), the verb is said to be in & future tense.
34. Actions or states may be described as either fin- ished, unfinished, or intended.
35. If the verb asserts a finished action or state, it is said to be in a perfect tense.
36. If the verb asserts an unfinished action or state, it is said to be in an imperfect tense.
INTRODUCTION".
acxr
37. If the verb asserts an intended action or state, it 13 said to be in an intended tense.
[The following diagram (borrowed, with slight alterations, from Key's Grammar) may assist the teacher in making his pupils under- stand the way in which these words are combined to form names for the tenses of the Latin verb.
The vertical lines denote respectively, y (yesterday) past time, n (now) present time, and £ (to-morrow) future time. The horizontal lines de note actions — if the horizontal line crosses one of the vertical ones it denotes an unfinished (imperfect) action ; if it lies to the left of it, a finished action, if to the right, an intended one.
pf
pf.-
imp.
imp.-
imp.
iiit-
irit.-
irti.-
F.
xxvi INTRODUCTION.
pf. denotes an action finished at a past time, past perfect tense. imp. " " " unfinished " " past imperfect teiise. iilt. " " " iutended " " , past intended tense.
pf. " •' " finished at- present time, present perfect tense. imp. " " " unfinished " " present imperfect tense. int. " " " intended " " present intended tertse.
pf. u " " finished at a future time, future perfect tense, imp. " " " unfinished " " future imperfect tense, int. " " " intended " " future intended tense
A denotes an action occurring at some indefinite point of past time. Aorist tense.
F denotes an action occurring at some indefinite point of future time. Future tense.
N. B. Professor Key says that what is called in this book the future imperfect tense is really always & future indefinite.^
38. Nouns are said to be of one or other of three gen- ders, masculine, feminine, or neuter.
39. If a noun denote a thing of the male kind, it is said to be of the masculine gender.
40. If a noun denote a thing of the female kind, it is said to be of the feminine gender.
41. If a noun denote a thing of neither the male nor the female kind, it is said to be of the neuter gender.
42. In Latin this proper and natural distinction is not thoroughly observed. Many nouns are masculine or feminine which denote neither male nor female animals. And so the following rules had best be learned by heart at once.
INTRODUCTION. xxvii
43. The following classes of nouns are for the most part masculine.
(a) Nouns denoting male animals, rivers, winds,
months.
(b) Nouns whose stems end in ll (generally til),
OH, Or (generally tor).
44. The following classes of nouns are for the most part feminine.
(a) Nouns denoting female animals, countries, trees.
(b) Nouns whose stems end in a, e, ion, on, lit,
tat, trie.*
45. The following classes of nouns are for the most part neuter.
Nouns whose stems end in eilto, en, es, OS.
46. Nouns which are found used both as masculine and feminine are called eoillllion.
47. All nouns whose gender is not determinable by the above rules are marked in the vocabularies m. (masculine), /. (feminine), n. (neuter).
* Nouns with i-stems are mostly feminine, but the exceptions are numerous. Professor Key gives the following acrostic to assist the memory :
M asculini generis crtrri-
A mni-* axi- funi-* flni-*
S enti-* dent(i)- calli-* colli-
C auli- fasci- fusti- folli-
U tri- ventri- vermi- assi-
L eni- posti- torri- cassi-
I gni- iinbri- pisci- pont(i)-
N atali- vec'ti- font(i)- mout(i)-
E nsi- mensi- pfmi- orbi-
S augui- angui-* ungui- corbi-.
* Many e'en of the.fie, as f mi- Are also generis fOminlm.
xxviii INTRODUCTION.
48. The vowels of Latin words arc said to be either long or short. This is called their " quantity"
49. A long vowel is one which is pronounced slowly and fully, and is considered to occupy twice as much time in pronunciation as a short vowel does.
50. All diphthongs are long — except these all the long vowels in the Latin words which occur in this book are distinguished by the mark (-) over them.
51. A syllable maybe long for purposes of versification, though the vowel it contains be short, if the vowel be followed by two consonants which are not sounded to- gether. Such syllables are said to be long by position ; but the vowels in them are not marked as long in this book.
52. When stems are inflected or different parts of words are joined together to make new words (compound or derivative words), very often the letters of one or both parts experience some changes. As these changes are made with a view of rendering the word more easy to say and more pleasant to hear, they are called euphonic (i. e., well-sounding) changes. We will speak first of the changes which the vowels undergo.
53. If the vowels are considered in regard to the amount of effort which is made to sound them, or as to the quan- tity of sound they represent, it will be found that they follow one another in this order, e, e, a, o, w, the first of these being the lightest and the last the heaviest. It is of course here taken for granted that the vowels have the sounds given them which are recommended in the preface to this book, and are not pronounced after the ordinary English manner.
54. One very common change which words experience in inflection or derivation is the substitution of a lighter
INTRODUCTION. xxix
vowel for a heavier voicel, when the addition of a syllable renders it difficult to give the distinct sound of the orig- inal vowel. Instances of this occur in the 4th lesson, where it is seen that when the accusative-ending em is added to such words as m'tlet-, the e of the stem is changed to the lighter vowel i. It will be felt at once that it is easier to say mil-item than nittetem, and that in pronouncing such words rapidly the voice naturally gives the lightest possible sound to the middle syllable.
55. This general principle will account for very many changes of vowels.
Thus, instead of con-fac(i)- we have con-fic(i}-. " " re-statu- " " re-stitu-.
" " princepem " " principem. " " homonem " " hominem. " " caputa " " capita.
" " tetagit " " tetigit.
56. But observe that if the vowel which is to be changed is followed by the letter r, it usually passes into e instead of into of i.
Thus, for peparit we have peperit, not pepirit.
" conspargo " " consperyo, " conspirgo.
57. Another common change of vowels is the substitu- tion of i for the diphthong ae.
Thus, for occaedit we find occidit.
" illaedo " ittido.
58. There is a frequent interchange of o and u.
Thus, from col- we get culto-.
" robor- " robitr.
59. The changes which consonants undergo are very frequent and important. In order that they may be un- derstood, the tables given in 61 and 68 must be carefully studied.
xxx INTRODUCTION.
60. The consonants are divided into two main classes, mutes and fgmtaotoelff, the mutes being those which re- quire the greatest exertion of the vocal organs for their articulation.
61. The mutes are classified in the following way:
ORDERS.
soft. hard. aspirated.
Gutturals. g c (k, qu) h
CLASSES. <( Dentals. d t
Labials. b p f
62. The three classes are named from the part of the vocal organs which is principally concerned in their pro- duction— the Gutturals being £/jr0#Metters, the Dentals, fce^A-letters, and the Labials, ^>letters.
63. The division into orders has reference to the effort which is required for their proper articulation.
64. We have rules which govern the combination of mutes based upon each of these classifications.
65. Mutes of different classes are not allowed to stand together unless the second be a dental. But when in composition there would be such a combination, the first mute is generally changed into the second.
Thus, ob-cid- (L. G.^ becomes oc-cid- ad-cid- (D. G.) " ac-cid-
ad-ger- (D. G.) " ag-ger-
sug-ger- ap-plaud-
sub-ger- (L. G.
ad-plaud- (D. L.
ad-fic- (D. L.
ec-Jic- (G. L. " tf-fio
66. When mutes are thus allowed to stand together
INTRODUCTION. xxxi
they must be of the same order • and so also when a guttural or labial stands before a dental; that is, both mutes must be hard, both soft, or both aspirated. The examples in the preceding section are instances of this. The following exhibit the same law, but the second mate being a dental letters of different classes may stand to- gether.
ad-trah- (s. H.) becomes attrah (n. H.'
scrib-to- (s. H.| " scrip-to- (n. H.
reg-to- (s. n.\ " rec-to- (H. H.
veh-to (A. H.) " vec-to- (H. u.
\ / \
67. The prefixes sub and ob were originally subs* obs ; and when they are prefixed to words beginning with one of the hard mutes the letter b is generally dropped.
Thus, for sub-dp- we find sus-cip-.
" obs-tend " os-tend-.
" subs-pende- " sus-pende-.
68. The semi-vowels may be arranged in the following classes and orders :
ORDERS.
Liquids. Spirants. ( Gutturals. r j
CLASSES. •< Dentals. 1, n s
( Labials. m v
69. The liquids are so named because they easil together and combine with the mutes to form one sound.
70. The spirants derive their name from the continuity of breath with which they are sounded.
71. Since n is a dental sound and m a labial, when n comes before a labial it is changed to m.
Thus, for in-pet- we have im-pet-.
" in-belli- " im-belli-.
xxxii INTRODUCTION.
72. Before another liquid, n is assimilated (/. e., changed into the same letter as that which follows it).
Thus, for in-muni- we find im-mani.
" cor-rip-.
73. The labial mutes before s generally become p. Tims, for scribsl we have scrips!.
74. The guttural mutes with s always become x.
Thus, for gregs. we have grex.
•' tey-n " tert.
75. The dental mutes before s are either dropped, or assimilated to s.
Thus, for dents we have d<-"ns.
" mit-so- " mis-so-.
The foregoing remarks upon the changes of vowels and consonants are of course very incomplete. The most that is designed is to give the pupil an opportunity of be- coming familiar, at this early stage of his progress, with some of the commonest and most general laws. Fuller information must be sought for in systematic grammars.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS BOOK.
Abl stands for ablative.
A. or ace accusative.
adv adverb.
c common; i. e., masculine or feminine.
conj conjunction.
D. or dat dative.
dep deponent.
f. or fern feminine.
fut future.
G. or gen genitive.
imperat imperative.
imperf. imperfect.
indie indicative.
inftn infinitive.
m. or masc masculine.
n. or neut neuter.
n. or nom nominative.
part or partic participle.
perf, perfect.
pi. or plur plural.
prep preposition.
pres present.
S. or4 sing singular.
semi-dep semi-deponent.
subj subjunctive.
subjunc subj unction.
Y. or voc vocative.
implies the repetition in that place of the form underneath which it stands.
implies that the second stem of a verb is the same as the first.
2—''—.
In the exercises —
English words joined by hyphens are to be translated by one Latin word.
English words in parentheses are not to be translated.
Latin words in parentheses are to be used for the English words after which they stand.
PRINCIPIA LATINA.
LESSON I.
1 . The cases of Latin nouns are formed by attaching various endings to the stems of the nouns. Thus, for the
Q. , j nominative, add the ending s. >mguiar, j accusative^ « u m or em>
This is the general rule for these cases : the exceptions and variations will be pointed out in the following lessons. But it must here be noted that
(1) the ending em is used for consonant-stems only. o usually becomes u in the
ace. sng.
Thus, from the nom. sing. ace. sing.
o-stem servo- we have servus, servum. w-stem vultit- " vultus, vultum. fc-stem navi- " navis, navem.
consonant-stem hiem- " hiems, hiemem.
2. The persons of the verb are made in the same way by attaching endings to the stems of the verbs. The following table gives the endings opposite to the persons which they make.
Persons. Endings.
1. I. Ill or p.
Singular, ^ 2. thou or you. -s " is.
3. he, she, or it. t " it.
1. we. -mus or Iiiius.
Plural, -{ 2. ye or you. -tis " itis.
3. they. nt " lint
As at present the third person singular only will be introduced in the exercises, it is necessary to give ex-
2 LESSON L [2.
amples here of that person only ; but it must be partic- ularly observed at once that the ending it is to be used only for consonant-stems and w-stems.
Thus, from the 3 d. person sing.
o-stem ama- we have amat. 6-stem mone- " monet. i-stem audi- " audit. co nsonan Astern reg- " regit.
system minu- " minuit.
It will be best for the pupils at once to learn by heart both the columns of person-endings given above ; and the teacher will observe that the mark (-) placed before three of the endings in the first column means that the addition of those endings makes the vowels a, e, and i long.
Before commencing the following exercise, it must be understood that —
(1) There is no article in Latin.
(2) In general, the order of words in Latin sentences is different from that used in English, the verb commonly standing at the end of the sentence.
(3) All the long vowels in the Latin words which fol- low have the long mark (—) of quantity placed over them. All the other vowels are to be pronounced short.
(4) The verbs are printed in italics in the first column of the vocabularies, and in Roman letters in the second.
EXERCISE 1.
1. The citizen sees the house. 2. The army conquers the state. 3. The horse drinks the water. 4. The dog frightens the mare. 5. The foal goes-to (its) friend. 6. The son cultivates friendship. 7. The slave seeks-for love. 8. The horse preserves the fugitive. 9. The attack frightens the deserter. 10. The storm throws down the tower. 11. The dog bites the foal. 12. The tower confines the prisoner. 13. The garden pleases the farmer. 14. Culture polishes the soul. 15. The messenger takes the letter. 16. The citizen flees-from the dog.
2.] LESSON I. 3
army, exercitu- letter, epistola- attack, impetu- love, ama- We, morde- love, amor- citizen, clvi; c. lover, amdtor- confine, coerce- mare, equa- conquer, vine- messenger, nuntio-, m. cultivate, col- nymph, nympha- culture, cultu- please, delecta- daughter, fllia- polish, poli- deserter, perfuga- preserve, serva- dog, cani-, c. prisoner, captlvo-, m. drink, bib- see, vide- farmer, agricola- seek for, quaer- fl?e from, fug(i)- slave, servo-, m. foal, equuto- Bon,fllio- friend, amlco-, m. soul, animo-, m. friendship, amlcitia- state, civitdt- frighten, terre- storm, hiem-, f. fugitive, fugitivo-, m. take, cap(i)- garden, horto-, m. throw doivn, dejic(i)- go-to, pet- tower, turri-, f. horse, equo- water, aqua- house, domu-, f. wood, silva-
NOTE. — The verbs in the vocabularies printed like cap(i)-, belong partly to the class of f-stems and partly to that of consonant-stems ; their peculiarities will be mentioned further on. The pupils had best read such stems thus : cap or capi; and all they need attend to now is this, that all the letters printed are to be used, unless particular directions to the contrary are given.
EXERCISE 2.
1. Hortus nympham delectat. 2. Animus cultum amat. 3. Turns civem servat. 4. Fllius canem quaerit. 5. Exercitus aquam videt. 6. Equulus equam petit. 7. Impetus civem terret. 8. Equus filiam delectat. 9. Amicus canem capit. 10. Canis amatorem mordet. 11. Nuntius hortum colit. 12. Fugitivus silvam petit. 13. Hiems perfu- gam terret. 14. Pilius agricolam servat. 15. Servus equam quaerit. 16. Captivus equam capit.
LESSON IL [3.
LESSON II.
3. Though the general rule for the formation of the nominative singular is that given in Lesson L, viz. : the addition to the stem of the ending s, it must here be noted that —
•f ^ ^^^Jtoa guttural-stem (c, g), we must write x for cs or gs. ** I to a dental-stem (d, t), we must write s for ds or ts.
Thus :
theguttural-stemj^ \ becomes {** fteteado the dental-stem ) £f [ becomes | g* f «— * of]
NOTE. — In the following vocabularies some nouns are printed thus : cohort(i)- ; the meaning of this will be explained in a subsequent lesson. Meanwhile let the pupils read them thus : cohort or cohorti. At pres- ent only the consonant-stem is to be used.
EXERCISE 3.
1. The king loves the state. 2. The soldier governs the island. 3. The hostage throws a stone. 4. The law frightens the thief. 5. The priest reads the letter. 6. The guard hears a shout. 7. The foot- soldier pushes the enemy. 8. Praise rouses valor. 9. Yalor preserves the state. 10. Peace charms the man, 11. The cohort is making an attack. 12. The state makes the law. 13. The flock loves the shep- herd. 14 The horse-soldier is leading the inhabitant 15. The bridge supports the wagon.
bridge, pontffr, m. man, viro- charm, delecta- peace, pdc-, € cohort, cohort^-, f. praise, laud-, £ enemy, hosti-, c. priest, sacerdot-c. flock, greg-, m. push, peM- foot-soldier, pedet- read, leg- govern, reg- road, via- guard, custod-, c. rouse, excita- guide, due-, c. shepherd, pastor- hear, audi- shout, ddmor- horse-soldier, equet- show, monstra- hostage, obsed-, c, soldier, mikt- inhabitant, incofa-, c. stone, lapid-, m. island, insular support^ sustine- king, reg- thief, fur-, c. law, leg-, f. throw, jac(i)- lead, due- valor, virtut- mate, fac(i)- wagon, carro-, m.
(
4.] LESSON'
EXERCISE 4.
1. Gustos lapidem jacit. 2. Grex pontem petit. 3. Pedes amlcum terret. 4. Dux virtutem . amat. 5. Rex insulam vincit. 6. Virtus sacerdotem delectat. 7. Eque,s lapidem dejicit. 8. Carrus pastorem sustinet. 9. Miles insulam capit 10. Hostis gregem ducit. 11. Lex furem coerce t. 12. Pax civitatem polit. 13. Obses civem excitat. 14. Servus domuin videt.
LESSON III.
4. It will be well for the pupils to begin now to learn the endings of the third or consonant declension of nouns. These are given at page 200 ; and the teacher should, as soon as they can be well repeated in their separate form, make his pupils learn by heart the examples si consonant- nouns ending in different letters, which are given immedi- ately after the endings. The special rules for the formation of the separate cases will be given in subsequent lessons. But as nothing can supply the placo of a perfect acquaint- ance with the cases arranged tabularly, it is best to be- gin at once to learn them by heart, without waiting for the particular explanations. And it is of the utmost importance that each noun declined should always be referred to its stem.
EXERCISE 5.
1. Peace increases happiness. 2. The judge sets-free the prisoner. 3. The heir receives the money. 4. The torch illuminates the cave. 5. The tempest alarms the sailor. 6. Rest refreshes the workman. 7. The spike wounds the horse. 8. The huntress slays the stag. 9. The bark preserves the bough. 10. Novelty charms the woman.
alarm, perterre- illuminate, illustra-
bark, cortec-, m. increase, auge-
bough, rdmo-, m. judge, judec-
cave, spelunca- money, pecHnia-
happiness, fellcitdt- name, nomina-
heir, hered- novelty, novitdt-
hold, tene- receive, accip(i)-
hope, spe- refresh, recrea-
huntress, vendtric- rest, quiet-, f. 1*
LESSON IV. [5.
sailor, nauta- torch, foe-, f.
set-free, llbera- warn, mone-
shake, quat(i)- wind, vento-, m.
slay, occld- woman, mulier-
spike, cuspid-, f. workman, fabro-
stag, cervo- wound, vulnera- tempest, tempestdt-
EXERCISE 6.
1. Obses cuspidem tenet. 2. Judex furem monet. 3. Canis cer- vum excitat. 4. Tempestas navem quatit 5. Pax regem recreat. 6. Rex heredem nominal. 7. Spes virtutem auget. 8. Gustos captlvum liberat 9. Cervus pastorem fugit. 10. Yentus ramum quatit.
LESSON IV.
5. In some cases one of the letters of the stem is altered when any ending, consisting of a whole syllable, is added to it • e. g., when the ending em is added to consonant-stems :
Thus, e in such words as rmlet-, princep-, is changed to i. on " ordon- " " in.
s " flos- " " r.
For example : the stem milet- makes not mlletem but militem.
princep- " not princepem but prindpem. ordon- " not ordonem but ordinem. *' flos- " notfldsem
EXERCISE 7.
1. The soldier loves the chief. 2. The law forbids baseness. 3. The nurse plucks the flower. 4. The horse-soldier deserts (his) rank. 5. The colonist retains the custom. 6. The king praises the foot-soldier. 7. The priest advises the multitude. 8. The prisoner fears (his) com- panion, 9. The hostage kills the guest. 10. The guard has a tree.
6-S.] LESSON Y. 7
baseness, turpitudon-, f. Tiave, habe- chief, princep- kill, occld- colonist, colono-, m. nurse, nutric- coinpanion, comet-, c. pluck, carp- custom, 77i6s-, m. praise, lauda-
/ear, time- rank, ordon-, m.
flower, ./Zos-, m. retain, retine-
forbid, veta- tree, arbor-, f. guest, ihospet-, m.
EXERCISE 8.
1. Fugitlvus comitem laudat. 2. Cohors ordiuem servat. 3. Pedes hospitem terret. 4. Civis colonum amat. 4. Amicus florem colit. 6. Sacerdos furem timet. 9. Gustos rnultitudinem deserit. 10. Nuntius morem laudat. 11. Princeps insulam capit. 12. Dux impetum facit.
NOTE. — It is thought that from this time the pupils may be made by their teacher to decline any of the nouns with consonant-stems which they meet with in the subsequent lessons.
LESSON V.
6. It has been shown in the preceding lessons that the nom. sing, is made by the ending s. But there are some exceptions to this which must now be mentioned. The rules for these will be most clearly and shortly exhibited in the following table, with the examples annexed :
To form the nom. sing. of stems ending in
ea, 1, r, s, add no ending. on-, on-, " " omit the last letter.
eri-, ero-, iro-, " "
(5) tr-,
7. NOTE.— 1st. Stems ending in or- make the 6 short in the nom. sing.
8. — 2d. Adjectives ending in eri- or ri- form their nom. sing. feminine regularly ; that is, by the ending s.
8 LESSON Y. [8.
Examples —
from the stem we have the nom. sing.
{insula-, island, insula.
consul-, consul, consul,
viator-, traveller, viator,
flos-, flower, flos.
/2^ ( ordon-, rank, ordo.
* * ( region-, country, regio.
celeri- (adjective), quick, celer, masc., celeris, fern.
genero-, son-in-law, gener.*
viro-,77wm, vir.
acri-, (adjective), keen, acer, masc., acris, fern.
lintri-, wherry, linter. •
agro-, field, ager.
( patr-, /a^er, pater.
v"y < matr-, mother, mater.
NOTE. — It will be well for teachers to exercise their pupils upon other examples of the above classes, with this table before their eyes, before allowing them to commence the exercises.
EXERCISE 9.
1. The queen sends the messe'nger. 2. The father loves (his) son. 3. The sun charms the shepherd.. :4. The thief despises the law. 5. The multitude hears the speech. 6. The workman makes a wherry. 7. The mother leads (her) daughter. 8. The shower moistens the field,
adorn, orna- girl, pueUa- boy, puero- master, magisfro- "break, frang- moisten, humecta- brother, fratr- mother, mdtr- cheat, frauda- plain, campo-, m. condemn, damna- queen, regina- consul, consul- send, mitt- country, region- shelter, teg- cup, cyatho-, m. shower, imbri-, m. despise, contemn- sister, sorbr- dry, sicca- speech, earth, terra- sun, sol-, m, father, patr- teach, doee- field, agro-, m. wherry, lintri-, t
* The following nouns make the nom. sing, according to the general rule, by adding s : hespero, humero, numero, utero.
9.] LESSON VL 9
EXERCISE 10.
1. Magister puerum docet. 2. Oratio hospitem delectat. 3. Insula regem habet. 4. Sol terrarn siccat. 5. Rex obsidem damnat. 6. Pater filiam pellit. 7. Ager agricolara delectat. 8. Mater puellain ornat. 9. Nutrlx puerum deserit. 10. Sacerdos virtutem retinet.
LESSON VI.
We have now given all the rules for the formation of the nom. and accus. cases singular of masculine and feminine nouns. Before proceeding to treat of adjectives, and the other parts of nouns, we shall introduce some exercises, with the view of giving the pupils some insight into the mode in which compound words are formed in Latin, at the same time that the rules for the formation of the nofii. and ace. cases are impressed more firmly on the memory.
9. A compound word is one formed by the union of a root and a prefix. Words so formed are very com- mon in Latin. A list of some of the prefixes is given below, with the ordinary meanings which they bear when compounded with roots. It must be understood that, as many of the prefixes end in consonants, when they are joined to roots which begin with consonants, they are very frequently altered in accordance with the laws of euphony which are explained in the introduction. The teacher should take this opportunity of seeing that the pupils understand these, at least to some extent. But in order to simplify the matter, in the next English exer- cise only such verbs will be employed as can be translated by compound Latin verbs with unaltered prefixes. And in case any difficulty in translating be found, the pupils can look out any of the compound words used, in the gen- eral vocabulary at the end of the book.
a, ab, abs,/rom, away. circum, around.
ad, to, near. con (cum), along with.
ante, before^ in front. de, down from.
10 LESSON VI. [9.
dl, dis, apart. pro, before, forth.
(ec) ex, e, out of. post, after, behind.
in, in. praeter, beyond, beside.
inter, between, among. sub, under.
ob, towards. supra, above.
per, through. trans, across.
prae, before. re,
The pupil must form for himself the compound words needed in the following exercise, joining the proper pre- fix to the root-verbs given in this and the foregoing vocabularies. It will be observed that in many of the compound verbs used in this and the following lessons, the prefix does not always bear precisely the meaning assigned to it in the above table ; and it will be the busi- ness of the teacher to point out how that derived meaning arises out of the primitive one.
EXERCISE 11.
1. The king pushes-out (expels) the inhabitant 2. The fanner goes- across the country. 3. The father leads-away (his) son. 4. The senator puts-forth (his) opinion. 5. The traveller puts-down (his) cloak. 6. The servant puts-back the cup. 7. The wherry carries- across the soldier. 8. The inhabitant carries-out (exports) food. 9. The conqueror carries-back glory. 10. The guard leads-round the army.
boar, apro- poet, poeta-, m. carry, porta- put, pon- cloak, paenula- senator, senator- conqueror, victor- servant, ministro-, m. food, cibo; m. traveller, viator- go, i- verse, versu- opinion, sententia-
EXERCISE 12.
1. Dux exercitum exponit. 2. Pater cibum importat. 3. Gustos captivum impellit. 4. Amiens epistolam transmittit. 5. Faber domum conficit. 6. Poeta versum componit. 7. Frater lintrem reficit. 8. Rex servum collaudat. 9. Canis aprum praevidet. 10. Servua au- fugit 11. Puer lintrem appellit. 12. Puella regem adit.
1O, 11.] LESSON VII. 11
LESSON VII.
It is supposed that the pupils are now familiar -with the table of person-endings given in Lesson I. In the pres- ent lesson the first and second persons singular will be introduced as well as the third. In order that these may be easily learned, an example of the present imperfect tense of each of the conjugations is here given, which should be thoroughly committed to memory.
The endings are given here again, with letters, etc., printed over each column, to show to what classes of verbs and tenses each column is in general to be at- tached :
For stems ending in
a, e, i, u or a consonant.
l Sing.
Plur.
o.
is,
it.
imus.
ills,
lint.
1O. 1st. Conj. 2d. Conj. 4th. Conj. 3d. Conj. the stem - U or a
ends in € *' consonant.
ama-, love. mone-, advise, audi-, hear, reg-, rule.
1. amo/oramao,moneo, audio, rego.
2. amas, mones, audis, regis.
3. amat, monet, audit, regit.
1. amamus, monemus, audlmus, regimus.
2. amatis, monetis, audltis, regitis.
3. amant, monent, audiunt, regunt.
1 1 . It must be particularly observed that—
(1) Verbs with o-stems, e-stems, and a-stems take the
12 LESSON VIL [12.
endings given in the first column, except in these re- spects, that,
(a) the first person sing, of the present imperfect tense of all verbs, takes the ending o from the second column, instead of in from the first.
(b) the third person plar. of verbs with ^-sterns takes lint from the second column, instead of nt from the first.
(2) The second column of endings is used for verbs with consonant-stems and -M-sterns (the 3d conjugation).
(3) The endings with this mark (-) before them make the stem-vowel long ; and the same thing is always indi- cated throughout the book by this sign.
(4) Verbs printed in the vocabularies, like cap(i)-, are conjugated for the most part like verbs of the 4th conjugation; but the vowel i remains short through- out, and they are regarded as belonging to the 3d con- jugation.
1.2. The endings O, -s (is), t (it), in general mark the persons of the verb sufficiently, and therefore the words "I," "thou," "he," "she," and "it" must for the most part not be translated.
NOTE. — It "will be well as soon as possible to make the pupils con- jugate the verbs which occur in the exercises ; at first, if necessary, with the examples before their eyes.
EXERCISE 13.
1. I kill a goat. 2. I plough a field. 3. The boy fears-greatly the multitude. 4. You hear the noise. 5. The girl teaches the beggar. 6. I burst-through the rank. 7. The speech alarms the assembly. 8. The consul leads-together the common-people. 9. You advise (your) son-in-law. 10. I love (my) father-in-law. 11. You call- down the hostage. 12. He calls-together the senate, 13. I adorn- greatly (my) daughter. 14. You enter the house. 15. He rules th« state. 16." Catiline flies-off.
adorn-greatly, adorna- burst-lhrougTi, perramp-
alarm, permove- Catiline, Catittna-
assembly, conventu-, call-together, convoca-
beggar, mendtco-, m. common-people, pleb-, £
13, 14.] LESSON Yin. 13
enter, subi- noise, strepitu-
f ear-greatly, pertimesc- plough, ara-
father-in-law, socero- senate, senatu-
fly-off, evola- son-in-law, genero-
goat, capro- thing, re-
kad-together, conduc- undertake, suscip(i)-
EXERCISE 14.
1. Hortum colo. 2. Florem carpis. 3. Lapidem jacit. 4. Clvitatem amo. 5. Multitudinem convocas. 6. Magistrum fraudat. 7. Video regionera. 8. Puellam terres. 9. Fratrem monet. 10. Rem suscipio. 11. Polls lapidem. 12. Clamorem audit. 13. Canis mendicum mor- det. 14. Rem conficis. 15. Aro agrum. 16. Cibum importas.
LESSON VIII.
It is now necessary to speak about adjectives. The first thing to be noted is the agreement of Latin adjectives with the nouns which they qualify. This is a matter which is wholly foreign to the English language. The adjective "large" may be used to qualify the nouns " man," " men^" " woman," " women," " rock," " rocks," without any change in its form, though these nouns differ from each other in number and gender.
1 3. But in Latin, adjectives agree with their nouns in ease, gender, and number ; that is, they vary their form, to correspond with the nouns which they are used to qualify, in all those respects.
For example :
If I wish to translate I must write
a great man, magnus vir.
great men, magrii mrl.
a great woman, magna mutter.
great women, magnae mulieres.
14. It will be seen at once, that the agreement of an adjective with a noun does not at all imply that the end-
2
14 LESSON Vm. [15.
ing of the adjective is to be the same as that of the noun ; but only that, as you follow certain rules in order to make a noun-stem ending in a particular letter into any case, so, just the same rules must be followed to make the ad- jective which is to qualify it, into the same case. The rules given for forming nouns into the nominative and accusative cases, hold, in all respects, except such as will be hereafter mentioned, for adjectives whose stems end in the same letters. The only thing which it is here necessary to say besides is, that all adjectives which shall be given in the vocabularies with stems ending in o, must be under- stood to have another stem, which is not printed, ending in a, the former being masculine, the latter being feminine / that is, the o-stem is to be used if the noun be masculine, and the a-stein if the noun be feminine.
In the following English exercise, the sentences are just the same as those given in Latin in Exercise 14. The only difference is, that each noun is now qualified by an adjective ; and each adjective must be formed just as if it were a noun, so that it shall be found in the same ease, gender, and number as the noun which follows it.
15. NOTE. — Adjectives with t-stems must alwaysh&ve the t changed to e when they take the accusative ending m. See § 1. (2).
EXERCISE 15.
1. I cultivate the barren garden. 2. You pluck the beautiful flower. 3. He throws the great stone. 4. I love the wise state. 5. You call together the foolish multitude. 6. He cheats the kind master. 7. I see the fertile country. 8. You frighten the timid girl. 9. He warns (his) wicked brother. 10. I undertake the easy thing. 11. You polish the valuable stone. 12. He hears the savage shout. 13. The fierce dog bites the poor beggar. 14. You finish the difficult thing. 15. I plough the barren field. 16. You import the valuable food.
and, et. fertile, ferdc(i)-
beautiful, pulcro- fierce./eroc(t)-
barren, sterili- foolish, stulto-
difficult, difficili- great, magno-
easy,factii- kind, benigno-
16.] LESSON IX. 15
lose, amitt- valuable, prctioso-
mild, mlti- wicked, improbo-
poor, pauper- wise, sapient(i)-
savage, saevo- young, juveni- timid, timido-
EXERCISE 16.
1. Magnus amor stultum animum vincit. 2. Fer5x aper timidum cap rum occldit. 3. Res facilis stultum puerum delectat. 5. Saevum hostem miles abducit. 5. Mater improba filiam expellit. 6. Sapiens coriventus sterilem regionem contemnit. 7. Fulcra gloria virum et consulem excitat. 8. Pauper fugitlvus paenulam amittit. 9. Fratrem servat beuigna soror. 10. Eques magnam gloriam reportat.
LESSON IX.
So far no verbs have been used except such as are in the present imperfect tense ; and it has been seen that nothing more was to be done to form them, than merely to add the person-endings to the stems of the verbs.
1O. But it is of course necessary to be able to assert actions as going on in past or future time as well; and this difference is expressed in Latin by adding endings to the stem of the verb before adding the person-endings. The form in which the verb appears when a tense-ending has been added, will be called a tense-stem. The follow- ing table will exhibit most clearly the mode of forming the past imperfect and future tense-stems :
If the verb-stem > add, to make the tense-stem of the
ends in > Pres. imperf. Past imperf. Future imperf.
a, e, -ba- -b-
i 11, or any > .
consonant, (
At present only the past-imperfect will be introduced. As when the past-imperfect tense-stem has been formed, all verbs alike end (in that tense) in a, the 1st column of person-endings is of course employed. A single example
16 LESSON IX. [17.
will suffice. From ara-, "plough," we have the past- imperfect tense-stem, araba-, and then,
The following examples will show various modes of expression which may in English be used to translate the past imperfect tense.
Stem-letters. Verb-stem. Tense-stem. Persons Singular. Meanings.
a. ambula- ambulafoa- 1st. ambulabam, I was walking.
e dole- doleba- 2d. dolebas, you used to grieve.
i dormi- dormiefoa- 3d. dormiebat, he slept.
n sternu- sternueba- 1st. sternuebam, I sneezed, [bling.
any cons, trem- tremeba- 2d. tremebas, you were trem-
" curr- curreba- 3d. currebat, he used to run.
17. It will be observed from these examples that the past imperfect in Latin is not always represented by the same English expressions. In general it is to be em- ployed when you wish to express that an action was going on, was unfinished, or was habitually performed at a past time.
EXERCISE 17.
1. I was praising-highly the general. 2. You used to govern the state. 3. The brave army was taking the beautiful island, 4. A swift ship carried the infantry. 5. You feared the cold wind. 6. The man used to praise the powerful chief. 7. The warlike cohort was-making a bold attack. 8. The timid hare deceived the dog. 9. All the country touched-upon the fertile province. 10. The skilful workman lessened the difficulty.
all, omni- lessen, minu-
bold, auddc(i}- man (a human being), homon-
brave, forti- province, prdvincia-
cold, frigido- powerful, potent^)-
deceive, fall- ship, ndvi-, f.
difficulty, difficultat- skilful, per'ito-
general, imperdtor- swift, veldc(i)-
hare, kpos-, m. (nom. s. lepus). touch-upon, atting-
heavy, graii- warlike, betticoso-
infantry, peditdtu- write, scrib-
18.] LESSON X. IT
EXERCISE 18.
1. Audax eques stultum senatum contemnebat. 2. Sapientem regera poeta peritus delectabat. 3. Feracem campum habebat bellicosus ex- ercitus. 4. Saevus aper improbum hominem occldebat. 5. Pater benignus sapientem epistolam scribit. 6. Captivus omnem difficultatem perrumpebat. 7. Arabas feracem agrum. 8. Ministruiu improbum monebam. 9. Yelocem lintrem impellebas. 10. Viator gravem paenu- lam deponebat.
LESSON X.
It is expected that by this time masculine and feminine nouns with consonant-stems present no difficulty to the pupil, but that he can decline any one throughout with perfect readiness.
It will be well, if this is the case (not otherwise), that he commit to memory the list of endings for nouns with «-stems given at page 203 ; and as soon as these are learned the examples of masculine and feminine nouns which follow. The same course should be followed in this as in the case of consonant-stems : i. e., as soon as the given examples are learned, the pupils should be exercised upon all nouns or adjectives with ^-sterns which occur in the exercises. This can very soon be done if they are allowed at first to have the page with the examples open before them.
We will now speak of the formation of the nominative and accusative cases plural :
1 8. If the stem add, to make the plural
end in Nom. Ace.
any consonant, es, 6s,
€ or u, -S, -S,
i (changed to e), -S, -S.
Plural.
Examples — / * N
Stem. JVbm. Ace.
reg- reges, reges.
die- dies, dies,
gradu- graduS, gradtis.
navi- naves, naves.
2*
18 LESSON X. [18.
NOTE. — 1st. Of all these nouns the nom. and ace. plur. do not differ in form ; and therefore these cases can only be distinguished from each other by the meaning of the sentences in which they occur.
2d. The vowel of t-stems is occasionally seen unaltered in the ace. plur., and this form was preferred by the best Latin authors.
3d. Nouns printed in the vocabularies, like mont(i)-, must be con- sidered to have their plural cases formed from the stem monti-.
All the persons of the verb will now be introduced, and the words " we," " ye," " they" need not generally be translated.
EXERCISE 19.
1. "We were fearing the bold conspiracies. 2. Ye stretched the light bows. 3. They heard the foolish speech. 4. We praise highly the noble consuls. 5. Ye pluck the green fruits. 6. The lying thieves seize a large sum-of-money. 7. The base guards deserted the gate. 8. Ye were selling the fertile field. 9. The powerful kings enrol brave armies. 10. You slew (your) kind friend.
and, gue, enclitic.* lying, mendac(i)-
base, turpi- noble, nobili-
bow, arcu- seize, rap(i)-
demand. pose- sett, vend-
enrol, conscrlb- slay, interfic(i)-
gate, porta- stretch, tend-
green, viridir sum-of-money, pecunia-
light, kvi~ tide, aestu-
EXERCISE 20.
1. Canes lepores excitabant 2. Excitabas omnes equites. 3. Ex- citamus bellic5sam cohortem. 4. Difficulties excitat virtutem. 5. Aestus feraces regiones attingunt. 6. Sapientes mures civitates servant. 7. Omnes flores carpebatis. 8. Patres matresque conjurationes time- bant. 9. Fulcra puella amatores juvenes habebat. 10. Mites nutrices puerum pueUamque ducebant.
* The word enclitic means leaning back, and is applied to some little words which are never used at the beginning of a sentence, but always attached to some other word.
19.] LESSON XI. 19
LESSON XL
We have now only to mention the mode of forming the nominat. and accus. plural for a-stems and o-stems. If the stem to make the plural
end in Nom. Ace.
a, add e, add -s.
o, change to i, " -s.
Examples —
Stem. Nom. Plur. Ace. Plur.
puella- puellae, puellas.
viro- viri, viros.
1O. It will be observed, on comparing this rule with that given in the last lesson, that all vowel-stems make the accusative plural by adding -s.
Observe also, that when a-stems take the ending e, these two vowels form a diphthong.
EXERCISE 21.
1. Careful husbandmen cultivated the beautiful islands. 2. The allies embark-on the swift ships. 3. The horses were crossing the broad rivers. 4. Recent wrongs were urging-on the soldiers. 5. We were cutting-away the old bridges. 6. All the boys and girls run-together quickly. 7. Lofty mountains surround the fortified cities. 8. Changes (say new things) frighten the noble and the rich (men). 9. I bury the unfortunate citizens. 10. You feel sharp pains.
ally, socio- old, vetes- broad, Idto- pain, dolor- bury, sepeli- quickly (adverb), cderiter careful, dlligent(i)- recent, recent(t)- city, urb(i)-, f. rich, dlvet- cross, transi- river, amni-, m. cut-away, rescind- run-together, concurr- embark-on, conscend- sharp, acuto- feel, senti- surround, cing- fortified, munlto- sword, gladio-, m. lofty, celso- unfortunate, misero- mountain, mont(i); m. urge-on, incita- new, novo- wrong (noun), injuria-
20 LESSON XIL [20,21.
2O. NOTE. — The verb t-, "go", with all its compounds, such as transi- " go-across," used in this exercise, is irregular in several points. One is, that in the past imperfect tense it takes the ending -1m- instead of eba- ; so transi- will have its past imperfect tense-stem, transiba-, and not trans ieba-.
EXERCISE 22.
1. Nauta frigidos ventos timet. 2. Potentes principes monebamus. 3. Fortes pedites multos hostes repellebant. 4. Novus incola feracem. regiouem amat. 5. Novl incolae feraces agros amabant. 6. Appello velocem navem, 7. Munitae urbes omnes impetus sustinent. 9. Acutos gladios tenebatis. 10. AcQti gladii miseros captives perterrent. 11. Omnes vias mflites reficiunt. 12. Omnes viae novos pontes habeat.
LESSON. XII.
In the sixth sentence of Ex. 21, an adverb is introduced. Adverbs are words used to modify the meaning of verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs beside which they are placed. All such words (which, with prepositions and conjunc- tions, are called particles in some grammars) are printed in the vocabularies without the hyphen (-) after them, to indicate that their form is never changed. It is best now to attend to the general rule of their formation. Generally,
2 1 . Adjective-stems are formed into adverbs by ending in o, changing o to e.
" " i, adding ter.
" " consonants, adding iter or er. Thus,
lato-, broad, makes late, broadly.
prudent-, prudent , " prudenter, prudently.
suavi-, sweet, " suaviter, sweetly.
felic-, happy, " feliciter, happily.
It must be remembered that these are only the general rules of the formation of adverbs. There are many which are not derived from adjectives at all, and others again
21.] LESSON XII. 21
which are formed from adjectives in a different way. But this will present no difficulty, for words of this sort will always be given in the vocabularies.
EXERCISE 23.
1. All the charioteers immediately urged on the horses. 2. Many women hasten to-the-same-place. 3. The thoughtless king foolishly let-go the hostages. 4. Ye cultivate the fertile fields far-and-wide. 5. The bold enemy (pi.) fight bravely. 6. The unfortunate sailors eagerly repaired the ship. 7. I soon assist the wounded man. 8. The soldiers take the fortified city with -difficulty. 9. Idle messengers never make-haste. 10. Ye compose verses beautifully.
assist, juva- idle, igndvo-
beautif'ully, pulcre. let-go, dlmitt-
bravely, fortiter. never, nunquam.
charioteer, aurlga- eoon, cito.
eagerly, cupide. to-the-same-place, eddem.
far-and-wide, late. thoughtless, imprudent(i)-
foolishly, stulte. with difficulty, aegre.
hasten, propera- wounded, saucio- immediately, statim.
EXERCISE 24.
1. Veloces capri lupos aegre fugiunt. 2. Ignavi servi cupide aufu- giebant. 3. Novam lintrem cito rapimus. 4. Doceo ignavum puerum. 6. Atrocem imperatorem nunquam times. 6. Res periculosae dlvites statim terrent. 7. Clamor imprudentem clvem permovet. 8. Miserum captlvum stulte monebas. 9. Faber sapiens filium filiamque aegre docebat. 10. Magnae injuriae omnes viatores terrent.
NOTE. — It is expected, that by this time the pupils are able to de- cline with facility any noun with a consonant-stem or an i-stem. And they should also be able to conjugate, without hesitation, the two tenses of the verb hitherto explained, from sterna ending hi any letter.
LESSON XHI. [21,
LESSON XIII.
Pupils should now commit to memory the table of the endings of nouns with a-stems (the first declension), and the example given of it at page 205 ; and they should as soon as possible be made to decline all nouns of this class which occur in the exercises, as well as those of the third declension. It should be pointed out that feminine adjectives, ending in a, have the same declension precisely.
EXERCISE 25.
1. The weary citizens lay aside (their) gowns. 2. The active maid- servants draw water. 3. The savage guards quickly bind the un- fortunate prisoner. 4. We were propping-up the falling house. 5. Ye mend the old clothes. 6. All the soldiers leaped-down at once. 7. I come to (ad) the city. 8. You bury the unfortunate commander by-night. 9. The priest gladly hears the wise speech. 10. The eagles were flying-together from all sides.
active, gnavo- fly-together, convola-
at once (together), simul. gladly, libenter.
bind, vinci- gown, toga-
by night, noctti. leap down, desili-
clothes, vesti-, f. maid-servant, famula-
commander, praefecto- mend, resarci-
draw (as water), hauri- no one, nemon-
eagle, aquila- prop up, fulci-
falling, caduco- weary, from all sides, undique.
EXERCISE 26.
1. Veterem turrim celeriter fulcls. 2. Nemo novam togam resarcit 3. Dives pastor benignum amicum sepeliebat. 4. Collaudo fortcm imperatorem. 5. Omnes agros late aras. 6. Improbum captivuin damnabatis. 7. Turpes senatores miseram multitudinem fallunt. 8. Leporem velocem capit canis. 9. Recentes injuriae fortem principem permoveut. 10. Flos caducus dolorem excitabat.
22, 23.]
LESSON XIT.
23
LESSON XIV.
We have now spoken of the mode of forming the nominative and accusative cases of all nouns, masculine and feminine. It remains to give the modes of forming the same cases for neuter nouns. And it must be observed, that in all neuter nouns the liom and JlCC. sing1, do not differ in form, nor do the saossa. and ace. plur. differ in form. It is thought best to exhibit in one view all the rules for the formation of these cases of neuter nouns, though examples will be introduced separately in the exercises.
23. IVeilter-steins form their nom. and ace. sing, and their nom. and ace. plur. by making the changes and additions which in the an- nexed table are stated opposite to the stem-letters.
to make the nom. to make the nom.
Stem-letters. and ace. sing. and ace. plur.
|
change |
add |
change |
add |
|
|
1.0, |
to 11, |
ill. |
0 to a, |
nothing, |
|
2. i, |
toe, |
nothing. |
nothing |
a, |
|
8. e§, o§, |
to MS, |
M |
S tor, |
it |
|
4. ai, ar, |
to al, ar, |
a |
nothing, |
<c |
|
5. <]. t, 11, rr, ss, |
drop last letter, |
K |
(I |
II |
|
6. any thing else, |
nothing, |
(i |
li |
(( |
Neuter Stems.
1. regno-
2. gravi-
3. ones-
4. calcar(i)-
5. cord- oss-
6. fulgur-
EXAMPLES.
Nom. and Ace. Sing. regnum, • grave, onus, calcar, cor, os, fulgur,
Nom. and Ace. Plur regna. gravia. onera. calcaria. corda, ossa. fulgura.
NOTE. — 1st. In all neuter nouns the nom. and ace. plur. end in a.
2d. As it was seen in § 5 that the e in words like mllet-is changed to i when any ending, making a new syllable, is added, so, words ending in en change the e to i, under the same circumstances : thus, flumen- makes nom. plur. flumina : so also, caput- makes nom. plur. capita •
3d. The four words, femor-, jecor-, ebor-, robor-, like nouns in the 3d class, change o to u in the nom. sing.
24 LESSON XV. [23.
In the next exercise, no neuter words will be intro- duced, except such as end in o-, making class 1st in the above table.
EXERCISE 27.
1. The fortified town easily keeps-off the enemy (pi.). 2. 1 see the dangerous conflagration. 3. You mix the new wines. 4. We fear the savage battle. 5. Ye hold many kingdoms. 6. The sharp missiles alarm the soldiers. 7. Long-enduring joy kept possession of the mind. 8. The black herd immediately devoured the fodder.
battle, proelio-j n. keep-off, prohibe-
black, nigro- keep-possession of, obtine-
conflagration, incendio-, n. kingdom, regno-, n.
devour, vora- missile, telo-, n.
easily, facile. long-enduring, diuturno-
fodder, pabub-, n. mix, misce-
hold, tene- town, oppido-,rL
joy, gaudio-, n, wine, vino-, n.
EXERCISE 28.
1. Acutum telum audacem aurigam vulnerat. 2. Magnum incen- dium miseras mulieres terret. 3. Xova gaudia juvenem animum ex- citant. 4. Nignim armentum campum latum percurrebat. 5. Magna armenta alo. 6. Difficilem rem celeriter conficio. 7. Pater benignus puerum amabat. 8. Parva oppida imperator et mHites servabant.
LESSON XV.
By looking back to § I/, it will be seen that the future tense -stem is made in two ways, which may be thus briefly represented :
take the ending
a, e, -b- Call this the ^-future.
i, u, or a consonant, e- Call this the e-future.
NOTE. — 1st. The to-future, as ending in a consonant, of course takes the person-endings given in the second column hi Lesson VII.
2<L The e-future takes the person-endings given in the first col- umn.
24, 25.] LESSON XY. 25
3d. The tense-ending e is changed to a in the 1st person sing.
24. The verb i-, "go," and all its compounds, takes the to-future.
25. The verb da-, "give," keeps the vowel short before all syl- labic endings.
EXAMPLES.
|
Sing. Plur. |
1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. |
1st. Conj. ama- / shall, amabo, Thou wilt, amabis, He will • amabit ; We shall, amabimus, You will, amabitis, They will, amabunt. |
2d. Conj. 4ffi. Conj. .mone- audi- monebo, audiam, monebis, audies, monebit ; audiet ; monebimus, audiemus monebitis, audietis, monebunt. audient. |
3d. Conj. rear- i-, "go," regam, Ibo, reges, Ibis, reget; ibit; regemus, Ibiraus, regetis, ibitis, regent ibunt. |
The pupils had best now commit to memory the end- ings of the second declension (o-stems), and the examples given therewith on p. 206. As we have now spoken of neu- ter nouns of this declension, it will be well to call atten- tion to the declension of the adjective at page 206, which presents the neuter forms, as well as the masculine. It is recommended that, as a general rule, boys be required to decline an adjective only in the gender in which it is used at the time, though they should of course be able to give all the forms together.
EXERCISE 29.
1. The kind master will gladly undertake the business. 2. I will finish the new buildings. 3. You will seize the wooden shield. 4. We will quickly buy-up the ripe corn. 5. The conquered allies will fear the adverse javelins. 6. Ye will preserve (your) allies and the for- tified town. 7. I will give the signal, and will lead-up the auxiliary- forces. 8. Gold and silver will not procure happiness.
adverse, adverse- javelin, pllo-, n. auxiliary forces, auxilio-, n. (pi.) lead-up, addiic-
building, aedificio-, n. not, non.
business, negotio-, n. procure, para-
buy-up, coem- ripe, maturo-
corn, frumento- signal, signo-, n.
conquered, victo- silver, argento-
give, da- shield, scuto-, n.
gold, auro-, n. wooden, 3
26 LESSON XYT. [25.
EXERCISE 30.
1. Atroces canes armentum prohibebunt 2. Dives rex oppidum ornabit. 3. Adversa proelia imperatorem perterreut. 4. Improbum captlvum interficiam. 5. Praefectus multa auxilia adducet 6. Frater ignavus nunquam negotium conficiet. 7. Milites fessi scuta et pila deponebant. 8. Graves lapides pastor dejicit.
LESSON XVI.
In the following exercises neuter nouns with i-stems will be introduced, forming the second of the classes given in Lesson XIV. Neuter adjectives with consonant- stems will be also used : and in regard to these it is to be particularly noted that they take the ending s in the nom. and ace. sing, neuter, just as the nom. sing. mas. does. As nouns with consonant and with i-stems have been already learned by heart, it will be well that now the adjectives given at page 202, as examples of the com- plete declension of these stems should be committed to memory.
EXERCISE 31.
1. The thin net will shut in all the birds. 2. The wide sheepfolds will Confine the sheep. 3. The sweet wine hardly filled the cask. 4. The wise plan will charm the unfortunate common-people. 5. The calm sea will again allure the travellers. 6. A soft couch will support the weary woman. 7. A great multitude quickly fills all the seats. 8. The messenger undertakes the disgraceful business.
again, rursus. • plan, consilio-, n.
allure, allic(i)- - reward, praemio-, n.
bird, avi-, f. sea, mari-, n.
calm, placido- seat, sedili-, n.
cask, cado~, m. sheep, ovi-, f.
couch, cublti-, n. sheepfold, ovili-, n,
faithful, fideli- shut-in, includ-
fitt, comple- similar, simili-
hardly, scarcely, vix. soft, molli-
meadow, prato-, n. sweet, suavi-
net, reti-, n, thin, tenui-
25.] LESSON XYII. 27
EXERCISE 32.
1. Fidelia consilia audio. 2. Difficilia negotia conficiebam. 3. Suavia vina hauriara. 1. Fer5x consiliura proponis. 5. Ovile novum vendebas. 6. Simile praemium contemnes. 7. Avis tenue rete videt. 8. Acutura pilum impetum prohibebat. 9. Agricola matiirum fruraen- tum habebat. 10. Pretiosa praemia dabamus. 11. Mollia cubilia ornabatis. 12. Feracia prata elves arabant.
LESSON XYII.
In the following exercises, neuter nouns in es or os, will be introduced, which constitute the 3d class in the table given in Lesson XIV. Their complete declension can now be learned as given at page 202.
EXERCISE 33.
1. The heavy load will weary the beast-of-burden. 2. The lieuten- ants and centurions were eagerly hastening the works. 3. The old wound again torments the unfortunate beggar. 4. The waves soon wear away the soft shore. 5. Food nourishes the body. 6. The hungry sailors will at-once tear-off the hard hides. 7. The huge weight presses down the light ship. 8. Faithful citizens always keep a treaty.
at once, statim. press down, deprim-
beast-of-burden, jumento- shore, lltos-
body, corpos- tear-off, derip(i)-
centurion, centurion- torment, crucia-
hard, duro- treaty, foedes-
hasten, matura- wave, fluctu-
hide, tergos- wear away, atter-
huge, ingent(i)- weary, fatlga-
hungry, jcjuno- weight, pondes-
lieutenant, legato- work, opes-
load, ones- wound, vulnes- nourish, al-
EXERCISE 34.
1. Jumentum gravia pondera aegre portabit. 2. Dlligentes fabri magnum opus cito conficiebant. 8. Multae aves litus petent. 4. Ve- tera foedera injuriam vetabant. 5. Fortes colonl novas terras statim
28 LESSON XYin. [25
petunt. 6. Nemo magnum onus libenter portabit 7. Multa tergora coemo. 8. Rex omne frumentum coemet, et fortes mflites conscribet. 9. Turpe vulnus ignavus miles accipit. 10. Miserum corpus acutus gladius vulnerabat. 11. Imprudens consilium stultum centurionem fallebat 12. Ingentia onera vix sustinebimus.
LESSON XYIII.
In the following exercises neuter nouns will be intro- duced belonging to the 4th, 5th and 6th classes, as given in Lesson XIV. See also the notes in that lesson. The declension of the other neuter nouns given at page 202 can now be learned by heart.
EXERCISE 35.
1. The sharp spur wounds the side. 2. The horse-soldier lays-aside (his) spurs. 3. We will pay all the tax every year. 4. The bold king seized the valuable taxes. 5. The fortunate conquerors shall eat corn and honey. 6. The faithful heart cultivates honor. 7. Severe pains were attacking the knees. 8. I will bury the corpse in the morning.
attack, invad- in the morning, mane.
bee, api-, f. knee, genu-, n.
contest, certdmen- pay, pend-
corn, farr-, n. river, flumen-
corpse, cadaver-, n. severe, gravi-
eat, ed- side, lates-
every year, quotannls. spur, calcdr(\)-, n.
fortunate, ftlK^- strength, robor-, n.
grass, gramen- tax, vectlgdl(i)-, n.
heart, cord-, n. thigh, femor-, n.
honey, mett-, n. threshold, llmen-
hoiior, honestat- war, beUo-, n.
EXERCISE 36.
1. Nigrae oves omne gramen celeriter edent. 2. Ferox bellum im- perator suscipit. 3. Misera femora robur amittunt. 4. Felix perfuga vetus limen libenter transit. 5. Grave vectigal aegre pendetis. 6. Jejunum armentum viride gramen cupide edebat. 7. Molle cublle fessum latus fulcit. 8. Ingens flumen omnes pontes deripit. 9. Suave mel apes reportant 10. Magnum gaudium corda complebit
26, 27.] LESSON XIX. 29
LESSON XIX.
Compare the sentences —
1. The slave kills the master. Servus dominum occidit.
2. The slave runs. Servus currit.
26. Verbs like that in the second sentence, since they do not speak of an action as directed towards an object, and do not therefore admit an accusative case after them, are called Intransitive verbs, while verbs, like that in the first sentence, which have been almost wholly em- ployed hitherto, are called Transitive verbs.
If intransitive verbs are connected with an accusative case, it must be generally by the help of a preposition.
27. Prepositions are undeclined words (or par- ticles), the primary use of which was to express the rela- tive positions of things in space / for example : in the sentences, " the bird is upon the branch :" " he goes into the wood :" " the boy sleeps on the grass :" the words upon, into, on, are prepositions.
In Latin, prepositions are only followed by nouns in either the accusative or ablative case. At present we shall only give the principal ones which are followed by an accusative case.
ad, to. ob (towards), on account of.
ante, before. per, through, across.
apud, near. post, after.
circum, round. praeter, beside, beyond.
contra, (facing), against. sub, under.
erga, towards. supra, above.
in, into, against. trans, across.
inter, between, among. ultra, beyond.
NOTE. — 1st. Some of these are the same as some of the prefixes given in Lesson VI.
2d. It has been said that the above prepositions are followed by an accusative case : and it may generally easily be seen that, when so used, the accusative case has the same kind of meaning as it has always had in the preceding exercises: viz., that of being the object or end of action or motion.
3*
30 • LESSON XX. [28.
EXERCISE 37.
1. I come to the city. 2. You go-acrosthe broad river to the fortified town. 3. The base deserter flees-away into the thick wood. 4. The unfortunate boy falls-down into the lake. 5. We will dig a deep ditch around the camp. 6. Ye were carrying the fodder across the wide plain. 7. The general sends the conquered enemy (2)1) under the yoke. 8. The commander led (his) army beyond the mountain.
camp, castro-, n. plur. run, cure- deep, alto- thick, denso- dig. fod(i)- wood, silva- ditch, fossa- wide, Idto- fall-down, decid- yoke,j'u</0-, n. lake, fact*-
EXERCISE 38.
1. Imperator milites m durum bellum dQcit. 2. Hostes impetum contra densus ordines ficriter faciuut. 3. Nuvem ad iitus appellebam. 4. Timida avis in silvam evolat. 5. Gniivus faber difficilia opera cito conficiet. 6. Yelox equus per agros currit. 7. Acuta calcaria equum in hostem incitant 8. Magistrum in viam devoco.
LESSON XX.
In all the preceding exercises the nominative and the accusative cases of the noun have been the only ones used. Those exercises ought to have taught the pupils distinctly and unmistakably that
38. (1) The nominative case with an active verb ex- presses the doer of the action described by the verb • it is always either the subject of the sentence (that about which the assertion is made), or some word in agreement with the subject.
(2) The accusative case is used in general to express that which is the object of an action, or that toward which some motion is directed.
Let these two principles be firmly fixed in the memory and understanding before proceeding further.
29, 3O.] LESSON XX^s^-JLJjL^^ ' 31
Let this rule also be learnt. Motion to towns or small islands, and also motion homeward (domu-), or to the country (rus-), is expressed by putting the proper names of towns or small islands, or the words domu- and rus-, in the accusative case without a preposition. As,
Regulus Carthaginem redit. Hegulus returns to Car- thage.
Ibant domum capellae. The she-goats were going home.
30. Some verbs, moreover, which signify " asking," "teaching," "concealing," are followed by two accusatives, one expressing the person and the other the thing. As,
Pacem te poscimus omnes. We all beg peace of you. Docebopuerumillamartem. Twill teach the boy that art. Iter omnes celat. He conceals the road from all.
EXERCISE 39.
1. All the soldiers will return to Rome. 2. The ambassadors has tened to Carthage. 3. The master taught the boys grammar. 4. The ambassadors demanded-back the image from-the-praetor. 5. Caesar every-day (quotldie) kept-calling-for (flagita-) corn from-the-Aedui. 6. Caesar conceals all (his) plans from-the-enemy (pi).
Aedui, Aeduo- image, simulilcro-, n. ask, roga- master, magistro- Carthage, CartMgon-, f. mind, meni(i}-, f. conceal, cela- return, redi- country, rus-, n. praetor, praetor- demand-back, repose- Saguntum, Sagunto-, n. grammar, grammatica-
EXERCISE 40.
1. Imperator R5mam legates mittit. 2. Consul praetorem senteutiam rogabit. 2. Improbus homo rus avolat. 4. Multi philosophl uunquam domum revenient. 5. Deum rogat bonam men tern. 6. Res Romanes amicum non celabat. 7. Pater multas res utiles f ilium docebit. .8. Hannibal Saguutum magnas copiis ducit.
32 LESSON XXI. [31-38.
LESSON XXI.
The next case to be treated of is the genitive.
3 1 . The genitive case in its primary meaning appears to have denoted the source from which something comes : this notion is very commonly expressed in English by the preposition o/1, as in the words " by order of the king," which implies that the order proceeded from the king ; and the word " of" so often expresses the meaning of the genitive case that it is said in many grammars to be the sign of the genitive case. It will be best, however, to get such a clear notion of the general use of the genitive case as may enable us to decide when it is proper to em- ploy it, without regard to the particular preposition which may happen to be used in the English.
35J. The commonest use of the genitive case is to limit the meaning of a noun or adjec- tive. For example, compare the following sentences : "The soldiers fight bravely:" "The soldiers of the tenth legion fight bravely." It is clear that the word "soldiers" is used in a narrower sense, is more limited or confined in its application, in the second sentence than it is in the first.
This limitation is generally effected by mentioning —
CaJl these the 33. 1. "What is productive of the limited noun, subjective genitive.
34.2. " theo$a*of
35. 3. " inclusive of
36. 4. " the possessor of
37. 5. " connected with 3§. 6. " descriptive of
objective " inclusive " possessive " " conjunctive " " descriptive "
Thus, in the following sentences we have
1. The command of the king, the subjective genitive.
2. The love of virtue, the objective
3. A part of the night, the inclusive "
4. The boy's book, the possessive "
5. Caesar's father, the conjunctive "
6. A man of virtue, the descriptive "
39, 4O.] LESSON XXII. 33
39. NOTE. — The subjective and objective genitives may be most readily distinguished by supposing the limited twun to be changed to the corresponding verb, and then seeing whether the word in the genitive would stand as the subject or as the object of it ; for example :
(1.) " The command of the king" becomes "the king commands." (2.) " The love of virtue" becomes " I love virtue."
40. It must be observed particularly that the descriptive genitive in Latin can never be employed unless an adjective is joined with it; thus, we cannot say "homo virtutis" though we can say "homo magnae viriaHs."
As it is very important that this lesson should be well understood, no exercise will be here given; but it is recommended that the teacher should avail himself of the examples given in the subsequent English exercises to impress firmly on his pupils' minds the general use of the genitive case, and the distinctions in the mode in which the limitation is effected. Time spent on this and on still further enforcing the fundamental uses of the nominative and accusative cases, as stated in the preceding lesson, will, it is firmly believed, be employed in the best possible way. Of course it is not intended that the above distinc- tions will meet every case, but only that jn most of the sentences here- after given one or other of them will be clearly applicable.
LESSON XXII.
The rules for forming the genitive case singular and plural are presented here in one view : but it is not ne- cessary that they should all be learned at once, as exer- cises wih1 be given upon them separately.
-rum
Sterna ending ia a *> form the genitive case
grammars. Singular. Plural.
1. any consonant, 3d. add is, add mil.
2. i, 3d. " s,
3. 11, 4th. " -g,
4. €, 5th. " i,
5. o, 2d. change to i,
6. a, 1st. add e, making a
[diphthong.
In the present lesson no genitive cases will be intro- duced but those made on consonant-stems, which form the first of the classes given in the above table.
34 LESSON XXm. [4O.
EXERCISE 41.
1. The friends of the powerful chief were opening the gates of the city.. 2. The death of the bold soldier will increase the fear of the consul. 3. You will overcome the soldiers of the legion. 4. The hope of liberty will at length prevail- with the man's brother. 5. I will bury the corpse of the scout to-morrow. 6. The fear of death will not deter the robber's children. 7. The pain of the wound still torments the skilful workman. 8. "We love the commander's wise son.
at length, tandem. liberty, Tibertat-
children, ttbero-, m., plur. open, aperi-
death, mort(i)-, f. overcome, supera-
deter, deterre- prevail-with, permove-
fear, timor- robber, latron-
hope, spc- scout, expldrdtdr-
increase, auge- still, etiamnum.
legion, legion-, L to-morrow, eras.
EXERCISE 42.
1. Fidelis servus pecuniam pastoris servat. 2. Arbores veteris ne- moris multas aves tegunt. 3. Pondus oneris equus vix sustinet. 4. Multi milites audacis cohortis aegre aufugiunt. 5. LIberi mulierum montem escendebant. 6. Mors consulis omnes incolas urbis terret. 7. Frlgidus ventus dolorem vulneris augebit. 8. oratio principis ani- mos mflitum excitat.
LESSON XXIII.
In the following exercises genitive cases will be intro- duced which foil under the second class in the table given in Lesson XXII., viz., those made on i-stems.
It is assumed that the pupils are now able to decline perfectly the first three declensions as well as the three imperfect tenses of the active verb ; let them now learn by heart the endings of the 4th or w-declension, as given at page 207, and the example of it : and let this, as well as the others, be constantly gone over, as examples of them occur in the reading exercises ; but always the stem of the word should be given before the declension is pro-
41, 42.] LESSON XXIII. 35
ceded with, that the connection between the declension and the stem-letter may become, as it were, intuitive.
EXERCISE 43.
1. The arrival of the fleet immediately lessens the boldness of the faithless multitude. 2. The fewness of the ships alarms the heart of the chiefs. 3. The enraged woman tears the gown of the citizen. 4. The multitude of bees quickly fills the hive. 5. The breadth of the river does not deter the attack of the bold soldiers. 6. The skill of the careful general overcomes all the difficulty. 7. The fierce barking of the dog does not increase the boldness of the robber. 8. The wise shepherd defends the health of (his) sheep.
41. N. B. The following i-stems omit the i before the ending 11111 of the genitive plural : cani-, " dog," juveni-, "youth," vati-, prophet, strut-, " heap," and sometimes a few others.
- 42 • There are some nouns with t-stems which make their nom. sing. as if from a stem ending in e. Such words will have the nom. sing. given in the vocabularies.
animal, animal(i)-, n. fewness, paucilat-
arrival, adventu- health, salut-
barking, latratu- heap, strui-, f., n. s. strues.
boldness, audada- htve, alveari-, n.
breadth, latiltidon- offspring, proli-, f., n. s. proles.
defend, defend- prophet, vafo'-, e., n. s. vates.
enraged, Irdto- skill, perltia-
faithless, inftdeli- tear, discind-
rleet, classi-, f. wait-far ^ expecta-
EXERCISE 44.
1. Yelocis navis praefectus insulam statim capit. 2. Audacia juve- num miserum captivum incitat. 3. Vatum oratioues collaudo. 4. Multitude canum tergora animalium cito deripiet. 5. Strues lapidum cadaver regis tegit. 6. Infidelis plebis clamores animum consulis per- terrebunt. 7. Proles ducis omnem patris pecuniam amittit. 8. For- tium imperatorum llberl adventum classis expectant.
LESSON XXIV. [42.
LESSON XXIV.
In the following exercises genitive cases will be intro- duced made upon w-stems, forming the third of the classes given in the table in Lesson XXII.
NOTE. — The two stems gru-, " a crane," and SM-, " a boar," or u a sow," are declined like the consonant or third declension, and therefore make the gen. sing. Ci gruis," '• suis/' Also, anu-, " old-woman," has sometimes " anuis" instead of " anus."
Let the declension of a neuter noun in w, given at page 207, be now learned.
EXERCISE 45.
1. The wagons will carry the wounded-men and the baggage of the brave army at-the-same-time. 2. The quickness of the disgraceful re- treat wearies the horses and oxen. 3. I was waiting-lbr the result of the bold attempt, 4. We feared the greatness of the waves and tem- pests. 5. You gladly assisted the daughters of the magistrate. 6. The size of the horns of the animal will astonish the hunter. 7. The chiefs of the senate, not (being) ignorant of the result of the contest, feared the tribunes of the common-people. 8. I secretly open all the gates of the house.
astonish, stupefac(i)- ox, bov-, c., n. s. bos.
attempt, conatu- prayer, prec-, f-
baggage, impedlmento- qL result, evtntu-
cavalry, cquiidtu- retreat, receptit-
greatness, magnitHdon- secretly, clam.
harbor, portu- size, amplitudon-
horn, cornur, n. tempest, tempestat-
hunter, venator- tribune, tribuno-
ignorant, igndro- wouuded-man, vulnerato- magistrate, mayistratur
EXERCISE 46.
1. Adventus exercitus spem fortis regis augebat. 2. Omnes ordines peditatus statim mittam. 3. Ob magnitudinem aestuum litora vltabiis
4. Preces senatus potentem equitatus praefectum vix permovebunt.
5. Post mortem magistrates omnes incolae domum vatis petunt 6. Paucitas portuum navigationem impediebat. 7. Cornua animalis vena- torem vulnerant. 8. Du^cultas conatua liberos latronis deterrebat.
42.] LESSON XXY. 37
LESSON XXV.
In the following exercises genitive cases made upon e- stems* will be introduced, forming the 4th of the classes given in Lesson XXII. It will be worth while now for the pupils to learn by heart the endings of the e-declen- sion (the 5th) and the example of it, as given at page 207. When this is thoroughly learned, all the declensions of nouns and adjectives should be kept in constant practice, that the connection between the stem-letter and a partic- ular mode of declension may be printed indelibly on the memory.
EXERCISE 47.
1. The companions of the fortunate merchant will not observe- thoroughly the similarity of the thing. 2. The fear of destruction takes-possession-of the woman's mind. 3. The appearance of the army- in-battle-array alarms the barbarians. 4. Idle boys let-slip much of the day. 5. Little of hope remains (superest). 6. I shall at-length re- ceive the reward of fidelity. 7. The wise man examines carefully the nature of things. 8. Delay of few days destroys the hope of victory.
appearance, specie- fidelity, fide-
army-in-battle-array, acie- let~slip, omitt-
barbarian, barbaro-, m. little, paulo-, n.
carefully, dlligenter. merchant, mercdtdr-
day, die-, m., also, f. in sing. much, multo-, n.
delay, mora- nature, ndtura-
destroy, perd- observe-thoroughly, perspic(i)-
destruction, pernicie- similarity, similitudon-
examine, explora- take-possession-of, occupa-
few, pauco- victory, victoria-
NOTE. — The two words re- and die- are the only ones of this declen- sion which are commonly used in the genitive plural.
EXERCISE 48.
1. Rei audacia uxorem fratris stupefaciet. 2. Perniciel timorem clamor multitudinis auget. 3. Similis rerum species animum hominis
* "Words with e-stems have the stem- vowel marked long. It is al- ways long, except (perhaps) in the ace. sing., and sometimes in the gen. and dat. sing, of the words spe-, " hope," re-, " thing, "./ide-, "faith." 4
38 LESSON XXYL [43.
fallit. 4. eventus multorum dierum tandem perspicimus. 5 Laudes tidel libenter dlcam. 6. Robur aciel diligenter exploras. 7. Muito.s dies auxilium et salutem cupide expectamus. 8. Mercator maguas spC-s alit
43. NOTE. — In the 7th sentence of this exercise we have multos dtis used to express duration of time. This is a very common use of the accusative case without a preposition.
LESSON XXYI.
In the following exercises the genitive of o-stems will be introduced, forming the 5th of the classes given in the table in Lesson XXII.
EXERCISE 49.
1. I will gladly undertake our friend's difficult business. 2. The remaining nations of the Gauls feared the ancient valor of the Roman people. 3. The boy's lather has the hope of great rewards. 4. I was pleading the prisoner's cause boldly. 5. The allies were there waiting- for the arrival of the great king. 6. You seize the horses of the war- like chief. 7. The inhabitants of the village behold the light of the conflagration. 8. The archers and slingers will make a beginning of the battle.
ancient, antiquo- our, nostro-
archer, sagittdrio- people, popido-,m.
beginning, initio-, n. plead, dic-
bekold, conspic(i)- remaining, rdiquo-
cause, causa- Roman, Romdno- Gaul, Gatto-, m.
light, luinen- there, ibi. nation, gent(t)-, f.
EXERCISE 50.
1. Socilpopuli Roman! adventum exercitusibi expectabunt. 2. Duces Gallorum conjurationem facient. 3. Victae copiae sociorum celeriter aufugiunt 4. Audacgs incolae munitorum oppidorum vectlgalia quo- tannTs non pendent, 5. Per vias oppidi miserum captlvum deducis. 6. Classis Roman! populi praefectum ibi expectat 7. Milites magnam mwltitudinem fugitivorum occldebant. 8. Cadum suavis vini accipio.
43.] LESSON XXVIII.
LESSON XXVII.
In the following exercises the genitive of ^-sterns will be introduced, forming the 6th of the classes given in Lesson XXII.
EXERCISE 51.
1. The army of the queen was cruelly laying-" waste the fertile country. 2. The sudden arrival of the sailors charms the inhabitants of the beau- tiful island. 3. I highly-praised the exploit of the bold deserter. 4. The learned judge will fix a day for-the-pleading (genii) of the cause. 5. The hope of victory rouses the brave chief. 6. The girls, (being) desirous of beautiful clothes, at once undertake the business.
cruelly, crudeliter. learned, docto-
exploit, facinos- pleading, diction-
fix, constitu- sailor, nauta-
judge, praetor- sudden, repentlno- lay waste, vasta-
EXERCISE 52.
1. Bellum maritimae orae conficiebam. 2. Mercator onrne fruraen- tum agricolarum dlligentium coemet. 3. Duces Gallorum, cupidl rerum novarum, foedus non servant. 4. Longarurn navium magnam partera eodem conduco. 5. Nautae repentlna mors f iliam agricolae permovebit. 6. Leges victae civitatis praetor servabit. 7. Barbaii partem Romanae provinciae crudeliter vastabant. 8. Spes victoriae animos mllitum acriter incitat. 9. Copiae barbarorum exercitum Roraanorum superant. 10. Agricolae equl pabulum edunt. 11. Vir magnae prudentiae rem suscipiet.- 12. Legatos eximiae virtutis ad victSrem mittam.
40 LESSON XXV ill. [43.
LESSON XXVIII.
As this will be the last lesson in which the only cases introduced are the nominative, the accusative, and the genitive, it is particularly desirable that teachers should avail themselves of every means of ascertaining whether their pupils thoroughly understand the various uses of these cases heretofore explained, before they allow them to proceed to sentences which are rendered more complex by the introduction of another case.
EXERCISE 53.
1. By-order (jussu) of the consul, I was leading a large part of the army through the defile. 2. An orator of singular eloquence will plead the cause of the wretched prisoners. 3. Cicero's daughter will go to-the- country to-morrow. 4. The robbers carry-off the riches of the avaricious citizen. 5. Love of glory rouses orators and poets. 6. A mind con- scious of right never fears.
ability, ingenio-, n. pass, transig-
avaricious, avaro- public, publico-
carry-off, abrip(i)- the rest, reliquo-, n
change, muta- right, recto-, n.
conscious, conscio- shape, figura-
defile, augustia-, pL singular, singuldri-
fifteen, quindedm, indecL skilled, perlto-
foot, ped-, m., n. s. pes. sleepless, insomni-
form, forma- surpassing, excellent^*)-
generally, plerumque. thirty, irlgintd, indecL
life, vita- vigorous, acrir mistress, dominatrlo
EXERCISE 54.
1. Omnium animalium formam vincit hominis figura. 2. Yir excellen- tis ingenii pueros regis grammaticam docet. 3. Agricola sapiens, rel publicae peritus, Romanum exercitum servat. 4. Fortuna rerum domi natrlx vitas hominum plerumque mutat. 5. Pompeii fllius acre bellum contra inimlcos patris fortiter gerebat. 6. Reliquum noctis mllites transigebant insomnes. 7. Caesar Aeduos flagitabat frumentum triginta diemm. 8. Milites decimae legionis fossam quindecim pedum tandem perficient.
44.] v LESSON XXIX. 41
LESSON XXIX.
We now come to treat of the dative case.
In many grammars the English prepositions "to" and " for" are said to be the signs of the dative case. But as there are very many instances in which it is proper to employ those words, where the English could not be translated by the dative case in Latin, it will be best here, as we did with the genitive, to ascertain the primitive meaning of the dative case, and then to exhibit its com- monest uses.
44. An examination of the Latin and kindred lan- guages shows that the primary use of the dative case was to express rest at a place, or nearness to a place. This meaning is apparent in many instances, as will be seen below. But the derived meanings are much the most common. The connection of these derived meanings with the primitive one will be clear from the consideration that in general tiling's do not affect us for good or ill, unless they are brought, in some sense, into near con- nection with US. We find accordingly that nearly always this notion of being affected either ibr good or ill is expressed by putting the noun denot- ing the person or thing so affected, into the dative case.
The following are instances in which the dative case would be proper in Latin.
(!.} I remain at Rome, maneo. Romae.*
(2.) I do good to the soldier, mllitl "benefacio.
(3.) The wind hurts the tree, ventus arborl nocet.
(4.) I give the money to the boy, do puero pecuniam.
49. * That Eomae is here the dative or locative is admitted by the best authorities. See Anthon's edition of Zumpt's Grammar, p. 287 ; An- drews and Stoddard's Grammar (1857), p. 221 ; Key's Grammar (1858), p. 183; Donaldson's Latin Grammar, p. 124; Yarronianus, p. 282.
The forms Tarentl, Lesbl, etc., are really remnants of an old dative or locative, Tarentoi, Lesboi. Compare the Greek use of the locative, 4»
42 LESSOR XXIX. [45-49.
The following names are convenient to express each of these :
45. (1.) The dative of place, or dativns loci.
46. (2.) The dative of advantage, ordativu* co ill modi.
47. (3.) The dative of disadvantage, or da tlv us iucoiiiiiiodi.
48. (4.) The dative of transmission, or dativiistraiisniissioiiis.
The three last may perhaps be expressed sufficiently by calling each of them a Dative of interest.
As was done in treating of the genitive, exercises will be omitted in this lesson, to give the teacher an oppor- tunity of impressing the above principles and distinctions upon the understanding of his pupils. It will be ob- served in the third of the above instances that the dative case is often proper in Latin where the English idiom uses a regular transitive verb, and therefore employs no preposition. The verbs which require a dative case in Latin, while the corresponding English ones take the accusative, will be marked in the vocabularies by the syl- lable " dot" printed after them. Sometimes, it will be observed, Latin verbs take a dative and an accusative case at the same time : these, of course, are ah1 transitive verbs, which take their object, as usual, in the accusative case, but require a dative case also in one of the senses given above.
It is hoped that teachers will use the ensuing English exercises to impress these facts and distinctions on the minds of .their pupils, before they have to write any sen- tences.
OIKOI, "at home," with the regular and more recent dative, OLKU. We find, moreover, Tyro, "at Tyre," in Virg. Aen. IV., 36 (Wagner), and Luvinio, "at Lavinium," in Liv. V., 52 (Alschefski). And in the Sd declension there is no doubt that the forms Cartfwgim. Tiburl, etc., are proper, though they were shortened by the poets. We have Tiburl in Cic. ad Alt, XVI.. ?>. 1, (Nobb.e). Of course in the same way. doml, hurnl, mUitiae, run, 6e//7, are locatives ; and as we have seen above that we find the regular dative form for the locative, so good MSS. give alienae domul in Cic. Tusc. L 22, 51., though Orelli reads doml. There are many other instances of so-called genitives, which are best explained as locatives.
49.] LESSON XXX. 43
LESSON XXX.
The following table presents the modes of forming the dative case singular and plural for nouns of various stems.
For Stems Declension as given to make the dative
ending in in the Grammars. Singular. Plural.
1.) any consonant, 3d. add I, add ibUS.
n, 4th. " " " bus.
e, 5th. " " " "
i, Bd.kngthenl, " "
o, 2d. " o, change to is.
a, 1st. add e, making a " "
[diphthong.
NOTE. — In class (2), the u of the stem is generally changed to i before the ending bus
In the following exercises nouns of the first three classes of the above table will be introduced.
EXERCISE 55.
1. "We were selling bread and eggs to the traveller. 2. I gladly grant the remaining part of the village to the army. 3. The wise mer- chant persuades the king. 4. The violence of the storm is injurious to the flowers. 5. We will set-over the affair the skilful workman. 6. The cruel conqueror of the state did not spare the multitude of women and children. 7. The faithless deserter will favor the attempts of the enemy. 8. The joyful multitude gives thanks to the merciful magis- trate.
be injurious to, noce-, dot. merciful, dement(i)-
bread, pani-, m. persuade, persuade-, dot.
cruel, crudeli- set-over, praefic(i)-, dot.
egg, ovo-, n. spare, pare-, dat.
favor, fave-, dat. thanks, gratia-, plur.
grant, conced-, violence, vls(i}-, f. n. s. vis.*
give (as thanks), ag-, village, vico-, m.
* The stem of this word is probably that given in the text, though the singular is inflected as if from vl-.
44 LESSON XXXL [49.
EXERCISE 56.
1. Feroci victor! non favemus. 2. Multitudini captlvorum llberta- tem concedemus. 3. Sapiens princeps senatul facile persuadebit. 4. Yeteri arbori veutl et imbres nocebant. 5. ExercituI sociorum panem et vlnura dabimus. 6. Sacerdotibus gratias agebam. 7. Ferocibus gentibus rex magistratum statim praeficit 8. AudacI exploratori parco.
LESSON XXXI.
In the following exercises examples of the dative made upon t-stems will be introduced. These form the 4th class given in Lesson XXX.
EXERCISE 57.
1. You resisted the brave citizen boldly. 2. The wise inhabitants favored the useful thing. 3. Ye will give great rewards to-the-brave citizen. 4. The prudent consul carefully provides-for all the events of a long war. 5. Our enemies cruelly betray the deserter to-the-power- ful magistrate. 6. I will put-forth a new plan to-the-citizen. 7. Thieves generally prefer nights to-days. 8. The joyful girl will give water to-the-birds.
"betray, prod- prudent, prudent(i)-
night, noct(i}-, f. resist, resist-, dot,
prefer, antepon-, dot. sad, tristi-
providefor, prospic(i)-, dat. useful, utili-
: EXERCISE 58.
1. Tristi patri fllius crudelis non prospicit. 2. FortI cohortl mollia cubHia incolae stemunt. 3. Honestae mortl turpitudinem non antepo- nebat. 4. Saevi lupl ovilibus nocent. 5. Densum nemus avibus amplam domum praebet. 6. ClassI Romanorum hiems valde nocebat. 7. Cos- tra hostibus turpiter prodes. 8. Civibus omnia frumenta vendimus.
49.] LESSON XXXII. 45
LESSON XXXII.
In the following exercises dative cases made upon o- stems will be introduced, forming the 5th of the classes given hi the table in Lesson XXX.
EXERCISE 59.
1. The brave nations will willingly submit to-the-Roman people. 2. The general sets the bold soldier over-the-hostile town. 3. Unfortu- nate prisoners often prefer death to-sad exile. 4. Ye will not betray the hostages to-the-enraged barbarians. 5. The slowness of the enemy will bring safety to-our allies. 6. The cruel king was staying at- Gabii. 7. The army will not trust to-the-foolish general. 8. The centurions are selecting a place suitable for-the-camp.
attend to. stude-, dat. report, nuntia- bring to, aflfer-, dat. select, delig- exile, exsilio-, n. set-against, oppon-, dat. fiery, igneo- slowness, tarditdt- Gabii, Gabio-, m. plur. stay, remain, mane- hostile, hostlli- submit, obtempera- often, saepe. suitable, idoneo- place, loco-, m. (also n. in pi.) trust to, believe, cred-, dat.
EXERCISE 60.
1. Legibus clvitatis diligenter studeo. 2. Improbls puefis magister nunquam credebat. 3. Spem salQtis fesso militl adventus navis afife re- bat. 4. Praefectus multum pabulum hostlli oppido imperabit. 5. Pulcro flori sol igneus nocet. 6. Laetus explorator adventum exerci- tus miseris clvibus nuntiat. 7. Miles ligneum scutum tells hostium opponebat. 8. Diem audacl conatui idoneam statim constituam.
46 LESSON XXXIT. [49.
LESSON XXXIII.
In the following exercises datives made upon ct-stems will be introduced, forming the 6th of the classes given in Lesson XXX.
EXERCISE 61.
1. You will buy clothes suitable for your beautiful daughter. 2. The army of Hannibal remained at-Capua many mouths. 3. The conquered army will make a departure like a flight (dat.). 4. The foot-soldiers bring assistance to-the-troops of horse-soldiers. 5. I will impose severe labors on-the-slothful maid-servants. 6. The consul remained in-the- couutry (dat.) during (per) the whole assembly. 7. The general remained the whole night at-his-own-house (suae doml). 8. I promise many beautiful things to the girls.
assembly, comitio-, n. pL month, mensi-, m.
assistance, subsidio-, n, promise^ promitt-
Capua. Capuar Rome, Roma-
departure, profection- slothful, pigro-
Hannibal, Hannibal-, m. troop, tvrma-
impose, impo^dai. your, tuo-
EXERCISE 62.
1. Fessi legionis milites turmls equitum aegre resistunt. 2. Capuae multos equos et multum frumentum coemo. 3. Praefectus feracibus insulls frumentum pabulumque imperat 4. Potentes principes regmae libenter parent. 5. Ignavi consules Romae mauebant. 6. Stultis incolis non facile persuades. 7. Victi mllites gladios et pila legatis tradunt. 8. Principes civitatis agriculturae student. 9. Consul suam domum venit. 10. Consul suae doml manet. 11. Tarquiuius Gabios fugit. 12. Tarquinius Gabiis nianebat.
LESSON XXXIV.
All the forms of the dative case have now been treated of, and the teacher will, it is hoped, be careful in these concluding exercises to see that his pupils have com- pletely mastered the principles and the forms already given.
5O, 51-1 LESSON XXXIV. 47
It will have been observed that many of the verbs which are followed by a dative case are compound ones. This general rule had best be learned.
50. Verbs compounded with prefixes which denote " nearness to?" arc followed by a dative case.
51. The datwus incommodl is often used in speaking of acts done to a person or thing, where we should rather use the genitive or the ablative, as,
Linguam ei praecidam, I will cut his tongue off (for him). Homini vitam eripit, He takes the mail's life ai0ay(for him).
EXERCISE 63.
1. The foolish people often give (sing.) honors to-unworthy (men). 2. We owe reverence to-our parents. 3. New countries will-be-added (acccd-) soon to the Roman empire. 4. "We prefer the virtues of the soul to-the-goods (bono-) of the body. 5. The orator will place-upon the free necks of the citizens a yoke of slavery. 6. The consul exposes (his) life to-the-missiles of the enemy.
affection, caritat- innocent, innocent(i)-
advantage, utilitat- neck, cervlc-, f.
lite, morde- old-age, senectut-
&p^ erip(i)-, put-behind, i. e., ) nns.thahp duck, anat-. f. esteem-less, \ p(
empire, imperio-, n. reverence, reverentia-
expose, objic(i)- slavery, servitut-
finger, digito-, m. stratagem, dolo-, m.
free, libero- take-away, adim-
give-way, succumb- tender, tenero-
hen, galllna- unworthy, indigno-
honor, honor- . virtue, virtut- impress, imprim-
EXERCISE 64.
1. Mors sola innocentem fortunae eripit. 2. Imperator Hbertatera civibus statim adimet. 3. Tarquinius eventum doll Gabils expecta- bat. 4. Bom magistii utilia praecepta mentibus tenerls fideliter impri- munt. 5. Iratae feles digitOs puellis mordent. 6. Anatum ova galllnis saepe supponimus. 7. Vir magnus senectuti nunquam succum- bet 8. Consul filii caritatem publicae QtilitatI posthabet.
48 LESSON XXXV. "[52-58.
LESSON XXXV.
The last case to be treated of is the abla- tive. The name given to the case implies that the grammarians supposed the characteristic meaning of it to be connected with the act of removing or separating one thing from another. This, it will be seen, is often the force of the ablative. But there are several uses of it which cannot be explained by this notion, and in which this case is closely allied to the dative, in its proper sense, as denoting locality or rest in a place. And, as the ablative has always, in Latin, the same form as the dative in the plural, and not seldom in the singular, it is thought that the case, as it exists, may be in reality the result of the gradual approximation in form of cases themselves originally different ; namely, the dative and a true ablative (or removal-case) existing in the oldest pe- riod of the language. However this may be, it is only necessary here to state the commonest uses of the abla- tive, and to illustrate them by examples ; by the help of which, and the English sentences in the ensuing exer- cises, it is hoped that a sufficiently clear conception of the proper mode of employing this case may be obtained, before the pupils proceed any further.
The ablative case then is used to express —
53. (1.) The place where a thing is done, called the ablative of locality.
54. (2.) The time when a thing is done, called the ablative of TIIHE WHEff.
55. (3.) The manner in which a thing is done, called the ablative of manner.
56. (4.) The circumstances under which a thing is done, called the ablative of circumstances.
57. (5.) The respect in which an assertion holds true, called the ablative of limitation.
5§. (6.) The condition or quality of a thing, called the ablative of DESCRIPTION.
59-64.J LESSON XXXV. 49
59. (7.) The point from which a removal takes place, called the ablative of separation.
60. (8.) The source or cause from which a thing arises, called the ab- lative of origin -
61. (9.) The V wins or instrument by which a thing is done, called the ablative of MJEAWS.
62. (10.) The price at which a thing is bought or valued, called the ab- lative of PJRICJE.*
Very frequently the force of the ablative in these va- rious uses is rendered more distinct by the use of the prepositions, which are given below. But in the case of those which are printed in capitals a preposition is sel- dom, if ever, employed. The particular facts connected with this subject must be learned from the grammars or from observation. But the following rules are sufficiently clear to deserve mention here :
63. The ablative of locality nearly always requires a preposition unless an adjective is joined with it.
64. The ablative of description always requires an adjective with it, without a preposition; cf. the note on the descriptive genitive in § 40.
The following may be taken as examples of each of the above uses : The ablative of
1. ^Locality. Opportune loco castra posuit. He pitched the camp in a favorable place.
2. Time wlieil. Eadem nocte templum deflagravit. The same night- the temple was burnt
3. ITIanner. Silentio copias eduxit. He led out the troops in silence.
4. Circumstances. Magno comitatu legatl veniunt. The am- bassadors come with a great company.
5. It imitation. Lepore omnibus praestitit. In wit he excelled all
6. Description. Rex statQra fuit humilL The king was of small stature.
7. Separation. Corintho fugit. He fled from Corinth.
8. Origin. Mercurius Jove natus. Mercury born of Jupiter.
9. Means. Tauii corriibus se tutantur. Bulls defend themselves with their horns.
10. JPrice. Vile est viginti minis. It is cheap at twenty minac.
* The first six of the above uses are supposed to belong to the ab- lative in consequence of its relation to the dative. The rest are thought to be derived from the notion of separation or removal. 5
50 LESSON XXXYI. [65-67.
60. It has been said that the ablative case is very often joined with prepositions in some of the foregoing uses. The principal prepositions that are joined with the ablative are the following, with the annexed meanings :
a, ab or abs, from, by. e or ex, out of.
absque, without. prae, before.
cum, along with, with. pro, before, instead of.
de, down from, concerning. sine, without.
66. The following also govern the ablative, with the annexed meanings, when they do not imply
motion. Otherwise they are usually followed by the accusative.
in, in. subter, under.
sub, under. super, above.
This lesson has now extended to a considerable length ; but it was thought best to put what was to be said in one place. No exercises will be given here, that teachers may have an opportunity of impressing these particulars on the minds of their pupils. The sentences in the ensuing Eng- lish exercises will, it is hoped, supply a sufficient number of examples for this purpose.
LESSON XXXVI.
671. The following table presents in one view the mode of forming the ablative case singular and plural.
to form the M ""* ^ *lur'
|
)-a consonant, 3d. add e. add ifous, i, 3d. change I to e, foils. H, 4th. lengthen stem-vowel, " " e, 5th. " " " " |
||
|
o, |
2d. |
change O to is. |
|
a, |
1st " |
i( .. .» .. it |
6§.] LESSON XXXVI. 51
6§. NOTE. — 1st. Many words with i-stems, particularly neuter nouns and all adjective§, make the ablative singular by lengthening the stem-vowel like other vowel -stems.
2d. Adjectives printed like ferac(i}- generally make the ablative sin- gular by lengthening the i.
3d. The ablative plural is always the same in form as the dative plural.
In the following exercises words with any of the above stems will be introduced, as there is so much similarity in the mode of formation that it is thought no difficulty will be found in the application of the rules.
EXERCISE 65.
1. I will send all the women and children ont-of the city by-night. 2. The bold hunter will wound the wild-boar with-a-spear. 3. In-the- course-of (de) the third watch the consul leads-out (his) army from the camp. 4. The stag runs-down from the mountain with-great quick- ness. 5. The victory will cost the Carthaginians (dot.) much blood and many wounds. 6. The bold shepherd presses the snake with-(his)- foot. 7. He was buying the books at-a-small price. 8. I shall escape out-of the wood along-with the guide.
blood, sanguin-, m. n. s. sanguis. quickness, cekritat-
book, libro-, m. run-down, decurr-
Carthaginian, Poeno-, m. small, parvo-
cost (prop, stand), sta- spear, hasta-
escape, effug(i)- third, tertia-
lead out, educ- watch, vigilia- price, pretio-, n.
EXERCISE 66.
1. Ex flumine in silvam celeriter fugiemus. 2. In litore turris stabat. 3. Celeritate periculum effugiam. 4. Cum custode ex carcere clam exibis. 5. Piscatorum uxores in monte stabunt. 6. Nigrum anguem sine timore tangebas. 7. Multitudine telorum hostes prohi- bebamus. 8. Nostrae copiae a litore eras discedent.
62 LESSON XXXVm. [68.
LESSON XXXVII.
EXERCISE 67.
1. We will encamp in-a-level place. 2. At Caesar's coming into Gaul, the Aedui held the chief-power. 3. I will easily persuade the slave by-the-hope of liberty. 4. You will soon learn from the brave inhabitant concerning the danger of the lieutenant and the legion. 5. At the third hour of the day we inform the consul of (de) the destruc- tion of the cohort.
Caesar, Caesar- Gaul, Gallia-
chief-power, principafat- hour, hora-
coming, adi-entu- inform, certior- fac(i)-
destruction, interitu- learn, cognosc-
encamp, consld- level, aequo-
EXERCISE 68.
1. Praefectum de adventu exercitus epistola certiorem facio. 2. Milites ex nave in mare audacter desiliunt. 3. Hostes cum tertia pane copiarum trans fliiruen considebant. 4. Prudens imperator castra aperto loco ponet. 5. Dicta crudelium latronum mulieres magno dolore afficient.
LESSON XXXYIII.
EXERCISE 69.
1. Te were surrounding our foot-soldiers with cavalry and chariots at-the-same-time. 2. Meanwhile the prudent centurion surrounds the camp on (ex) every side with a high rampart. 3. The messenger carries the report of (de) our victory to the city with-incredible quickness. 4. Ambassadors often came from the citizens to Caesar about (de) peace. 5. The shepherds generally lived on-milk and flesh, and clothed (their) bodies with-skins of animals.
ambassador, legato- meanwhile, interea.
chariot, essedo-, n. milk, loot-, n.
clothe, vesti- rampart, vallo-, n, and m,
flesh, caron-, C (o omitted ex- report, fama-
[cept in nom. s.) side, part(i)-, £
incredible, incredibili- skin, petti-, £ live, viv-
69.] LESSON XXXIX. 53
EXERCISE 70.
1. Aeduos praecipuo honore semper habebam, pro antlqua et con- stant! fide in Romanum populum. 2. Repenting, re perterritl, principes barbarorum trans latum flumen in suos fines magno cum periculo re- cedent. 3. Prima luce castra ex aequo loco movebit. 4. Homines constant! fide collaudo. 5. Hora die! circiter tertia laetl incolae de victoria nostra ex fugitive cognoscent.
We have now spoken of all the cases of nouns except the vocative, or the case used in speaking to a person. This case is invariably the same as the nominative, except in the singular of the 2d declension (o-stems) ; and of these, those ending in ro-, which make their nom. sing. in er, have the same form for the vocative and the nominative, as have all neuter nouns. On this account, the vocative case has been omitted in the tables of declen- sion, as causing, if inserted there, needless repetition. It will have been learned from the table of the 2d declension, that in the only case where the vocative differs from the nominative, it is made by changing o of the stem into e. Proper names ending in io, and the words filio-, " son," and genio, "guardian spirit," contract the letters ie of the vocative into i, as Virgilio- makes Virgili, filio-, fill, and genio, gem.
As there is little peculiarity in the use of this case, it is not thought necessary to insert any exercises upon it.
LESSON XXXIX.
69. As adjectives denote qualities as possessed by the things represented by nouns, and those qualities are pos- sessed in different degrees, it is necessary to have modes of indicating this : and these forms or modes of expres- sion are called in grammar " degrees of compar- ison." What these are, and the mode of forming them in English, will be at once seen from the following sen- tences : 5*
54 LESSON XXXIX. [7O-73.
.Charles is iaU. Positive degree.
Charles is taller, or more tall than John. Comparative degree. Charles is the tallest of the family. Superlative degree.
Of course the Latin language must have means of ex- pressing these same distinctions. We must now show what these are:
70. The general rule in Latin is this —
If the stem end in a vowel, omit it, and then
The Comparative is made by adding the ending ior-
The Superlative i»*iuio-
To this general rule we have the following exceptions :
71. (1.) If the stem end in s, r, ro, fi, the super- lative ending is rilUO , and if the r is not preceded by e, an e must be inserted there ; note also, that if the stem end in S the S is changed to r.
72. (2.) For the words
•Hi-, difficili-, } nil-, dissimili-, > icili-, hwmiU-, )
facili-,
simili-, dissimili-, [• the superlative ending is liliio-
gracili
73. (3.) If the stem end in one of the verbal suffixes dico-,Jico-,
The Comparative ending is eiitior- The Superlative ending is eiitissimo-
EXAMPLES. — GENERAL RULE.
Comparative. Superlative.
alto-, "high, altior-, higher, altistimo-. highest.
audac(i)-, bold,, audacior-, bolder, audacissimo-, boldest.
1ST. EXCEPTION.
pauper-, poor, pauperior-, poorer, pauperrimo-, poorest.
acri-, keen, acrior-, keener, acerrilllO-, keenest.
vetes-, old, veterior-, older, veterrimo-, oldest.
pulcro-, fair, pulcrior-, fairer, pulcerrimo-, fairest.
74, 75.]
LESSON" XL.
55
2D. EXCEPTION.
facili-, easy, facilior-, easier,
humili-, low, humilior-, lower,
3D. EXCEPTION.
maledico-, scurrilous, maledicetltior-, munifico-, bountiful, munificeiltior-,
facilliino-, most easy. humilliino-. lowest.
malediceiitissimo-.
muriificeiitissiiiio-.
EXERCISE 71.
1. I see the lofty tower. 2. You see the loftier tower. 3. He sees the loftiest tower. 4. We send a faithful slave into the village. 5. Ye have a more faithful slave in the town. 6. They send the most faithful slaves with their (suo-} children. 7. I help the poor beggar. 8. You kill the poorer beggars with the swords. 9. The king drives out the poorest beggars from the state.
EXERCISE 72.
1. Rex pulcrae puellae parcit. 2. Mulier pulcriorem avem in horto servat. 3. Pulcerrimum agrum incolae parvo pretio vendebas. 4. Facilem rem suscipio. 5. Humiliorem navem magna celeritate con- scendet. 6. Simillimo conatu difficile negotium conficiemus. 7. Ho- minem lingua maledica non arnamus. 8. Virura munificentiorem omnes urbis incolae ingentl gaudio collaudant. 9. Rex munificeutis- simus aurum et argentum civibus dat.
LESSON XL.
74. The rules given in the preceding lesson need only this single modification —
We have for neuter adjectives the comparative ending ios. " nom. and ace. sing. ius.
Of course the s of the stem is changed to r before all syllabic endings. The complete declension of a compar- ative adjective is given at page 20/, and should now be learned by heart. ty
75. We may here introduce the principal words which form the comparative and superlative irregularly :
66 LESSON XL. [76.
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
masc. neut.
bono-, good, melior-, melios-, optimo-.
malo-, bad, P^jor-, pejos-, pessimo-.
magno, great, major-, majcs-, maximo-.
multo-, miich, many, plur- (plural), plus-, plurimo-.
parvo-, small, minor-, minos-, miuimo-.
76. There are some adjectives also which have only the comparative and superlative in common use ; of these the positive is either an adverb or a preposition, or an ad- jective used in a peculiar sense, or as a noun. The prin- cipal ones are here given :
Positive.
citra, prep.
extra, prep, (extero-)
infra, prep, (infero)
intra. prep.
prope, prep.
post, prep, (postero-)
supra, prep, (supero-)
ultra, prep.
pro, prep.
Comparative.
citerior-, on this side, exterior-, outer, inferior, lower, interior-, inner, propior-, nearer, posterior-, later, superior-, upper, ulterior-, further, prior-, former,
Superlative.
citimo-.
extreme-.
infimo-, or Irno-.
in tire o-, or Imo-.
proximo-.
postremo-.
supremo-, or summo-.
ultimo-.
primo-.
EXERCISE 73.
1. The beggars will quickly go across the broader river. 2. The swifter animals will flee out-of the wood. 3. The heavier load wearies the beast-of-burden. 4. The more recent wound was tormenting the soldier. 5. The greater danger will frighten the common-people.
EXERCISE 74.
1. acrius certamen socios et auxilia fatlgat. 2. Sapientissimus Iggatus nobilius facinus perficit. 3. Gravius vulnus fortior centurio accipit. 4. Yelocius animal cangs vix capient 5. Minus amentum agricola vendet.
[These exercises are made purposely shorter than usual, that time may be had for exercising the pupils thoroughly in these forms. If they are learned well once they will present no further difficulty ; and it is recommended that in future, when the stems of the Latin words are read aloud, whenever a comparative or superlative degree occurs, all the three degrees be systematically given.]
TT.j LESSON XLIL 57
LESSON XLI.
EXERCISE 75.
1. You were selling the worse horse to the foolish traveller. 2. With better fortune we will seize the larger island. 3. The enemy will set-on-fire the villages nearest to-their (suo-~) territories. 4. On-the- first days of the war we conquer the enemy with-a-very-great slaughter. 5. The orator will plead the cause of the prisoner with-very-many words. 6. The enemy were holding the top-of (summo- adj.) the mountain.
EXERCISE 76.
1. Summa difficultate Iatr5nes in spelunca capimus. 2. Ultima hiemis parte Caesar per citeriorem provinciam iter faciebat, et conven- tus agebat 3. Pessimo exemplo improbis proditoribus parcetis. 4. Minima spe salutis miser captlvus ex carcere ad litus fugiebat. 5. Yir summa virtute et prudentia rem difficiliorem perficit. 6. In extremo ponte turrim constituit. 7. Extrema hieme Pompeius bellum ingena parabat. 8. Consul optimus mllites ex angustils ducit.
LESSON XLIL
As adverbs denote the presence of qualities, so we want to express different degrees of those qualities. We have, therefore, comparative and superlative degrees formed on adverbs. Their mode of formation is generally very- simple. The following rules comprise nearly all cases :
77. (1.) The comparative adverb is the same in form as the neuter nominative singular of the comparative of the adjective from which it is derived ; and even has such a form when it is not derived from an adjective.
(2.) The superlative adverb is formed by changing the o of the superlative adjective into e ; and even has this form when there is no corresponding adjective.
68 LESSON XLm. [78.
EXAMPLES.
Adjective. Positive advert. Comparative adverb. Superlative adverb.
late-, broad, late, latiua, latissime.
bouo-, good, bene, melius, optime.
acri-, keen, acriter, acrius, acerrime.
audac(i)-, bold, audacter, audacius, audacissime.
saepe, often, saepius, saepissime.
EXERCISE 77.
1. The very powerful (superl.) nations will carry-on the war more- keenly. 2. The braver scouts ascend the hill more-eagerly. 3. The horse-soldier wounds the commander more-severely with a spear. 4. The fugitives escape out-of the prison into the wood more-quickly. 5. I shall more-easily overcome the slothful chief. 6. Ye were more- mercifully sparing the inhabitants of the conquered province.
carry on, ger- prison, career-, m.
learnedly, docte. severely, graviter.
mercifully, clementer. bountifully, largiter.
EXERCISE 78.
1. Vir acerriml ingenii puerum doctius monet. 2. Diligentiorea piscatores retia cupidius contrahunt. 3. Ampliorem agrum pauperi colono largissime das. 4. Eques ferocl animo impetum acriorem facit. 5. Magister longiorem librum magno studio scribit 6. Sapientior sen- tentia majore gaudio omnes senatores aflficit. 7. Prima luce miseram multitudinem dux improbus deserit. 8. Tertia hora die! mllites ex omnibus castrorum portis cum magno clamore audacius erumpunt.
LESSON XLIIL
78. The three imperfect tenses of the active verb have been, it is hoped, perfectly learned. As the verb es-, " be," is very irregular, the three imperfect tenses of it will be here given to be committed to memory.
79.] LESSON
Pres. Imperf. Past Imperf. Future Imperf.
I 1. sum, lam, eram, I was, ero, I shall be,
Sing. •< 2. es, you are, thou art, eras, you were, eris, you will be,
( 3. est, he is. erat, he was. erit, he will be.
i 1. sumus, we are, eramus, we were, erimus, we shall be,
Plur. < 2. estis, ye are, eratis, ye were, eritis, ye will be,
( 3. sunt, they are. erant, they were. erunt, they will be.
79. It is clear that this verb differs from all the ones hitherto used, in that it does not (ordinarily) make a com- plete assertion; for instance, it would be obviously absurd to say, "The slave was" without adding some noun or adjective to say what he was. This verb requires always, (unless it is used in the sense " exist") some ad- jective or noun with it, which is said to complete its meaning*.* The word so added is always in the same case (and, if possible, in the same gender and number), as the subject of the verb ; in other words, the verb " CS-"
has the same case after it as before it.
EXERCISE 79.
1. Faithful slaves are worthy of-praise. 2. Of-all friends you-are the dearest 3. A greater herd is in the meadow. 4. Virginia was the fairest of-all girls. 5. Among the Helvetii Orgetorix was by far tho noblest and wealthiest (man). 6. The camp is placed on-the higher ridge. 7. You are wicked slaves and worthy of-all punishment. 8. The judge will be merciful to-the-other prisoners, but will visit the de- serters with-the-utmost punishments.
but, sea*, by far, longe. dear, caro-
Helvetii, Helvetia-, m. plur. higher, superior- meadow, prato-, n. Orgetorix, Orgetorig-, m. other, alio- placed, posito-
punishment, supplicio-, n. ridge, jugo-, n. utmost, ultimo- visit, affic(i)- Virginia, Virginia- wealthy, divet-, comp. dltior-,
superl. dltissimo- worthy, digno-, abl.
* There are many verbs besides es- whose meaning is incomplete, such as "become," "seem," "be made," "be elected," "be thought," &c., &c. These have, of course, a completing adjective or noun just as es- does. These verbs are called by Dr. Kennedy Copulative verb§.
60 LESSON XLIV. [§O, 81.
EXERCISE 80.
1. Equus est omnium animalium velocissimus. 2. Amplissirm horti sunt regis ditissimi. 3. Amicus eram Helvetils, et surumo studio fines sociorum defendebam. 4. la nostra patria homines sunt llberi, et legibus virtutis ultro parent. 5. VI tempestalis naves erant sauciae. 6. Viri magnae virtutis amplls honoribus sunt dignl. 7. Vita brevia est, ars longa. 8. Capuae multae erant deliciae, et milites Hanni- balis libenter ibi manebant.
LESSON XLIY.
80. In the 2d sentence of the preceding exercise we had the genitive regis u$,e<i possessively with the verb sunt. The dative also is very commonly used with es- to ex- press the iiossessor of any thing, the thing possessed being the subject of the verb. But there is a difference in the meaning of the genitive and dative, used in this way :
If the genitive be used, the notion of the possessor is made prominent ;
If the dative be used, the notion of the thing possessed is made prominent.
An example will make this clear : We can say,
Hie hortus regis est. This garden is the king's (and not some other person's).
Hie hortus regl est. This garden belongs to the king (as well as other things).
8 1 . "We may mention here another use of the dative case which could not conveniently be introduced before. The dative is often employed to denote the end or result of an action or a state. As,
VirtutSs hominibus decorl sunt. Virtues are an honor to men.
Hunc locum domidlio deligunt. They choose this place for a residence.
82, 83.] LESSON XLY. 61
EXERCISE 81.
1. The farmer had six sons (say : there were six sons to the farmer). 2. Our sou has many books. 3. The greedy sea is a destruction (dat.) to sailors. 4. The poor have small resources. 5. Caesar sends five cohorts as-aid (dat) to-the-legion. 6. Cicero had a brother Quintus.
anxiety, cura- greedy, avido-
destruction, exitio-j n. owner, domino-, m.
disgrace, dcdecos- Quintus, Quinto-
EXERCISE 82.
1. Domus ampla saepe domino dedecori est. 2. Quartam legionem praesidio castris relinquam. 3. Ignavis hominibus multa sunt curae. 4. Omnibus sunt memoria et amor scientiae. 5. Pueris dlligentibus omnis kora est emolumento. 6. Piscatoribus erant multa retia.
LESSON XLY.
Many of the sentences in the preceding exercises have been imperfect in this respect, that the comparative de- gree has been often used, but the object with which the comparison is made has not been mentioned. In English, this object is always preceded by the word "than." The same connection is expressed in Lathi in one or other of two ways.
8£. 1st. The word "than" is expressed by "quam," and the second noun is placed in the same case as the first.
83. 2d. The word "than" is untranslated, and the sec- ond noun is placed in the ablative case.
EXAMPLES.
Europe is smaller than Asia. (1.) Europa minor est quam Asia.
(2.) Europa minor est Asia.
The daughter is fairer than the (1.) Fllia estpulcrior quam mater mother. (2.) Fllia est pukrior matre.
NOTE. — The ablative must not be used instead of quam, unless the first noun is in the nom. or the ace. case. 6
62 LESSON XLYL [84, 85.
EXERCISE 83.
1. The sun is larger than the earth. 2. The earth is smaller than the sun. 3. The swan is larger than the goose. 4. The goose is smaller than the swan. 5. Stags are swifter than dogs. 6. The unfortunate soldiers embark-on the ships more eagerly (than was prudent). 7. The boys receive larger rewards (than they deserved). 8. The third legion will ascend the hill more quickly (than they ought).
84. NOTE 1st. — In the last three sentences it will be seen that the object with which the comparison is made is omitted: and the whole notion would generally be expressed in English by substituting the word " too" for the word " ?no?-e." In future, then, such expressions as " too eagerly," are to be expressed by tJie comparative degree.
85. 2d. The word " quam" when used before a superlative degree, makes it mean " as much as possible." Thus : quam dlligentissime means "as carefully as possible;" quam gravissiml labores means "labors as severe as possible."
EXERCISE 84.
1. Nostra patria potentior est quam tua. 2. Grnavus puer magistro doctior est. 3. Majora praemia ignavi mllites accipiunt, quam nautae dlligentissiml. 4. Labores quam gravissimos pigrls miuistris imponam. 5. Quam plurimils nigras oves mercator coemebat. 6. Probus magis- tratus audacl latrone erat pigrior. 7. Nihil est amabilius virtute. 8. Sunt domesticae fortitudines non inferiores militaribus.
LESSON XLYI.
We have now given the principal rules in regard to the formation and uses of the different inflections of sub- stantives and adjectives. It is hoped that these will now present no difficulty, and that the pupils are well prepared to learn the remaining tenses of the indicative mood, of the active verb, and also the personal and other pro- nouns. In future, no special vocabularies will be given for the exercises? The words that occur must be looked for in the general vocabulary at the end of the book, which also includes all the words hitherto employed.
86, 87.] LESSON XLYI. 63
8G. We have so far only made use of those forms of the verb which describe actions as incomplete or un- finished. But it is clearly necessary to the perfection of language, that it should have means to describe also finished or complete actions. In English, tenses to ex- press this notion are formed by the help of the auxiliary verb " have." But in Latin the mode of making them is similar to, though not the same as, that in which the im- perfect tenses were seen to be made.
The following examples will show the form and the meaning of the three perfect tenses in English :
1. Present perfect. "7" have come to pay the money." Clearly, here the action of coming is spoken of as finished, but as finished only in the time now present.
2. Past perfect. " I had come before you left." Here the action of coming is spoken of as finished before a certain time now past.
3. Future perfect. "I shall have come back before night." Here the action of coming is spoken of as being likely to be finished by a certain time now future.
87. In Latin these meanings are expressed in general,
1st, by an alteration in the verb-stem.
2d, by a distinct set of person or tense endings.
Nearly all Latin verbs, in the course of their conjuga- tion exhibit their root in three forms ; of these,
The 1st is the stem on which are formed the im- perfect tenses, Active and Passive.
The 2d is the stem on which are formed the per- fect tenses, Active.
The 3d is the stem on which are formed the per- fect tenses, Passive.
If these three forms of the stem be known, the whole conjugation presents not the least difficulty. And as this knowledge can be best attained by boys by continual observation, it is recommended that in future, when read- ing aloud the stems of each sentence, they should in all cases be made to give the three forms of the "verb-stem.
64 LESSON XLVI. [§§, §9.
when there are such, though in the exercises the different modes of formation will be explained ; and thus the knowl- edge acquired in fragments may be collected under gen- eral heads. The three forms will always be given in the final vocabulary.
88. We are going now to speak of the perfect active tenses ; and therefore must first mention the 2d form of the verb-stem, which may be called the second stem, and is marked " 2" in the vocabulary. Most verbs with a- stems and i-stems (forming the 1st and 4th conjugations), make the second-stem by adding the ending -v-. Thus,
1st Stem. 2d Stem.
ama-, love, amav-
audi-, hear, audlv-
The present perfect, like the present imperfect, has no te>*se-ending, but has a distinct set of person end- ings attached directly to the 2d stem.
The past perfect has the tense-ending era- attached to the 2d stem, and then takes the regular person-endings given in ihejirst column in Lesson VII.
The future perfect has the ending er- attached to the 2d stem, and then the regular person-endings given in the second column in Lesson VII., except that the 3d per- son plur. has illt instead of uiit.
The following table gives these endings united to each other ; any verb may be conjugated in either of these tenses, by attaching the endings here given to the second- stem.
89. 2. Audiv-, heard. 2. Amav-, loved.
I. Pres. ( 1. i, I have,
] 2. isti, thou ha
f 3. It, • ne nas.
( 1 iimis, we have,
Plur. \ 2. istis, ye have,
».( 3.
. Sing. 2. isti, thou hast, or you have, prescilt
grunt, or ere, they have.
90]
LESSON XLYII.
65
|
2. Audiv- |
||||
|
2. Amav-. |
||||
|
II |
Past. ( 1. eram, |
I had, 1 |
||
|
Sing. •< 2. eras, |
thou hadst, or you had, |
• ¥»«•«£ |
||
|
( 3. erat, il. eramus, 2. erati§, |
he had. \ we had, ye had, |
M. €M>9mf perfect teiise. |
||
|
3. eraut, |
they had. J |
|||
|
IIL |
Put. |
1. ero, |
I shall have. "| |
|
|
£w</. Pfor. |
2. eris, 3. erit, 1. erimus, 2. eriti§, |
thou wilt have, he will have, we shall have, ye will have, |
Future - perfect tense. |
|
|
3. erint, |
they will have. |
No exercises are given in this lesson, as it is thought the pupils will have done well if they have mastered the statements and tables given above.
LESSON XLYII.
00. In the table given in the last lesson the first tense was called " the present perfect," and the present tense of the English verb " have" was used to translate it. But the same forms are also used in Latin to describe an ac- tion as having occurred in some indefinite point of past time. In this use the tense is called " aorist," which means " indefinite." The difference will be perceived on comparing the two sentences :
1. I have come to pay you the money. Present perfect.
2. I came to pay the money. Aorist.
It is clear that the second of these expressions would be equally correct if the action spoken of occurred yes- terday, last week, last month, or last year. But the former can only be used if the action spoken of occurred to-day. In Latin both these senses are expressed by the same form, by adding to the 2d stem the endings given in § 89, I. 6*
66 LESSON XLVriL [91, 92.
In the following exercises examples of the present per- fect or aorist tense will be introduced, made from stems in a and i, which, as was said in § 88, for the most part make the second stein by adding the ending -v-.
EXERCISE 85.
1. I have called-down the soldier from the rampart. 2. You praised the man of-constant fidelity. 3. The mother has adorned (her) daughter with the most beautiful clothes. 4. "We have-built the new fortifications with-the-greatest diligence. 5. Ye hastened within the house. 6. They have changed their oldest customs.
EXERCISE 86.
1. Ivimus in urbem cum praefecto equitatQs. 2. Adventure exer- citus imperatori nuntiavisti. 3. Maesti mllites cadavera sociorum in agro sub umbrosls lagls sepellvere. 4. Clamores latronum procul au- dlvimus. 5. Postero die munltum oppidum quam fortissime oppugna- vistL 6. Incolae miserae provinciae Romano populo multos annos servivei*unt 7. Quam maximam vim frumentl quaestor parvo pretio comparavit 8. Lltus ornne classibus late occupavistL
LESSON XLYIII.
9 1 . Frequently in the perfect tenses made by the end- ing -v, a shortening or contraction takes place, the letter -v being omitted. As this is not a matter of any difficulty, it is sufficient here to say that occasionally such forms will be introduced into the exercises for reading, that the teacher may have an opportunity of explaining them. But they need never be employed in the writing exercises.
O2. Nearly all the sentences used so far have been simple, i. e., they have consisted of one subject and one predicate. But simple sentences are often combined to- gether to make what is called a compound sentence, and the words used to indicate this combination are called conjunctions. The simple sentences so combined
92.] LESSON XLYIII. 67
are often co-ordinate, i. e., each stands on the same level, as it were, in the speaker's thought • neither is given as in any way dependent upon the other. Thus, the two simple sentences, "His father is dead," "his mother is living," may be combined into one compound sentence : "His father is dead but his mother is living."
The conjunctions which join sentences together in this co-ordinate way will be called by the name " conjunction" without any distinguishing adjective.
In the following exercises some such compound sen- tences will be used.
NOTE. — Some verbs with, e-stems also make the 2d stern by the end- ing -v-.
EXERCISE 87.
1. The legion quickly fortified the camp with a ditch, and waited-for the approach of the enemy. 2. The commander condemned the miser- able deserters on-accouut-of (their) cowardice. 3. The women, by (their) prayers, softened the enraged mind of the king. 4. Ye punished the wicked fugitives, and praised the diligence of the guards. 5. We have at length overcome the difficulties of the long march. 6. You have- beeu-slaves for-a-long-time to-the-Romans.
EXERCISE 88.
1. Sulla non solum in vivos saeviit, sed etiam in mortuos. 2. Pos- tero die Galll multo majoribus copils castra oppugnarunt, fossamque complerunt. 3. Reliquo certamine noster exercitus hostes facile su- poravit. 4. Locum duplicl altissimo muro muniistis, et praeacutas trabes in muro collocastis. 5. Pratrem ad horam nonam in litore ex- pectastl. 6. Nautae cantus Sirenum non audierunt, sed rex mlram vocis dulcedinem auribus cupide captavit. 7. Equites fugae turpitu- dinem virtute deleverunt. 8. Omnia perlcula multos annos vltavimus.
68 LESSON XLIX. [93.
LESSON XLIX.
OS. We must now speak of the words called pro- nouns.
Pronouns, as their name would lead us to expect, are generally said to be words used instead of nouns, in order to avoid the too frequent repetition of the same noun. But upon this we may remark that —
1st. The frequent repetition of the same pronoun with- out offence, shows that mere repetition is not a thing in itself considered objectionable.
2d. It will be found extremely difficult, if not impos- sible, to represent, even by complex combinations of nouns, the thoughts and relations which are expressed simply and naturally by the aid of the words called pro- nouns.
Instead, therefore, of attempting to show how each of the words so called is entitled to the name in its literal sense, we shall endeavor to point out the meaning of each separately ; but it will be seen that they all have this in common : they all denote that the nouns to ichich they re- fer, or in connection with which they stand, bear some defined relation to the speaker, or to the things spoken about.
Pronouns are divided into six classes :
(i.) Personal pronouns are words which do indeed refer to nouns (or at least to things which have names) but only to this extent, that they imply that the nouns they refer to are either
il.) The person or persons speaking ; or, 2.) spoken to ; or,
3.) " " or things spoken about.
(2.) Possessive pronouns are adjectives, and imply that the nouns with which they agree either
(1.) belong to the person or persons speaking; or, (2.) " spoken to; or,
(3.) " " " or things spoken
[about.
it U
U U
94.] LESSOR XLIX. 69
(3.) Demonstrative pronouns are adjectives, and imply that the nouns with which they agree are either
(1.) near the person or persons speaking ; or,
spoken to ; or, " or things spoken about.
(4.) Logical pronouns imply that the words they refer to either are already known and definite from hav- ing been mentioned in the discourse, or (more rarely) are to be immediately mentioned, and so will be rendered definite.
(5.) Interrogative pronouns imply, that the things they refer to are not yet definitely known to the speaker, but that he asks for information about them.
(6.) Indefinite pronouns imply, that the things they refer to are either not definitely known to the speaker, or that he so represents them, but do not imply that he desires more information about them.
It will be observed, that the first three classes corre- spond exactly with the three persons of the verb • and we have seen that the person-endings of the verb constantly supply the place of the personal pronouns.
We shall first introduce in the exercises the personal and possessive pronouns. The following table presents the stems of these :
Singular. Plural.
First ( Personal, me-, I, no-, we.
person, ( Possessive, meo-, my, nostro-, our.
« , ( Personal, te-, thou, vo-, you,
person } Possessive, tuo-, thy, j vostro' [ your'
Third (Personal, se-, himself, herself, itself, se-, themselves.
person \ Possessive, suo-, his own, her own, its own, suo-, their own.
O4r. It must be particularly observed, that though se-, suo-, are given here as pronouns of the third person, they are only used in a reflective sense / i. e., generally when they refer to the same person as the subject of the verb. For the third personal pronoun, when not reflective, the
70 LESSON XLIX. [91.
logical pronoun eo-, which will be given in a subsequent lesson, is generally employed.
The declension of the personal pronouns in Latin being very irregular, they are here given at length, to be learned by heart.
Singular.
1st, me-. 2d, te-. 3d, se-.
Nom. ego, /. tu, thou.
Ace. me. te. se.
Gen. mei. tuL suL
Dat. mihi. tibL sibL
Abl me. te. se.
Plural.
1st, no-. 2d, vo-. 3d, se-.
JVwn. nos, we. vos, ye.
Ace. " " se.
n~» " 5 nostrum. vostrum.
Gen- Jnostrt. vostrL
Dat. nobis. vobis. sibL
Abl " " se.
NOTE. — 1st. Se- has the same forms for singular and plural.
2d. Se- has no nominative: since, as it is reflective, the subject of the sentence in which it occurs may always be regarded as its nominative case; and this, of course, will determine its gender and number.
3d. The nominative cases of the First and Second personal pronouns are only used when they are emphatic ; since the person-ending of the verb supply their place exactly, and sufficiently in ordinary circum- stances.
4th. Ml the possessive pronouns are declined like adjectives in o or a, except that the vocative singular of meo-is ml.
5th. Most modern editions of Latin authors, following the later writers, give vestrum, vestrl, as the genitive plural of the 2d personal prononn, instead of the more regular vostrum, voslrl.
6th. The genitive plural of the 1st and 2d personal pronouns has two forms ; of these the one ending in um is used as tlie inclusive genitive (§ 35) : the form in l for the other uses.
As in former cases, no exercises are given in this lesson, that the whole time of the pupils may be devoted to the study of the distinctions and explanations given, and to the learning of the tables of the personal pronouns.
94.] LESSON LI. 71
LESSON L.
EXERCISE 89.
1. / was a friend to the Helvetii, but you an enemy. 2. The general gives thanks to-me. 3. The king will not spare you. 4. The boy loves himself. 5. All boys love themselves. 6. No one of-us was at Rome at-the-coming of Caesar. 7. The general praised our diligence. 8. The soldiers praised their own diligence.
EXERCISE 90.
1. Me vita rnstica delectabat, tu autem delicias urbanas laudabas. 2. Incolae feracioris insulae suos equos laudaverunt. 3. Prima luce explorator tibi nuntiavit adventum hostium. 4. Tuos libros tibi liben- ter reddam. 5. Juvenis ad vitium procllvior se nimium amat, et suam voluptatem studio acriore cupit. 6. Omnis natura est sui conservatrlx. 7. Grata mihi vehementer est memoria nostri tua. 8. Habetis ducem memorem vestri, oblltum sui.
LESSON LI.
Most verbs with e-stems, and many others, including some with a-stems and ^-sterns, make the 2d stem by adding w, and omitting the final vowel of the 1st stem, if there be one. Thus, we have,
1. doce- 2. docu-
1. aperi- 2. aperu-
1. gem- 2. gemu-
NOTE. — No doubt this ending u is the same as the v, which we have seen used for most a-stems and t'-stems : the u being employed where the 2d stem is formed directly from the primitive root of the word.*
* Very often the form given as the imperfect or 1st stem of a verb is not really the original root of the word. In these cases generally ths 2d and 3d stems are made from the primitive root, and not from the im- perfect stem. The particular facts in regard to this matter must be
72 LESSON LIL [94.
In the following exercises, the past perfect will be in- troduced as well as the present perfect or aorist. See
§89.
EXERCISE 91.
1. Ton frightened the women and children by-your boldness. 2. The wise philosophers had taught their-own children. 3. The very base traitor had opened the gates of the city to-the-enemy. 4. You eagerly snatched the gift out-of your father's hands. 5. We have care- fully cultivated our own fields. 6. The soldiers of the cohort leaped- down from their-own ship into the sea.
EXERCISE 92.
1. Lex turpissimam rem omnmo vetuerat. 2. Legiones locum non tenuenint : sed in proximum collem se recipient. 3. Portas aperuimus, universique et oppidan! et nrilites obviam Antonio exiimus. 4. Nemo inter Latinos dlligentius tuo patre hortos coluerat. 5. Tempestas hodie nostros in castrls continuit, et hostem a pugna prohibuit. 6. Novum consilium amicis nobilium civium magnopere placuerat. 7. Magna pars nostrum pericula silvartfru vehementer timuerat. 8. Fortissimi legionarii signum mediis ex hostibus rapuere.
LESSON LIL
It was seen in Lesson XLIX., that hi Latin demonstrar twe pronouns follow the division of the personal pronouns, as possessive pronouns do. Their name indicates that
gathered from the vocabulary. But it may be worth while here to state the principal modes of deriving imperfect-stems from roots.
Root. 1st stem.
The insertion of n as tag- tang- ' touch."
" " in " cub- cumb- 'lie."
The addition of n " cer- cern- 'separate."
" " " sic " gno~ gnosc- 'learn."
« " " t " flee- fleet- 'bend."
« " «• 1 " pel- peU- 'push."
EOBSOX'S LATIN EXERCISES.
95.] LESSON LIL 73
they point to the noun with which they agree, as with the finger, and describe its position by representing it as —
1. Near the person speaking ;
2. " " spoken to ;
3. " " or thing spoken of.
There are therefore in Latin three demonstrative pro- nouns :
1. llO-, ha-, meaning, this near me ;
2. IN to-, ista-, " that near you;
3. illo-, ilia-, " that near Mm, or that yonder.
The declension of these being in several respects ir- regular, ho- is here given to be learned by heart. The three genders, as given below, had best be learned to- gether.
Ho-, this. Singular. Plural.
Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut.
Nom, hie haec hoc hi hae haec
Ace. hunc hanc " hos has "
Gen. hujus horum harum horum
Dai. hulc his
AU. hoc hac hoe "
NOTE. — Hujus, hulc and his, though only given once, are of all genders.
95. In § 32 it was said that the commonest use of the genitive case was to limit the meaning of a noun or adjective. The genitive case always denotes something different from the noun which it limits. But nouns some- times are more exactly defined by the addition of another word denoting the same person or thing as the limited noun. Nouns so employed are put in the same case, and, if possible, in the same gender and number as the limited noun, and are said to be in apposition to it. The two following sentences will serve to illustrate what is here said :
1. Servus Caesaris, Caesar's slave. Gen. of possessor.
2. Servus Balbus, The slave Balbus. Nom. of noun in apposition.
7
74 LESSON IHI. [96.
EXERCISE 93.
1. I will sell you this slave (of mine) for-twenty minae. 2. This law forbade all injustice, 3. The laws had strictly forbidden this injustice. 4. This woman has tamed many wild-beasts, and has swayed the anger of lions. 5. "With-these swords we kept-off the enemy. 6. Balbus, the wicked slave, (being) alarmed by-this evidence, kept-silence.
EXERCISE 94.
1. Caesar imperatpr Dumnorigem, improbum Divitiaci fratrem, his verbis monuit 2. Evander multis ante tempestatibus haec loca tenue- rat. 3. Haec consilia Camillo consull vehementer placuerant 4. Hi pueri optimo magistro nunquam paruerant. 5. Caesar cohortes novem apud se retinuit, et his copiis castra hostium audacissime oppugnavit. 6. Milites ex hac nave in mare desiluerunt. 7. Hos hortos cum max- ima cura dlligens sennis coluerat 8. Hunc improbum hominem ut hostem Gallia Caesar arcuit
LESSON LIII.
96, The 2d stem of very many verbs, mostly with consonant-stems, is made by attaching the ending s, which combines with the stem in the ways given below. If the stem end in a vowel-, the vowel is omitted before the S. See Note on Lesson LI.
(1). Gruttural-stems (c, g, h,) with s make X :
as, 1. reg- 2. rex-
1. due- 2. dux-
1. veh- 2. vex-
1. auge- 2. aux-
(2.) Dental-stems (d, t,) with s omit the dental, or sometimes change it to s :
as, 1. laed- 2. laes-
1. mit(t)- 2. mis-
1. ccd- 2. cess-
1. ride- 2. ris-
1. senti- 2. sens-
9?.] LESSON LIH. 75
(3.) r-stems with s change r to s, and sometimes omit r:
as, 1. ger- 2. gess-
1. haere- 2. haes-
(4.) J-stems with s, change b to p, and sometimes to s :
as, 1. scrib- 2. scrips-
1. jube- 2. juss-
97. NOTE. — It is very common in Latin to find an adjective or an adjective pronoun used without a noun. In such cases, if the adjective be masculine, the word " man" is generally to be supplied in English; if it be feminine, the word " woman;" and if neuter, the word "thing."
Thus, boni means " good men."
bonae " " good women." bona " "good things."
EXERCISE 95.
1. "We said all these-things boldly in the council of the states. 2. Te had plucked the largest apples from this tree. 3. These very warlike nations have carried-on many wars with the Romans in their-own ter- ritories. 4. The horses dragged the wagon out-of this river with-the- greatest-possible difficulty. 5. I had scattered these seeds too-widely. 6. This legion remained in the town more than three months.
EXERCISE 96.
1. Multi de rebus a majoribus suls gestis scripsere. 2. Ab hac spg repulsi vallo pedum undecim et fossa pedum quindecim hiberna cinx- eratis. 3. Has mumtiones postero die dlligenter auximus. 4. Ad principem legates primes clvitatis mlsistis. 5. Populus Romanus bel- lum magnum et atrox cum Jugurtha rege Numidarum gessit 6. So- cii cum auxilils ex castris domum de improvise discesserunt.
76 LESSON LIY. [97.
LESSON LIY.
As the 2d and 3d demonstrative pronouns are declined exactly alike, only one of them is here given to be learned by heart —
Isto-, that near you, and illo-, that near him, or that yonder.
Singular. Plural.
|
Masc. Fern. Neut. |
Masc. Fern. Neut. |
|
Nom. ille ilia illud |
ill! illae ilia |
|
Ace. ilium illam " |
illos illas |
|
Gen. illius |
ill drum illdrum illonun |
|
X>at. ill! |
illis |
|
AU. illo ilia illo |
u |
NOTE. — 1st. Though the genii, and dot. sing, and dat. and dbl plur. are given only once, the same forms are used for all genders.
2d. The emphatic adjective ipso-, "self," "very," is declined like illo-, except that the neut. sing. nom. and ace. is ipsum, and not ipsnd.
EXERCISE 97.
1. I gave the book to that boy (yonder). 2. That speech (of yours) has by-no-means pleased me. 3. I have waited-for your letter about those affairs (near you) a-long-time. 4. Ye led the Roman army across yonder river into more dangerous places. 5. We beheld the forces of the enemy drawn-out upon all those hills (yonder). 6. The arrival of that fleet (of yours) had greatly increased our hope of safety.
EXERCISE 98.
1. Omnes hostium naves in illo portu praefectus combussit. 2. In illam provinciam imperator exercitum tmnsduxit, et bellum Qno se- cundo proelio f Inivit. 3. Maxima m istius vicl partem tuis mllitibus concesseriis. 4. Ilium miserum captivum trinis catenis vinctum hostes in fuga secum traxerant. 5. De istls rebus multi commenta absurdis- sima finxerunt. 6. Subdolus ille proditor noctu ex urbe evasit. 7. Omnes illius regionis elves novum periculum mature Benscrant. 8. Multa bella superioribus annis fellciter gesseratis.
98, 99.] LESSON LY. 77
9§. NOTE. — In sentence 4 of this exercise we have secum, for cum se. The preposition cum is placed after the personal pronouns, instead of before them. The same order is also sometimes adopted with the relative pronoun quo-.
Thus we have mecum instead of cum me.
tecum " " cum te.
secum " " cum se.
noblscum " " cum nobls.
voblscum " " cum vobls.
quibuscum " " cum quibus (sometimes).
LESSON LY.
99. The pronouns ho- and itto-, besides their proper use to express position in this or that place, are employed to express the latter and the former of two things spoken about. As ho- means this near me it stands for the latter, since the thing last mentioned may be considered as the nearer to the speaker. And so illo- stands for the for- mer, or that which is conceived of as farther from the speaker, as having been mentioned previously to something which has just been spoken of. In the following exer- cises these pronouns will be used occasionally in these senses. They may often be translated by "the one," " the other."
NOTE. — Though isto- has been explained to mean that near you, it is often used in cases where this meaning is only indirectly apparent ; and often too where it cannot be observed at all.
EXERCISE 99.
1. The latter opinion pleases me, the former displeases (me). 2. The latter boy is industrious, the former (is) idle. 3. I praise the diligence of the one, I blame the idleness of the other. 4. Virtue is worthy of praise for (per) itself. 5. The general dismissed those soldiers, on- accouut-of (their) distinguished valor. 6. This state had nourished a- long-time. 7*
78 LESSON LYI. [1OO, 1O1,
EXERCISE 100.
1. Caesar aciem instruxerat in ilia valle. 2. Hostes ex omnibus illius silvae partibus in unum locum convolaverunt. 3. Ducea cupid- itates horum militum coercuerunt. 4. Hoc bellum plurimas nostrae urbis op€s absumpsit. 5. Meutem tuain in istis studiis probe exer- cuistL 6. Milites per totum ilium diem sitierunt. 7. Illud incendium totam fere urbem una nocte absumpserat. 8. Patria nobis carior est quam nos ipsl. 9. Omne animal se ipsum diligit. 10. Saepe hominl nihil est inimlcius, quam sibi ipse.
LESSON LYI.
100. The 2d stem of many verbs is made without the addition of any ending. The first class of these to be mentioned consists of those which take a prefix called a syllable of reduplication. This syllable is made by the first consonant of the root, followed either by the letter e, or by the first vowel of the root. Often the vowel hi the root is changed in accordance with the principles stated in the introduction. The following examples will make this clear :
1. tend-, stretch, 2. tetend-
1. cad-,/«#, 2. cecid-
1. fall-, deceive, 2. fefell-
1. morde-, bite, 2. momord-
101. NOTE. — In compound verbs, the syllable of reduplication is generally, though not always, lost. When it is retained, it comes be- tween the prefix and the root.
Thus: 1. decid- 2. decid-.
1. concurr- 2. concucurr-, or concurr-.
EXERCISE 101.
1. We have spared the inhabitants of this city. 2. That rash young man had touched the beautiful snake with his fingers. 3. We learned many-things from those old-men (near you). 4. By a bolder attack ye quickly drove yonder robbers out-of this village. 5. The frightened horse ran as quickly as possible through yonder plain. 6. Ye gave that (of yours) good advice to the magistrates of our city.
102.] LESSON LYII. 79
EXERCISE 102.
1 . Subdoli fares stultos carceris custodes hoc consilio penitus fefelle- runt 2. Silva vetus cecidit : sed nemo arbores ferro cecldit. 3. Imperator fidibus praeclare ceciait. 4. Valde me momorderuut epistolae tuae. 5. Mater hoc pretiosum praemium suae carae filiae spopondit. 6. ThebanI uudique ex agrls conourrerunt, et ex arce praesidium pe- pulerunfr. 7. Labore operis incitatl non mulieribus, non infantibus pepercimus. 8. Multl plura ex libris quam a patribus didicere.
LESSON LYII.
1O2. Logical pronouns, as was said in Lesson XLIX., define the words with which they agree, or to which they refer, not as existing in this or that part of space, but as being mentioned in the discourse, generally before, but sometimes afterwards. The following sen- tences contain pronouns which must be translated by logical pronouns in Latin :
1 . Sallust is an elegant writer ; I read his books with pleasure.
2. Sallust is an elegant writer, whose books I read with pleasure.
It is clear that in these sentences the words his, whose^ refer to the noun, Sallust, mentioned in the previous sen- tence ; and, as this is the case, they must be of course in the same sender and in the same number as the noun they refer to, which is called their antecedent. It will be seen, too, that though " his" is the genit. sing, of the English 3d personal pronoun, it is to be rendered by the logical pronoun eo-, as the Latin 3d personal pronoun is only used in a reflective sense, as was said in § 94.
As eo- is quite irregular in its declension, it is here given to be learned by heart.
LESSON LYIL [1O3, 104.
Singular. Plural.
Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. Norn, is ea id ii eae ea
Ace. eum earn " eos eas "
Gen. ejus eorum earum eorum
Dat. ei iis or els
AbL eo ea eo " "
The following examples may assist the pupil in using this pronoun rightly :
I hold his sword, ejus gladium teneo.
Pompey holds his sword (reflective), Pompeius suum gla-
[dium tenet.
You hold her garland, ejus corollam tenes.
She holds her garland, (reflective), suam corollam tenet. I hold their spears, eorum hastas teneo.
They hold their spears (reflective), suas hastas tenent.
NOTE. — The gen. and dat. cases sing., and the dot. and abl. plur. are the same for all genders, though they are only stated once in the table.
103. NOTE. — Sometimes logical pronouns do not refer to any particular word, but to a whole statement. In this case, generally a noun is introduced, with which the pronoun agrees just like an ad- jective.
104. Let this be learned by heart. Logical pronouns agree with their antecedents in gender and number, out their case is determined by the construction of their own sentences.
EXERCISE 103.
1. We had put the enemy to (in) flight, and had spared very-few of them. 2. Ye overcame the consul and sent his army under the yoke. 3. The traitors had deceived the commander, and had given him up to the enemy. 4. The Germans held Gaul : no one had ever contended with that nation without his own destruction. 5. The Belgae dwelt near the Rhine: these (people) had never seut ambassadors to Caesar concerning peace. 6. You got-together very many sheep and sheared them.
1O5.] LESSON LYIII. 81
EXERCISE 104.
1. Flumen sine perlculo translveram ; sed magnam impedlmentorum partem in eo amiseram. 2. Pugna diu duravit, et in ea multi ex nos- trls ceciderunt. 3. Aeduos superaveramus et llberos sacerdotum ab iis obsides reduxeramus. 4. Altum flumen ilium cainpum cinxit; itaque Pompeius in eo loco sua castra summa dlligentia munlvit.
5. Helvelil cum Germanls contendunt, eosque suls f Inibus prohibent.
6. In eapugna ex essedls ad pedes desiluerunt. 7. Nostrl amlci fabroa vocaverunt, et iis praemia dederunt. 8. Carthaginienses pacem pete- bant ; ea gens iusigues calamitates Romano populo olim intulerat (1. infer-).
LESSON LYIII.
1O«>. The 2d stem of many verbs is made either by lengthening the stem-vowel or by changing it into e-. If the 1st stem end in a vowel that vowel is dropped.
1. leg-, read, 2. leg-
1. jac(i)-, throw, 2. jec-
1. fave-, favor, 2. iav-
1. vide, see, 2. vid-
1. jnva-, assist, 2. juv-
1. vi(n)c-, conquer, 2. vie- (see note* on
[Lesson LI.)
NOTE. — It is supposed that the 2d stem of such verbs was originally made by reduplication, and that the long vowel was produced by the contraction of the syllable of reduplication with the stem-syllable.
EXERCISE 105.
1. The soldiers easily broke-through the line of the enemy, and put them to (in) flight. 2. The barbarians captured the city: that loss the Romans had sustained by the fault of the lieutenant. 3. Ye had con- quered the consul, and had taken his camp. 4. Caesar made peace with the Aedui ; that state had carried-on many wars with the nearest nations. 5. You had collected a great fleet from («x) Asia, and had sent it into Greece. 6. Ye had collected all the forces of the allies, and had led them into the winter-quarters of the eighth legion.
82 LESSON LIX. [105.
EXERCISE 106.
1. Ubii cum Caesare amicitiam fecerant, obsidesque el dederant. 2. Libertatem a majoribus accepimus, atque in ea semper pennanebimus. 3. Jam per angustias vestras copias transduxeratis, et in Aeduorurn flues perveneratis, eorumque agros vastabatis. 4. Nondum barbaro- rum consilia cognoveramus ; tamen eorum oppida obsidebamus. 5. Prlma luce ad insulam pervenisti, ejusque incolis ista tua dementia pepercistL 6. Superiore anno legatum oppido praefecl et legionem octavam el commisL 7. Interim nostri militfis impetum hostium sus- tinuerunt, et complures ex iis ceperunt. 8. Aper in venatores ruit, eosque ingentl timore afficit.
LESSON LIX.
By the addition of the syllable deill to the logical pronoun eo-, the adjective eo-dem " the same" is formed. As there are some slight variations in the declension, it is here given at length.
Singular. Plural.
Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. em eadem idem iidem eaedem eadem Ace; eundem eandem " eosdem easdem " Gen. ejusdem eorundem earundem eorun-
Dat. eidem iisdem or elsdem [dem
All. eodem eadem eodem " "
EXERCISE 10T.
1. Next day they moved their camp from that place; Caesar did the same (thing). 2. You pleaded all causes in-the-same manner. 3. The general always favored the wretched prisoners with-the-same clemency. 4. The boys had read the same books. 5. All the soldiers fled by dif- ferent ways into the same wood. 6. You had collected all those ships into the same harbor.
1O6.] LESSON LX. 83
EXERCISE 108.
1. Multi homines de eisdem rebus eodem die non eadem sentiunt. 2. Insipiens eldem sententiae modo fidit, modo diffldit. 3. In eadem cnstra mllites ex omnibus legionibus imperator coegerat. 4. Eodem die hostes in proximum collem se receperunt. 5. Eadem diel hora Caesar hostes vicit, eorumque castra uno impetu cepit. 6. Idem latro et domus parietes* perrupit et omne ex ea aurum ademit. 7. Eadem animl dili- gentia omnes inimlcl insidias cavistl. 8. Consilio ejusdem hominis ex eo loco in illam urbem veneras.
LESSON LX.
1 06. Of some verbs the 2d stem is the same as the 1st, and in this case the difference between the perfect and imperfect tenses is made only by the tense-endings. This is the case with most verbs ending in u, and some ending in v, d, t ; and the same is to be said of many compound verbs, whose roots make the 2d stem by re- duplication, since, as was said in § 101, the syllable of reduplication is generally lost when a prefix is appended : and thus, that which was used to distinguish the 1st and 2d stem is lost in the compounds.
EXERCISE 109.
1. We boldly climbed up to the roof of yonder house. 2. The trav- eller for-a-long-time warded-off the sword from (his) head with-(his)- right arm. 3. We had driven-back the enemy, and had slain a great number of them. 4. All the citizens ran-together into the same part of the forum. 5. In-the-course-of (de) the third watch we loosened the ships from the harbor. 6. The workmen have set up a huge wooden tower of four stories.
EXERCISE 110.
1. Miseram mulierem occlderas, et caput el abscideras. 2. Illud rapidum flumen ingentia saxa magno cum murmure devolvit. 3. Tandem equi- tatus noster in conspectum venit, hostesque arma statim abjecerunt ac
* The six words abiet-, ariet-, pariet-, seget-, teget-, and interpret- keep the e through all the cases.
84 LESSON LXI. [10r, 10§.
terga verterunt. 4. Prlraa luce terram attigimus omnesque incolumes naves perduximus. 5. Legionem passibus ducentls ab hoc tumulo con- stituL 6. Injustus rex elves hostesque juxta metuit. 7. Omnibus hi3 rebus permoti equites domum contenderunt 8. Milites infima saxa turns convellerunt
LESSON LXI.
107. It was said in § 92, that compound sentences are such as are made up of two or more simple ones ; and that these are sometimes combined co-ordinately. It is hoped that this expression is by this time understood, as it now becomes necessary to speak of cases, where simple sentences are combined to form compound ones in such a way that one of them is introduced subordinately to the other. The following examples will make the meaning of this clear :
1. The man whom we loved is dead.
2. He still lies where he died.
In the 1st of these, the sentence "whom we love" is joined like an adjective or attribute to the noun " the man."
In the 2d, the sentence " where he died" is joined like an adverb to the word " lies."
In this book the sentence which contains the main as- sertion, and to which the other is joined, will be called the primary sentence ; and the sentence which is introduced in explanation of the main assertion, and in subordination to it, will be called the secondary sentence. As these terms will in future be used with- out further explanation, it is very important that their meaning should be well understood at once.
108. We shall speak at present only about secondary sentences, which constitute the 1st of the classes given above, and which may be called adjective second- ary sentences, or, more shortly, adjectival sen- tences. Adjectival sentences are joined to primary sentences by means of a logical pronoun, which
108.] LESSON LXI. 85
is called in grammar the relative pronoun. In
§ 102 it was said that all logical pronouns refer to some word, generally stated in a previous sentence, which is called their antecedent, and that they therefore nearly always are found in the same gender and number as their antecedent. But what has been often seen in the case of the logical pronoun eo- is equally true with regard to the relative pronoun, namely, that the case of the logical (or relative) pronoun depends upon the construction of the words in its own sentence. Thus, in the 1 st example given above, the antecedent, "the man," is in the nominative case, standing as the subject of the verb " is dead;" but the relative " whom" is in the accusative case, standing as the object of the verb "we love." The relative pro- noun in Latin is quo-, and it is thus declined :
Singular. Plural.
|
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
Neut. |
|
|
N'om |
. qui |
quae |
quod |
qui |
quae |
quae |
|
Ace. |
quern |
quam |
u |
quos |
quas |
u |
Gen. cujus)fnd quorum quarum quorum Dat. cui \ quibus ) f „ -,
All. quo qua quo « f «» all genders.
NOTE. — 1st. It is most particularly to be observed that a relative pro- noun introduces a perfect sentence ; and therefore all the words which are connected with it in construction must be kept separate from the words which constitute the primary sentence.
2d. If there be any doubt as to what case of the relative pronoun is to be employed, take in its place its antecedent, and join it with the re- maining words of the adjectival sentence; and it will thus be made clear in what connection the relative pronoun stands with the other words in its sentence. Thus: "Sallust is a writer whose books I read with pleasure." In what case is the relative whose to be made ? The antecedent is clearly " Sallust." Say now: "I read the books of Sal- lust with pleasure." Since the antecedent now appears in the genitive case, that must be the case of the relative pronoun also.
3d. Since the sentences we are speaking of are adjectival, sentences, which are used to qualify some nouns in the primary sentences, they must as a general rule be inserted immediately after the nouns which they qualify.
86 LESSON LXIL [109.
EXERCISE 111.
1. Sallust is a very elegant writer, whose books I read with pleasure. 2. We have buried the man whom ye killed. 3. "We obey the king, whose rule is mild and just. 4. The king is happy whom all the citizens love. 5. Men are happy, who direct (their) life by the laws of virtue. 6. We will send home the prisoners whom we have spared.
EXERCISE 112.
1. Deus favet homim qui virtutem amat. 2. Omnes res bonae sunt quas Deus creavit. 3. Magna sunt beneficia, quibus Deus nos quotidie cumulat. 4. Propter virtutem et probitatem etiam eos dlligimus quos nunquam vidimus. 5. Servl, quos misisti, me convenerunt. 6. Britan- nia est insula natura triquetra, cujus unum latus est contra G-alliam. 7. Multa, quae stultl expetunt, sapieutes spernujit. 8. Domus, quam aedificamus, est ad mare.
LESSON LXII.
Very often the logical pronoun eo- is used as the ante- cedent of the relative quo-, or agrees with it. When eo- stands alone as the antecedent it is used as a noun, and means either " those men," " those women," or " those things," according to its gender, just as it was said in § 97 that adjectives did.
1O9. Sometimes, too, the relative pronoun does not agree in gender and number with its antecedent, but has another noun introduced along with it, which stands in place of the true antecedent, whether that be a simple noun or a whole sentence. The particular facts in con- nection with this subject can only be fully stated in sys- tematic grammars ; but it is hoped that when instances occur in the reading lessons of such peculiarities, the teacher will take the opportunity thus offered of explain- ing to his pupils wherein the variation from the ordinary rule consists.
110-112.] LESSON LXIII. 87
1 1 0. Very often the relative pronoun is used in Latin where we should employ a personal or demonstrative pronoun with some conjunctions. It thus often serves the place of a mere connective.
111. NOTE. — The two logical pronouns eo- and quo- may be used in relation to words of the 1st, 2d, or 3d persons, and so may be fol- lowed by verbs in any one of the three persons.
EXERCISE 113.
1. That is the pleasantest friendship, which similarity of manners lias yoked-together (i. e., has brought about). 2. (It) is God who rules this world. 3. Many states will revolt from Cyrus ; which thing will be the cause of many wars. 4. Those-things which we desire we easily be- lieve. 5. The conquerors did not spare the women who had fled into the town. 6. The robbers have set-on-fire the ships, which ye were repairing in yonder harbor.
EXERCISE 114.
1. Eas res, quas commemoravistis, memoria teneo. 2. Helvetil le- gatos ad vos miserant; cujus legationis Dlvico erat princeps qul superiore bello Helvetios duxerat. 3. Dux Arvernos bello superavit, quibus populus Romanus ignovit, neque stipendium imposuit. 4. Ob eas causas el munition!, quam feceras, me praefecisti. 5. Eos duces delegimus, qui omnes annos una cum Sertorio egerant. 6. Vos, qul Ariovistum intra fines recepistis, omnes cruciatus perferetis. 7. In Eburones, quorum pars maxima est inter Mosam ac Rhenum, cohortes quinque mlsimus. 8. Duces et auxilia ex Hispania arcessemus, quorum adventu bellum acriter geremus.
LESSON LXIII.
11^. It was seen in § 78 that the imperfect tenses of es-, " be," are irregular. The perfect tenses are regularly formed, but the 2d stem is fu-. Thus we have —
1. The present perfect or aorist, fui, fuisti, &c., I have been, &c.
2. The past perfect, fueram, fueras, &c., I had been, <£c.
3. The future perfect, fuero, fueris, &c., I shall have been, &c.
LESSON LUV. [113.
EXERCISE 115.
1. Ye, who had been the leaders of the Gauls in the former war, were the chiefs of that embassy. 2. This woman was among the pris- oners whom we had taken. 3. You who prefer death to slavery have always been very-dear to me. 4. The difficulty of that march," which had been through woods and marshes, was very-great 5. There have been very-learned men in that nation, who have discovered many use- ful things. 6. "We were in the city before the beginning of the war, which Caesar carried-on in Gaul
EXERCISE 116.
1. Geometria in summo honore fuit apud Graecos, quT omnibus scientiis maxime studebant. 2. In exercitu L. Sullae fueramus, qul in Asia maximum bellum confecit 3. Hujus consilil principes fuerant regis f Ilii, quos pater gravissimo supplicio aftecit. 4. Initio ejus belli dux Germanorum fuit Ariovistus qul multos menses Romanls resistebat 5. Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus et ditissimus fuit Orgetorix, qul conjurationem nobilitatis fecit. 6. Dictator fuit Camillus, qul primum hostes vlcit acie, deinde etiam urbem .obsedit. 7. Numa, rex Romae secundus, qul nullum quidem bellum gessit, non minus clvitati quam Romulus profuit (1. prodes-). 8. Tarquinius, qul propter superb iam Superbl cognomen accepit, Septimus fuit atque ultimus regum.
LESSON LXIV.
In the following exercises examples of the future perfect tense will be introduced. The conjugation of this tense is given in § 89.
113. It is now necessary to say something of the 2d class of secondary sentences, which (see § 107) may be called adverbial sentences. These are so called because their meaning defines the assertion made in the primary sentence in the same way as an adverb defines the meaning of a verb or adjective. These sentences may be classified in the following way :
LESSON
Adverbial sentences assert, 1.) The place
2. The time
3. The condition
4. The cause
5. The purpose
6. The consequence
7. The manner
of the action spoken of in the primary sentence.
114. The words which introduce these adverbial sen- tences, are called in the grammars subordinate conjunc- tions. As we appropriated the name conjunction to those which introduced sentences co-ordinately to the first sentence, we shall venture for shortness to name the ones which introduce subordinate sentences siilij unc- tions.
The following names and examples may be taken to assist the pupil to remember and understand the classifi- cation given above : though it is by no means expected that it will be fully comprehended at present.
Primary sentence.
Adverbial Name of
sentence. adv. sentence.
where he died. Local.
1 16. (2.) He went home, when he was cured. Temporal.
117. (3.) You make a mistake, if you say that. Conditional. 1 1 §. (4.) I love you, because you are kind. Causal.
119. (5.) We must eat, that we may live. Final.
1 2O. (6.1 The king was so cruel, that-he was hated. Con§eciltive. He always speaks, as he thinks. Modal.
115. (l.)He still lies, . (2.) He went home,
. . . (6.1
. (7 .)
In the following exercises examples of the first three of these classes will be given.
1 22. It has been observed that the future perfect is used when an action is spoken as finished at a future time. In the coming exercise those verbs which are to be ren- dered by the future perfect tense will have the full mean- ing of the tense given (by the words "shall have," "will have") ; but generally in English the present imperfect or perfect tense is used instead of this fuller form . 8*
90 LESSON LXY. [122.
EXEECISE 117.
1. You will return before I shall have gone away. 2. We shall easily pay this tax when we shall have sold the sheep and oxen, 3. We will nee into the woods before the army shall have come. 4. When the fourth legion shall have moved its winter-quarters, the first legion will succeed it. 5. If I shall have received-information about the war, I will report (it) to the consuls. 6. If we shall have performed all these- things we shall prevail upon the jurymen.
EXERCISE 118.
1. Animi quum e corporibus excesserint in coelum pervenient.
2. Quum portas aperueritis, proditores ex urbe quam celerrime fugient.
3. Si praetor exercitum ex periculo eripuerit, Senatus el gratias aget.
4. Quum messem peregeritis, frumentum mercatori vendetis. 5. Si ante mediam noctem adveneris llteras scribam. 6. Antequam portam aperueris, rex adveniet. 7. De Romanorum adventu hostes nou ante coguoscent quam ipse rem nuntiavero. 8. Nostrl prius impetum facient quam hostes flumen transierint.
XOTE. — In the 7th and 8th sentences, the subjunctions antequam and priusquam, "before," are separated; the parts, ante and prius, being placed in the primary sentence, and quam introducing the secondary sentence.
LESSON LXY.
In the following exercises examples of all the imperfect and perfect tenses will be introduced.
EXERCISE 119.
1. While the soldiers were entering the city, the citizens were full of fear. 2. How shall he (eo-) govern (his) children, who does not govern his-own passions? 3. If you shall cultivate virtue, all good men will love you. 4. If you shall have adorned (your) mind with virtues, you will always be happy. 5. As-soon as I shall have heard the affair, I will write to you. 6. Before war had consumed (aor.) the resources of our city, (it) was very powerful.
123.]
LESSON LXYI.
91
EXERCISE 120.
1. Gens Lacedsemoniorum fortis fuit, dum Lycurgi leges vigebant. 2. Tamdiu manebo, donee totam rem cognovero. 3. Quamdiu felix eris, multi tibi erunt amici. 4. Quum hostes agros devastaverint, urbem ipsam oppugnabunt. 5. In els potissimum rebus, ad quas aptis- siral erimus, elaborabimus. 6. Multi nune pauperriml sunt, qul olirn ditissiml erant 7. Fueram liber : avaritia me fecit servum. 8. Probis hominibus qui placuerit, is Deo quoque placebit.
LESSON LXVI.
The verb es- is used with several prefixes, mak- ing compound verbs. All of these are conjugated exactly like the simple verb, except two, potes-, " be able," and prodes-, " be profitable."
(1.) Potes- (a) changes t into s before §.
tb) omits f after t.
(2.) Prodes- (a) omits d before s. (Really d is in- serted before the forms beginning with e.)
(b) omits d before f. The tenses therefore will be —
Potes- Prodes-
Pres. imperf. 1. Possum. Prosum.
Sing. 2. Potes. Prodes.
3. Potest. Prodest.
1. Possumus. Prosumus.
2. Potestis. Prodestis.
3. Possunt. Prosunt.
Past imperf. Poteram, &Q. Proderam, &c.
Fut. imperf. Potero, &c. Prodero, &c.
Pres.perf. Potui, &c. Profui, &c.
Past perf. Potueram, <fcc. Profueram, &c.
Fat.perf. Potuero, &c. Profuero, &c.
In the following exercises some of the compounds of es- will be introduced — all these (except potes-} may have a dative after them in one of the ordinary senses of that case, as given in §§ 44-48.
92 LESSON LXYII. [124.
EXERCISE 121.
1 . You will come to the city to-morrow, if yon can (fat}. 2. Te were not able longer to-bear (ferre) the attack of our soldiers, and turned (your) backs. 3. God is-near all places, and directs all things by his-own will. 4. We despise those who are-profitable to no-one. 5. Those who cultivate virtue are-profitable to themselves and to the state.
6. I will send the prisoner from the camp to-morrow, if I can (fut.\
7. The officer, who had recently conquered the enemy, was-over the larger fleet.
EXERCISE 122.
1. Noctes prosunt furibus magis quam dies. 2. Quartae legionis hiberna aberant ab Ariovisto millia passuum quindecim. 3. Dicernus Latine, si poterinms. 4. lis legionibus. quas in Gallia citeriore Caesar conscripserat, Labienus praefui't. 5. Adfuit vir praestantl eloquentia, cujus oratio omnibus principibus tandem persuusit. 6. Yicti hostes in montem, qui proxime suberat, quam maxima poterant celeritate se receperunt. 7. Circiter millia hominum centum trigirita superfuCrunt, qui domum reverterunt. 8. Llteras Graecas uon didici, quae ad vir- tutem doctoribus nihil profuerunt.
LESSON LXYII.
Transitive verbs, as has been said, are those which admit an object after them in the accusative case : the word transitive denotes that the action, which is asserted of the subject, passes across from the subject, and in its effects reaches an object. Almost every sen- tence heretofore given in the exercises is an example of this. Verbs when so used are said to be in the active Voice : i. e., when the action is described as passing1 from the subject : and in this case the subject "(or doer of the action) and the object (or sufferer of the action) are stated with equal prominence. But as in process of time it became desirable to have the means of making the object of the action the more prominent notion, by a peculiar artifice of language the object came to be used as the subject of the sentence : and then of course it was
125.] LESSON LXYII. 93
necessary that the verb should describe the action not as passing from, but as passing to the subject.
Thus: the sentence "Brutus killed Caesar," states the doer and the receiver of the action with equal prominence. But the same general notion may be thus expressed: " Caesar was killed by Brutus," and here the subject of the sentence is the sufferer, not the doer of the action, and the sufferer is in this way made the more prominent notion. When the verb is used in this way, it is said to be in the passive voice.
In English the passive voice is made by the past parti- ciple of the verb, in combination with the different tenses of the verb " to be."
In Latin the passive voice in the imperfect tenses is distinguished from the active only by a distinct set of person-endings, the tense-stems being in all cases the same both for the passive and active voices. These person-end- ing are here given as those of the active voice were stated in Lesson VII.
For stems For stems in
ending in a, c, i. 11 or a coii§oiiant.
1. r or.
i i. r or.
Sing. 1 2. -ri§ or re, eris or ere.
(3. -Uir, itiir.
•I
•tur,
1. -iiiur, imiir.
riur. <J 2. -mini, imiiii.
iitur, imtur.
The present imperfect passive is thus conjugated :
ama-, love, mone-, advise, audi-, hear, reg-, rule.
|
f1- |
amor, |
moneor, |
audior, |
regor, |
I am ruled. |
|
|
II* CO |
( amaris, ( amare, |
moneris, monere, |
audiris, audire, |
regeris, { regere, j" |
thou art |
a |
|
u |
amatur ; |
monetur ; |
audltur ; |
regitur; |
he is |
<( |
|
lit |
amamur, amamini, amantur. |
monemur, moneminl, monentur. |
audlmur, audlmini, audiuntur. |
regimur, regimini, reguntur. |
we are ye are they are |
u u u |
94 LESSON LXYIL [126.
The past imperfect passive is thus conjugated :
1. amabar, monebar, audiebar, regebar, / was ruled.
9 ( amabaris, monebaris, audiebaris, regebaris, ) .,
1 } amabare, rconebare, audiebare, regebafe, J
3. amabatur, mouebatur; audiebatur; regebatur. he was "
. amabamur, monebamur, audiebamur, regebamur, we were "
2. amabamini, monebamini, audiebamin^regebamini, ye were
3. amabantur. monebantxir. audiebantur.regebantur. they were "
The future imperfect passive is thus conjugated:
f I
(^
1. amabor, monebor, audiar, regar, I shall be ruled,
(amaberis, moneberis, audieris, regeris, ) thouwatbe „
" ( amabere, monebere, audiere, regere, )
3. amabitur ; monebitur ; audietur. regetur ; he will be "
1. amabimur, monebimur, audiemur, regemur, we shall be "
2. amabiuiini, monebimuai, audiemini, regemini, you utitt be "
3. amabuntur. monebuntur. audientur. regentur. they will be "
NOTE. — 1st. To save space, the English of reg- only is given ; but the other three examples can, of course, be translated by substituting the participles "loved," "advised," heard," for "ruled," in the above places.
2d. As o is the ending for all verbs in the 1st person of the pres. imperf. active, so is or for the passive : and verbs with i-stems take lint ur from the 2d coftimn.
3d. The ending or contracts with the a of the stem of the 1st conjugation.
4th. The future tense- ending e is changed to a in the 1st person sing.
5th. All the passive imperfect person-endings contain the letter r, except the 2d person plur.
In the following exercises, sentences are given first with the verbs in the active voice, and are then repeated in the passive form ; but it must be particularly noted that :
The subject of the active verb, if a living agent,
is expressed in the ^Kissive construction by the ablative case with the preposition a, or ab. Call this " the ablative of the agciit."
127.] LESSON LXVIII. 95
EXERCISE 123.
1. Brutus kills Caesar with a sword. 2. Caesar is killed by Bru- tus with a sword. 3. You praised the conqueror on-account-of his clemency. 4. The conqueror was praised by you on account of his clemency. 5. The general will not prevail-upon me by all (his) threats. 6. I shall not be prevailed-upon by the general by all (his) threats.
EXERCISE 124.
1. Agros hostium late ferro et igne vastamus. 2. Agri hostium late ferro et igne a nobls vastantur. 8. Si semper bene vixeris, omnes te diligent. 4. Si semper bene vixeris, ab omnibus dlligere. 5. Urbem hostes oppugnabant, elves acriter defendebant. 5. Urbs ab hostibus oppugnabatur, a civibus acriter defendebatur. 7. Exploratores earn rem nobls statim nuntiant. 8. Ea res ab exploratoribus nobls statim nuntiatur.
LESSON LXVIII.
r. Verbs like cap(i}- are thus conjugated in the present imperfect tense passive.
SI. Capior, ( 1. Capimur,
2. Caperis or capere, Plur. \ 2. Capimini, 3. Capitur, ( 3. Capiuntur.
EXERCISE 125.
1. You were collecting as large forces as possible of infantry and cavalry. 2. As large forces as possible of infantry and cavalry were being collected by you. 3. The scout carried-down (imperf) this mes- sage to the miserable townsmen, and affected them all with-very-great joy. 4. This message was carried-down by the scout to the miserable townsmen, and they-all were affected with-very-great joy. 5. At the setting of the sun Ariovistus leads back (his) forces into the camp. 6. At the setting of the sun the forces are led back into the camp.
EXERCISE 126.
1. Neque fortunae impetu, nee multitudinis opmione, nee dolore neque paupertate terreor. 2. Eodem tempore haec mihi mandata referebantur,
96 LESSON LXIX. [128, 129.
et logati ab Aeduls veniebant. 3. Omnes amlci consulum coguntur in senatum : eorum vocibus et concursu potestas libere decernendi plurimls eripitur. 4. Rel mllitaris perltissiml habemur : atque cum explGrator- ibus praemittemur . 5. Defensores oppido idonei a nobis deliguntur. 6. Xova legio in Gallia citeriore ab imperatore conscribitur. 7. Horum vocibus ac timore paulatim etiam tu perturbabaris. 8. Fossae circum urbem uoctu a nobis perficientur.
LESSON LXIX.
We now come to speak of participles.
128. Participles are verbal adjectives; that is, they are adjectives formed from verbs, which express the action of the verb as a property belonging to a person or thing.
Some languages have more participles than others. In Latin there are only three ; two belonging to the active voice of the verb, and one belonging to the passive voice. At present we shall only speak of the last : the periect participle passive.
129. What has been hitherto learned as the 3d stem of the verb is really the perfect participle passive ; and as this is always given in the vocabulary, nothing more will be said about its formation than that it is nearly al- ways made by adding to the verb-stem the ending so- or to-9 and the adjective thus formed is declined like any ad- jective ending in o-.
The perfect part, passive may be translated in English, according to circumstances, in three ways. Thus, from duo, " lead," we have 3. ducto-,
which may be translated (1) •" having been led,"
(2) "being led,"
(3) "led."
The first, however, is the proper full meaning of the form.
130.] LESSON LXX. 97
EXERCISE 12T.
1. Being alarmed'by the sudden arrival of the array, the enemy retired within their fortifications. 2. -£his village, being situated in a valley, is hem- med in on-every-side by-very-lofty mountains. 3. The soldiers, liaving- been driven back by-the-missiles of the enemy, were fleeing in-all-direc- tions. 4. Having-been-overcome, ye were seeking safety in-flight. 5. The town having-been-taken will-be-set-on-fire. 6. The javelin thrown down from the higher ramparts pierced the soldier's thigh.
EXERCISE 128.
1. Arma dejecta de^muro in fossam, quae erat ante oppidum, altitu- dinem aggeris paene adaequaverunt. 2. Mulier, hujus rel a me certior facta, sub tectum properaverat. 3. Alteram ejus vlcl partem Galll3 concessi: alteram ab illls vacuam relictam cohortibus attribul. 4. Funditores perterritos in fugam dedistis. 5. Servus, spe llbertatis ad- ductus, iu castra quam citissime redibit. 6. Naves, quae a vobls aedificabantur, tandem perfectae ad novum portum convenient. 7. Diu et acriter pugnavistis : tandem vulneribus confecti terga vertistis. 8. Scuta ictu plloruin transfixa manibus emisimus.
LESSON LXX.
13O. A very common use of the perf. partic. pass, is in the construction called ablative absolute. The
word " absolute" means " loosed from," and words are said to be used absolutely, when they may be taken out of a sentence without affecting its construction. Thus : " Nature being- our guide, we cannot go wrong ;" in this sentence the words marked by italics could be omitted without damaging the construction of the remainder.
Let the following sentences be examined.
(1.) This battle having been fought, CsBsar led back his army.
(2.) The javelins being hurled, they broke through the enemy.
(3.) The javelins being thrown away, they fought hand to hand.
98 LESSON LXX. [131, 133.
It is clear that the words marked by italics denote in the
131. 1st sentence the time when the main action occurred.
1 32. 2d sentence the means by which the main action occurred.
133. 3d sentence the circumstances under Which the main action occurred.
Such expressions, denoting these particulars about the main action, are in Latin generally put in the ablative case, and are said to be in the ablative absolute. A reference to what has been said (in §§ 54, 56, 61) about the uses of the ablative case in Latin, will show the rea- son why this case was preferred for the absolute construc- tion.
In general then: the ablative absolute is the name used when the ablative of a noun is accompanied by an adjective, or a participle, or another noun, to denote the time when, the means by which, or any attending circumstances under which the principal action occurs. Let this be learned by heart. More particular information about the matter will be given subsequently ; at present it is only necessary to say that very often in English suhjunctions are used introduc- ing secondary sentences, when the ablative absolute would be employed in Latin.
EXEKCISE 129.
1. The hostages having been deliver -ed-up, Caesar hastened into the territories of the Aedui. 2. Caesar, his-army having been landed, hastened towards the enemy. 3. Caesar, the horses of all having been removed out of sight, joined battle. 4. The soldiers, (their) javelins having been hurled from the higher ground, easily broke-through the phalanx of the enemy. 5. This (phalanx) having been broken-apart. they made an attack upon them (to-) with-drawn-swords. 6. The Hel- vetii. a phalanx having been made, mounted-up to-meet (sub) our first line.
NOTE. — In these sentences the literal English of the Latin expressions has been given. But the teacher should by all means see that his pupils understand what would be the idiomatic English in each case ;
134, 135.] LESSON LXXI. 99
and in translating the subsequent exercises, they should always be re- quired to render absolute sentences with the proper subjunction.
EXERCISE 130.
1. Nullam partera noctis itinere intermisso, die quarto in fines Lin- gonura pervenerunt. 2. Helvetii omnium rerum inopia adductl legates de deditione ad eum mlserunt. 3. Reliquos omnes obsidibus, armls, perfugls traditls, in deditionem accepit. 4. Helvetii omnibus fructibus amissls domi nihil habuerunt. 5. Bello Helvetiorum confecto totlus fere G-alliae legatl, principes civitatum, ad Caesarem convenerunt 6. Helvetii jidrentissimls rebus domos rellqueraut. 7. Ea re permissa, diem consilio constituerunt. 8. Ed consilio dlmisso principes civitatum ad Caesarem reverterunt.
LESSON LXXI.
134:. The commonest nse however of the perfect partic. pass, is in the formation of the perfect pas- sive tenses. These are formed by the union of the imperfect tenses of es- with the perfect pass, partic. Thus : " The town has been taken" is oppidum captum est / literally : the town is (in the condition called) taken.
130. Occasionally, when the completeness of the ac- tion is to be made very prominent, the perfect tenses of es- are used with the perfect partic. pass, instead of the imperfect tenses.
In the example given, it will be seen that in all these tenses the perfect partic. completes the mean- ing" Of the verh es-, and it must therefore, as said'in § 79, agree with the subject of it in gender and number.
Frequently in poetry as well as in prose, the verb es-, with the perfect participle pass, is omitted, when it is quite clear from the sense which tense of it is to be sup- plied.
As the perfect tenses of all passive verbs are conju- gated alike, it is sufficient to give here an example in each gender.
100
LESSON LXXI.
[135.
Present perfect or aorist. masc.
51. rectus sum 2. rectus es 3. rectus est 1. recti sumus Plur. • 2. recti estis 3. recti sunt
. — The English of the Present perfect or aorist Past perfect Future perfect
|
Past perfect. |
Future per- |
|
fect. |
|
|
fern. |
neut. |
|
recta eram |
rectum ero |
|
recta eras |
rectum eris |
|
recta erat |
rectum erit |
|
rectae eramus |
recta erimus |
|
rectae eratis |
recta eritis |
|
rectae erant |
recta erunt |
is, I have been, or / was, &c.
is, / had been, &c.
is, I shall have been, &c.
The teacher had best make the pupils conjugate the perfect tenses of several verbs, in order to impress these meanings upon their minds, that they may not translate " was written" by scriptum erat, cfec., &c.
EXERCISE 131.
1. By this victory the war of the whole sea (maritima-, adj.) coast was finished. 2. I hold the chief-power over-all those states (gen.) from which the forces have been collected. 3. We, who had made a sally, were driven back into the town. 4. You had been sent (as) am- bassadors to those states which are (a part) of hither Spain. 5. Very many severe wounds were received by those who were defending the camp. 6. Leaders have been sent-for from Britain, on whose arrival the contest will be carried on against the Komans.
EXERCISE 132.
1. Nos, qui nuper in Galliam transportati sumus, fines sociorum ves- trorum longe lateque vastamus. 2. MorinI, spe praedae adducti, nos, qui ex navibus onerarils expositi eramus, magno suorum numero cir- cumsteterunt. 3. Omnia quae imperaveras a principibus dlligenter ad diem facta sunt. 4. Quadraginta naves quae in Meldls factae erant, tempestate rejectae. cursum non tenuerunt. 5. AdventQ P. Sullae, quern castris praefeceram, facile repulsl estis. 6. Quamquam periculoso genere proelil locoque inlquo pressus eras, tamen omnia paratissimo animo sustinueras. 7. Bellum quod Carthaginienses cum populo Ro- mano gessere maxime memorabile est omnium quae unquam gesta sunt. 8. Magna pars diel consumpta erat, neque munitioni castrorum tempus relinquebatur.
136.] LESSON LXXIII. 101
LESSON LXXII.
EXERCISE 133.
1. We will not sleep before your affairs shall have been finished. 2. Ye will not be happy, unless your passions shall have been confined by you. 3. Ye have been overcome by-the-multitude of the enemy. 4. I had been detained by a very rich merchant. 5. Ye had been routed by the first attack. 6. Ye will not be rich, unless riches shall have been despised by you.
EXERCISE 134.
1. Laetae mulieres de adventu filiorum, qui in exsilium Slim abie- rant, certiores factae sunt. 2. Simulac castra munita erunt, milites se ad pugnam expedient. 3. Legio, cul praefectus sum, apud Nervios hiemabit. 4. Ibi turres cum ternls tabulatis erectae, multlsque tor- mentis et omnl genere telorum completae erant. 5. Hostes cum fugientibus permixti, quos silvae montesque texerunt, ab equitatu in- terfectl sunt. 6. Eodem fere tempore classis a Carthagine in Sardinian! missa ad Baleares insulas ejecta est. 7. Proelium adversum equestre paucls ante diebus erat factum. 8. Vos, qui ex veteribus legionibus eratis relict! praesidio navibus, naves conscendistis et a terra solvistis.
LESSON LXXIII.
136. There are many verbs in Latin which, though they have a passive form, have an active meaning. These verbs probably had a reflective signification originally ; i. e., they described the agent as acting upon himself; and many of these retain that meaning throughout all periods of the language. But most of them have a simple active meaning, transitive or intransitive. These verbs are called in the grammars Deponeilts, from the fact that they lay aside the passive meaning, though they retain the passive endings. Deponent verbs may always be known in the vocabularies, by their having only the 1st and 3d stems given ; for of course as the deponent verbs have the active meaning themselves, they require no active voice, and therefore no perfect active, and therefore no 2d stem, 9*
102 LESSOX LXXIIL [136.
which is used only for the perfect active tenses. Deponent verbs therefore will be given thus : laeta-, rejoice, 3. laetato-.
Deponent verbs are conjugated exactly like passive ones, except in the respects to be men- tioned hereafter.
It is particularly recommended that the pupils be taught to recollect which are the deponent verbs, by the fact that they have only 1st and 3d stems.
In the following exercises imperfect and perfect tenses of deponent verbs will be used in alternate sentences.
EXERCISE 135.
1. Ye were wandering beyond your-own territories. 2. The island had used its-own laws. 3. In this matter you are avenging not only public but private wrongs. 4. Ye have not-yet overtaken the mer- chant who is waitiug-for you. 5. "We will encourage the weary soldiers, who will presently earn the great reward of their labor. 6. I shall have measured-out the corn to the slaves before the return of the mes- senger whom I have sent to the town.
EXERCISE 136.
1. Ex castris egredior, loco potior, duas ibi legiones colloco. 2. Tandem a dextro latere summum jugum nacti suruus, hostesque loco depulimus. 3. In Africam ex Sicilia proficiscere, et duas legiones, ex quattuor, quas a nobis accepistl, et quingentos equites transportabis. 4. Simulac sol ortus erit, proficiscemur. 5. De fratris morte quereris, communemque Galliae fortunam miseraris. 6. a me facile 'adept! eratis. quae petebatis. 7. Quarta circiter vigilia de muro cum custodibus colloquar. 8. In Carnutibus summo loco natus erat Tasgetius, cijus majores in sua clvitate regnum obtiuuerant.
136. J LESSON LXXIV. 103
LESSON LXXIY.
In the following exercises passive verbs as well as de- ponents will be introduced, and the pupils must use all care to note the difference in meaning.
EXERCISE 137.
1. The king promises a great number of ships, which have been built in yonder harbor. 2. A war had unexpectedly arisen in hither Gaul, which had been lately subdued. 3. The soldiers, who had been put to (in) flight, were returning home. 4. "We have not forgotten the former victory of the Carthaginians, in which the most-powerful enemies had been overcome. 5. The colonists are gaining-possession- of the whole island, which has been assigned to them. 6. Ye had gained-possession-of the town, in which the baggage of the enemy had been deposited.
EXERCISE 138.
1. Naviculam deligatam ad rlpam nancisceris, eaque profugies. 2. Initium repentinl tumultus ac defectionis ortum erat ab Ambiorige, qul apud Eburones rex creatus erat. 3. Noctu progressus mlllia passuum circiter duodecim, hostium copias conspicatus sum, qul paulo ante fusl erant. -4. Legio, cui praefectus eras, aedificia vlcosque barbarorum in- cendit, magnoque pecoris atque hominum numero potlta est. 5. Aliae naves eodem unde erant protectae, relatae sunt; aliae inferiorem partem insulae magno cum periculo dejectae sunt. 6. TJrbem Romam condidere atque habuere initio Trojani, qul Aenea duce, iucertis sedibus vagaban- tur. 7. Turn demum beatus eris, quum aspernatus eris voluptatem. 8. Dum exercitus hostilis urbis domos prlvatas publicasque demolieba- tur, elves maximo moerore afficiebantur.
104 LESSON LXXVI. [137.
LESSON LXXV.
EXERCISE 139.
1. At daybreak all our men had been carried across, and the line of the enemy was distinctly -seen (imperf.). 2. Labienus having exhorted the soldiers, gave the signal of battle. 3. At the first onset, on (al) the right side, where the seventh legion had taken-its-station, the enemy are beaten. 4. The leader of the enemy himself was-near his- own-(men), and kept-exhorting (past.. imp.) them. 5. This business having been finished, Labienus returned (pres. imp) to-Agedicum, where the baggage of the whole army had been left. 6. He-himself having gone out a little after in-silence with three legions went-to (pres. imp.) that place.
EXERCISE 140.
1. Ab hoc concilio Remi, Lingones, Treveri abfuerunt : illi, quod aml- citiam Romanorum sequebantur: Treveri quod aberarit longius, et a Germanls premebantur. 2. Allobroges crebris ad Rhodanum disposing praesidiis, magna cum cura et diligentia suos fines tuentur. 3. Tandem a Germanls summum jugum nactis hostes loco depelluntur. 4. Caesar, impedimetitis in proximum collem deductls, duabus legionibus praesidio relictis, circiter tribus millibus hostium ex novissimo agmine interfectls, altero die ad Alesiam progressus castra fecit. 5. Dux ex arce Alesiae suos conspicatus, ex oppido egreditur et eas res, quae eruptionis causa paratae erant, expedit. 6. Restitute proelio equites ab tergo hostes adoriuntur. 7. De media nocte missus equitatus novissimum agmeii consequitur: magnus numerus capitur atque interficitur: reliqui in clvitates discedunt. 8. His rebus confectis in Aeduos proficiscitur.
LESSON LXXYI.
137. In the 5th and 6th sentences of Ex. 139, and in several in Ex. 140, it will be observed that the pres. imp. is used in speaking of actions really past. This is a very common usage in the Roman historians ; and is said to have arisen from the desire of giving to their narrative a kind of dramatic liveliness. But as the idiom of the Eng- lish language does not tolerate so frequent a use of this interchange of tense, it is best to translate the present in such cases by the aorist. From its use by the historicuis.
138, 139.] LESSON LXXYI. 105
the tense is called the "historic present;" and
verbs which have to be rendered by this tense in Latin will be marked thus (p. A.) in the English exercises.
138. In § 124 it was said that the object of an active transitive verb becomes the subject of a passive verb. It follows from this that if the verb be not transitive (or do not admit an object after it) it cannot be used with a subject in the passive. But it is very common in Latin for intransitive verbs to be used in the passive form im- personally. An impersonal verb is one which makes an assertion like any other verb, but does not make it of any particular subject. There are several verbs which are only used in this way. But at present we shall only speak of passive forms used impersonally. The sub- ject will best be understood by examples. The folio wing active expressions become impersonal in the passive.
Active. Passive.
Films mini resistit. mini a f ilio resistitur.
My son resists me. I am resisted by my son.
Filius tibi persuadet. tibi a f ilio persuadetur. [son.
Your son persuades you. You are persuaded by your milites fortiter pugnave- a militibus fortiter pugnatum [runt. [est.
The soldiers fought bravely, (the battle) was fought
[bravely by the soldiers.
It will be observed that —
130. (1.) Impersonal verbs are always in the 3d per- son singular, and if possible in the neuter gender.
(2.) When the dative case follows the active verb, it remains with the passive impersonal verb.
(3.) The living subject of the active verb is expressed by a with the ablative case with the passive construction.
(4.) The tense of the passive impersonal verb is the same as that of the active verb.
In the following exercises sentences will be given first with the active construction, and then with that of the passive.
30G LESSON LXXYII. [14O, 141.
EXERCISE 141.
1. Men generally envy great fortune. 2. Envy- is- felt (lit. it is en- vied) generally to-great fortune by men. 3. The general will not spare all the prisoners. 4. Mercy-will not be shown (lit. it will not be spared) to all the prisoners by the general. 5. The soldiers fought very bravely at-one time in-all places. 6. The-battle- was- fought (lit. it was fought) very bravely by the soldiers at-one time in-all places.
EXERCISE 142.
1. Mllites maxime ad superiores mumtiones laborant. 2. a rrnlitibua maxime ad superiores mumtiones laboratur. 3. Caesar ad Britanuiam omnibus navibus meridiano fere tempore accessit. 4. a Caesare ad Britanniam omnibus navibus meridiano fere tempore accessum est. 5. Principes ex consilio consurarunt. 6. a principibus ex consilio consurgitur. 7. Milites totis castris trepidanL 8. a militibus totls castris trepidatur.
LESSON LXXYII.
It was said in § 128, that the Latin verb has only three participles. One of these, the perfect partic. passive, has been already spoken of. The other two belong to the ac- tive voice.
14:0. The imperfect participle active answers to the English participle ending in -ing, as fearing, loving. It is made by adding
to a-stems and e-stems the ending nt(i)-.
to all others, " " ent(i)-.
Thus, from
ama~ we have the imperf. part, act amant(i)-, " loving." mone- " monent(i)-, "advising."
audi- " " " " audient(i)-, "hearing." reg- " " regent(i)~, " ruling."
141. NOTE. — 1st. The verb*-, "go," and all its compounds, makes the nom. sing, iens, and takes eunt- in all the other cases.
2d. Deponent verbs have this participle like ordinary active verbs.
3d. Of course these participles govern the same cases as the verbs from which they are formed.
142.] LESSON LXXYIII. lOt
EXERCISE 143.
1. Our-men, guarding the gates with-difficulty, are hard-pressed by the multitude. 2. We beheld the legion fighting bravely. 3. The bar- barians crossing the river in-ships and on-rafts, will march into our territories. 4. I will grant the land to the Aedui asking (it). 5. The enemy had killed three thousand of our men resisting bravely. 6. The stag, admiring its horns (reflected) in the water, is beheld by the dogs.
EXERCISE 144.
1. Oppido timens, diurnis eo nocturnisque itineribus contendisti. 2. InterfectI sunt fortissime pugnantes duo consules : neque id fuit falsum, quod illl in pugnam proficiscentes dixerant. 3. Dux ex castrls in mon- tem refugiens ab equitibus est interfectus. 4. Discedens ab hibernis in Italiam te fratremque tuum legionibus praefecl. 5. Novissimos adortl, et multa millia passuum prosecuti, magnam multitudinem eorum fugieritium occldimus. 6. Peritus nauta mare refluehtibus undls strl- dens non timet. 7. Equestribus proelils GermanI ex equls desilientes, pedibus saepe pugnabant 8. Redeuntes aggredimur quos possumus et interficimus.
LESSON LXXYIII.
. The last participle to be spoken of is that com- monly called the future participle active. This may be most conveniently formed as a general rule by changing the o- of the 3d stem into uro-. Thus
stem. fut. partic. act. meaning.
3. ducto- ducturo- about to lead.
3. arato- araturo- intending to plough.
3. caso- casuro- doomed to fall.
The future partic. of es-9 "be" is futuro-.
NOTE. — 1st. Deponent verbs have this participle as well as simple active verbs.
2d. From eight verbs the fut. partic. is not made precisely in this way. Of these the commonest are the two deponents or(i)-, "arise," andmor(i)-, "die."
1. mor(i)-, 3. mortuo-, fut. part, morituro-, "destined to die." 1. or(i)-, 3. orto-, " " oritiiro-, "about to arise."
108
LESSON LXXYIII.
[143.
143. Though this participle is called the future partic., it does not so much denote futurity as intention and destiny, and it is most commonly used in connection with the tenses of es- in just the same way as the perfect partic. pass. So we have —
moriturus sum, casiiri eramus, araturl erunt,
I am doomed to die.
we were destined to fall.
they will be intending to plough.
Actions may be regarded in three ways 1. As begun and not finished,
finished,
2. As begun and (Perfect)
3. As not yet begun, but only Intended
in present in past in future in present in past in future
scribo. scribebam. seribam. scrips!, scripseram. scripsero. scripturus sum. scripturus eram. scripturus ero.
As we have hitherto called the first six tenses by a double name as present imperfect, &c., so it is recommended that the last three be called pre sen t intended, &c. : though in some grammars they are called the present &c. of the peri- phrastic future. But these can with no more propriety be called periphrastic expressions, than scriptus sum <fcc. can be so called.
NOTE. — The imperfect tenses are made from the 1st stem, the perfect from the 2d stem, and the intended from the 3d stem.
EXERCISE 145.
1. The workmen, to whom the affair has been intrusted, are going- to-do nothing. 2. The ships on (in ace.) which the young men have em- barked, are destiaed-to-perish. 3. I was inten ding-to-hold the military- command of the neighboring state. 4. These legions were inteuding-to- cross the river, which flows (influ-} into the lake Lemaunus. 5. You were about-to-land the soldiers on (in) the island. 6. The mothers will intend-to-leave then- daughters in the city hi which they were born.
143.] LESSON LXXIX. 109
EXERCISE 146.
1. Imperatori, quern multos annos secQti sumus, omnes res nostras reote commissuri sumus. 2. Nationes, quae trans Rhenum incolebant obsides tibi daturae erant, et imperata tua facturae. 3. Nuntios ad Pompeium missurl eratis, atque ille reliqua per se acturus erat. 4. Fru- mentum omne, praeterquam quod secum portaturl erant, Helvetil com- burunt. 5. De mels in vos meritls non sum praedicaturus, quae sunt adhuc et mea voluntate et vestra expectatione leviora. 6. Et exprox- irms hibernis et a Caesare subsidia conventura sunt. 7. Alexander ille magnus imperio totlus orbis terrarum potiturus erat. 8. Malus sane est medicus, qui morbl causam ignorans, morbum ipsum est curaturus.
LESSON LXXIX.
EXERCISE 147.
1. As the eye, so the mind, (though) not seeing itself) sees other things. 2. Scipio, when once-on-a-time (aliquando) he intended-to-visit Ennius the poet, was not admitted by him. 3. Darius, king of the Persians, put-to-death (neca-) his friend, (when) advising the best-things. 4. Pliny the-elder, intending-to-examine the eruption of Mount Vesu- vius, was overwhelmed by the smoke and ashes. 5. Darius saw the camp of Alexander shining with-great brightness. 6. The Helvetii, in- tending-to-seek new abodes, burnt all their towns and villages.
EXERCISE 148.
1. Praeceptor in scholam venit discipulos Srudlturus, puer attente audlturus. 2. Darium agitabant pej somnia species imminentium rerum. 3. BellovacI ad consilium non venerunt, quod suo nomine atque arbitrio cum Romanis bellum gesturl erant. 4. Caesar in provin- ciam rediturus erat atque delectum habiturus. 5. Pompeius per illam regionem cum legionibus iter facit, et in Hispaniam confestim est ven- turus. 6. Hoc sperans Caesar tres legiones ex castris educturus erat. 7. Nonae legionis mllites, temere insecutl longius fugientes, in locum iniquum progrediuntur. 8. Pugnatum est utrimque fortissime et acer- rime.
10
110 LESSOR LXXX. [144, 145.
LESSON LXXX.
We have now spoken of the three Latin participles which were said to be verbal adjectives. We must here treat of the infinitive mood, which is really a verbal substantive.
14rA. The word infinitive means unlimited, and those forms of the verb are so called which express the action of the verb without any person-endinys.
In Latin the infinitive mood also expresses the action of the verb without any limitation as to tune, though the names given in the grammars to the forms of this mood would seem to imply the contrary. But the infinitive mood has distinct forms or modes of expression to denote whether the action is unfinished, finished, or intended, and we find therefore in Latin an imper- fect, a perfect, and a future (or intended) infinitive in the active and passive voices.
1 45. The infinitive is, as was said, a verbal substantive, and it is used for the most part only as the object or the subject of another verb, and must be regarded therefore as hi the nominative or the accusative case, though undeclined.
We have then in the active and passive voices together six simple or compound forms of the infinitive mood, di- vided into the three classes of imperfect, perfect, and future (or intended.) We shall first give the forms of these :
Imperfect. Perfect. Future.
1. ama- act. aroare 2. amav- act. amavisse 3. amato- act. amuturo-ess«
** pass, amari 3. amato- pass, amato-esse " pass, aniatnm iri 1. mone-ae<. rnonere 2. inonu- act. monuisse 8. monito- act. monituro-esso
" past, moneri 3. mon\to-pass. monito-esse " pass, monitum iri 1 audi- act. an dire 2. audiv- act. audivisse 3. audlto- a ct. audit uro-esso
u pass, audlri 3. audlto- pass, audito-esse " pans audit um iri 1. reg- act. regere 2. rex- act. rexisse 8. recto- act. rccturo-osse
" pass, regi 8. recto- pass, recto-esse " pass, rectum iri
1. c»p(i)- act. capere 2. eep- act. cepisse 8.capto- act. capturo-csse
* pa&s. capi 8. capio- pass, capto-esse " pass, captum iri
146.] LESSON LXXX. Ill
NOTE. — 1st. The imperf. infin. of es- is esse, and of potes- is posse.
2d. The first, second and fourth conjugations make the imperf. infin. active by the ending-re, and passive by the ending -rl.
3d. The third conjugation makes the imperf. infin. act. by the ending ere, and passive by the ending I.
4th. The imperf. intin. of verbs like cap(i}- is made from the consonant- stem, like the third conjugation.
5th. The pcrf. in/in, active of all verbs is made by adding i§se to the 2d stem.
6th. The perf. infin. passive of all verbs is made by combining the perfect part. pass, with the infin. of es-.
7th. Thefut. infin. active of all verbs is made by combining the future part. act. with the infin. of es-.
8th. The fut. infin. passive of all verbs is made by combining the ac- cusative supine with the imperf infin. pass, of i-. As the supines have not yet been spoken of, this expression cannot, of course, be under- stood at present.
9th. In the expressions composed of the participle and the infin. of es-, of course the participle completes the meaning of es-, and therefore must agree with its subject.
As in the exercises these infinitives will not all be in- troduced at once there is no need that they should all be perfectly learned now. It is only thought best to put all the forms together.
14:6. The infinitive mood is used simply (as the accu- sative case) as the object of the following classes of verbs, namely, verbs which denote,
1 . \Vish, as cupio Tre, I desire to go.
2. Power, " possum ire, I can go.
3. Intention, " cogito ire, I intend to go.
4. Duty, " debeo ire, I ought to go.
5. Habit, " soleo ire, I am wont to go.
6. Commencement, " incipio ire, I begin to go. V. Cessation, " desino ire, I cease to go.
This is not a complete enumeration, but it is sufficiently so for our purpose.
In the following exercises, the imperf. infin. active, will alone be employed. Generally the infin. is placed imme- diately before the verb whose object it is.
112 LESSON LXXXT. [147.
EXERCISE 149.
1. TVe had determined to lead the array across the Rhine. 2. I was not able to discover ports suitable for larger ships. 3. "We will en- deavor to persuade the foolish woman. 4. You had begun to distribute the corn to the army. 5. The barbarians were not able to burst-through the fortification. 6. "We desired to reach the lower part of the island.
EXERCISE 150.
1. Conatus sum reficere pontes. 2. Helvetii quam maximum numerum jumentorum et carrorum coemere constituerunt. 3. Cum proximls clvitatibus pacem et amicitiam confirmare debemus. 4. Veneti in Britanniam uavibus translre consuerunt. 5. Per medios hostes per- rumpere potuistis, incolumesque ad uuum in castra pervenistis omnes. 6. Equites lapides telaque in nostros conjicere coepSrunt. 7. In scientia excellere pulcrum putamus. 8. In Galh'am Caesar contendere instituit.
LESSON LXXXI.
147. We have seen that there are three forms (or tenses) of the infinitive mood, the imperfect, perfect, and future. The following rules with regard to the choice of one of them to suit each case must be particularly at- tended to.
We must employ
(1.) The imperfect infinitive for actions unfinished \ at the time de- (2.) The perfect infinitive finished > noted by the
(3.) The future infinitive " intended ) principal verb.
It will be seen, accordingly, that the form of the infini- tive mood is wholly independent of the tense of the prin- cipal verb. Thus we may use with any tense
I. The imperfect infinitive, as
(1.) Gaudeo te videre. lam glad (to-day) to see you. (2.) Gaudebam te videre. / was glad (yesterday) to see you. (3.) Gaudebo te videre. / shall be glad (to-morrow) to see you.
148.J LESSON
II. The perfect infinitive, as
(1.) Audit te Ivisse. He hears (to-day) that you have gone.
(2.) Audiebat te Ivisse. He fteard (yesterday) that you had gone.
(3.) Audiet te Ivisse. He will hear (to-morrow) that you have gone.
HI. The future infinitive, as
(1.) Speras me venturum esse. You hope (to-day) that I shall come.
(2.) Sperabas me venturum esse. You hoped (yesterday) that I should come.
(3.) Sperabis me venturum esse. You will hope (to-morrow) that I shall come.
In the following exercises the perfect and future infini- tive active will be employed as well as the imperfect.
14§. NOTE. — The four following verbs are called semi-deponents, because the imperfect tenses are conjugated with the active person-endings, and the perfect tenses are made like the passive. They have, therefore, only the 1st and 3d stems.
1. aude- 3. auso-, dare.
1. fid- 3. flso-, trust.
1. gaude- 3. gaviso-, rejoice.
1 sole- 3. solito-, le accustomed.
EXERCISE 151.
1. The enemy do not dare (to-day} to join battle. 2. The horse- soldiers did not dare (yesterday) to leap-down from their horses. 3. The cowardly sailors will not dare (to-morrow) to sail, even (vel) with-a-favor- able wind. 4. The orator is-accustomed to defend the causes of the poor. 5. Caesar was accustomed to finish all things with-the-greatest quickness. 6. The old-man rejoiced to narrate very long stories.
EXERCISE 152.
1. Helvetil dicuntur omnia sua aedificia incendisse. 2. Helvetil dlcuntur omnia sua aedificia incendere. 3. Helvetil dicuntur omnia sua aedificia incensurl esse. 4. Hostes locls superioribus occupatls itinere exercitum prohibere conatl sunt. 5. Narratur hie pagus unus, patrum nostrorum memoria, dorno exisse, et consulem exercitumque ejus interfecisse. 6. Consueverunt dl immortales nonnullls secundiores 10*
114 LESSON LXXXTT. [149, 15O.
interdum r6s et diiiturmorem impumtatem concedere. 7. Hostes cas-
tris exire et proelium committere non ausl sunt. 8. Amicos rebus angustls deserere non soliti sumus.
LESSON LXXXII.
149. We have seen that some kinds of compound sentences are made by attaching secondary sentences to primary ones by the help of the relative pronoun (ad- jectival sentences), or by subjunctions (adverbial sentences); see § 108 and § 113. But compound sen- tences may also be made by joining one primary sentence to another as its object or subject : i. e., one sentence may be used as a noun to another. Sentences so attached
in this book will be called nominal sentences.
1 oO. Examine the following sentences.
(1.) I fear to die.
12.) I hope that Caesar will conquer his enemies.
3.) To lie is disgraceful.
(4.) For a Christian to lie is disgraceful.
In the 1st and 3d sentences we have the infinitive mood used by itself to express (1) the object, and (3) the subject of the principal verb, and as it was said that the infinitive mood is a neuter noun, used either in the nomin. or accus. case, it is clear that in (1) it is in the accus. case, and in
(3) it is in the nomin. case.
It will be observed also that in sentences (2) and (4) the words marked by italics stand respectively for the ob- ject and the subject of the principal verb ; and on the same principle as before the verbs " will conquer" and " to lie" must be in the infin. mood. But in these sentences the subjects of those verbs also are given ; in (2) " Caesar," in
(4) " a Christian ;" and it is a peculiarity of the Latin lan- guage that the subject is in such cases made in the accus. case, even though the sentence hi which it stands is used as the subject of the other verb. This matter is of the greatest importance ; and it is hoped
151.] LESSON LXXXH. 115
that in the examples now to be given, the teacher will be very careful to see that his pupils understand —
(1.) Whether the infinitive mood stands for object or subject.
(2.) The reason of the tense of the infinitive mood.
(3.) The form which the nominal sentence would take if it were used by itself as a primary sentence.
(4.) That the English word "that" is not translated when introducing nominal sentences.
(5.) That the English word "it" is often used in antici- pation of the subject, when the subject is a nominal sen- tence, and must of course be untranslated in Latin.
151. It is particularly to be observed that as the in- finitive mood has no person-endings, wSen a verb, which in the indicative mood would have its subject sufficiently indicated by the ending, passes into the infinitive mood, its subject must be expressed, in the accusative case; and that if the subject of the infinitive is in the 3d person, and Is the same as the subject of the principal verb, it must be expressed by the reflective pronoun sefor all gen- ders and numbers.
EXAMPLES.
(1.) Caesar said (that) he had conquered the Germans. Caesar dixit se Germanos vicisse. (2.) Caesar hopes (that) he will conquer the Germans. Caesar sperat se Germanos victurum esse. (3.) It is honorable (for) a soldier to meet death for his country.
Decorum est militem pro patria mortem oppetere. (4.) Caesar forbade the soldiers to destroy the bridge. Caesar vetuit milites pontem rescindere.
NOTE. — It will probably be well for the teacher to go over each of the coming English sentences witli his pupils, before they translate them, pointing out the particulars above alluded to.
116 LESSON LXXXIII. [151.
EXERCISE 153.
1. The consul promises (that) he will not fail the senate and common- wealth. 2. The consul promised (that) he would not fail the senate and the commonwealth. 3. I perceive (that) the ships are approaching the entrance of yonder harbor. 4. I perceive (that) the ships have ap- proached the narrow strait. 5. It is a great disaster (that) ye should have thrown-away (your) arms. 6. It was reported to Caesar (that) the Helvetifwere marching through the territories of the Sequani.
EXERCISE 154.
1. Sentimus calere ignem, nivem esse albam, dulce mel. 2. Caesar respondit, pads causa se aequo animo tulisse detrlmentum sui honoris. 3. Mulier dixit, se postero die opus esse confecturam. 4. Nonnullae geutes se angustos ffnes habere arbitrabautur. 5. Certior factus sum vos contra nos conjurare, et inter vos obsides dare. 6. Helvetii moribus suis Orgetorigem ex vinculls causam dicere coegerunt. 7. Hac epistola certiores fact! sum us hostes legionem nobis auxilio missam reppulisse. 8. Notum est Hannibalem adversus Romanos acerrime pugnavisse.
LESSON LXXXIII.
EXERCISE 155.
1. There very few, having trusted-to their strength (pi.), strove to swim across. 2. The Bclgae were-indignant(ra0feife/er-)that the army of the Roman people should winter and become-firmly-established (inveterasc-) in Gaul. 3. The Remi say that they intrust themselves and their (property) to (in ace.) the power and protection of the Roman people, and (that they) had not (neqtte) agreed with the rest-of the Belgae. 4. Caesar learns from the scouts that all the rest of the Belgae would soon be in arms. 5. At length, late-in-the-day (multo die), I learned that the enemy had moved their camp, and that you were com- ing to me. 6. The barbarians boasted that they had engaged with the Romans in pitched-battle (acie-) and had conquered them.
EXERCISE 156.
1. Negavimus nos more et exemplo popull Romanl posse iter ulli per provinciam dare. 2. Videbam pertculosum populo Romano esse
152.] LESSON LXXXIV. 117
Germanos paulatim consuescere Rhenum translre. 3. Polliciti estia vosobsides daturosesse, etimperata nostra facturos. 4. Juravisti te, nisi victorem, in castra non reversurura. 5. Confessus es scire te ilia esse vera. 6. Dixl me proxima nocte de quafta vigilia castra moturum. 7. Aperte odisse magis ingenul est quam fronte occultare sententiam. 8. Sapientis est consilium explicare suum de maximls rebus.
LESSON LXXXIY.
1 52. In the last two sentences of the preceding ex- ercise there were instances of a use of the genitive case, which could not be conveniently mentioned before the introduction of the infinitive mood ; though it really falls under the head of the possessive genitive, § 36.
The genitive is used constantly with the verb es- to de- note that some point of character &c. belongs to the per- son represented by the genitive. Instead of the genitive of personal pronouns, the neuter sing. nom. or ace. of the corresponding possessive pronouns is used.
EXERCISE 157.
1. It is (the duty) of a wise-man not to fear adversity. 2. It is (the part) of a just judge to preserve the innocent. 3. It is (a mark) of a foolish-man to persevere in errors. 4. It is (the duty) of a prophet to see-beforehand (praevide-) the future. 5. It is (a mark) of a generous soul to assist the wretched. 6. It is (the duty) of a good king to secure the peace of the state.
EXERCISE 158.
1. Barbarorum est in diem vivere. 2. Tuum est legibus patriae parere. 3. Est boni oratoris multa auribus accepisse, multa vldisse. 4. Magnl animl est dlvitias contemnere. 5. Non meum est rebus ad- versls perturbarl. 6. Parentum est alere liberos ; llberorum, parentibua obedlre. 7. Putant se id facere non posse sine maximo peiiculo. 8. Stultorum est aliorum vitia cernere, sua non cognovisse.
118 LESSON LXXXVL [152.
LESSON LXXXY.
In the following exercises the imperfect and perfect in- finitive of passive and deponent verbs will be introduced. For their formation see the table in Lesson LXXX.
EXERCISE 159.
1. Towards (sub aec.) evening I ordered the gates to be shut, and the soldiers to go-out from the town. 2. The town, fortified by the nature of the place and by art, cannot be stormed. 3. It is (a mark) of a constant man, not to fear danger or reproach. 4. The Britons, having followed-closely with all their forces, were hindering our-men from-going-out (infin.) from the ships. 5. The blind beggar feels that he has been wounded. 6. It is reported to Caesar that the ships have been set-on-fire.
EXERCISE 160.
1. Tertia fere vigilia solvistL equitesque in ulteriorem portum pro- gredl et naves conscendere et te sequi jussisti. 2. Principes cognove- runt magnam partem senatus in urbem convenisse et legates ad Caesarem de pace et amicitia missos esse. 3. ArbitratI estis id bellum celeriter coufici posse. 4. Hoc tibi persuasi, consilium ab amicissimo homine, non ab hoste, datum esse. 5. Stultl est inanibus rebus com- moveri. 6. Animadverteras omnes oppidi partes praeruptissimis saxis esse munitas. 7. Caesar suos ex omnibus partibus vulnerarl videbat. 8. Illl nostros regredl non patiebantur, quod timore adducti locum re- linquere videbantur.
LESSON LXXXYI.
EXERCISE 161.
1. Some-men asserted that Caesar, constrained by want of corn, had hastened into the province. 2. Caesar saw that the-battle-was-being- fought in-a-disadvantageous place, and that the enemy's forces were being augmented. 3. Caesar thought it-was-injurious to depart from the war and the enemy. 4. The chief assured (p h.) his-men, that the Romans would either not endure want (of provisions), or with-great
153, 154.] LESSON LXXXVII. 119
danger, would advance too-far from their camp. 5. The townsmen, a shout having been raised, began to take (their) arms, to shut the gates, to man the wall. 6. Caesar was-sure that, if-that-town-were-recovered (aU. absol), he would reduce the whole state under (in ace.) his power.
EXERCISE 162.
1. Tertio die, missis ex oppido legatis de deditione, arma comportari, jumenta produci, obsides darl jubet. 2. Sceleratus homo non intelligit, pietate et religione et justls precibus Deorum mentes, non contaminata superstitione, posse placari. 3. Omnes milites jurant se exercitum ducesque non deserturos, neque sibi separatim a reliquls consilium captures. 4. Dixeras Aeduos tecum et cum Sequanls contentiones hab- uisse. 5. Centuriones qul dlligentiores viden volebant, portas castrorum totam noctem custodiebant. 6. Vidimus hostes in aquam progresses esse. 7. Senatui nuntiabitur foedus violatum esse. 8. Dico Luculli adventu maximas regis copias omnibus rebus ornatas atque instructas fuisse, urbemque Asiae clarissimam obsessam esse ab ipso rege maxima multitudine.
LESSON LXXXV II.
We must now speak of interrogative sentences or questions.
Questions are of two sorts :
1st. Those which do not assume the truth of the fact spoken of in the question, but ask whether it be true or not, as : Did Brutus kill Caesar?
Call these laet-questions.
2d. Those which do assume the truth of the fact spoken of in the question, and ask for more information about it, as : Who killed Caesar ?
Call these word-questions.
We shall speak first of the 1st class.
1 54L In English such questions are expressed by putting the subject of the verb immediately after it, or
120 LESSON LXXXVn. [154, 157.
after its auxiliary, as itf the above example. But since in Latin the subject of the verb was often omitted (being sufficiently indicated by the person-ending) it was neces- sary to have some other way of pointing out the difference between an assertion and a question. For instance : the three words, Brutus Caesarem ocndit, though commonly placed in this order, may be arranged in any way with- out its being indicated by their position that a question is asked. In Latin therefore certain words called inter- rogative particles are used, the presence of which in a sentence shows that a question is asked, and not a fact asserted.
The interrogative particles used in Latin for simple questions are :
155. (1) Ne, enclitic: i. e., appended, to the most emphatic word : as, Brutusne Caesarem occidit ? Was it Brutus who killed Caesar f
1 06. (2) Num placed at the beginning of the sen- tence, when the answer " no" is expected : as, Xum Brutus Caesarem occidit ? Did Brutus kill Caesar f (no.)
157. (3) Nonne placed at the beginning of the sen- tence, when the answer " yes" is expected : as, nonne Brutus Caesarem occidit ? Did not Brutus kill Caesar f (yes.)
Often however the enclitic ne is used when the sense seems necessarily to require the answer " yes," or " no." In these instances the question may be supposed to be stated with the two possible alternatives, as : potestne virtus ser- v~ire f " can or cannot virtue be a slave ?" In such cases in the exercises ne will be inserted in parentheses ; and the emphatic word to which ne is to be appended will be marked by italics ; and the expected answer will be in- serted when num or nonne must be used.
15§-160.] LESSON LXXXVIII. 121
EXERCISE 163.
1. Does the concourse of all good-men move thee not-at-all (nihit). 2. Do not poets wish to be celebrated after death ? (Yes). 3. Are we able to change the-past (pi. n.) ? (No). 4. Does (not) Socrates appear to place a happy life in virtue alone (ne) ? 5. Do-you-(not)-see (ne) that this evil is (one) of-opinion, not of-nature ? 6. Do the remaining emotions of the mind fall upon (in) the wise man ? (No), t. To this (lianccine) life will you call-back that man? 8. Is not a dog very-like a wolf? (Yes).
EXERCISE 164.
1. Egone has injurias diutius patiar quam necesse est ? 2. Nonne sensistis triumphatum hodie de vobls esse ? 3. Num potes popular! hanc terram, quae te genuit atque aluit ? 4. Num ignavissimos hostes magis timetis quam Deos, per quos jurastis ? 5. Verblsne istls, frater, te mllitibus persuasurum esse credis ? 6. Num haec vobls forma sanae civitatis videtur? 7. Deditisne vos urbem, agros, dlvina humanaque oinnia in ditionem popull Roman!? 8. Arbitrarisne consulem aut in tempore pugnam inlvisse, aut firmasse subsidiis aciem, aut ullo bonl consults functum officio ?
LESSON LXXXVIII.
158. Word-questions are those which, while they assume the truth of the fact spoken of, demand more information about it. Such questions are asked by inter- rogative pronouns or interrogative adverbs.
1 59. Interrogative pronouns form the fifth class spoken of in Lesson XLIX.
The principal pronoun of this class in Latin is quo- de- clined exactly like the relative pronoun except in the nomi- native and accusative singular. The difference will be ob- served at once.
JHasc. Fern. N~eut. Nom. quis quae quid. Ace. quern quam quid.
160. But it is to be observed that qm and quod are also used when a noun is joined with the interrogative ;
11
122 LESSOX LXXXVin. [161.
i. e. quis and quid are nearly always used as substantives, qul and quod as adjectives. Thus
Who calls me ? is translated by quis me vocal ?
What slave calls me ? " " " qul servus me vocatf
TV hat do you read? " " " quid legist
What song do you read ?" " " quod canneri legis ?
Besides quo-, the adjectives quail- " of what kind," quanto- " how great," are used as interrogatives in word- questions; and so also the folio wing adverbs: ubi, "where," quo, " whither," quando, "when," cur, "why," quin9"why not," and some others.
161. The interrogative quo- is made more emphatic by the addition of the syllable -nam to all its cases ; we also find the prefixes ee, and num, used with it : thus
quisnam, quaenam, quidnam, &c. ecquis, ecquae (or ecqua), ecquid, &c. numquis, munquae (or niunqua), numquid, &c.
But the last (like num) is only used when a negative answer is expected.
EXERCISE 165.
1. Who writes these letters? 2. By whom are these letters written? 3. Whose note is sweeter than the note of the nightingale ? 4. What bird sings more sweetly than the nightingale ? 5. Who uttered that famous opinion? 6. What philosopher uttered that famous opinion? 7. Who (quisnam) perpetrated this crime ? 8. 0 country (rus-), whea shall I behold thee ?
EXERCISE 166.
1. Quis de re tarn clara dubitare potest ? 2. Quern viram carmine celebrabimus ? 3. Quivir a nobis carmine celebrabitur ? 4. SI omnes aliena imperia perferimus, quisnam liber est ? 5. Quis clarior in Grae- cia fuit Themistocle ? 6. Qul cantus moderata oratione est dulcior, quod carmen artificiosa conclusione aptius? 7. Quis amicior quam frater fratri ? 8. Quis moitalium omnibus horis sapit ?
162.] LESSON XG. 123
LESSON LXXXIX.
EXERCISE 167.
1. Who am I, and what faculty is-there in me ? 2. "What is more sweet than to have a true friend? 3. Did old-age compel the chief of philosophers to grow-slack (obmutesc-} in their studies ? (No). 4. Could (ne) so-rgreat a mind (not) produce a pleasant old-age. 5. Was the old-age of these-men miserable, who delighted themselves in-the- cultivation of the Held ? 6. What is more foolish, than to take (habe-} uncertain-things for (pro) certain, false-things for true ?
EXERCISE 168.
1. QuI pavor hie, qul terror, quae obllvio animos cepit ? 2. Mortem omnibus horls impendentem timeris qul (how) poterit animo consistere ? 3. Nonne multo melius est, otiosam aetatem et quietam, 'sine ullo labore et contentione transducere ? 4. Quern intelligimus divitem, aut hoc Verbum in quo homine ponimus ? 5. Quae servitus est, si haec libertas existimarl potest? 6. Quae est civitas? Omnisne conventus etiam ferorum et immanium? Omnisne etiam fugitivorum ac latronum congregata in unum locum multitudo? 7. QuomodS, tot legibus in exsilium ejectus, nomen exsulis non perhorrescis? 8. Ecquando unam urbem, ecquando communem patriam habebimus ?
LESSON XC.
The interrogative pronoun to be used, if only two persons are spoken of, is utro-. This, as well as the adjectives solo- "alone," toto- "the whole," olio- "the other," alter o- "the other of two," "the second," neutro- " neither," uno- " one," nullo- "none," ullo- " any," takes the ending -ms for the genit. sing., and -I for the dat. sing, in all genders, like the demonstrative pronouns illo- and isto-.
NOTE. — The- i in the ending -lus is marked long. This is the proper quantity, no doubt, as all these genitives arise from the contraction of -ius with the o of the stem. But alterlus is incorrectly said to have the i always short; and allus has it always long, as in it there is a double contraction from alioius. The other words are often found short in the poets, but tkey are pronounced long in prose.
124 LESSOX XCL [163.
The declension of three of these words is here given in one of the three genders in the sing.
utro- (masc.) altera- (fern.) alio- (neut.)
JVom. uter. altera. aliud.
Ace. ntruni. alteram. "
Gen. utrius. alteiius. alms.
Dat. utrl. alter!. alii.
Abl. utro. altera. alio.
Observe that alio- has aliud in the neut. sing. nom. and ace. The plural of all these words is regular.
EXERCISE 169.
1. "\Vhich of these (two) is more worthy of punishment ? 2. To which of-us (two) shall the new book be given ? 3. Demosthenes and Cicero were most excellent orators : which of them do you prefer ? 4. The other cities, being worn-out by the long war, received the army within (their) walls. 5. The other town, having been plundered and burnt, was nothing profitable to the weary soldiers. 6. On the second day, the army came to a village abandoned by the enemy.
EXERCISE 170.
1. Xuntil ad alias Aeduoram clvitates a nobis missl tandem adcastra reverterant. 2. uua urbs, posita in altissimo rnonte omnes aditus diffi- cillimos habebat. 3. Certior a nobis factus fuuditores trans pontem transducis, et ad hostes contendis. 4. Totae sociorum copiae pulsae superataeque passim fugiunt 5. Hi principes, studio novarum rerum adducti, imperium totlus Galliae appetiverunt. 6. Alter eorum Graecus fuit, alter Romanus. 7. Tibi soli ex tot millibus captivorum imperator parcet. 8. Alteram regionis partem, penitus a miHtibus vastatam hostibus rehiiquo.
LESSON XCI.
163. We have now to speak of the imperative
mood, or the forms of the verb used in commanding.
164.]
LESSON XCL
125
Of this mood there are two tenses, called present and future, the uses of which will be explained hereafter. As the forms of these are very easily learned, it is thought sufficient to. present them here in one view, without call- ing attention particularly to the formation.
It will be seen that of the present imperative both ac- tive and passive, only the 2d persons singular and plu- ral are used ; while of the future imperative we have in the active the 2d and 3d persons singular and plural, and in the passive the 2d and 3d persons singular, and only the 3d person plural.
ama-
mone-
audi-
|
Active. |
|
|
Pres. Sing. 2. am a. Plur. 2. amate. |
mone. monete. |
|
Fut. Sing. 2. amato. 3. " |
moneto. |
|
Plur. 2. amatote. |
monetote. |
|
3. amanto. |
monento. |
|
Pa§sive. |
|
|
Pres. Sing. 2. amare. Plur. 2. amaminl. |
mone re. monemim. |
|
Fut. Sing. 2. arnator. 3. " |
monetor. « |
|
Plur. 3. amantor. |
monentor. |
reg- cap(i)-
audi. rege. cape,
audlte. regite. capite.
audito. regito. capito.
U U II
audltote. regitote. capitote.
audiuuto. regunto. capiunto.
audire. regere. capere.
audlminl. regimini. capimini.
auditor. regitor. capitor.
U U U
audiuntor. reguntor. capiuntor.
164. The verbs die-, "say," due-, " lead," es-, " be," fae(i)-, " make," fer-, " carry," do not take the ending e in the 2d pers. sing, of the present imperative active. In that person they are therefore unaltered. The imperative of es- and its compounds is thus conjugated.
Present. Future.
2. sing. 2. plur.
2. sing.
3. "
2. plur.
3. "
es.
este.
esto.
esto.
estote.
sunto.
No exercises will be given in this lesson, that the time may be devoted to learning the above forms. 11*
126 LESSON XCII. [165.
LESSON XCII.
165. The forms of the present imperative
are used in requests and directions of an unemphatic char- acter, and generally in relation to time present or imme- diately succeeding ; and thus it has only the 2d person. It is however very rarely used in negative directions (/>ro- hibitions), some forms of the subjunctive mood, to be spo- ken of hereafter, being used instead of it.
It is to be particularly observed that in prohibitions the negative adverb is ne (not nori). Neve is the form used instead of et ne.
EXERCISE 171.
1. Advance with a-brave mind, Lacedaemonians; to-day, perhaps, •we shall sup with (apud) the gods-below. 2. Mother, I call-upon thee, arise and bury (thy) son. 3. Believe me. (dat.) no-orie of-you will catch (conxequ- dep.) me, when I have-gone-forth (exced-fut.perf.) hence. 4. Say, O stranger. at-Sparta, that you have seen us lying here. 5. Leap-down, fellow-soldiers, unless ye-wish (vultis) to betray the eagle to the enemy. 6. Allow me, 0 friend, to expire in this slaughter of my soldiers.
EXERCISE 172.
,1. AudyJiupiter, dlqtie omnes coelestes, yosque terrestres, Yosque iuferni audjte.. . 2. Adeste elves, adeste commilitones, , 3. Si vobLs viderur; tifsced'tle, Quirite's. 4. Adeste. dl testes foederis, et expetite poenas, debitas simul vobis violaTTs. noblsqu'e per vestrum nuriien de- ceptis. 5. Obsecro. elves, mihi misero atque innocent! subvemte. 6. Haerete affixl contiotoibus. et in foro vivite. 7. Praeb^te vos, 6 elves, in re tarn trepida patribus obedientes. 8. avertite ab Ira parumper ad cognitionem et cogitatiGnem animos. 9. Mel potius misereminl, o elves, filiaeque meae. 10. Si dormls, expergiscere, si stas, ingredere, si in- grederis, curre, si curris advoia.
166.] LESSON XCIII. 127
LESSON XCIII.
166. The future imperative has, as we have seen, three forms in the active and two in the passive :
that of the singular in each voice being employed for the 2d and 3d persons.
It is used in giving more urgent commands, and has reference to future time generally, and it is the mood used in laws, wills, <&c., and corresponds in meaning to the word " shall," as used in the commandments : e. g., " TliOll shaft not steal." There are a few verbs however of which the future imperative is used with the same force as the present imperative generally possesses. Among these are sci-, " know," and ha be-, " hold." Though, as has been said, the present imperative is not often used in prohibitions, in laws ne is found with the future impera- tive. Thus the eighth commandment, given above, would be in Latin, ne furator.
EXERCISE 173.
1. If you, 0 friend, shall be able (per/.) to-get-hold-of (assequ-, dep.) me, bury (me) as shall seem-fit to yourself. 2. The vestal virgins in the city shall guard the everlasting fire of the public hearth. 3. The two (men) shall-be of-royal authority (abl.} and they shall-be-called consuls. 4. My slave shall-be free. 5. It is not enough that poems should-be pretty ; (they) must be charming (dulci-), and must-carry (ag-) the mind of the hearer whithersoever they wish (/«£). 6. The fishermen must- draw-together the net.
EXERCISE 174.
1. Bacillum propter me ponitote, quo volucrgs et canes abigam. 2. Cadavera prima luce sepeliuntor. 3. Puerl haec carmina ad verbum discunto. 4. Quum valetudini tuae consulueris, turn consulito naviga- tion!. 5. Rem vobls proponam: vos earn suo, non nominis pondere penditote. 6. FabrI materia et aere navium afflictarum utuntor ad re- liquas reficiendas. 7. Latro statim comprehenditor et in vincula con- jicitor. 8. Faucis diebus frumentum militibus metltor.
128 LESSOX XCIY. [167, 169.
LESSON XCIY.
We have seen that Participles are verbal adjectives, and that the infinitive mood is a verbal substantive, used in the nomin. and accus. cases only.
167. There is besides these verbals, another partici- pial form made by adding
to o-stems and e-stems ndo-. to ah1 others endo-.
NOTE. — The connecting vowel is sometimes u, making undo-.
Thus from ania- is formed amando-, "loving."
" mone- " " monendo-, "advising."
audi- " " audiendo-, " hearing."
" reg- " " regendo-, "ruling."
" cap(i)- " " capienda-, "taking."
" i- " " eundo-, "going."
168. This participial form is used —
1st. As a noun in the sense given above ; but only in the neuter singular, and not in the nominal, case, and is then called the Gerund.
2d. As an adjective in the sense of " to be loved" &c., and is then called the Oerillldive.
The Gerundive is sometimes called the future partici- ple passive* and has a twofold use :
1st. As a simple adjective in agreement with a noun, like a participle.
2d. In a peculiar sense in connection with the verb es-.
We shall first speak of the Gerund.
169. As the Infinitive mood is a neuter noun, used only in the nominative and accusative cases, the Oertind is used as a noun to supply the place of the infinitive for the other cases ; and it may stand also in the accusative case, when following a preposition, as the infinitive is very rarely found so governed.
The following sentences are examples of the gerund employed as a noun hi the accusative, genitive, dative and ablative cases.
XOTE. — The gerund, like the infinitive, governs the same case as the verb from which it is formed.
1TO-173.] LESSON XCV. 129
170. (1). The accusative case of the gerund is for the most part used after the prepositions ad and in- ter. The following examples will show its meaning then.
Mitto legfitum ad inspicien- / send an ambassador for the dum. purpose of looking into (the
matter].
Bos ad arandum natus est. The ox was made for ploughing. Inter agendum caveto. You must be careful while
driving (the flock.}
171. (2). The genitive case of the gerund is employed to limit the meaning of a noun, for the most part objectively (see § 34).
Spes potiundi castris milites The hope of gaining the camp
excitat. urges on the soldiers.
Titus erat equitandi peri- Titus ivas skilled in horse-
tus. manship.
172. (3.) The dative case of the gerund is governed either by verbs or adjectives, the latter being sometimes understood.
Multl regnando studuerunt. Many gave their attention to
reigning.
Soli boni idonei sunt aliis The good alone are jit to juste imperando. govern others justly.
1 73. (4.) The ablative case 'of the gerund is used either as ablative of means or after the prepositions «'», a&, ex, de.
Volscus stando et vigiliis fes- The Volscian was weary (of) sus erat. by standing and watching.
Summa voluptas ex discendo The greatest pleasure is de- capitur. rived from learning.
Virtutescernunturinagendo. The manly virtues are seen
in action.
No exercises are given in this lesson, that the form and uses of the gerund may be well understood, before the pupils have to translate any sentences containing it.
130 LESSOR XCYI. [174.
LESSON XCY.
EXERCISE 175.
1. While (inter) fighting, thirty ships of the enemy were taken, thir- teen (were) sunk. 2. All burned with a wonderful passion for (gen.} regaining (their) liberty. 3. God made the ox for-the-purpose - of ploughing. 4. Few-men are fit for speaking. 5. Walls serve for- defending against the violence of enemies. 6. The guide went-forward with horsemen to examine.
EXERCISE 176.
1. Omni occasion e recte utendo Caesar potens factus est. 2. Nun- quam ingenium idem ad res dlversissimas, parendum atque imperandum, habilius fuit. 3. Hannibal prlma luce equites, transgresses flumen, ob- equitare portls jubet, jaculandoque in stationes elicere ad pugnam hostes. 4. Hannibal, advocata contione, varie militum animos versat, castlgando adhortandoque. 5. Omnes res satis comparatae sunt ad trajiciendum quam occultissirce. 6. Militibus labore ac pugnando fessls quies data est 7 Eadem fortfma, quae necessitatem pugnandi imponit, multa vobls praemia victoribus proponit. 8. Alils timor hostium audaciam ingre- diendi flumen fecit, transgressique in castra pervenerunt.
LESSON XCYI.
1 74:. W hen the Gerund is formed from a transitive verb, and has its object expressed, (in the accusative), the gerundive ** generally employed instead of it with the following changes of construction —
1. The accusative (the object) takes the case of the gerund.
2. The gerundive agrees with the noun which was the object of the gerund.
As this is very important, let the following examples be carefully studied. The sentences in parentheses give what would be the construction of the gerund ; the others the construction of the gerundive.
175, 1.76.] LESSON XCVI. 131
1st. (Gerund in the' accusative.)
(Puer aptus est ad Hteras tractandum). The boy is fit for handling literary matters.
Puer aptus est ad literas tractandas. The boy is fit for literature to be handled.
2d. (Gerund hi the dative.)
(Asinus idoneus est onera portando). The ass is proper for carrying burdens.
Asinus idoneus est oneribus portandls.
3d. (Gerund in the genitive.)
(Ars civitatem gubernandi est difficillima). The art of (fovcrninfj a state is very difficult.
Ars civitatis gubernandae est difficillima.
4th. (Gerund in the ablative.)
(Literus tractando ingenium acuitur). The mind is sharpened by handling literature.
Liteiis tractandls ingenium acuitur.
176. NOTE. — 1st. In the first tvfo of these cases (i. e. when the gerund, if used, would be in the accusative or dative case,) the gerundive (or passive) construction is alivays to ~be employed: and far most commonly is it found in the last two also ; i. e. when the gerund, if used, would be in the genitive or ablative. The exceptions are for the most part found in those cases where, if the gerundive were used, the gender of a pronoun (or adjective used as a noun,) would be left in doubt ; so we should say cupiditas plara habendi, and not cupiditds plurium habendorum.
2d. In English almost always the gerund (or active) construction is used ; and so, in translating the above sentences, only one form of words has been given for both modes of expression, except in the first case.
In the following exercises the words marked by italics, though the verb may in English be active, are to be trans- lated by the gerundive (or passive) construction.
EXERCISE 177. .
1. The art of educating boys is difficult. 2. Ye were wasting time in-sending embassies. 3. This nation is unskilled in (ad) the arts of besieging cities. 4. I was sent home (to treat) concerning exchanging prisoners. 5. Time was not given far-executing those things which had been determined-upon. 6. The Romans built (p. h.) a fort for-the- Bake-of defending the bridge.
132 LESSOR XCYIL [177.
EXERCISE 178.
1. Consul censebat id esse maximum vinculum socils in fide conti- nendls. 2. Hannibal dixit se Iberum trajecisse ad delendum nomen Romanorum, llberandumque orbem terrarum. 3. Hoc prlmo proelio facile apparuit campos patentes, quales sunt inter Padum Alpesque, bello geruudd Romanis aptos non esse. 4. YlgintI naves ad depopu- landam oram Italiae a Carthaginiensibus missae sunt. 5. Prudentia est rerum appetendarum et fugiendarum scientia. 6. Magnas copias misimus non ad tuendos tantummodo veteres socios eonciliandosque novos, sed etiam ad pellendum Hispania Hasdrubalem. 7. Hannibal quingentos equites ad depopulandos socioram popull Romani agros mittit 8. Optimi auctores traduut, blduo vix locum rate jungendo flumini inventum esse.
NOTE. — It will be well for teachers to exercise their pupils in altering the above Latin sentences into the active (gerund) construction.
LESSON XCVII.
177. The gerundive is very often used in connection with verbs denoting to transfer, to let out, to hire, <£c., in agreement with the object of those verbs if they be active, and with their subject if they be passive. Such verbs are /oca-, " let-out at rent," comluc-, " hire," suacipfj)-, " un- dertake," cura-, " take care," <fcc., <fcc. In this construc- tion it is implied, that the purpose of the action is, that something should be done to the object or subject. This will be clear from the following examples.
Columnam conduxerat faciendam. Lit., he had hired a {pillar to be made) i. e., he had contracted to build a pillar.
Pontem in Arari faciendum curat. Lit., he takes care of a (bridge to be made^) i. e., he has a bridge built over the Saone.
TJrbs militibus dlripienda data est. The city was given to the soldiers to be plundered. Lit., (a to be plundered city) was given to the soldiers.
It will be seen from the above sentences that the ge- rundive, in. agreement with the object or subject, is in reality nothing more than an adjective, and forms with the noun a compound object or subject.
ITS, 179.] LESSON XCVIIL 133
EXERCISE 179.
1. The Roman people gave the war to Crassus to carry-on. 2 The consul had (cura-) the deserter led back to the king. 3. Conon had (cura-) the walls of Athens repaired. 4. They contracted (loca-) with him (dat.) to make a monument of-marble (adj.). 5. The great king had (cura-) the Roman citizens in all Asia butchered in-one day. 6. Antigonus gave the dead chief to his relations to bury.
EXERCISE 180.
1. Posters die praetor vestimenta exercitui praebenda locat. 2. Mer- cator tabulas ac statuas in Italiam portandas conduxit. 3. Bonus praeceptor ingeniorum discrimma notat eorum, quos erudiendos susce- pit. 4. Caesar longls navibus exercitum transportandum curaverat. 5. Caesar quam plurimas naves hieme aedificandas veteresque reficien- das curat. 6. Natura res domesticas procurandas et administrandas mulieribus dedit. 7. Caesar captam urbem dlripiendam militibus con- cessit. 8. Puerls bonds libros legendos damus.
LESSON XCVIII.
It was said in § 168, that the gerundive, besides its use as a simple adjective (or a future participle), was used in a peculiar sense in connection with the verb es-.
178. The gerundive being an adjective, can of course only be used to complete the meaning of es-, (see § 79) and must therefore agree in case, gender, and number with the subject of it. Take for example the sentence, epistola est scnbenda : " a letter is to be written." This being the literal meaning of the words, from it grew naturally the sense, " a letter must be written."
1 79. The gerundive, then, when used to complete the meaning of es-, always implies the notion of duty or necessity. This notion however is not to be sup- posed to belong to the gerundive itself, but arises from its connection with es-. It was seen in § 80, that es-, when followed by a dative case, denoted possession : as, est mihi liber, " I have a book." So in this case the full
12
134 LESSOX XCVIIL [ISO.
phrase would be epistola est mihi scribenda : " a letter is to me to be written," or " I have a letter to write," or again, " I must write a letter."
The following examples will serve to illustrate this mat- ter, and to show some of the modes of expression which may be used in English in translating this construction of the gerundive.
Vir tibi non est contemnen- The man ought not to be de-
dus. spiscd by you.
Ager nobis erat diligentis- We had to cultivate the field
sime colendus. very carefully.
Leges patriae nobis sunt ob- We should observe the laws
servandae. of (our) country.
Omnes vobis cruciatus per- You will have to endure all
ferendi erunt. torments.
Dixit omnes vobis cruciatus He said that you would have
perferendos fore. (fut. in- to endure all torments.
fin. of es-)
1 8O. If these examples are carefully studied, it will be seen that —
1st. They ah* imply duty, necessity, or obligation of some kind.
2d. The person on whom the obligation rests is put in the dative case.
3d. The time of the obligation is expressed by the proper tense of es-.
Though in ah1 the above examples the dative case and the verb es- are expressed, in order to exhibit the full construction, it will be seen in the following exercises that
1st. The dative is often omitted, when the person who is obliged, &c., is sufficiently apparent from other con- siderations.
2d. The verb es- is also not unfrequently omitted, when the time of the obligation is clearly known. This is par- ticularly the case when es- would be in the infinitive mood ; as then the time is commonly marked by the principal verb.
181.] LESSOX XCIX. 135
EXERCISE 181.
1. The arrogance of Ariovistus is not to be borne. 2. Ye ought not to neglect our wrongs. 3. I said that ye ought not to neglect our wrongs. 4. The long ships, which have been most seriously shattered, will have to be repaired by-the-Grallic workmen. 5. I perceive that I shall be (fore) obliged to carry on the war in dangerous places. 6. We must hold the assemblies of the province.
EXERCISE 182.
1. Omnes, qui aderant, conclamabant, occasionem non esse amitten- dam. 2. Bellum cum Saguntlnls susceptum cum Romanls habendum erit. 3. Ego censeo istum juvenem dorm tenendum esse, et sub legibus, sub magistratibus docendum vivere cum ceterls aequo jQre. 4. Decre- vimus legiltos extemplo Romam nobis mittendos esse. 5. Harum omnium re rum casus nostrls navibus erat extimescendus. 6. In omnibus negotils adhibenda est praeparatio diligens. 7. Neque mihi legates audiendos neque conditioned abhostibus accipiendas arbitrabar. 8. Hi quiturpis- simam servitutem deditionis nomine appellant, neque clvium loco hab- eridl sunt, neque ad consilium adhibendl.
LESSON XCIX.
It was seen in § 138, that intransitive verbs, though they cannot have a passive voice in any proper sense, are yet used impersonally in the passive ; and it is clear that the construction of the gerundive, explained in the last lesson, can only be properly made use of in the case of transitive verbs ; for unless we could say : scnbo episto- lam, we could not say : epistola est mihi scrlbenda.
181. Intransitive verbs, however, have an imper- sonal gerundive construction, i. e., the neuter nom. or ace. sing, of the gerundive is employed with es- and a dative to imply that the action of the verb must be done ; just as the 3d person sing, of intransitive verbs was seen to be used, and in the perfect tenses in the neu- ter gender. See the examples in § 138.
Thus from the intransitive verb pugna- we have
Pagnatur, a battle is being fought.
136 LESSOX C.
Pugnutum est., a battle was fought.
Pugnandum est mini, a battle must be fought by me ; or, I must fight.
182. This neater nom. sing, of the gerundive is the same in form as the gerund, and like the gerund, governs the same ease as the verb from which it is made. Let the following examples be carefully studied —
Proficisendum mihi est hoc This very day I am obliged
ipso die. to set out.
Tibi vlribus utendum erit. You will have to use (your)
strength. OblTviscendum vobls injuria- / think that you ought tofor-
rum esse censeo. get injuries.
EXERCISE 183.
1. TVe ought immediately to run-to-meet the enemy. 2. Te had at- the-same-time to stand-your-ground in the waves, and to fight with the enemy. 3. It is the duty of all men to resist injustice. 4. We shall be obliged to have recourse to (ad) force. 5. I think that the horse- soldiers ought to advance farther and to retreat more quickly. 6. No- one ought to fear without cause.
EXERCISE 184.
1. Secundissimis rebus consilio amlcorum utendum est. 2. Omnes eonclamamus nemini dubitandum esse de vestra fide. 3. Cicero docet oratdribus disputandum esse de omm re in contrarias partes. 4. Miserts mulieribus quam prlmum ex insula fugiendum erit. 5. His rebus adductus statui non diutius expectandum esse. 6. Putavimus nobis confligendum fore sub oculis imperatoris. 7. Permotus hominum fania, scribendum ad te existimavi. 8. Xonnulli censebant de tertia vigilia in castra ad mare recedendum.
LESSON C.
The following exercises contain examples of the sev- eral uses of the gerund and gerundive, as explained in the previous lessons.
EXERCISE 185.
1. Hannibal ordered (p. h.) the officer, by kind words to entice the townsmen to (ad) open (their) gates, and receive a garrison. 2. The
183, 184.] LESSON CI. 137
dictator had gone to-Rome for-the-sake of taking-again (repet-) tlie auspices. 3. The lieutenant was sent by the consul to (ad) receive the old army, and conduct (it) thence into Sicily. 4. The consul had (cura-) the new legion transported at-the-earliest-moment (primo quoque tern- pore) into Sardinia. 5. The senate of all the tribes came-together thither to (ad) deliberate in-common. 6. They thought that the Punic alliance and friendship ought-to-be-desired-before the Roman.
EXERCISE 186.
1. Ea pars concilil vlcit, quae nihil raptim nee temere agendum, con- sulendumque de integro censuit. 2. Consul in Campaniam profectus est ad permutandos exercitus. 3. Summus magistrates instruendae fraudl intentior fuit quam muniendls castrls aut ulll mllitari open. 4. Pos- terum diem sepeliendo utrimque caesos in acie cousumpserunt. 5. Ibi, nullo ad evagandum spatio, comminus consertae sunt manus. 6. Pe- cunia in stipendium, vestlmentaque et frumentum exercitui desuut; haec omnia ab Roma vobis mittenda sunt. 7. Prodeundum in con- tionem Fulvio praetor! est, et publicae necessitates populo indicandae sunt. 8. Ducit imperator exercitum ad castra maxima oppugnanda quibus Hasdrubal praeerat.
LESSON CI.
183. There remains to be treated of one more verbal called the supine. This is a noun occurring only in the accusative and ablative cases sing. It may be most readily formed by changing the o- of the 3d stem into u-.
Thus from 3. amatQ- we get the supine stem amatu-. And from amatu- we have ace. sing, amatiun.
dbl. sing, amatu.
We will speak first of the accusative supine.
184. The accusative Supine is used only after verbs implying motion, and expresses the purpose of that mo- tion.
EXAMPLES.
Ad Caesarem congratula- They came to Caesar to cow- turn convenerunt. aratulate (him).
Quinque cohortes fr umenta- He sent five cohorts to get corn. turn misit.
12*
138 LESSON GIL [1§5, 1§6.
EXERCISE 187.
1 . "We came to surrender our kingdom and ourselves (nosmet i})sds).
2. The soldiers had advanced farther from the camp to-provide-foddtr.
3. Ambassadors of the Aedui came to-compkrin. concerning the arro- gance of Ariovistus. 4. The strangers are-coming into the city to witness the games. 5. I will not go to-be-a-slave to Grecian matrons. 6. Coriolanus went-away among (in ace), the Yolsci to-live-in-exile.
EXERCISE 188.
1. Camillus, post multa in patriam merita, judicio populi damnatus, exsulatum abiit. 2. Barbari ad socios legatum mittunt, subsidium rogatum. 3. Plerique de more salutatum Ibant consulem. 4. Hae aves cum sole cubitum eunt. 5. Deus et diligendus est et timendus. 6. Recte dictum est, parcendum esse victis. 7. Non corpori soli sub- veniendum est, sed mentl atque auimo multo magis. 8. Resistendum seuectutl est, ejusque vitia diligentia compensanda sunt. 9. Is oppor- tunus visus est locus communiendo praesidio.
LESSON CII.
1 8d. The ablative supine is used as an ablative of limitation after some adjectives. (See § 57.)
EXAMPLES.
Hoc factu turpe est. This is base to do, (lit., in the
doing.)
onttio sapientium jucunda The talk of the wise is pleas- est audStu. ant to hear, (lit., in the hear-
ing.)
186. A common use of the accusative su- pine is to form a future infinitive passive, in
connection with ir7, which is the imperfect infinitive pas- sive of *-, "go," and is of course used impersonally, (see § 138). The "following are examples of it —
1§6.] LESSON GIL 139
Spero causammeam proba- I hope that my cause will be
turn hi. approved.
Spero consilia mea proba- / hope that my plans will be
turn hi. approved.
On this construction it is to be observed that —
(1.) hi properly means people are going , or it is being gone (by people).
(2.) Probatum is the accus. supine, in its ordinary sense, expressing the purpose of the verb of motion irl.
(3.) The words causam and consilia, which seem to be the subjects of probatum iri, are really the objects of pro- batum.
(4.) Probatum not being a participle, of course does not change its form to agree with the noun after which it stands.
(5.) The supine with Iri can be treated as if it were a regularly formed future infinitive passive ; it is however only used when .the future action spoken of is likely to occur soon.
EXERCISE 189.
1. That (isto-) philosophy is easy to understand. 2. Virtue is difficult to attain (invent-) • it wants a guide and director. 3. You will do what appears (fut.) best to be done. 4. All hoped that the wicked deserter would be slain. 5. Ye said that an opportunity of fighting would be given in some place. 6. We were pointing-out to the Gauls that they would be deprived of-their liberty (dbl).
EXERCISE 190...
1. Omnia praeteribo, quae mihi turpia dictu videbuntur. 2. Consul multa pfoelia parfa, haud ulhim dignum memoratu, fecit. 3. Nihil dictu visuque foedum in haec llmina admittendum est. 4. Prodigiura visu mirabile accidit. 5. Quo brevior narratio est, eo facilior intellectu,
6. Video hunc improbura hominem a suo ipsius iniraico occlsum iri.
7. Caesar longius bellum ductum iri existimans, in provinciam legatum misit rel frumentariae causa. 8. Hoc omne assignatum Iri aut perti- naciae ineae aut timorl videbam.
140 -LESSON CITL [186.
LESSON CIII.
The following exercises will contain examples of the nse of all the verbals, nouns as well as adjectives, and it is hoped that the teacher will take this opportunity of seeing that his pupils thoroughly comprehend the forma- tion and use of each, by constant reference to what has before been said in treating of them separately.
EXERCISE 191.
1. Next day, Caesar having-advanced a little from the larger camp, gave (fac(i)-) the enemy an opportunity of fighting. 2. "When he un- derstood that they were not-even-then (ne turn guidem) coming-forth (prodi-) he led-baek his army into the camp. 3. At sunset Ario- vistus led-back his forces, many wounds having been given (infer-) and received. 4. In judging, haste is to be avoided. 5. The women, weeping, with-hands outspread (passo-) encouraged the soldiers setting- out for (in) battle. 6. Swallows (when) about-to-fly-away into 6ther lands, take-their departure (emigra-) in-oneway.
EXERCISE 192.
1. Hostes terga verterunt, neque prius fugere destiterunt, quam ad flumen Rhenum pervenerunt. 2. Reliquos omnes nostri equitatu con- secuti ititerfecerunt. 3. Jucundus est auditu cantus lusciniae. 4. Ante hiemem hirundines e nostristerris emigrant, alibi habitatum. 5. Camelus non tantuin ad portandum sedetiam ad equitandum idoneus est. 6. Nun- tifitum erat, castra postero die expugnatum iri. 7. Hos viros conantes dicere Ariovistus prohibuit, et in catenas conjecit. 8. Imperator oppi- dum expugnare conatus, dCfendentibus civibus Romanls militibusque, quos praesidil causa mlserat Caesar, triduum moratus, paucis in oppug- uatione amissls, re infecta inde discessit.
187, 188.] LESSON CIV. 141
LESSON CIV.
It is intended that pupils who have advanced to this point shall now begin to read some continuous Latin author: either the easy Roman history which is given immediately before the vocabulary at the end of the book; or, if they are already quite familiar with the forms and their uses hitherto treated of, the Commen- taries of Caesar. But, whichever course be pursued, it is necessary that the forms of the subjunctive mood be first learned.
187. The subjunctive mood, as its name im- plies, is in strictness only to be used in sentences sub- joined to primary sentences: i. e., in what have been called secondary sentences. The exceptions to this and the various uses of the subjunctive mood will be explained in subsequent lessons. But it is best that the tenses of it, which are very easy, should be learned at once. No English meanings are assigned to them, as the possible ones are so various that it is thought the assumption of one or two for each tense would only tend to render the further progress of the pupil more difficult.
188. The subjunctive mood in Latin has four tenses, viz. :
The imperfect, present and. past. The perfect, present and past.
The following are the general rules for the formation of these tenses, which are given at length below :
I. For the imperfect tenses active and passive we have as tense-endings —
142
LESSON CIY,
[1§§.
for the present,
if the 1st stem ends in «-, a changed to e. " " u e-, a- added.
u u u ^ u u
*~j
it it II n. it tt
U
for the past, -re- added.
ere-
any consonant, " To these tense-forms the regular active and passive person-endings are attached.
II. For the perfect tenses active we have as tense- endings added to the 2d stem,
for the present, ; ' for the past,
eri- isse-
m. The perfect tenses passive are made by attach- ing the perfect participle passive to the present and past imperfect subjunctive tenses of the verb es-, in the same way as the corresponding tenses of the indicative mood are made. These tenses of es- are given below.
The following table exhibits at length the subjunctive tenses of the four conjugations. I. Imperfect.
Pre*. ac#. S.
P.
Pres. pas. S.
P.
Past act. S.
P.
|
1. ama-. |
1. mone-. |
1. audi-. |
1. reg-. |
|
1 amem. |
moneara. |
audiam. |
regam. |
|
2 ames. |
moneas. |
audiaa |
regas. |
|
3 amet. |
moneat. |
audiat. |
regat. |
|
1 am em us. |
moneamus. |
audiamus. |
regamus. |
|
2 ametis. |
moneatis. |
audiatis. |
regatis. |
|
3 ament. |
moneant |
audiant. |
regant. |
|
1 amer. |
monear. |
audiar. |
regar. |
|
2 ameris or |
monearis or |
audiaris or |
regaris or |
|
amere. |
moneare. |
audiare. |
regare. |
|
3 ametur. |
moneatur. |
audiatur. |
regatur. |
|
1 amemur. |
moneamur. |
audiamur. |
regamur. |
|
2 amemiuL |
moneamiiiL |
audiaminL |
regamini. |
|
3 amentur. |
moneantur. |
audiantur. |
regantur. |
|
1 amarem. |
monerem. |
audlrem. |
regerem. |
|
2 amarCs. |
moneres. |
audires. |
regeres. |
|
3 amaret. |
moneret. |
audlret. |
regeret. |
|
1 amaremus. |
moneremus. |
audiremus. |
regeremus. |
|
2 atnaretis. |
mbneretis |
audlretis. |
regeretis. |
|
3 amarent. |
monerent. |
audlrent |
regerent |
!§§.]
LESSON CTV.
143
Past pass. S.
P.
1 amarer. monerer. audirer. regerer.
2 amareris or monereris or audireris or regerf ris or amarere. mouerere. audlrere. regerGre.
3 amaretur. moneretur. audlretur. regeretur.
1 amaremur. moneremur. audiremur. regeremur.
2 amareminl. moneremini. audirem'inl. regeremim.
3 amarentur. monerentur. audlrentur. regerentur.
II. Perfect.
NOTE. — As the perfect tenses of all Latin verbs are made alike, it will be enough to give one example of each tense.
2d stem, amav-.
Pres. act. S.
P.
1 amaverim.
2 amaveris.
3 amaverit.
1 amaverimus.
2 amaveritis.
3 amaverint.
Past. act. S.
P.
1 amavissem.
2 amavisses.
3 amavisset.
1 amavissemus.
2 amavissetis.
3 amavissent.
|
3d stem, amato-. |
|||||
|
amatus, or |
!sim. |
( amatus or |
( essem. |
||
|
Pres. pass. S. |
amata, or |
sis. |
Past pass. S. |
< amata, or |
< esses. |
|
amatum |
sit. |
( amatum |
( esset. |
||
|
amati, or |
( simus. |
I amati, or |
{essemus. |
||
|
p. |
amatae, or |
•j sitis. |
P. |
•< amatae, or |
essetis. |
|
amata |
( sint. |
( amata |
essent. |
NOTE. — 1st. The forms of the present perf. active subjunctive are very similar to those of the future perfect indicative, and the quantity of the i in the 2d pers sing, and the 2dand 3d pers. plur. is said to be common, i. e., long or short; but it is probable that properly the vowel is short in the fut.perf. indie, and long in the pres. perf. subjunc.
2d. "When the 2d stem is made by the ending -v-, that consonant is often omitted, and the quantity of the preceding vowel is changed, or contraction takes place, as in the corresponding tenses of the indicative. See § 91.
144
LESSOX err.
[1§9.
3d. The conjugation of the imperfect tenses subjunctive of es- is given above, in showing the perfect passive tenses of other verbs. From poles-, "be able," a contraction takes place and we have —
P.
Pres. imperf. subj.
1 possim (for pot- sim).
2 possis.
3 possit.
1 posslmus.
2 possitis.
3 possint
Past imperf. subj. possem (for pot- essem). posses. posset, possemus. possetis. possent
4th. From verbs like cap(i) the past imperf. subj. is made without the t, and therefore the connecting vowel is employed. Thus, we have for the past imperf. subjunctive —
Active. ( 1 caperem. S. -{ 2 caperes. 3 caperet.
1 caperemus.
2 caperetis.
3 caperent
P.-
Passive.
1 caperer.
2 capereris.
3 caperetur.
1 caperemur.
2 caperemini.
3 caperentur.
5th. Tlie perfect tenses of es- are made regularly from the stem fu-. From potes- we have, as before, the 2d stem potu~.
These tenses should now be thoroughly learned ; and to give oppor- tunity for this no exercise is here inserted. But if it is judged best, a reading lesson may be assigned from the little history found at the end of the book.
189.] LESSON GV.
LESSON CY.
189. It was said in § 187, that the subjunctive mood properly is employed only in secondary sentences ; i. e., in sentences attached as adjectives or adverbs to
primary sentences. But a more complete statement of the facts is now desirable.
Ah1 language consists in general either of
(1.) Assertions, as: The sun shines^
or (2.) Questions, " Does the sun shine ?
" (3.) Commands, " Stand still, O sun. " (4.) Adverbial or adjective sentences attached to any one of these.
NOTE.— *It is clear that the last class must always be used in connec- tion with other sentences ; and they are therefore called in this book secondary sentences.
Sentences which contain assertions, questions or commands may stand either
(1) alone and independently, or (2) dependently as object or subject of another verb.
In the first case they are called principal sentences ; in the second they are called nominal sentences, as occupying the place of nouns to the principal verb.
The table given on p. 146 presents these remarks in one view; and that on p. 147 is a repetition of the same in its essential features, but with the addition of a gen- eral statement of the cases in which the different moods of the Latin verb should be employed. 13
146
LESSON CY.
[189.
SYNOPSIS OF THE PABTS OF SIMPLE AND COMPLEX PBOPOSITIONS.
either Primary, *. e. such as can stand indepen- dently. These
either Principal,
ather assertions
These can be
Or commands.
or Nominal, i. e. C either assertions now used as the
object or subject of •< or questions, a verb. These can be ^or commands.
or Secondary,
t. e. such as can- not stand inde-^ pendeutly. These are
either Adjectival.^
t. e. introduced by the relative pronoun.
or Adverbial, t. e.
introduced by some subj unction.
either to Prin- cipal sen- tences,
or to Nominal sentences,
or to other Secondary sentences.
189.]
LESSON CY.
147
SYNOPSIS OF THE EULES FOB THE USE OF THE MOODS OF THE LATIN VEEB.
Primary. •<
Principal.
Nominal.
(1.) Assertions. Indicative.
(2.) Questions. Indicative.
(3.) Commands. Imperative.
(1.) Assertions. Infinitive.
Subjunctive. For
limitations see Less. CXXXIY., § 239.
(2.) Questions.
(3.) Commands. Subjunctive
(1.) Principal sentences. Indicative or Subjunctive, according to the relation existing between the Primary and Secondary.
Secondary, attached! (2.) Nominal sentences. Subjunctive.
to,
For limitations see Lesson CXXXVL, §240.
(3.) Secondary sentences. The same
mood as occurs in the first secondary sentences. But see Less. CXXXVL
148 LESSOX CVL [19O.
It is not, of course, expected that the whole meaning of the above tables will be fully appreciated at once. But they may be made somewhat familiar to the pupils' minds even now: and they should be constantly referred to during the course of the ensuing lessons, in which the whole subject will be further elucidated. Xo exercises are given in this les- son, for the same reason as that for which they have heretofore been occasionally omitted. But one remark more is made here.
The indicative mood is used for the statement of facts.
The subjunctive mood is used for the statement of thought* or conception*.
The following sentence will serve for an illustration of this:
Aliis nocent, ut in alios liberales suit.
They injure some, that they may be generous to others.
Here the injury is spoken of as a lact. Their being generous is not spoken of as a fact, but as the thought or conception which is in their minds when they do their acts of injustice.
LESSON CYI.
We shall speak first of the subjunctive mood as used in secondary sentences.
19O. The subjunctive mood is used in all sec- ondary sentences which express the object or purpose of an action. These are called final sentences. (See § 1 1 9.)
Such final sentences are introduced,
(1.) By the (2.) " " (3.) " "
the subjunction ut, "in order that."
" 7^,"inorderthat— not," "lest." quo,. " in order that," when there is a comparative in the final sentence. (4.) By the relative pronoun quo-.
191.] LESSON CYI. 149
NOTE. — The temporal particles, dum, donee, " until," are in the same way followed by the subjunctive mood, when they imply that the ac- complishment of a purpose is the limit of the time.
EXAMPLES.
(1.) Edimus ut vivamus. We eat that we may live (or
to live).
(2.) In silvam aufugit ne He fled into the wood that he caperetur. might not be caught (or
lest he should be caught].
(3.) Obducuntur cortice Trunks of trees are sheathed trunci, quo sint a frigo- with bark that they may be ribus tutiores. safer from the cold.
(4.) Caesar equites prae- Caesar sent horsemen before misit qui viam explora- him, who were to examine rent. the road (or to examine
the road).
NOTE. — In examples 1st and 4th it will be observed that in English we can express purpose by the simple infinitive mood. But it must be particularly remembered that this is not the case in Latin (except sometimes in poetry), but all such final sentences must have the subjunc- tive mood. ^
191. It remains to state briefly the rules for the sequence of tenses, which tell us how we are to
determine which of the tenses of the subjunctive mood is to be employed in each case.
As there are only four tenses of the subjunctive mood, two imperfect and two perfect, the proper tense to use can be discovered by answering two questions :
I. Must the verb in the subjunctive be Imperfect or perfect ?
II. Must the verb in the subjunctive be present or past?
In order to answer these questions the following rules must be strictly heeded :
13*
150 LESSON CYL [192; 197.
192. I. (i.) We must use an imperfect tense of the subjunctive mood if the action spoken of
in the secondary sentence be regarded as unfinished at the time denoted by the verb in the primary sentence.
193. (2.) We must use a perfect tense of the subjunctive mood, if the action spoken of in the secondary sentence be regarded as finished at the. time denoted by the verb in the primary sentence.
194. n. (i.) We must use a present tense of the subjunctive mood, when the verb in the pri- mary sentence is in either a present or a future tense. •
19o. (2.) We must use a past tense of the subjunctive mood, when the verb in the primary sentence is in a past or the aorist tense.
196. (3.) We may use either a present or a past tense of the subjunctive mood, when the verb in the primary sentence is in the historical present.
197. XOTE. — Sometimes the present perfect subjunctive is used as an £LOri§t after a past tense in the primary sentence.
The pupils can of course only become familiar with these rules by practice. But it is recommended that the teacher should go over each of the sentences in the ensu- ing exercise with them, and point out how they should apply the rules in each case, in order to determine the proper mood and tense to be employed. Occasionally in the exercises the verbs which are to be in the sub- junctive mood will be printed in italics.
EXERCISE 193.
1. I shall send you to-Rome, in-order-that you may secure peace and friendship with the Roman people. 2. Caesar moved-back the horses of-all that lie might take-away the hope of flight. 3. Caesar set-out with all diligence lest such-great nations should be united. 4. You have sta- tioned (dispon-) garrisons (in various places) in-order-that (quo) you may the-more-easily keep off the enemy. 5. "Words were invented to indicate (with rel.) the will. 6. The general will place guards over-you (dot.) in-order-that he may be able to discover your plots.
19§.j LESSOR CVIII. 151
LESSON CVII.
EXERCISE 194.
1. Caesar resolved that he-ought-to-proceed against (in ace.) them on-tlris-account (eo) the more-severely, in-order-that for (in ace.) the time to-come (reliquo-)the right of ambassadors might be more carefully kept by barbarians. 2. That foolish man makes-up (fing-) a (new) face and a (new) gait for-himself, in-order-that he may appear more-dignified. 3. Caesar sent-forward (p. h.) all the cavalry, to the number of four thousand, to (rel.) see the march of the enemy. 4. The townsmen sent ambassadors to Rome, who were-to-ask aid from the senate. 5. Themis- tocles persuaded the people that a fleet of a hundred ships should be built. 6. Pompey, alarmed by the words of Caesar, in order that he might the more easily retard the attack of the soldiers blocked up (p. h.) the gates, lest immediately-on (sub ipsa) (his) departure the army sftould burst-into the town.
LESSON CVIII.
108. We have seen that the subjunctive mood, being the mood of conceptions, is used in all sentences which contain the statement of a purpose (final-scn-
tences). But further : if the action which is performed for a certain purpose, is continued successfully until the purpose is attained, the purpose has become a conse- quence.
Take the following examples :
(1.) Curro ut sudem. I run that I may sweat.
(2.) Ita cucurrl ut suda- Iran so that I sweated. rem.
From a comparison of these two sentences it will be seen that in both the secondary sentence stands in the same kind of relation to the primary sentence : i. e. the mind conceives a connection as existing between them and the primary sentences : and so, though in the second example the secondary sentence contains the statement of
152 LESSON CTOL [199, 20O,
a fact and not of a mere thought, in Latin the subjunc- tive mood is still employed, just as if the sentence con- tained the statement of a mere purpose. It is hoped that this explanation will be made intelligible to the pupils by the teacher ; at any rate they can find no diffi- culty in learning the following rule :
199. All secondary sentences ichich contain the state- ment of a consequence (called COllSCClltiVC Senten- ces) have their verbs in the subjunctive lUOOd.
In such secondary sentences the consequence is
!1.) Positive : introduced by ut, "so that." 2.) Negative : " ut non^ " so that-not."
EXAMPLES.
(1.) Sol efficit, ut oirmia The sun makes all things
floreant. flourish.
(2.) Turn forte aegrota- I happened to be itt, so that
bam, ut ad tuas nuptias I could not come to your
venire non possem. wedding.*
200. XOTE. — Sometimes, when the negative consequence has been aimed at, and has been consciously intended, it is introduced by ne, which is properly used only to introduce a negative purpose, as. ne moriar efficere non potestis, You cannot bring it about that I shall not die.
EXEECISE 195.
1. The city has been so excellently fortified that ye cannot take it. 2. This nation has in all time so deserved of (de) the Roman people, that it ought not to be led-away into slavery. 3. This town was so- well (sic) fortified by the nature of the place, that it afforded (da-) great means (sing.) for (ad) prolonging the war. 4. No one is so mad as-to (ut) grieve by his own will. 5. This is a common vice in great and free states, that envy is the attendant of glory. 6. You-are-distant so-far from the completion of the greatest works, that you have not-yet laid (jac(i)-) the foundations.
201.] LESSON CX. 153
LESSON CIX.
EXERCISE 196.
1 . Caesar demanded these things of (a) me : first, that I should not lead a multitude of men across the Rhine into Gaul; secondly that I should give-back the hostages to-the-Aedui. 2. So great fear suddenly seized all the army, that (it) alarmed in-no-slight-degree (nan mediocriter) the minds of all. 3. Some (men), induced by shame, remained, in-order- tliat they might avoid the suspicion of fear. 4. So great was the quick- ness of these foot-soldiers by-practice, that, raising themselves (sublevati) by the manes of the horses, they equalled (their) speed (cursu-). 5. Ariovistus sent about sixteen thousand men (genii.} uriiucumbered, with all the cavalry: which forces were-lo-frighten our-men, and hinder (them) from fortifying (munition-). 6. The enemy charged-forward so suddenly and quickly, that room for-hurliug (genii.) the javelins against the enemy was not given.
LESSON CX.
20 1. We saw in § 186 that the want of a regularly formed future infin. passive was commonly supplied by the infin. irl with the accusative supine. But we find very often the future infin. both active and passive expressed by the combination of fore (or, less com- monly, faturum esse), the future infin. of es-, with an infperfect tense of the subjunctive mood depending upon ut (consecutive) : as,
Persuasum est Stoicis fore Tlie Stoics have believed that
aliquando ut omnis hie one day all this world
mundus ardore deflagret. will be burnt with fire.
Existimo ex hac re futurum I think that in consequence
esse, ut totms Galliae of this thing the affections
animi a me avertantur. of the whole of Gaul will
be averted from me.
In the first of these examples the nominal sentence might have been omnem hunc mundum ardore deflagra- turum esse. In the second it might have been animos totius Galliae a me aversum iri. But see §186 (5.)
154 LESSON CXL [2O2, 2O3.
2O2. NOTE. — Wfon the verb has no 3d stem, and consequently no future partic. active and no supine, this circumlocution must neces- sarily be employed.
It will be well for the teacher to make his pupils trans- late the future infin. in both ways where it is practicable.
EXERCISE 197.
1. I assert that in-a-short-time (brevi) he will be torn-in-pieces by dogs. 2. It had formerly been foretold to Xero by astrologers, that at- some-time (quandoque) he would be abandoned. 3. Some of (tx) the prisoners made-their-way (perveni-) to the Gauls, and assured (demonatra-) them (dat.) that the remaining legions would not dare to stand-their- ground against (them). 4. The chiefs of the states thought that in-a- few years they would all be driven out of Gaul, and all the Germans would cross the Rhine. 5. I hope that that distinguished fortune may happen (conting-) to-us. 6, I hope that you will soon (brevi) cure all these troubles.
LESSON CXI.
2O3. After verbs and phrases which denote hin- drance, prevention, resistance, &c., the act which is prevented is in the subjunctive mood, introduced by the words quominus or ne: the former implying merely the fact of the prevention, the latter, (for the most part) this besides, that the prevention was aimed at and designed. But quominus may be always used.
EXAMPLES.
Rebus terrenis multa exter- Many outward circumstan- na possunt obsistere, quo- ces can prevent earth- minus perficiantur. ly things from being
brought to perfection.
Impedior dolore animi ne I am prevented by indig- de hujus miseria plura di- nation from saying more cam. about this persons wretch-
edness.
2O4.] LESSON CXII. 155
EXERCISE 198.
1. Age does not hinder us from continuing our studies even (usque) to the last period of life. 2. It was-owing (sta-) to (per) Trebonius that the soldiers did not gain-possession-of the town. 3. They pointed- out that in-former battles it-had-been-owing (sta-) to (per) the leaders, not to the soldiers, that-they-did-not (ne) conquer. 4. I am prevented (interdud-) by grief from writing more (pi.) to you. 5. He was hin- dered by-weakness of voice from speaking in public. 6. Death does not deter a wise man from consulting-for-the-interest-of (consiU-) the state (dat).
LESSON CXII.
2O i. We have seen that verbs denoting hindrance, <&c. , are followed by quominus. But if the verb or phrase which implies hindrance, prevention, doubt, be accompa- nied either
(1.) By a negative indicating the want of effectual hin- drance, &c. ; or (2.) By an adverb indicating the difficulty of effectual hindrance, <&c. ; the following subjunctive mood is ordinarily introduced by quin.
EXAMPLES.
Facere non possum, quin I cannot help sending you a
quotidie literas ad te muV letter every day.
tarn.
Milites aegre retenti sunt, The soldiers were hardly re-
quin in oppidum irrumpe- strained from bursting into
rent. the town.
!N"6n dubitari potest, quin There can be no doubt that
fuerint ante Homerum there were poets before Ho-
poetae. mer.
EXERCISE 199.
1. The barbarians will not restrain themselves from hastening into Italy. 2. The soldiers hardly restrained their passion (animo-, pi.)
156 LESSON" CXIY. [2O5, 206.
from instantly making the attack. 3. I do not doubt that I cannot avoid the offence of negligence. 4. It is not doubtful that he who is called generous and kind follows duty, not profit. 5. There is nothing so difficult but-that it can be investigated by inquiry (ycrund). 6. Xo- thing is-wanting (abes-) for-my-being (quln sim) the most wretched (of men).
LESSON CXIII.
2O5. It is to be observed that a question often amounts in fact to a negative ; and therefore quln can be used after such sentences as if a negative particle were found In them : as,
Quis dubitare potest quln in No one can doubt that riches virtute divitiae suit ? are found in virtue.
EXERCISE 200.
1. "Who doubts that advantage can never contend with honor? 2. "Who is there, but (qum) sees- distinctly that there is great power in the senses? 3. I will not object that (quominus) all men should read my writings. 4. I was not able to manage (fac(i)-) not to declare to-you my opinion and choice. 5. He thought (he) ought-not to-delay to (quln) fight-it-out in-a-battle. 6. "We cannot object that (quln) other-people should disagree with (a) us.
LESSON CXIY.
It was seen in § 190 that the purpose of an action was sometimes expressed by an adjectival sentence introduced by quo- with its verb in the subjunctive. But adjectival sentences in many other cases besides have their verbs in the subjunctive mood. Some of these will be mentioned.
2O6. When the adjectival sentence is consecutive : «'. f., expresses a quality naturally fol- lowing upon and flowing out of the constitution and character of the noun which it qualifies, the verb is in the subjunctive mood.
206.] LESSON CXY. 157
EXAMPLES.
Sapientia est una, quae mae- Wisdom is the only thing stitiam pellat ex animis. which can drive away sor-
row from the soul.
Innocentia est affectio tails Innocence is such a condition animi, quae noceat nemini. of the mind as (which)
hurts no one.
NOTE. — Very often in such cases the antecedent to the relative pro- noun is accompanied by the adjectives tali-, "such," tanto-, "so great," &c., or the pronouns illo- or eo-, and similar expressions.
EXERCISE 201.
1. "Who can be so averse to (a) the truth, as-to (quo-} deny that all these-things are managed by the power of the immortal gods? 2. The officer was a man of-vigor (am-) and (one) who reposed no-confidence (nihil) in the faith of the Sicilians. 3. We want such a consul, as (quo-) separates himself from the society of impious citizens. 4. There is no state so firm, as-that-it (qua-) cannot be overthrown by hatred (pi.). 5. Nothing is so rough, so uncouth, as (quo-) not to be set off by oratory. 6. A good man will not dare to do or think any thing (quidquam) which he dares not mention-aloud.
LESSON CXY.
EXERCISE 202.
1. Who is so senseless as-that (quo-) those-things (you speak of) should move (him?) 2. No woman ever, (her) children being lost, has been (found) of so weak a mind (abl.) as-that-she has not made an end of mourning at-some-time (aliquando). 3: There is nothing so great and difficult which this man cannot accomplish. 4. There is no grief which length of time does not diminish and soften. 5. The-man (eo-) who does not fear death, because death has nothing (in it) which is to-be-shuddered-at, procures for himself a great security for (ad) a happy life. 6. Those-persons (eo-) bear with-vexation (inlquo animo) that they should-be-opposed-in-argument (redargu-)who are as-it-were (quasi) de- voted and consecrated to fixed and predetermined (destindto-) opinions. 14
158 LESSON CXYII. 2O7, 208.
LESSON CXVI.
SOT. When an adjectival sentence is used to describe the qualities of a class, which is only indefinitely alluded to in the primary sentence, it will have its verb in the subjunctive mood. This may be called a descriptive sentence. The primary sentence then often consists of a single verb, such as sunt, est, inveniuntur, &c.
EXAMPLE.
Sunt, qui discessum animi There are some who think a corpore putent esse mor- that death is the depart- tem. ure of the soul from the
body.
EXERCISE 203.
1. Some philosophers have been found, who said (past imp.) that pain was the greatest (summo-) evil 2. There were (some) who be- lieved that Crassus was not ignorant of the conspiracy. 3. In all ages, fewer men have been found who (conquered) their passions, than who conquered (past imp.) the forces of the enemy. 4. There have been some, who praised nothing, except what they were-confident that they could imitate. 5. There are some in this body (ordon-) who either do not see those-things which are-impending, or dissemble those-things which they do-see. 6. There are philosophers who think that the whole world (mundo-) is managed by the inind and reason of the gods.
LESSON CXVII.
Often an adjectival sentence is introduced to state the cause or ground of the assertion in the primary sentence, or to express the limitations with which the latter must be taken. In such cases the relative pronoun quo- is frequently strengthened by the use of the adverbs utpote^ ut, praesertim, quippe, and is followed by the subjunctive mood. Such adjectival sentences may be called causal
209.] LESSON CXYHL 159
sentences (adjectival); and are only slightly different in force from the adverbial causal sentences mentioned in § 118«
EXAMPLES.
Magna culpa Pelopis, qui Great was the fault of Pelops fllium non docuerit. in not teaching his son.
Lit : since he did not teach.
Peccasse mihi videor qui a / think I did wrong in leav- te discesserim. ing you. Lit : since I left
you.
Solis candor illustrior est, The light of the sun is bright- quam ullius ignis, quippe er than (that) of any fire, qui in immenso mundo since in the boundless uni- tam longe lateque collu- verse it shines so far and ceat. widely.
EXERCISE 204.
1. That man was a (person) of marvellous wakefulness (all) since-he (quo-) in-his- whole consulship did not see (aor. subj.) sleep. 2. Thence the consul kept-advancing with compact line, as-he (ut qui) saw-clearly that- they-had-come-up (perf. infin. pass, impers.) now near (ad) the enemy. 3. Crassus is wretched, since-he has lost (dlmitt-) by death that (great) fortune (pi): Pompey is wretched, since-he has been stripped-of so- great-glory (abl). All in-a- word (denique) are wretched who are- without (care-) this light (abl). 4. 0 fortunate youth, since-you (quo-) have found Homer (as) herald of your virtue. 5. I consider myself happy in having found such a friend. 6. To roe indeed the power of the tri- bunes of the common-people appears ruinous, since-it (quippe quae) was- produced (nala sit) in sedition, and for (ad) sedition.
LESSON CXYIIL
2O9. In the last lesson we saw that sometimes adjec- tival sentences are used to state the cause or ground of an assertion. But that notion is more commonly expressed by an adverbial sentence introduced by the subj unction quum, which has its verb in the subjunctive. Sentences of this class also may be called causal sentences (ad- verbial). (See § 118.).
160 LESSON CXIX. [21O.
NOTE. — Other particles introducing causal sentences are
quod, qufa, quoniam, quando. The verbs which follow these particles are usually in the indicative unless the cause is given in accordance with the views of the person spoken about, and not with those of the speaker.
EXERCISE 205.
1. Since life without friends is full of snares and fear, reason herself •warns (us) to procure friendships. 2. The king, since he did not dare to take-his-stand (consist-) on the common platforms, was accustomed to harangue from a high tower. 3. Since you have set-out to- Athens as to a mart of good arts, it is very disgraceful that (you) should return empty. 4. You were often, no-doubt (credo) when (since) you were at-Athens, in the schools of the philosophers. 5* Since these-things are so, that wish and opinion of-yours I praise and most earnestly ap- prove. 6. Since God has given you a soul, than which nothing is more excellent nor more divine, will you so (sic) throw-away and prostrate yourself, that there-may-be-no-difference (nihil intersit) between you and a beast?
LESSON CXIX.
21O. The events which succeed one another in the course of any action, are bound together by a chain of cause and effect, which connection is more or less capable of being recognized by us. Accordingly, when a series of events is being narrated historically in Latin, the sentences which mark the time of the principal action are intro- duced by the subj unction quum, and contain a past tense of the subjunctive mood ; e. g. —
Quum Caesar! id nuntiatum After this thing had been told esset, maturat ex urbe to Caesar, he hastened to proficisci. set out from the city.
In this case we can perceive that it is not only implied, that the report of the event preceded Caesar's departure in time, but that it is also represented as the cause of his departure. And as the mind apprehended this connection, the subjunctive mood (the mood of conceptions) is proper. But even when the connection of the antecedent
211, 212.] LESSON CXIX. 161
event with the principal one is not so apparent, the Ro- mans often employed the subjunctive mood, after the sub- junction quum, as if to imply that, whether they could see the connection or not, they believed that such a con- nection was there really. We have therefore this general rule for Temporal sentences.
311. The *lll> junction quum, in historical narration, is followed by a past tense of the sub- jlllictive mood, when the verb in the principal sentence is in the aorist, the historical present, or the past iniperiect (if the action be continued). In these cases quum before the past imperfect can generally be rendered " while," and before the past perfect can be rendered " after."
313. It must be particularly remembered that quum, as a temporal subjunction, cannot be followed by the sub- junctive mood, except in the past teilSCS. If other tenses are required the indicative mood must be used. If the temporal sentence be used merely to give the date as it were, or the exact time of the principal action, the indicative mood in any tense must be employed.
EXAMPLE.
Quum acerrime pugnaretur, While the battle was proceed- subito sunt Aedui visi ab ing with the greatest spirit, latere nostris aperto. the Aedui suddenly ap-
peared on the exposed flank of our men.
EXERCISE 206.
1. When the line of the enemy on (a) the left wing had been turned to (in) flight, on the right wing they pressed (past imp.) our line by the multitude of their (men.) 2, When P. Crassus, a young-man, who was- over the cavalry, had observed that, he sent the third line as-aid (dat.) to-our-rnen in-their-difficulty (labdrani(i)-). 3. After he had dispatched (dlmitt-) either legions or auxiliaries into all parts of the territories of Ambiorix, and had laid-waste all-things with slaughter (pi.) and fire (pl.\ he sent (p. h.) Labienus with two legions against the Treviri. 4. While for-some-time the battle-went-on (dimica-, pass, impers.) with- 14*
162 LESSON CXX. [213, 214.
the-greatest earnestness, the chief drew-up (p. h.) a line, -which was-to- be a protection (dat.) to his own cavalry. 5. When Caesar had come into the country, he ordered (p. h.) the states (dat.) (to provide) soldiers, and bade (p. h.) (them) to come-together into a fixed place. 6. While they, a circle having been made, were defending themselves, quickly about six thousand men (gen.) came-together to the shouting.
LESSON CXX.
213. In the last sentence of the preceding exercise, it would have been better English to say, "when they, having made a circle," &c. But we saw in treating of the participles, § 128, that there was no form in Latin an- swering to the English perfect participle active, except in the case of deponent verbs which have the passive forms but active meanings. Thus, we have in English,
" making" translated by facient(i)-.
"having been made" " " facto-.
" having made" " " no Latin form.
214. It was necessary therefore in order to express this last meaning to have recourse to some different mode of expression. When the active perfect participle is from a transitive verb and has its object expressed, the ablative absolute construction with the Latin perfect participle passive can be employed, as is done in the above sentence. But if the verb be intransitive, and therefore without an accusative of the object, no passive construction of it can be formed. In such cases the use of quum with the past perfect subjunctive spoken of in the last lesson is to be employed, unless the English active verb be represented by a Latin deponent verb ; in which case the perfect participle may be translated ex- actly. But the construction with quum is often employed when other combinations would be possible. The follow- ing table presents some of the ways in which the dif- ferent English participial expressions may be represented in Latin :
21-1.] LESSON CXX. ^ 163
(a) Imperfect active participle in English.
The tribune was killed while fighting with the enemy. Tribunus, adversus hostes pugnans, occlsus est. (1.)
" quum " " pugnaret, " " (2.)
(b) Perfect active participle in English.
The tribune, having taken the camp, was killed.
Tribunus, cum castra cepisset, occisus est. (3.)
" castiis captls, " " (4.)
" potltus (dep.) " " (5.)
(c) Imperfect passive participle in English.
The tribune, being hard-pressed by the enemy, was killed. Tribunus, quum ab hostibus premeretur, occisus est. (6.)
" hostibus eum prementibus, " " (7.)
(d) Perfect passive participle in English.
The tribune, having been taken by the enemy, was killed. Tribunus, ab hostibus captus, occisus est. (8.)
" quum " " captus esset, " " (9.)
The above modes of expression have been numbered, in order that by inserting the corresponding number after participial expressions in the subsequent lessons, the pupil may be aided in selecting the right form. This will not be done always : and it is therefore hoped that the teacher will keep his pupils long enough upon the present lesson to enable them to understand the cases in which the dif- ferent modes of expression are proper or possible.
EXERCISE 207.
1. Lentulus having come (3) to Rome for-the-purpose-of (ad) open- ing (gerundive) the treasury, being terrified (8) by the approach of Caesar, fled out-of the city. 2. The soldiers having fortified (3) the camp, Hannibal himself, with the-light-armed (expedite-} hastily traversed (p. h.) the defiles. 3. The Helvetii, observing (2) that Caesar had- crossed the river, sent ambassadors to him. 4. The Aedui not being able (2) to defend themselves, sent to-ask aid. 5. The eagle-bearer (aquilifero-) being hard-pressed (6) by-a-great multitude of the enemy, threw (projic(i)-) the eagle within the rampart. 5. Having ascertained (4) these things, (and) seeing (2) that war was being-prepared on-all-sides, Caesar thought that he ought-to-reflect about war more-seasonably (maturius). 6? The engines having cleared (3) the walls of-defenders (abl.) Hannibal sent five-hundred Africans to undermine the wall at (ab) the bottom.
164 LESSON CXXIT. [215.
LESSON CXXI.
EXERCISE 208.
1. Having ascertained (4) the wish of the citizens, we will set-out about (de) midnight. 2. Caesar having landed (4) the army, and having selected (4) (cap(i)-) a place suitable for-a-carnp, hastened to the enemy. 3. The enemy having tarried (5) a little-while (paulisptr) near the town, and having laid waste (5) the lands of the allies, (and) having set-on- fire (4) all the villages and buildings, hastened to Caesar's camp. 4. Our horsemen, while retreating (2) (se recip(i)-) into the camp, ran- against (occur-) the enemy in-front. 5. The general, having led-across (4) the army, halted near the town, and pitched his camp close-to (juxta) the wall. 6. Having seen (3) that the fourth legion was being hard pressed (urge-) by the enemy, you ordered that the legions should gradually join themselves.
LESSON CXXII.
We have now spoken of the principal cases in which the subjunctive mood is used in secondary sentences ; i. <?., when it is required by the sense of the secondary sentence. We have now to treat of the use of the subjunctive in primary sentences. Let the tables given in pp. 146, 147, be again carefully examined.
We will speak first of questions used as the object or subject of a verb ; i. e., what we called nominal questions.
2 lo. Let this rule be perfectly remembered :
Nominal questions take their verbs in the sub- junctive mood.
Nominal questions are introduced by the same inter- rogative pronouns or particles as principal questions ; (see §§ 154-160.)
EXAMPLES.
Deorumne providentia mun- Is the world governed by the dus regitur? providence of God?
216.] LESSON CXXIII. 165
Videamus, Deorumne pro- Let us see whether the world videntiu mundus regatur. is governed by the provi- dence of God.
Quid pater t'aus scripsit? What did your father write?
Die quid pater tuus scripse- Tell (me) what your father rit. wrote.
It will be seen that in English the position of the sub- ject after the verb in a principal question is not main- tained when the question is used nominally : since in the latter case an interrogative word (whether, cfcc.,) is always employed, which distinguishes sufficiently a question from an assertion.
In the following exercises the questions adduced will be first stated as principal and then as nominal.
It will be observed that sentences which would in Eng- lish be marked rather as exclamations than as questions, have, when used nominally, the same construction as questions.
EXERCISE 209.
1. How anxious and uneasy is all love ! 2. I am not ignorant how anxious and uneasy all love is. 3. What is that force and whence is (it) ? 4. We shall easily understand what that force is and whence (it) is. 5. What do those-men say, what do (they) think (senti-) who are of (ab} that system ? 6. No-one, even-moderately (medlocriier quidem) learned is ignorant what those say, what (they) think, who aro of that system.
LESSON CXXIII.
Those questions which involve one or more alternatives are called disjunctive : they are such as this : " Is he deceiving us, or is he himself deceived ?" The first member of such questions is introduced by ne (enclitic) nonne, or utrum, and the other member or members nearly always by an : and these particles are used alike in principal and nominal questions. Some- times the first member has no interrogative particle.
166 LESSON CXXIY. [217.
EXERCISE 210.
1. Do-you-stud}-, or fish, or hunt, or (do) all-things together ? 2. I desire to know whether you study or fish, or hunt or (do) all-things to- gether. 3. Did I not sufficiently understand you, or have you changed (your) opinion ? 4. It is doubtful whether I did not sufficiently under- stand 3Tou. or whether your have changed (your) opinion. 5. Is virtue sought (expct-) on account of its own worth, or on-account-of some (ali- quem] profit ? 6. The-question-is-raised (qweritur) whether virtue is sought on-account-of its own worth, or on-account-of some profit
LESSON CXXIY.
317". As questions when asked nominally have their verbs in the subjunctive mood, so also nominal com- mands require their verbs to be in the subjunctive. The command when thus used nominally is introduced by ut (positive) and by ne (negative). But ut is often omitted. As commands have reference to things not yet finished, of course the imperfect tenses of the subjunctive must be employed in nominal commands.
There are many expressions which fall most naturally into this class of nominal sentences, which yet are not strictly speaking commands : such as those which imply entreaty, advice, permission, &c.
EXAMPLES.
Epistolam lege. Read the letter.
Rex militi imperat, ut epis- The king commands the sol-
tolam legat. dier to read the letter.
Ne statuas mihi ponitote. You must not erect statues
to me.
Imperator vetuit ne statuae The Emperor forbade statues
sibi ponerentur. to be erected to him.
EXERCISE 211.
1. Do not allow (imperf. subj.) the town to be taken-by-storm. 2. Caesar had-charged (manda-) (his) lieutenant not to allow the town to
21§, 219.] LESSON CXXV. 167
be takeu-by-storm. 3. Do-not deliver (imperf. sub}) us to-the Romans for (in ace.) slavery. 4. The women, weeping, with-outspread (passa-) hands implored the soldiers setting-out into the battle, not (ne) to de- liver them to-the Romans for slavery. 5. Recollect both the old disaster of the Roman people, and the ancient valor of the Helvetii. 6. The chief warned Caesar to recollect the old disaster of the Roman people, and the ancient valor of the Helvetii.
LESSON CXXV.
218. It was seen in § 163 that the present imperative has forms only for the second person singular and plural. In order to express the same notion for the first and third persons, the present imperfect subjunctive is used.
219. It was said also in § 165 that in prohibitions the present imperative is rarely used: instead of it we find the present imperfect or the present perfect subjunctive used with ne : most commonly the latter. It is probable that these uses of the subjunctive mood are to be ex- plained as falling under the principle stated in the last lesson : i. e., that they are really instances of i llfipcra- ative sentences used nominally, the govern- ing verb being omitted. This is undoubtedly the case in such equivalents for the imperative in prohibitions, as,
Cave dixeris : Take care, that you do not say it : say it not. Noli me jocari putes : Do not think I am jesting.
EXERCISE 212.
1. May the gods avert the omen. 2. In prosperous circumstances let us avoid (fug(i)-) pride and arrogance. 3. Let war be so (ita) undertaken, that nothing else but (nisi) peace may seem to-be-sough t-for. 4. Do not make (perf) this battle ruinous (funesta-) by the death of the consul. 5. Let-us-love (our) country, let-us-obey the senate, let-us-take- thought (consul-) for-the-good ; let-us-neglect present profit (pi ), let-us-be slaves to-the-esteem (gloria-) of posterity. 6. Do (perf) nothing for-the-sake- of kindness, be-not moved by pity.
168 LESSON CXXYL [22O-223.
LESSON CXXYI.
Though it was said (§ 187) that the proper use of the subjunctive mood is confined to subordinate or subjoined sentences (whether primary or secondary), we have seen in the last lesson that it appears to be used independently , instead of an imperative, to supply the place of the missing forms of that mood.
22O. There are other cases too in which the subjunc- tive is used in sentences which stand independently ; though it is probable that all may be explained by sup- posing that the true principal sentence is omitted, and the subjunctive mood allowed to stand alone with the force which it would have derived from that sentence, if expressed.
The cases we are now speaking of form three main
1.) The potential use of the subjunctive mood. 2.) The optative use " " " "
3.) The deliberative use " " "
221. (1.) The subjunctive mood is said to be used potentially when it expresses an assertion as doubt- ful, possible or conditional. It is very often so employed to express a modest or polite reservation of a positive state- ment. This is particularly the case with the present per- fect tense.
222. (2.) The subjunctive mood is said to be used opt at i ye I V when it expresses wish or desire. This is closely allied to the use of the subjunctive for the imper- ative spoken of in the last lesson.
223. The subjunctive mood is said to be used de- li!>eratively when an inquiry is made as to what is to be done or ought to have been done.. It is generally implied in these cases that the correct thing either cannot be done or has not been done.
The following maybe taken as examples of these cases —
223.] LESSON CXXVII. 169
(i.) Potential.
Ego ipse cum Platone non For myself I should not be invltus erraverim, unwilling to be mistaken
along with Plato.
(2.) Optative.
Valeant elves mei : sint in- May my fellow citizens be columes, sint beati. prosperous, may they be
safe, may they be happy.
(3.) Deliberative.
Cur plura commemorem ? Why need I mention more
cases ?
EXERCISE 213.
1. The judgment of Brutus, with-your good-leave (pac-) would-I-say (perf.) (it), I far prefer to yours. 2. In-this-way (ita) you-can-find praise without envy, and. procure friends. 3. Would-that (utinam) I were able as (tarn) easily to find the true (pi. neut.) as to refute the false (pi). 4. Am-I-to-fight with the tempest rather than submit to-it and obey (it) ? 5. This-thing without any hesitation I-sJiould-be-inclined-io-affirm (perf.) that eloquence is the most difficult thing of all. 6. May the gods pre- serve to-you these joys and this fame.
f LESSON CXXYII.
EXERCISE 214.
1. Kings may-keep (habe-) (their) kingdoms for-themselves, the rich (their) riches. 2. Who, I-pray (tandem), can-blame me justly (jure)1! 3. What need-I-fear if I am destined-to-be (futuro-) either not wretched after death or even happy ? 4. What fitter companions to-generosity can-I-name (perf.) than humanity and clemency? 5. You-can-see more with-your-own eyes, than with those-of-others (alieno-). 6. Let flattery, the helper of vices, be removed far-away. 15
170 LESSON CXXTm. [224.
LESSON CXXYIII.
We have now spoken of the subjunctive mood as used —
(1.) In several kinds of secondary sentences, when it is required by the nature of the relation between the secondary sentence and the primary one to which it is attached.
(2.) In nominal questions.
18.1 In nominal commands.
(4.) In principal sentences; in which it is employed,
(a.) To supply the missing forms of the present imperor tive.
fb.) Potentially.
(c.) Optatively.
(d.) Deliberatively.
We have now to speak of another very impor- tant principle of Latin Syntax in regard to the use of the subjunctive mood.
The subjunctive mood is used in all secondary sentences which are attached as an integral part of the thought^
!1.) To any nominal sentence. 2.) To any secondary sentence which contains the sub- junctive.
(3.) To any primary sentence which contains the subjunc- tive.
This is the general rule. But it must be understood that it only holds good when the secondary sentence forms an integral part Of the thought expressed in that to which it is attached. There are besides some other limitations which will be stated hereafter.
225.] LESSON CXXIX. 171
EXAMPLES.
credo eum, qui sapiens / do not believe that he who is sit, raiserum esse posse. wise can be miserable.
Quis fidem habeat el qui am- Who can put confidence in the icds suos deceperit ? man who has deceived his
friends ?
Eo simus animo, ut nihil in Let us be of such a mind as malls ducamus, quod sit a to regard nothing as evil, Deo constitutum. which has been appointed by
God.
NOTE. — It is hoped that the teacher will make his pupils see in these examples, as well as in the sentences contained in the following exer- cises, to what sort of sentence (nominal, secondary, or principal), the secondary sentence is in each case attached.
EXERCISE 215.
1. It was the custom at Athens for-those (ace.) to be praised in the public-assembly (contion-) who had been slain in battles. 2. Socrates was-accustomed-to-say that all-persons were sufficiently eloquent in that-subject (eo-) which they knew. 3. Who can-love that-man whom he fears ? 4. All agree that there is something (aliquid) which belongs to the dead. 5. It is clear that souls, when they have gone-out from the body, are-carried (ferri) on high. 6. Caesar thought that Ariovis- tus was now returning to good-sense (sdnitat-), since he of-his-own- accord (ultrd) promised that-thing which he had before refused to (him) requesting (it).
LESSON CXXIX.
We have now spoken separately of the changes which sentences of the various kinds (assertions, questions, com- mands and secondary sentences) undergo when they are affected by the government of the verb in another sen- tence. We must now speak of all this in combination, as we have now to treat of what is called oratio ol>li- q ua, or " reported speech."
172 LESSON CXXIX. [225, 226.
225. When the sentiments of a speaker are reported, it is possible for the reporter either —
1st. To give the speaker's exact words, precisely as they were uttered : this is called oratio recta (direct speech); or,
2d. To give the sense only, the form of the words being altered. This is called oratio obliqua (indirect speech.)
The following example will make this distinction clear :
1st. Oratio recta. (The chief said) : "I know that these statements are true, and no one feels more pain at the circumstance than I."
2d. Oratio obliqua. The chief said that he knew that those statements were true, and that no one felt more pain at the circumstance than himself.
226. If this subject be properly considered it will be observed that —
(l.) The speech may consist of assertions, or questions, or commands, or all of these, with secondary sentences at- tached to any of them.
(2.) If the oratio recta be employed, the verb which is used to introduce the speech will have no effect upon the construction of any of the parts of the speech.
(3.) If the oratio obliqua be employed, the verb which is used to introduce the speech will affect the construction of all the parts of the speech.
(4.) Whatever the verb may be which introduces the speech, all the assertions in it may be considered as the objects of the verb die-, " say ;" ah1 the questions as the objects of the verb roga-, "ask;" and all the commands as the objects of the verb jube-, " bid," whether these verbs be expressed or have to be understood.
We have therefore the following rules for the changes which the several parts of a speech will undergo, when it is reported oblique —
227-233.] LESSON CXXIX. 173
227. (a.) The verbs in assertions will be put in the infinitive mood, and of course their subjects in the accusative case. See §§ 149-151.
22$. (b.) The verbs in questions will be put in the subjunctive mood. See § 215.
229. (c.) The verbs in commands will be put in the subjunctive mood, and of course in one of the imperfect tenses of it. See § 217.
03 O. (d.) The verbs in secondary sentences will be put in the subjunctive mood. See § 224.
23 1 . (e.) The verbs which are in the subjunctive mood in the speech as delivered, will remain in the sub- junctive.
232. (f.) Since the speech is not given as spoken directly by any one or to any one, all pronouns of the first and second person (me- no- te- vo- ho- isto- meo- tuo- nostro- vestro-) are excluded in strict- ness from the oratio obttqua.
233. (g.) Of course the pronouns se- suo- will prop- erly be used instead of me- meo- when the speaker is rep- resented as talking of himself.
It is hoped that the teacher will be sure that his pupils understand that the rules given above in regard to the verbs are not new rules, and will therefore make them refer to the sections indicated. The rule (b) in regard to questions, and that (d) in regard to secondary sentences will need some limitation hereafter. But it is recom- mended that a great deal of pains be taken to see that the rules as they stand are thoroughly mastered; and several of the following examples are given in both the forms that there may be the means at hand for making the requisite comparison.
EXERCISE 216.
1. By-the-right of war I take the tribute which conquerors are accus- tomed (perf.) to impose on-the -conquered. 2. Ariovistus says that by- 15*
114 LESSOR CXXXL [234.
the-right of war he takes the tribute which conquerors are accustomed to impose upon-the-conquered. 3. Those states which dissent from the rest-of the Gauls, I will unite (to the league) by my diligence, and I will bring-about (effic(i}-) one (united) plan of the whole-of Gaul. 4. The chief said that those states which dissented from the rest-of the Gauls he would unite to the league by his diligence, and that he would bring about one (united) plan of the whole-of Gaul. 5. This nation has been urged on by its chiefs, who say that the Aedui, having been reduced by Caesar into slavery, suffer all indignities and insults. 6. He pointed out that that nation had been urged on by its chiefs, who said that the Aedui, having been reduced by Caesar into slavery, were suffering all indig- nities and insults.
LESSON CXXX.
EXERCISE 217.
1. 1 neither dare to come into those parts of Gaul which you possess, nor can I, without great effort and expense, draw-together (my) army into one place. 2. Ariovistus replied, that he neither dared to come into those parts of Gaul which Caesar possessed, nor could draw-together (his) army into one place without great effort and expense. 3. Why sJiould any one (quisquam) judge that Ariovistus will so rashly depart from his-duty? 4. Caesar asked why any one judged that Ariovistus would s/> rashly depart from his-duty. 5. Supposing (si) Ariovistus, being-impelled by frenzy and madness, does-bring (infer- pres. perf.) war, what I-waut-to-know (tandem) do you dread? 6. Caesar said, supposing Ariovistus, being-impelled by frenzy and madness, should- bring (past perf.) war, what, he wanted-to-know (tandem), did they dread?
LESSON CXXXI.
234. While we continue the exercises upon the ora- tio obligua, we may introduce the peculiarly formed
234.] LESSON CXXXL 175
tenses of the few irregular verbs in Latin. These are irregular only in some of the imperfect tenses. We will give first those tenses of the three verbs vol- " wish," nol- " be unwilling" (contracted from nevol-) and mal- "wish rather" (contracted from magevol-). It is to be under- stood that the tenses not here given are regularly formed.
Present imperfect indicative. vol- nol- mal-
S. 1. volo nolo malo
2. vis nonvis mavis
3. vult nonvult mavult P. 1. volumus nolumus malumus
2. vultis nonvultis mavultis
k 3. volunt nolunt malunt
Present imperfect subjunctive.
S. 1. velim nolim malim
2. veils noils malls
3. velit nolit malit P. 1. velimus nolimus malimus
2. velitis nolitis malitis
3. velint nolint malint
Past imperfect subjunctive.
S. 1. vellem nollem mallem
2. velles nolles malles
3. vellet nollet mallet P. 1. vellemus nollemus mallemus
2. velletis nolletis malletis
3. vellent nollent mallent
Imperf. infin. velle nolle malle
Nol- has besides a present and future imperative.
Present, S. 2. noli. P. 2. nolite. Future, S. 2. nollto. P. 2. nolltote. 3. " 3. nolunto.
176 LESSON CXXXII. [235, 236.
Vol- and nol- have besides the imperfect participle reg- ularly formed and also the gerund.
1ST. B. — It should be pointed out that the irregularity of the past imperfect subjunctive and the imperfect infinitive of these verbs consists in the omission of the connecting vowel of the ending ere, and the consequent assimila- tion of the two liquids 1 and r.
EXERCISE 218.
1. I wish to treat with you about those things which began (coeptae sunt) to be treated (about) between us, and were not (neque) completed. 2. The chief said that he wished to treat with Caesar about those things which had begun to be treated (about) between them (eo-) and had not been completed. 3. If you do-not (minus) wish to do that, Bend an ambassador to me. 4. Ariovistus said if he did not wish to do that, he-might-send an ambassador to him. 5. What do you wish for- yourself? Why do you come into my possessions? 6. Ariovistua asked Caesar what he wanted for-himself, why he came into his pos- sessions.
235* NOTE. — In the last sentence the reflexive pronouns (se- and suo-) are used to represent both the " for yourself" and " my" of the oratio recta. Properly the reflexive should only refer to the, subject of the principal verb (in this case Ariovistus). But usage allowed it also to refer to the subject of a secondary sentence, when no ambiguity was caused thereby. This is most commonly done in the case of the adjective (possessive) suo-. Kiihner says, that the use of se- with such reference is confined to cases where the pronoun and the verb form only one notion, as in the above case : quid tibi vis is nothing more than what do you want?
LESSON CXXXII.
236. The verb fer- "bear" is irregular in some of the imperfect tenses, the irregularity consisting for the most part in the omission of connecting vowels.
There are many compounds of fer- which are conju- gated in the same way as the principal verb.
236.] LESSON CXXXII. 177
The irregular tenses active and passive are here given :
ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
Present imperfect indicative. S. 1. fero feror
2. fers ferris or ferre
3. fert fertur P. 1. ferimus ferimur
2. fertis ferimini
3. ferunt feruntur
Past imperfect subjunctive. S. 1. ferrem ferrer
2. ferres ferrerfs or ferrere
3. ferret ferretur P. 1. ferremus ferremur
2. ferretis ferremini
3. ferrent ferrentur
Imperf. infin. ferre ferri
Present imperative.
S. 2. fer ferre
P. 2. ferte ferimini
Future imperative.
S. 2. ferto fertor
P. 3. " "
S. 2. fertote
P. 3. fer unto feruntor
EXERCISE 219.
1. The frenzy (pi.) of-the-tribunes (tribunicio-, adj.) cannot be borne any-further (ultra). 2. The consuls denied that the frenzy of the tri- bunes could be borne any-further. 3. Missiles are-being-carried-together into the house of the traitor, and he holds meetings at-home. 4. The officer reports (refer-) to the senate that missiles are-being-carried- together into the house of the traitor, and he (eo-) holds meetings at- home. 5. If the consul chooses (vol-, fut.) to send soldiers with me, I will lead them by a not difficult road (aditu-) above the heads (sing.) of the enemy. 6. The scout said that if the consul chose to send soldiers with him he would lead them by a not difficult road above the heads of the enemy.
178 LESSON CXXXIH. [237, 238.
LESSON CXXXIII.
237. The verb/<zc(i)- "make" is not used in the imper- fect tenses passive. Instead of it the stem^ is used, which is conjugated with the active person-endings except in the infinitive.
The following table represents the common forms of it :
Pres. imperf. indie., f 10, fls, fit, — — flunt.
Past " ' " fiebam, flebas, &c.
Fat. " " flam f ies, &c.
Pres. imperf. sub}., flam flas, &c.
Past " ' " fierem, fieres, &c.
Imperf. infin., fieri.
NOTE. — 1st. The vowel i is short before er-.
2<L The gerundive faciendo is regularly formed from/oc(z)-.
3d. The compounds of fac(i}- with verbal roots and adverbs, like pate- fadfy- form their imperfect tenses passive from fi- as above, but the compounds made with prepositions change a of the stem into i (as from fac(i)- comes perfic(i)-) and form the passive tenses regularly.
4th. Futuro- may be regarded aa the future partic. of /i-in the sense of " happen," " become."
The verb i- "go" with all its compounds is irregular in the imperfect tenses. Most of these forms have been given before, but it may be well to repeat them here altogether.
Pres. imperf. indie., eo, is, it ; imus, itis, eunt.
Past *' " ibam ibas, &c.
Fut. « " ibo, ibis, &c.
Pres. imperf. subj., earn, eas, <fcc.
Past " " "" irem ires, &c.
Imperf. in/in., ire.
Imperf. partic.j eunt(i)- nom. sing. iens.
Gerund, eundo-
Fut. partic., ituro.
Pres. imperat., S. 2. I. P. 2. ite,
Fut. " S. 2. ito, 3. !to. P. 2. itote, 3. eunto.
-c
^
239.]
NOTE. — The vowel t of the stem is changed to e when the ending presents the letters a, o, w.
EXERCISE 220.
1. I earnestly advise the people not to condemn their own cause by a Useless modesty. 2. The plebeian said that he earnestly advised the people not to condemn their own cause by a useless modesty. 3. There is not time Tor-ascertaining (genit.) the causes. Let all the younger-men be present to-morrow (poster 6 die) at-dawn in the plain. 4. The consuls said in an assembly (contion-) that there was not time for ascertaining the causes : (that) all the younger-men should-be-present next day at dawn in the plain. 5. Are-you here going- to-give-up (praebe-} yourselves to-the-missiles of the enemy, undefended, un- avenged? why (quid), then (igitur), have-you arms? why have you brought (infer-) war aggressively (uUro) ? 6. The soldier asked with- a-loud (clara-) voice whether they were going to-give up themselves to the missiles of the enemy, undefended, unavenged ? why they had arms ? why they had brought war aggressively ?
LESSON CXXXIV.
239. It was said in § 215, that the verbs in nominal questions were found in the subjunctive mood. To this we must now state the following veiy important excep- tion : When questiom^aoGur in the oratio obllyua, if the subject in the oratio recta be the secoiiTT person, the suJbjunctive^&_w.sec?; but if the subject be either first or third person, the infinitive is used with the subject-accusative. Thus we shall have,
In the oratio recta. In the oratio obliqua.
2d person. Unde parabitis Unde paraturi essent socios
socios navales. navales.
1st person. Unde parabimus Unde se paraturos esse so-
socios navales. cios navales.
3d person. Unde parabunt Unde eos paraturos esse so-
socios navales. cios navales.
The reason of this difference seems to be that the ques- tions asked in the 1st or 3d_ persons are rather rhetorical,
180 LESSON CXXXY. [239.
i. e., are disguised assertions, and so, not differing much, except in form, from assertions, are expressed in the same manner as nominal assertions, the interrogative word being retained to show the distinction ; while questions in the 2d person are proposed rather with a view to an answer, and so retain the proper construction of nominal questions.
NOTE. — 1st. It will be observed above that the distinction between the 1st and 3d persons in the oratio obfiqua is marked by the use of the pronoun se- for the 1st person, and eo- (or illo-) for the 3d person.
2d. It was said above that primary sentences which have their verbs in (he subjunctive mood retain that mood in tJie oratio obllqua; and ac- cordingly it will be found that when questions of the 1st or 3d persons (in the oratio recta) are found in the oratio obfiqua with the sul>junctive mood, the subjunctive would also have been used in the oratio recta.
It is hoped that great care will be taken to make the pupils perfectly understand these distinctions.
EXERCISE 221.
1. "Why (quid) do we live ? "Why are we counted among (in parte) the citizens (genit.) ? 2. The tribune asked, why did they live ? why were they counted among the citizens ? 3. What end do ye think there is of continued military service ? 4. The centurion asked, what end did they think there was of continued military service ? 5. What better hope (genit.) is held-out (portend-) to the Latins ? 6. The chief asked, what better hope was held-out to the Latins?
LESSON CXXXY.
EXERCISE 222.
1. Can any one (quisquam) believe that such friends have suddenly, without cause, been made enemies? 2. The ambassadors asked, could any one believe that such friends had suddenly, without cause, been made enemies? 3. Why should the enemy hold the most fruitful land (agro-) of Italy rather than the victorious army ? 4, The consul asked, why should the enemy hold the most fruitful land of Italy rather than the victorious army ? 5. If I choose (vol-) to forget old insults, am I able also to lay-aside the memory of recent injuries ? (No.) 6. Caesar asked, supposing he chose to forget old insults, was he able also to lay-aside the memory of recent injuries ?
240.] LESSON CXXXYI. 181
LESSON CXXXYI.
It was stated in § 224, that secondary sentences at- tached to nominal sentences, or to primary or secondary sentences which contain the subjunctive mood, have their verbs in the subjunctive. This is the general rule : but it is necessary now to mention some limitations of it.
24O. The indicative mood may stand in these secon- dary sentences when they contain —
1.) Thoughts of the narrator, not of the speaker.
2.) Thoughts of the narrator and also of the speaker.
3.) Statements of mere facts, or general truths.
' ) Periphrastic expressions for simple notions.
It often occurs that the use of the indicative mood shows that the secondary sentence is to be regarded as coming under one of these heads, while the subjunctive would have been equally proper with a slight difference of meaning.
In the following exercise the verbs in secondary sen- tences must be translated by the indicative mood, unless the subjunctive is indicated by italics; and the teacher should help his pupils to see under which of the above classes each case falls. It will be observed that these remarks apply not only to sentences occurring in formal oratio obllqua, but to all such as come under the con- ditions stated at the beginning of this lesson.
EXERCISE 223.
1. "Who can be so averse to (a) the truth as to (quo-) deny that all these things which we see are managed by the power of the immortal gods? 2. Near that river which flows into the Pontus, the philosopher says (ait) that certain (qudsdain) little-animals (bestiola-) are-produced (nose-, dep.) which live (only) one day. 3. The scouts report (refer-} to Caesar that among the Suevi there is a wood of-boundless size (all.) which is called Bacenis. 4. Asia is so rich (oplma-) and fertile that it easily surpasses all lands in-the-multitude of those things which are exported. 5. The force of eloquence (eloquendo-) effects (this) that (we can) learn 16
182 LESSON CXXXYII. [241, 242.
those-things which we do-not-know, (igndra-) and can teach those- things which we do-know. 6. It-can happen (fi-) that a-man (quis) may feel rightly, and not be able elegantly to express that which he^ feels.
LESSON CXXXVII.
An impersonal verb was defined (§138) to be one which, like all other verbs, makes an assertion, but is not attributed to any subject : and we have seen that it is common to find intransitive verbs used impersonally in the passive. We have now to speak of impersonal Verbs proper : i. e., those which are nearly always used impersonally : and we shall treat of the most im- portant of these in separate heads according to their con- struction with the rest of the sentence.
24L 1 . The following Jive verbs denote various feelings, and are used in the third person sing, of the imperfect tenses, and form perfects also of the active or passive forms as given below :
1. misere- denoting pity, perfect miserito-.
2. pige- reluctance, " pigu- or pigito-.
3. poenite- " repentance, " poenitu-.
4. pude- shame, " pudu- or pudito-.
5. taede- " weariness, " taedu- or pertaeso-.
24:2. With these verbs,
The person feeling is put in the accusative. The thing felt about " " " genitive.
Sometimes however instead of the genitive we find an infinitive mood, and sometimes a neuter pronoun, some- times a secondary sentence with quod, and sometimes a nominal question ; each of which may be regarded as the subject of the verb.
242.]
LESSON cxxxym.
183
EXAMPLES.
|
Person. |
Thing. |
|
|
Miseret |
nos |
eorum. |
|
Poenitet |
me |
stultitiae. |
|
Taedebit |
vos |
ignuviae. |
|
Pudet |
me |
vixisse tur- |
|
piter. |
We pity them. I repent of my folly. Ye will be weary of sloth. I am ashamed of having lived dishonorably.
EXERCISE 224.
1. Upright men rarely repent of their actions and plans. 2. There are (some) who are neither ashamed of infamy nor are weary (of it). 3. Those-men who have lived otherwise than was-right (decuit) repent most of their sins, when they have been visited by a severe and deadly disease. 4. I saw him wretched, and I pitied him. 5. I do not repent of-having-lived (infin.}, since (quoniam) I have so lived, that I think I was not born in- vain. 6. I am not ashamed to confess (that I) do-not- know (nesci-) (that) which I-do-not-know.
LESSON CXXXVIII.
EXERCISE 225.
1. All-men are ashamed to confess that they are worthy of-punish- ment. 2. We have often repented of speaking, never of keeping-silence (tace-). 3. Do you repent that (quod) I have led-across the army safe (salvo-) ? 4. "We more pity those who do not seek-for (requir-) pity than (those) who loudly-claim (efflagita-} it. 5. "We are absolutely (prorsus) weary of life. 6. We were weary of the new magistrates.
184 LESSON CXXXIX. [243, 244.
LESSON CXXXIX.
243. The two impersonal verbs lice- "be allowed" (perfect lieu- or licito-) and libe- "be pleasing" (perfect libu- or libito-) have for the most part the following con- struction :
For the person, For the thing,
The Dative case. (1.) a neuter pronoun. (2.) an infinitive mood.
Lice- has also frequently the thing expressed by the subjunctive mood without ut. The person with both is often omitted.
EXAMPLES.
Quantum liceat vobls spec- You are bound to see how
tare debetis. much is allowed you.
Nemini licet contra patriam No one may lead an army
ducere exercitum. against his country.
Facite quod vobls libet. Do what is pleasing to you.
Non libet mihi deplorare / don't like to complain of
vltam. life.
Fremant omnes licet, dlcam Let the world howl, I will
quod sentio. still speak my mind.
Non mihi licuit esse pigro. I was not allowed to be lazy.
244. NOTE. — 1st. It is from the use of licet, as shown in the last sentence but one, that it came to be used in the sense of a concessive subjunction, meaning "although."
245. 2d. When lice-, as in the last sentence, has depending on it an infinitive mood which requires a noun or adjective with it to com- plete its meaning, this noun or adjective must of course (§ 79) be in the same case as the noun which precedes the infinitive as its subject : i. e. under these circumstances generally in the dative.
EXERCISE 226.
1. Themistocles was allowed to be at-leisure (otidso-). 2. Why do ye pursue this wretched and insignificant (tenui-) booty, who may now be most fortunate. 3. Let Pompey, (now thai he is) dead, be allowed to-be-free-from (care-) the charge of crime. 4. It has pleased you to impel me to these-things. 5. It shall be allowed (you) to be rich in cattle and much land. 6. In this subject (genes-) I may not be neg- ligent.
246, 247.] LESSON CXL. 185
LESSON CXL.
2 IO. The two impersonal verbs dece- "befitting," (perfect decu-) oporte- " be right," (perfect oportu-) have an accusative case Of the person, and gen- erally an infinitive mood to express the thing. But oporte- often has the subjunctive mood after it without ut, to ex- press both person and thing.
247. As we saw in the last lesson that lice- can often be translated by may or might, so oporte- may frequently be best rendered by ought or must. But as these English verbs have no forms to express finished actions, we are in our language obliged to denote the past existence of a pos- sibility or an obligation by using the perfect infinitive after those verbs ; e. g., " I might have seen him :" " I ought to have attended to the matter." But in Latin the corre- sponding verbs lice- and oporte- having all the past and perfect tenses, must be followed by the imperfect infinitive, the time of the possibility or the obligation being sufficiently expressed by the tense of lice- or oporte-. The same remark applies to the use of the personal verbs debe- " owe" and potes- " be able." It is hoped that the teacher will pay particular attention to this point, and make his pupils fully comprehend the difference of the English and Latin modes of expression in the following examples.
Oportet me ire. / ought to go.
Oportuit me ire. / ought to have gone.
Decet me tacere. It is fitting I should be silent.
Decuit me tacere. / should have been silent.
Licet tibi Ire. You may go.
Licuit tibi Ire. You might have gone.
Debet patriam defendere. He ought to defend his country.
Debuit patriam defendere. He ought to have defended his
country. 16*
186 LESSON CXLL [248, 249.
EXERCISE 227.
1. Ye see that all that money out of the treasury, which ought to have been given for (pro) the corn to-the states, has-been appropriated (lucrlfac(i)-) by that-man (into-). 2. We ought not to think that the good- will of the citizens is an insignificant-aid (mediocre telum] for (ad) carrying-on affairs, 3. You ought to love me myself (ipso-) not my- goods (meo-). 4. It is by-no-means (minime) becoming for an orator to be angry. 5. Ought he not to have shed his blood for his country ? 6. By her own charms virtue herself ought to-attract (traJi-) you to true glory (decos-).
LESSON CXLL
24:8. The two impersonal verbs interes- and refer- have nearly the same meaning, "be of importance." For the construction of these verbs we must notice three particulars —
1st. The thing* which is of importance is expressed by (a) an infinitive mood,
or (b) an interrogative word with the subjunctive, or (c) ut or ne with the subjunctive, or (d) a neuter pronoun.
2d. The person to whom it is of importance is expressed
(a) by the genitive case of a noun ; but
(b) the ablative singular feminine of the posses-
sive pronouns meo- tuo- nostro- vestro- suo- is used instead of the genitive cases of the personal pronouns.
3d. The degree of importance is expressed by
(a) the adverbs multum, magnopere, &c.
(b) by the genitives of indefinite value, magrii
parvl, &c*
* 249. It was said in § 62, that the price at which a thing was bought was expressed by the ablative. But if it be only stated ill general and indefinite terms, that the value is large, small, &c., a genitive case is ordinarily employed, as: virtus volup- tatem minimi facit. Virtue thinks very little of pleasure.
249.] LESSON CXLII. 18t
EXAMPLES.
Interest omnium bonam vi- It is the interest of all to tarn agere. lead a good life.
Mea refert magnl quid hie It is of great moment to me velit. what this man means.
Vestra interest ne impera- It is your interest that the torem pessiml faciant. worst men should not elect
their general.
Illud tua nihil refer ebat. That was of no importance
to you.
Hoc ego et mea et re! pub- / think this to be for my in- licae et maxime tua in- terest, and for the state's, teresse arbitror. and most of all for yours.
EXERCISE 228.
1. It is the interest of an orator to teach, to charm, to rouse (per- move-) the minds of those-hearing (him.) 2. A philosopher is said, when-dying, to have accused nature, because (quod) (she had given) to stags and crows a long (diuturna-) life, to whom that (id) was of no (nihil) moment, (while) she had given to men, to whom it-would-have- made-the-greatest-difference (maxime interfuisset) so petty (exigua-) a life. 3. It is of more importance to none than to yourself, that a bur- den should not be imposed on your shoulders (cervlc-), under which you may sink (concid-). 4. Caesar was-accustomed to say that it was not so-much (tarn) for his own as (quam) for the state's interest, that he should be safe. 5. I will point-out in-another place, how much it is of moment to the common safety that-there-should-be two consuls in the republic. 6. It is of great importance to-us-all (nostrd omnium) whether men are happy or wretched.
LESSON CXLII.
- EXERCISE 229.
1. Ariovistus replied, that he ought not to be impeded in-the-exer- crcise-of (in) his right (jus-) by the Roman people. 2. I thought it-was- proper (dece-) to write-out-at-length (perscrlb-) one of (ex) the many speeches of this tribune. 3. He pointed out how-greatly (quanta opere) it was for the interest of the common safety that the bands of the enemy should-be-kept-apart (distine-.) 4. I feel both shame and vexation at the manners of the state. 5. Are not citizens allowed to send
188 LESSON CXLIII. [25O-252.
ambassadors to citizens about peace, which has been allowed even to fugitive-slaves and brigands? 6. Was the young-man sorry for the crime which at-your-iustigation (te auctore) he had committed (fac(f)-).
LESSON CXLIII.
95O. We have now to speak of conditional propositions.
A conditional proposition is one which does not assert a fact absolutely, but asserts its dependence upon another fact ; e. g., " If we are attacked, we will resist." In this sentence (called a conditional or hypothetical proposi- tion) neither of the facts spoken about is asserted abso- lutely ; but it is only said that the second depends upon the first, in so far as this, that if the first occur the second will. The first part of such a sentence, containing the subj unc- tion " if," is called the condition ; the second part is called the assertion. It must be perfectly understood that neither of these parts is affirmed absolutely ; the only thing declared is the fact that there is a connection between the two.
It is very important to understand the modes in which conditional propositions of different sorts are represented in Latin : but it is not possible in this book fully to explain them. We shall endeavor only to state the rule for the three most important forms : and it is hoped that, if these are completely comprehended, other varieties as they oc- cur in reading may be easily understood.
25 1 . It has been stated that a conditional proposition declares the connection of the condition and the as- sertion. When this is all that is implied, of course the speaker does not indicate any doubt that the facts spoken of may be real : and consequently in Latin, the in- dicative mood is employed both in the condition and the assertion, when all that is declared or implied is the lact Of the Connection between the two.
252. NOTE. — Sometimes in place of the assertion a command is giveu, dependent upon the condition ; in this ca. «», of course, the im- perative mood is employed instead of the indicative.
203.] LESSON CXLY. 189
EXERCISE 230.
1. If we leave-off war, we shall never enjoy peace. 2. There is nothing which I should fear if after death I am destined-to-be (futuro-) either not wretched or even happy. 3. If I see you, I shall breathe- again (fut. per/, in both clauses). 4. If I have (fut.) you, I shall not seem to myself to have perished utterly (plane). 5. I will speak, if I can (fut.) in-Latin (Latlne). 6. If the heart, or the blood, or the brain, is the soul, it will perish (interi-} along- with the body.
LESSON CXLIY
EXERCISE 231.
1. Prove (export-) if you can, that the souls remain after death. 2. If the consent of all-men is the voice of nature, we also ought to think the same-thing. 3. If you do not see what this is, at-least (at) you see of-what-kind (qudk) it-is. 4. If I have sinned at-all (quid) against (in) you. pardon-me. 5. If you so bear those-things which have happened, as I hear (you do), I ought rather to congratulate your virtue than to console your sorrow. 6. If we are able (fut.) to be together (Una) less than we wish (fut.) we shall nevertheless enjoy communion of soul (plur.) and the same pursuits.
LESSON CXLY.
We have seen that the indicative mood is regularly employed in both the condition and assertion of a condi- tional proposition when nothing more is implied than the fact of the connection between the two clauses.
25$. But if in addition to this the speaker intends to indicate that he is distinctly conscious of the possibility that the facts spoken of may be falsely assumed, while they may yet possibly be truly stated, the subjunctive mood in one of the present tenses £9 employed in both clauses.
It will be observed that the meaning here assigned to
190 LESSON CXLYI.
the present tenses of the subjunctive is such as to im- ply, that the difference between the import of a condi- tional proposition with its verbs in the present tenses of the subjunctive, and one which has its verbs in the indic- ative is often very slight.
EXERCISE 232.
1. If your country were to speak with you thus (haec) ought (debe-j she not to gain-her-prayer (impetra-) ? 2. If a-man (quis) should wish to revile philosophy iu general (universa-) he would be able to do it with-the- people on-his-side (secundo-). 3. If that-man, who has deposited money with (apud) you, should wage war upon-his country (dot.) you would not give-back the deposit 4. The da}- would fail me if I should wish to enumerate (the men), to whom, (though) good, (fortune) has turned- out (eveni-) ill (male). 5. If a-man (quis) should have deposited a sword with you (when) in-a-sound mind, and should ask-it-again (repet-) when- insane (insanient-) it would-be a sin to give-it-back, a kindness not-to- give-it-back. 6. I should be-sorry if I thought that after (ad) ten thousand years (gen.) some (aliqua-) nation would gain-possession of our city.
LESSON CXLYI.
. We have now to mention the third main class of conditional propositions.
When the speaker wishes not only to affirm the con- nection between the condition and the assertion, but also to indicate his knowledge or belief of the false-
llOOd of the assumption made, he uses the past tenses of the subjunctive mood in both clauses: the past imper- fect, if the assumption have reference to present time ; the past perfect, if it have reference to past time.
NOTE. — Often the 2d half only (the assertion) of a conditional prop- osition is expressed; but its tense will always show what kind of condition is to be supplied.
The following table may perhaps be useful, in fixing in the pupils' minds the foregoing distinctions.
254.]
There are sitions, with port :
First Form.
Second Form.
Third Form.
LESSON CXLYI.
191
three principal forms of conditional propo- the following distinctions of tense and im-
Tenses. any of the indicative.
the present of the subjunctive.
the past of the subjunctive.
Import.
mere connection clauses.
of
of
• (1) Connection
clauses.
(2) Suspicion of the incorrectness of
the assumption made.
• (1) Connection of
clauses. (2) Knowledge or belief of the in- correctness of the assumption made. %
The foil owing exercise contains examples of the third class.
EXERCISE 233.
1. Hercules never would have gone-away to the gods, unless (nisi), when he was among men, he had made (muni-) that way for-himself. 2. If your parents feared you, and you could not appease them by any means (ration-) you would retire as I think (oplnor) from their eyes somewhither (aliquo) 3. If Ulysses had wandered less (than he did) he would have been less known (than he is). 4. Philosophy never would have been in so-great honor, unless it had grown-strong (vige-) by the contentions and discussions of the most-learued-men. 5. If you remained in your opinion (you) ought-to-be-ashamed (gerundive) more. 6. If there were nothing else in human nature, nothing would be more ill-formed (dtformi-) than man.
192 LESSON CXLTOL [255, 256.
LESSON CXLYII.
EXERCISE 234.
1. If Hannibal were alive, we should already have war with the Romans. 2. If we wish to obtain a happy life, attention must be given to virtue, without which we can reach neither friendship nor any thing worth -seeking-for (expetenda-). 3. If the people were to meet (con- gred(i)-) with you, and if it were able to speak with-one voice, it would say as-follows (haec). 4. If I had known that you were there, I-myself would have come to you, 5. If your father were-alive, he would be among (in) the chief-men (princep-) of the state. 6. If Pompey had then been-destroyed, would he have departed from good circumstances or from bad-ones ? undoubtedly (certe) from wretched-ones ; for-(then)- he-would-not (non enim) have carried-on war with (his) father-in-law ; he would not without-preparation (impardto-) have taken-up arms; he would not have left (his) home ; he would not have fled out-of Italy ; Ae would not, after-having-lost (his) army, have fallen (incid-) defence- less (nudo-} upon (in) the sword, and (into) the hands of slaves ; (his) children would not have been crushed (dele-) ; all his fortunes would not (now) be possessed by the conquerors.
LESSON CXLYIII.
In the classification of pronouns in § 93 there were six sorts mentioned. Of these we have spoken of all but the indefinite, and they must now be treated of.
25o. Indefinite pronouns refer to objects which the speaker either cannot or does not choose to specify distinctly. There are several of these in Latin, each with some difference of meaning or use. We shall only mention the principal ones here.
2oG. The simplest of the indefinite pronouns both in form and meaning is quo-, which is declined like the rel- ative pronoun, except partly in the nominative and accu- sative singular and plural, which are as follows : Singular. Plural.
m. f. n. m. f. n.
Norn. quis qua quid qui quae qua
Ace. quern quam quid quos quas qua
257.J LESSON C5LIX. 193
Besides these, we have forms exactly the same as those of the relative when the indefinite pronoun is used adjec- tively: i. e., in agreement with a noun.
Quo- is always enclitic : i. e., always stands after and is attached in sound to another word : and very often after the relative pronoun and si, nis$, ne, num.
It generally represents such English expressions as " a man," "any one," "any thing" when wholly unemphatic.
EXAMPLES.
Proprium est quod quis acre What a man has bought
mercatus est. with money is his own.
Pedites, si quid erat durius, The foot soldiers would concurrebant. run together if any thing
of more than ordinary difficulty occurred.
EXERCISE 235.
1. If they have reached any excellence of virtue, ability, fortune, let them impart it to-their-own (friends). 2. No-one ought to think, that if Socrates did or spoke (aor. subj.) any-thing against the custom and habit of-citizens (clvlli-, adj.) the-same thing is-allowed to him. 3. Let not a man disdain as (tanquam) small the elements of grammar. 4. Does a man feel-anger (irasc-, dep.) with boys (dat.) whose age knows (novit) not-yet the differences of things ? (No). 5. They have-it estab- lished (sancto-) by the laws, if a man has learned (accip(i)-) any-thing from the neighbors concerning public affairs (sing.}, by rumor or report, that (uti) he mention-it (defer-) to a magistrate. Q. When (ubi) once a man has-forsworn-himself (fut. perf.) he ought not afterward to be believed (impers.).
LESSON CXLIX.
257. We have said that the enclitic quo- is the most simple of the indefinite pronouns in form and meaning. From this are derived the others of which we must now speak ; and it will be best to arrange these in order, with their differences stated generally, reserving a fuller state- ment of each for special exercises, it
194 LESSON CXLIX. [25§, 259
(1.) quo-que implies that each one of a class is referred to separately. { ) qt - e i „ „ any ^^ oj. a cjasg -g referre(j ^0, as you please.
(3.) quo-dam " " some particular one, known to the speaker is re- ferred to. (4.) aliquo- " " $0m« particular one, not necessarily known, is
[referred to, (5.) quo-quam " " hardly any one, perhaps notf a 5tn^2e o«e, can be
[referred to.
From this general statement it will be seen that the difference of these indefinite pronouns consists in the latitude or range of* selection of the indi- viduals in a class, which the speaker suggests as possible. We will give exercises on them in the above order.
258. NOTE. — In all these words it is the quo- which is declined, the other part of each word, whether coming before or after quo- remaining unaltered. The same rule holds here which was given for quo-, viz., that the forms quis, qua, quid, are for the most part used as nouns, qul, quae, quod, as adjectives.
259. QllO-que can generally be rendered " each" : but it is used in several idiomatic expressions which will best be understood from examples.
1st. Quam quisque norit Let each man exercise him-
artem, in hac se exer- self in the art which he
ceat. knoics.
Quod cuique obtigit, id Let each man keep what has
quisque teneat. fallen to him.
NOTE. — Tn this use of quo-que in relative sentences, it is particularly to be observed that quo-que stands in the secondary clause, and not (as " each" does in English) in the primary one, unless as in the sec- ond example, it is found in both.
2d. Suum cuique tribuen- His own ought to be as-
dum est. signed to each man.
Suum quisque noscat in- Let each man learn his own
genium. capacity.
NOTE. — "When quo-que is used with the reflexive pronoan, it nearly always stands immediately after it.
260.] LESSON CL. 195
3d. Omnes idem faciunt, All men do the same thing,
sed optiraus quisque op- but the best man (does h)
time. best.
Sapientissirrms quisque vir- The wisest man loves virtue
tutern maxime amat. most.
NOTE. — Superlative adjectives thus used with quo-que are found for the most part in the singular, but not unfrequentty in the neuter plural.
4th. Non omnibus annis This does not occur every
hoc fit, sed tertio quo- year, but only every third
que anno. year.
Priino quoque tempore de At the earliest possible mo-
consulis honore ad sena- ment a motion was made
turn refertur. to the senate about the
honor of the Consul.
EXERCISE 236.
1. Money has always been despised by the most distinguished (amplo-) and illustrious (man). 2. I believe (it to be) most foolish not to propose the best (examples) for (ad) imitation (gerund). 3. Posterity pays-back to each his own (proper) honor. 4. Each-man is best known to-himself, and each-man perceives-the-truth (senti-) about himself with-most- difficulty. 5. Each man sought for himself the first place in-the-march (gen.} and hastened to reach (perveni-) his-home. 6. They were ex- cited at-every third word (abl) and denied that money had been given to the man.
LESSON CL.
26O. The two indefinite pronouns quo-libct and
<|11O VftS are really compounded of the pronoun quo- and the impersonal libet, or the 2d pers. sing. pres. im- perf. indie, of vol-, and therefore indicate that any selec- tion you please may be made of the individuals of the class referred to.
If the class consists of two only, utro-vis or utro-libet are used instead of quo-vis and quo-libet.
196 LESSON CM. [261.
EXAMPLES.
Qulvls homo potest quem- Any man can put forth any
vis turpem de qudlibet disgraceful report you
rumorem proferre. please about any one.
Utrumlibet elige, alterum Choose which of the two
incredibile est, alterum you like: the one is in-
nefarium. credible, the other mon- strous.
NOTE. — The forms with quis and qua do not occur.
EXERCISE 237.
1. He was accustomed to get-up (fing-} any abuse (pi.) (you please) against (in) any-one. 2. The Germans dare, however (quamvls) few (they may be) to advance (adi-) toward any number (you like) of horse- soldiers bn-saddles (ephippialo-. adj.). 3. If any. even (vel) the least thing shall be discovered, we do not object that (quln) the life of this man be surrendered to the lust of those-persons. 4. He resolved to accomplish his undertaking by any means (sing.). 5. So great was the violence of the injuries that men preferred (malr) to endure any-thing (rather) than not to lament and complain-bitterly about the wickedness of that-man (isto-). 6. You would be glad (gaude-) to receive a kind- ness from any -body.
LESSON CLI.
2G1. The indefinite pronoun 4JI1O (lain implies that the range of selection among the individuals of the class referred to is not unlimited, but that some one or more individuals known (or assumed to be known) to the speaker are intended. It can often be rendered in Eng- lish by the words " a certain one," <fec., and we sometimes find in Latin " certus quldam." It is often used to mod- ify some strong epithet or metaphor.
262.] LESSON CLII.
EXAMPLES.
Non pugnas narrat, quod He does not talk of his quidam facit. battles as a certain per-
son (I could name) does.
In his divlnum quiddam He used to say that in these esse dlcebat. there was something di-
vine.
NOTE. — The forms with quis and qua are not used.
EXERCISE 238.
1. That man had a kind-of (qua-darn) divine memory of facts, a greater (one) of words. 2. A certain-one of (ex) the counsellors, a man endowed with-the-highest virtue, said that he understood the whole matter. 3. There was a certain time when men wandered in the fields. 4. I discovered (cognosc-) that there was in you some distin- guished and illustrious ability for (ad) speaking (gerund). 5. Insult haa a sort of sting (in it) which men of-respectability (bono-, adj.) can with- the-greatest-difficulty bear. 6. There are some-persons so unmusical in-voice that they can never come into the number of orators.
LESSON CLII.
262. AliqilO- implies that some particular individ- ual of the class referred to must be selected, though it may not be known which. It answers for the most part to the English " some" when used with emphasis, in op- position to "much," "all," &c., in such phrases as the fol- io whig : u If we cannot gain much, we may at least expect some reward." The same general meaning is found in various adverbs compounded with the particle ali-. When the words answering to " all," " much," &c., are not expressed, aliquo- often has the meaning of something considerable or important. 17*
198 LESSON CLIII. [263, 264.
QllO-piam is another indefinite pronoun which is nearly the same as aliquo- in sense, though it is not used in the same emphatic way.
EXAMPLES.
Est hoc aliquid, tametsi non This is something, yet not
est satis. enough.
Vis me esse aliquem. You wish me to be some- body.
Si pars aliqua ceciderit, at Suppose some part hasfall-
reliquos servarl posse con- en, yet they are sure the
f idunt. rest can be saved.
EXERCISE 239.
1. Name some one (man) (in-particular). 2. That-(remark)-of-yours is something, but-by-no-means (nequaquam) are all-things (included) in it (isto-). 3. This fame will bring to-}rou some safety. 4. I think that nothing has-been-passed-by by me, but that something-considerable has-been-kept-back for (ad) the last part of the cause. 5. It is not your fault, if some-people feared you; and on -the -contrary (contra) (it is) the highest praise that (qtwd ) most-men (plerlque) judged (cense-) that you were by-no-means (minime) to-be-feared. 6. I used-to-declaim with Piso, or with Pompey, or with some-one every-day (quotldie).
LESSON CLIII.
263. Quo qua ill implies that hardly any single one, and perhaps none at all of the individuals of the class can be found to answer the requirements of the case spoken about. It follows from this that it is used for the most part in negative sentences or in questions which imply a negative. Quo-quam is not used in the plural, or in the feminine of the singular, and is always used as a noun.
264. The adjective ullo- is used in just the same sense as quo-quam.
265.] LESSON CLTIL 199
EXAMPLES.
Quamdiu quisquam erit, As long as there is a single qui te defendere audeat, man found bold enough vlves. to defend you, you shall
be allowed to live.
!N"um censes ullum animal, Do you think that any an- quod sanguinem habeat, imal at all, which has sine corde esse posse ? blood, can exist without
a heart f
Ueque ex castris Catillnae Nor had any single one of quisquam omnium exces- them all left Catiline's serat. camp.
EXERCISE 240.
1. May-T-die, if beside you I have any-single-man left (rdiquo-) in whom I-can recognize the image of (our) ancient and national (ver- nacula-) humor. 2. You-are-rnistaken (erra-) if you think that I or any-single-one of these expects from you these daily works. 3. The Helvetii said that they would make (their) march through the province without any wrong-doing (maleficio-). 4. The Bellovaci said that they on-their-own account (nomen-) would carry-on war with the Romans, nor would submit to the command of any-one-at-all. 5. The stability of friendship can be secured, when men shall control those passions to which others are-slaves, nor shall demand, the one from the other (alter db altero) any-thing-at-all except (what is) honorable and right. 6. Justice never harms any-single-mau who has it.
TABLES.
I. Endings of the third declension for consonant-stems.
IVoill. and VoC. Acc. CJen.
Abl.
Sing.
S (or none) em
Plur. es
u
urn ibus
IT. Examples of masculine and feminine nouns with consonant-steins :
trab-, beam.
stirp(i)-, stock.
|
If. and T. A. O. Abl. |
Sing. trabs trabem trabia trabi trabe |
Plur. trabes trabum trabibus |
Sing. stirps stirpem stirpis stirpl stirpe |
Plur. stirpes U stirpium stirpibus u |
palud-, marsh.
Sing. Plur.
If. and V. palus paludes A. paludem
O. paludis paludum
1>. paludi paludibus
Abl. palude "
mont(i)-, mountain.
Sing. monS montem mentis montl monte
Plur.
montes
montium montibua
TABLES.
201
|
greg-, flock. merc(i)-, merchandise. |
||||
|
Sing. |
Plur. |
Sing. |
Plur. |
|
|
W. and V. |
grex |
greges |
merx |
merces |
|
A. |
gregem |
N |
mercem |
u |
|
Ck |
gregis |
gregum |
mereis |
mercium |
|
I>. |
gregl |
gregibus |
mere! |
mercibus |
|
Abl. |
grege |
M |
merce |
u |
|
princep-, |
chief. |
milet-, soldier. |
||
|
Sing. |
Plur. |
Sing. |
Plur. |
|
|
W. and V. |
princeps |
priucipes |
miles |
milites |
|
A. |
principem |
M |
militem |
u |
|
0. |
principis |
principum |
militis |
militum |
|
I>. |
principi |
principibus |
militl |
mllitibus |
|
Abl. |
principe |
u |
milite |
u |
|
homon-, maw. |
sermon-, |
discourse. |
||
|
Sing. |
Plur. |
Sing. |
Plur. |
|
|
UT. and V. |
homo |
homines |
sermo |
sermones |
|
A. |
hominern |
M |
sermonem |
u |
|
0. |
hominis |
hominum |
sermonis |
sermonum |
|
I> |
hominl |
hominibus |
sermon! |
sennonibus |
|
Abl. |
homine |
M |
sermone |
u |
|
flos-,jfl |
'ower. patr-, father. |
|||
|
Sing. |
Plur. |
Sing. |
• Plur. |
|
|
W. and V. |
flos |
flores |
pater |
patres |
|
A. |
florem |
M |
patrem |
a |
|
0. |
floris |
florum |
patris |
patrum |
|
I>. |
flori |
floribus |
patr! |
patribus |
|
Abl. |
flore |
a |
patre |
tt |
|
labor-, |
labor. |
exsul-, |
exile. |
|
|
Sing. |
Plur. |
Sing. |
Plur. |
|
|
W. and V. |
labor |
labores |
exsul |
exsules |
|
A. |
laborem |
u |
exsulem |
« |
|
0. |
laboris |
laborum |
exsulis |
exsulum |
|
j) |
labor! |
laboribus |
exsull |
exsulibus |
|
Abl. |
labore |
« |
exsule |
« |
202
TABLES.
HI. Examples of neuter nouns.
ones-, burden. corpos-, body.
|
If. and V. A. O. Abi. |
Sing. onus a oneris onerl onere |
Plur. onera onerum oneribus M |
Sing. corpus u corporis corpora corpore |
Plur. corpora M corporum corporibus |
flumen-, river.
calcar(i)-, spur.
|
If. and T. A. 0. m Abl. |
Sing. flumen M fluminis flumini flumine |
Plur. flumina it fluminum fluminibus u |
Sing. calcar u calcaris calcari t< |
Plur. calcaria calcarium calcaribua « |
NOTE. — The abL sing, is made from the stem calcari-.
|
caput-, head. |
femor-, thigh. |
|
|
Sing. Plur. |
Sing. Plur. |
|
|
If. and T. |
caput capita |
femur femora |
|
A. |
u « |
(t « |
|
O. |
capitis capitmn |
femoris femorum |
|
I> |
capitl capitibus |
femori femoribus |
|
Abl. |
capite " |
femore " |
NOTE. — Cagut- does not omit the last letter in the N. and A. Sing.
IV. Examples of adjectives, masculine, feminine, and neuter, with consonant-stems.
feroc(i)-, fierce.
Sing. Plur.
Masc. and Fern. Neut, Masc. and Fern. Neut.
If. and V. ferox ferox feroces ferocia
. A. ferocem " " "
Abl.
ferocis feroci ferocl or feroce
ferocium ferocibus
TABLES. 203
vetes-, old.
Sing. Plur.
Masc. and Fern. Neut. Masc. and Fern. Neut.
JV. and V. vetua vetus veteres vetera
A. veterem " " "
O. veteris veterura
I>. veteri Veteribua
Abl. vetere "
V. Endings of third declension for z-stems.
Sing. Plur.
W. and V. is (sometimes es or none) €s A. em (sometimes im) " (sometimes is)
C3-. is iuin
I>. i ibus
Abl. e or i
NOTE. — 1st. These endings include the stem-vowel. 2d. The ablative in I is used for all adjectives and neuter nouns with t-stems.
VI. Examples of masculine and feminine nouns.
avi-, bird. tussi-, cough.
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur.
N. and V. avis aves tussis tuss6s
A. avem " tussim "
O. avis avium tussis tussium
5>. avi avi bus tussi tussibus Abl ave
nubi-, cloud. lintri-, wherry.
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur.
W. and V. nubes nubes linter lintrgs
A. nubem " lintrem "
O. nubis nubium lintris lintrium
I>. nubl nubibus lintri lintribus
Abl. nube " lintre "
204 TABLES.
VII. Example of an adjective, exhibiting the forms of the neuter gender as well as those of the masculine and feminine.
NOTE. — All neuter nouns with i-stems are declined like the neuter of this adjective.
levi-, light.
Sing. Plur.
Masc. and Fern. Neut. Masc. and Fern. Neut. If. and V. levis leve leves levia
A. levem " " "
O. levis levium
1>. levi levibus
AbL "
Yin. The following example is given to exhibit the declension of those adjectives with re-stems, which have distinct forms for the three genders in the nom. sing.
acri-, keen.
Sing. Plur.
Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. and FemZ NeuL
If. and T. acer acris acre acres acria
A. acrem
O. acris acrium
J>. acri acribus
AbL
IX. Declension of a comparative adjective, acrior-, acrios-, more keen.
Sing. Plur.
Masc. and Fern. Neut. Masc. and Fern. Neut.
If. and V. acrior acrius acriores acriora
A. acriorem " " "
O. acrioris acriorum
I>. acriori acrioribus
Abl. acriore or acriori "
TABLES. 205
X. Endings of the first declension, or of nouns with a-stems.
Sing. Plur.
W. and V. a ae
A. am as
&. ae arum
D. " is
Abl. a
XI. Example of a noun of the first declension, mensa-, table.
|
Sing. |
Plur. |
|
|
If. and V. |
mensa |
mensae |
|
A. |
mensam |
mensas |
|
O. |
mensae |
mensarum |
|
I>. |
" |
mensis |
Aal. mensa
NOTE. — These endings include the stem-vowel.
XII. Endings of the second declension, or of nouns with o-stems.
Sing. Plur.
Masc. or Fern. Neut. Masc. or Fern. Neut. IV. US (rarely OS) or none um I a
|
A. um (rarely oiil) |
U It 44 " OS " |
|
D. o Abl. |
drum is 44 |
NOTE. — These endings include the stem-vowel. 18
206
TABLES.
XIII. Examples of masculine or feminine nouns of the second declension.
|
servo-, slave. |
agro-. |
}fidd. |
||
|
Sing. |
Plur. |
Sing. |
Plur. |
|
|
W. |
servus |
servi |
ager |
agri |
|
V. |
serve |
u |
" |
M |
|
A. |
servum |
servos |
agrum |
agros |
|
0. |
servi |
servorum |
agri |
agrorum |
|
I>. |
servo |
servis |
agro |
agris |
Abl.
The following examples of adjectives with o-stems are given, as exhibiting in one view the masculine and neuter forms. The feminine forms are also given, that the com- plete declension of what are called in the grammars " adjectives of three terminations " may be seen.
If. V. A.
O. I>.
Abl
bono-, good.
Sing. Plur.
Most. Neut. Fern. Masc. Neut. Fern.
bonus bonum bona bonl bona bonae
bone " " " " "
bonum " bonam bonds " bonas
bonl bond " bona
bonorum bonis
bonarum bonis
pulcro-, beautiful.
|
Sing. Masc. Neut ]¥. pulcer pulcrum A. pulcrum " |
Fern. pulcra pulcram pulcrae pulcra |
Plur. Masc. Neut. pulcri pulcra u « pulcros " pulcrorum pulcris u |
Fern. pulcrae pulcras « pulcrarum pulcris i< |
|
O. pulcri 1>. pulcro AbL |
XIY. Endings of nouns of i\iQ fourth declension, or of nouns with w-stems.
TABLES. 207
Sing. Plur.
Masc. or Fern. Neut. Masc. or Fern. Neut. IV. and V. us u us ua
A. um
G. its uuni
I>. Ill (rarely u) ubus or ibllS
Abl. it
NOTE. — These endings include the stem-vowel.
XV. Examples of the fourth declension.
portu-, harbor. cornu- (neut.), horn.
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur.
If. and V. portus portus cornu cornua A. portura
G. portus portuum [cornus] cornuum
1>. portul portibus cornu cornibus
portu " cornu "
XVI. Endings of the fifth declension, or of nouns with e-stems.
Sing. Plur.
IV. and V. es * es A. em
G. el (sometimes e) erum
D. " " " ebus Abl. e
NOTE. — These endings include the stem-vowel.
XVII. Example of the fifth declension.
die-, day.
Sing. Plwr.
If. and V. dies dies
A. diem "
G. die! dieram
I>. " diebus Abl. die
NOTE.— The three words, re-, " thing," fide-, "trust," and spe-, "hope," generally have the e shortened in the genitive and dative singular.
208 TABLE&
XVLLL. Declension of domu- or domo-, house.
Sing. Plur.
If. and V. domus domus
A. doraum " or domes
O. domus domuum or domorum
I>. domui, or domo, locat doml domibus
Abl. domo "
XIX. Declension of vis(i)-, strength, and Deo-, God.
|
W. and V. A. 0. I> Abl. |
Sing. VIS vim via VI « |
Plur. vires vlrium viribus M |
Sing. Deus Deum Dei Deo ii |
Plur. Del, Dil, or Dl Deos Dedrum or Deum Deis, Diis or Dis « it |
XIX. Declension of duo-, two, and ambo-, both.
duo-, dua-. ambo-, amba-.
Masc. Neut. Fern. Masc. Neut. Fern.
. and V. duo duo duae ambo ambo ambae
A. duos or duo " duas ambosorambo " ambas
G. duorum duarum amborum ambarum
I>. duobua duabus ambobus ambabus
Abl.
NOTE. — All the cardinal numerals from four to a hundred, are unde- clined; MTIO-, " one," has the genit and dative, lus and I for all genders ; duo-, "two," is given above; and tri-, " three," is regular.
OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY
FROM THE EARLIEST TIMES TO THE EMPERORS.
NOTE.— The numbers inserted in parentheses refer to the division* in the preceding book, as marked in tfie margin and at the head of the pages.
LIBER PRIMUS.
1. Antiquissimls temporibus (54), Saturnus in Italiam venisse (146) dlcitur. Ibi baud procul a Janiculo arcem condidit, eamque Saturniam (79) appellavit. Hie Italos primus agriculturam (30) docuit.
2. Postea Latlnus in illls regionibus imperavit. Sub hoc rege Troja in Asia eversa est. Hinc ^Eneas, Anchi- sae (37) fllius, cum multis Trojanis, quibus (46) ferrurn Graecorum pepercerat, aufugit, et in Italiam (27) pervenit. Ibi Latmus rex e! benigne recepto (128) filiam Lavlniam in matrimonium dedit. ^Eneas urbem condidit, quam (104) in honorem conjugis (34) Laviniam appellavit.
3. Post JEneae mortem, Ascanius, ^Eneae (37^ fllius, regnum accepit. Hie sedem regni in alium (162) locurn transtulit, urbemque condidit in monte Albano (13), eam- que Albam longam nuncupavit. Eum (104) sequutus est Silvius, qul post ^Eneae mortem a Lavlnia genitus erat (l. gign-). ejus poster! omnes, usque ad Romam con- ditam, Albae (45) regnaverunt.
4. Unus (162) horum regum (35), Romulus Silvius, se (151) Jove (83) majorem (79) esse (149) dicebat, et, quum tonaret, mllitibus (50) imperavit, ut clipeos hastls (61) percuterent (190), dlcebatque (17), hunc sonum multo clari- orem esse (149) quam tonitrum (82). Fulmine ictus et in Albanum lacuna praecipitatus est.
18*
210 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
5. Silvius Procas, rex Albanorum, duos fllios reliquit, Numitorem (95) et Amulium. Ilorum minor natu (57), Amulius, fratri optionem dedit, utrum regnum habere vellet (215), an bona (97), quae pater rellquisset (224). Numitor paterna bona praetulit (9) ; Amulius regnum obtinuit.
6. Amulius, ut regnum firmissime possideret, Numito- ris flliuni per insidias interemit, et flliam fratris (37), Rheam Silviam, Vestalem virginem (79) fecit. Nam his Vestae sacerdotibus (243) non licet viro (46) nubere. Sed haec a Marte geminos fllios, Romuluin et It em urn, peperit. Hoc quinn Amulius coniperisset (211), matrem in vincula conjecit, pueros (150) autem in Tiberim abjicl (149) jussit.
7. Forte Tiberis aqua ultra ripam se eifuderat, et quum puerl in vrado essent (211) posit!, aqua refluens eos in sicco (97) rellquit. Ad eoruin vagltum lupa accurrit (101), eosque uberibus (61) suis aluit. Quod (110) videns Faus- tulus quidam, pastor illlus regionis, pueros sustulit (1. toll-) et uxorl Accae Laurentiae nutriendos (177) dedit.
8. Sic Romulus et Remus puerltiam inter pastores tran- segerunt. Quum adolevissent (211), et forte comperis-
sent, quis (160) ipsorum avns, quae mater fuisset Ante (215), Amulium interfecerunt, et Numitori avo Chr. regnum restituerunt. Turn urbem condiderunt in 753. monte Aventmo, quam (104) Romulus a suo nomine
Romam (79) vocavit. Haec quum moenibus cir- cumdaretur (25), Remus occlsus est, dum fratrem irrldens nioenia transiliebat.
9. Romulus, ut civium numerum augeret (192), asylum patefecit (237), ad quod mult! ex clvitatibus suls pulsl accurrerunt (1 01). Sed novae urbis civibus (47) conjuges deerant. Festum itaque ISTeptuni et ludos instituit. Ad hos quum niulti ex fiuitimls populls cum mulieribus et liberls venissent (211), Roman!, inter ipsos ludos, spec- tantes virgines rapuerunt.
10. Popull illl, quorum (104) virgines raptae erant,
OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY. 211
bellum adversus raptores susceperunt. Quum Romae (50) appropinquarent (211), forte in Tarpejam virginem inciderunt (101), quae in arce sacra procurabat (17). Han# rogabant, ut viam in arcem monstraret (195), elque per- miserunt, ut munus sibi (235) posceret. Ilia petiit, ut sibi (48) darent, quod in sinistrls manibus gererent (230), annulos aureos et armillas significans. At hostes, in arcem ab ea (126), perducti, scutis (61) Tarpejam obruerunt ; nam et ea in sinistris manibus gerebant
11. Turn Rdmulus cum hoste, qul montem Tarpejum tenebat, pugnam conseruit in eo loco, ubi liunc forum Ro- manum est. In media caede raptae processerunt, et hinc patres, hinc conjuges et soceros complectebantur et roga- bant, ut caedis (34) fmem facerent (190). Utrique his precibus cominotl sunt. Romulus foedus icit, et Sabluos in urbem recepit.
12. Postea civitatem descripsit. Centum Senatores legit, eosque cum ob aetatem, turn ob reverentiam ils (46) debitam, Patres (79) appellavit. Plebem in trlginta cu- rias distribuit casque raptarum nominibus nun- cupavit. Anno (54) regni vlcesimo septimo, quum A. c. exercitum lustraret (211), inter tempestatem or- 716. tarn, repente oculls (51) hominum subductus est.
Hinc alii eum a Seriatoribus interfectum (79), alii ad Deos sublatum esse (149) existimaverunt.
13. Post Rdmull mortem unlus (162) anm interregnum fuit. Quo elapso (131) Numa Pompilius, Curibus (49), urbe* in agro Sablnorum, natus, rex (79) creatus est. Hie vir bellum quidem nullum gessit ; nee minus tamen clvitati (46) profuit. Nam et leges dedit, et sacra plurima instituit, ut popull (36) barbarl et bellicosi mores molliret (192). Omnia autem, quae faciebat, se (151) nymphae
* When the word urb(i)- or oppido- is joined in apposition (95) to the name of a town in the dative (locative), it is put in the ablative case with 47i, rarely without the preposition. See Andrews' Lat. Gr. § 221. Rem. 2 . If in urbe or in oppido precedes the name of the town, the latter is put in the ablative case.
212 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
Egeriae, conjugis suae, jussu facere (149) dlcebat. Morbo decessit, quadragesimo tertio imperil anno (54).
14. Xumae (50) successit Tullus Hostilius, cfijus A. c. avus se in bello adversus Sabinos fortem et stre-
673. nuum virum praestiterat. Rex (79) creutus bel- lum Albums (47) indixit, idque trigeminorum, Ho- ratiorum et Curiatiorum, certamine f inivit. Album prop- ter perfidiam Metii Suffetil diruit. Quum triginta duubus annis* regnasset (91), fulmine ictus cum domo sua arsit.
15. Post hunc Ancus Marcius, Numae (37) ex c. filia nepos, suscepit imperium. Hie vir aequitate
(57) et religione avo (44) similis, Latinos bello domuit, urbem ampliavit, et nova el (50) moenia circumdedit. Carcerem primus aedificavit. Ad Tiberis ostia urbem condidit, Ostiamque vocavit. Vlcesimo quarto anno (54) imperil morbo (61) obiit.
A. c. 16. Deinde regnum Lucius Tarquinius Priscus 616. accepit, Demarati filius, qul tyrannos patriae Co- rinthl (95) fugiens in Etruriam venerat. Ipse Tar- quinius, qui nomen ab urbe Tarquinils (95) accepit, ali- quando Romam (29) profectus erat. Advenientl (51) aquila pileum abstulit, et, postquam alte eVoluverat, re- posuit. Hinc Tanaquil conjux, mulier auguriorum (34) perlta, regnum (150) el portend! intellexit.
17. Quum RomaB (45) commoraretur, (211) Anci regis familiaritatem consequutus est, qul (104) emn filiorum (34) suorum tutoreni reliqmt. Sed is (104) pupillis (51) regnum intercepit. Senutoribus, quos Romulus creaverat, centum alios (162) addidit, qul niinorum gentium sunt appellati. Plura bella feliciter gessit, nee paucos agros, hostibus (51) ademtos, urbis (36) territorio adjunxit. Primus triuniphans (128) urbem intrust. Cloucus fecit; Capitolium inchoavit. Trlcesimo octavo imperil anno (54) per And filios, quibus (51) regnum eripuerat, occl- sus est.
* The ablative case is used to denote the time within which an event occurs.
OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY. 213
18. Post hunc Servius Tullius suscepit impe- A. c. rium, genitus ex nobill femina, captiva (95) tamen 578. et famula. Quum in domo Tarquinil Prisci educa- retur, (211) flamma in ejus capite visa est. Hoc pro- digio (§1) Tanaquil el summam dignitatem portend! (149) intellexit, et conjug! (46) persuasit, ut eum slcuti llberos suds (94) educaret (192). Quum adolevisset, rex el (48) flliam in matrimonium dedit.
19. Quum Priscus Tarquinius occisus esset, (211) Tana- quil de superiore parte domus populum allocuta est, dl- cens ; regem grave quidem, sed non letale vulnus acce- pisse (22 7) / eum, petere, ut populus, dum convaluisset (231), Servio Tullio (46) obediret. Sic Servius reg- nare (146) coepit, sed betie imperium administravit. Monte 3 tres urbi (50) adjunxit. Primus omnium een- sum ordinavit. Sub eo Roma habuit capitum (35) octo- ginta tria millia civium Romanorum cum ils qui in agris erant.
20. Hie rex interfectus est scelere filiae Tulliae
(95) et Tarquinil Superb!, filil ejus regis (37) cm A. c. Servius successerat. Nam ab (126) ipso Tarqui- 534. nio de gradibus Curiae dejectus, quum domum (29) fugeret (210), interfectus est. Tiillia in forum pro- peravit et prlma conjugem regem -(79) salutavit. Quum domum redlret, aurlgam (150) super patris corpus, in via jacens (128) carpentum agere (149) jussit.
21. Tarquinius Superbus cognomen moribus meruit.. Bello (57) tamen strenuus plures finitimorum populorum (35) vicit. Templum Jovis in Capitolio aedificavit. Pos- tea, dum Ardeam oppugn abat, urbem Etruriae (36), im- perium perdidit. Nam quum filius ejus Lucretiae nobi- lissimae feminae, conjugi Tarquinil Collatml, vim fecisset, haec se (94) ipsam occidit in conspectu maritl, patris et amicorum, postquam eos obtestata fuerat, ut hanc inju- riam ulciscerentur (195).
22. Hanc ob causam L. Bratus, Collatlnus, alilque
214 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
A. c. nonnulll in exitium regis (34) conjurarunt, po- 510. puldque persnaserunt, ut el (47) portas Urbis clau- deret. Exercitus quoque, qu! clvitatem Ardeain cum rege oppugiiabat (17), eum rellquit. Fiigit itaque cum uxore et llberls suis (94). Tta Roma? (45) regnatum. est (138) per septem reges, annos (43) ducentos quad- raginta tres.
23. Hinc consules coepere pro uno rege duo creari, ut, si unus mains esset, (224) alter eum coerceret. Annuum ils imperium tributum est, ne (190) per diuturnitatem po- testatis insolentiores (84) redderentur. Fuerunt igitur anno (54) prlmo, expulsls regibus (131) consules L. Ju- m'us Brutus, acemmus (71) llbertatis vindex, et Tar- quinius CollatTnus, maritus Lucretiae. Sed Collatlno (51) paulo post dignitas sublata est. Placuerat enim, ne quis (256) ex Tarquiniorum familia Romae (45) maneret. Ergo cum omni patrimonio suo ex urbe migravit, et in ejus (102) locum Valerius Publicola consul factus est.
24. Commovit bellnm urbl (47) rex Tarquinius. In prlma pugna Brutus, consul, et Aruns, Tarquinil films, sese invicem occlderunt. Roman! tamen ex ea pugna victores recesserunt. Brutum Romanae matronae quasi communem patrem per annum luxerunt. Valerius Pub- licola Sp. Lucretium, Lucretiae patrem, collcgam (79) sibi fecit; qul, quum morbo exstinctus esset(211), Horatium Pulvillum sibi collegam sumsit. Ita primus annus quinque consules habuit.
25. Secundo quoque anno (54) iterum Tarqui- A. c. nius bellum Romanls (50) intulit, Porsena (133), 508. rege Etruscorum, auxih'um el ferente. In illo bello Horatius Codes solus pontem ligneum defendit et hostes cohibuit, donee pons a tergo ruptus esset (190). Turn se cum armls in Tiberim conjecit et ad suos trans- navit.
26. Dum Porsena urbem obsidebat (17), Qu. Mucius Scaevola, juvenis fortis animi (38), in castra hostis (36) se contulit, eo consilio (133), ut regem occideret (195).
OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY. 215
At ibi scribam regis pro ipso rege interfecit. Turn a regiis satellitibus (126) compreliensus ot ad rGgcm de- ductus,quum Porsena eum ignibus (132) allatis tcrreret, dextram arae (50) accensae imposuit, donee fiammls con- sumta esset (190). Hoc facimis rex nilrfitus juvenem dimisit incolumem. Turn hie, quasi beneticium referens, ait trecentos alios juvenes in eum conjurasse (149). Hue re territus Porsena pacem cum Romf.ms fecit, Tarquinius autem Tusculum (29) se contulit, ibique privf.tus cum uxore consenuit.
27. Sexto decimo anno (54) post rogos exartos, populus Romae seditlonem fecit, questns, quod A. c. tributis (61) et militia a senatu (120) exhaunrotur 494. (209). Magna pars plebis (35) urbcm reliquit et
in montem trans Anienem amnem secessit. Turn patres turbati (128) Menenium Agrippam misernnt ad plebem, qul (190) earn senutul conciiiaret. Hie iis inter alia fabu- lam narravit de ventre et membris humani corporis ; qua populus commotus est, tit in Urbem rediret. Turn prl- mum Tribuni plebis creati sunt, qui plebem adversum no- bilitatis (33) superbiam defenderent (190).
28. Octavo decimo anno post exactos reges, Qu. Marcius, Coriolanus dictus ab urbe Volscorum Co- A. c. riolis (95), quam bello ceperat, plebi invlsus (79) 492. fieri coepit. Quare urbe (59) expulsus ad Yolscos, acerrimos (71) Romanorum hostes, contendit, et ab iis dux exercitus factus Romanos saepe vicit. Jam usque ad quintum milliarium Urbis accesserat, nee ullis (264) civium suorum legationibus flectT poterat, ut patriae (46) parceret. Denique Yeturia mater et Yolumnia uxor (7) Urbe ad eum venerunt; quarum (33) fletu et
recibus (61) commotus est, ut exercitum removeret (198). uo (110) facto a Yolscls ut proditor occisus (79) esse dicitur.
29. Roman! quum adversum Yejentes bellum gere- rent (211), familia Fabiorum sola hoc bellum suscepit. Profectl sunt trecenti sex nobilissiml homines, duce
216 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
(133) Fabio Consule. Quurn saepe hcstes vi- A. c. cissent (211), apud Cremeram fluviura castra 479. posuerunt. Ibi Vejentes, dolo usi, eos in insidias
pellexerunt. In proelio ibi exorto omnes perie- runt ; unus superfuit ex tanta familia, qul propter aeta- tera puerilem dud non potuerat ad pugnam. Hie genus propagavit ad Qu. Fabium Maximum, ilium, qul Hanni- balem prudent! (68) cunctatione debilitavit.
30. Anno trecentesimd et altero ab Urbe condita A. c. Decemviri creat! sunt, qui (190) civitatl leges scrl- 451. berent (192). Hi primo anno bene egerunt ; secun-
do autem dominationein exercere coeperunt. Sed quum unus eorum (35) Appius Claudius Virginiam, Vir- ginil Centurionis filiam, corrumpere vellet (234), pater earn occidit. Turn ad mllites profugit, eosque ad seditio- nem commovit. Sublata est decem^ris (51) potestas, ipsique omnes aut niorte aut exilic pumti sunt.
31. In bello contra Vejentanos Furius Camillus A. c. urbem Falerios (95) obsidebat. In qua (103) obsi- 395. dione quum ludl literaril magister principum filios
ex urbe in castra hostium duxisset, Camillus hoc donum non accepit, sed scelestum hominem, manibus (133) post tergtim -sdnctls, puerls Falerios (29) reduccn- dum (177) tradidit; virgasque iis dedit, quibus prodi- torem in urbem agerent (190).
32. Hac tanta animl nobilitate commotl Falisci urbem Romanls tradiderunt. Camillo (47) autem apud Roma- nos crlniin! (81) datum (25) est, quod albis equls tri- umphasset (209), et praedam inique (21) dlvlsisset ; dam-
natusque ob earn causam et clvitate (59) expulsus A. c. est. Paulo post Galll Senones ad Urbem vene- 390. runt, Romanes apud flumen Alh'am vicerunt, et
Urbem etiam occuparunt. Jam nihil praeter Cap- itolium defendl (146) potuit. Sed jam praesidium fame laborabat, et in eo erant, ut pacem a Gallis auro (62) em- erent (199), quum Camillus cum manu mih'tum superve- niens hostes magno proelio superaret.
OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY. 217
LIBER SECUXDUS.
1. Anno (54) trecentesimo nonagesimo altero
post Urbem conditam Gall! iterum ad Urbem ac- A. c. cesserant, et quarto milliario (03) trans Anienem 361. fluviuin consederant. Contra eos missus est T. Quinctius. Ibi Gallus quidam, eximia corporis magnitu- dine (64), fortissimum Romanorum (35) ad certamen sin- gulare provocavit. T. Manlius, nobiJissimus juvenis, pro- vocationem accepit, Galluin occldit, eumque torque (59) aureo spoliavit, quo (61) ornatus erat. Hinc et ipse et posterl ejus Torquatl (79) appellat! siint. Galll fugam capesslverunt.
2. Novo bello (131) cum Gallls exorto, anno Ur-
bis quadringentesimo quarto, iterum Gallus pro- A. c. cessit, robore atque ariuls (57) insignis, et provo- 349. cavit unum ex Romanls, ut secum (98) armls de- cerneret. Turn s§ M. Valerius, tribunus mllitum, obtulit ; et, quum processisset armatus, corvus el (46) supra dex- trum brachium sedit. Mox, commissa pugna, hie corvus alls (61) et unguibus Galll oculos verberavit. Ita factum est, ut Gallus facill negotio a Valerio (126) interficeretur (199), qul Line Corvlnl nomen accepit.
3. Postea Romanl bellum gesserunt cum SamnT- tibus, ad quod L. Paplrius Cursor cum honore die- A. c. tatoris profectus est. Qul, quum negotil cujusdam 324. causa Romam (29) ivisset (211), praecepit Q. Fabio Rulliano, magistro equitum, quern (104) apud exercitum rellquit, ne pugnam cum hoste committeret (195). Sed ille, occasionem nactus, fellcissime (77) dimicavit et Sam- nites delevit. Ob hanc rem a dictatore capitis* damnatus est. At ille in Urbem confugit, et ingenti favore (61) mllitum et popull llberatus est ; in Paplrium autem tanta
* Verbs denoting "accuse," "condemn," "acquit," take a gtidiice of the offence or the penalty. 19
213 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
exorta est seditio, u,t paene ipse interficeretur (237 note 3d).
4. Duobus annTs post T. Veturius et Spurius Postu- mius Consules bellum adversum SamnTtes gerGbant. Ill a Pontio Theleslno, duce -hostium, in insidias induct! sunt.
Nam ad Furctilas Caudinas Rjmaiios pellexit in A. c. angustias, unde sese (235) expedire non poterant. 321. Ibi Pontius patrein suum (94) Herenniuin rogavit,
quid faciendum (ISO) putaret (215). Ille ait, aut omnes occidendos (178) esse, ut Romanoruni vires frange- rentur (196), aut omnes dlmittendos, ut beneficid obligaren- tur. Pontius ntrumque consilium improbavit, omnesque sub jugum mlsit. SamnTtes denique post bellum uudc- quinquagiiita annoruui (40) siipei*ut! sunt.
5. D^victTs Samnitibus (131), TarentTnls (50) bel- A. c. lum indicium est, quia legatis (47) Romanoru n in- 281. juriam iecissent (2-09). Hi Pyrrhum, Epiri rSgcra (95), contra Romanos auxilium (30) poposcernnt. Is mox in Italiam venit, tumque prlmum Rumaiil cum trans- manno hoste pugnaverunt. Missus est contra eum con- sul P. Valerius Laevlnus. Hie, quum exploratores Pyrrhl cepisset (211), jussit eos per castra due! (149), ostemli omnem exercitum, tumque dimittT, ut renuntiarent Pyrrho (48), qusecunque a Rouianls (126) agerentur (215).
6. Pugna commissa (131), Pyrrhus anxilio elephantorum vTcit. Xox proelio flnem dedit. Laevinus tamen per noctem iugit. Pyrrhus Romanos mille octingentos cepit, eosque summo honore (55) tractavit. Quum eos, qul in proelio interfectl fuerant, omnes adversis vulneiibus (55) et trucl vultu etiam mortuos (128) jacere vidC-ret, tulisse ad coelum man us dicitur, cum hac voce : Ego cum tdlibus vins brevl orbein terrdrum subigerem (254).
7. Postea Pyrrhus Romam (29) perrexit ; omnia ferro igneque vastavit; Campaniam depopulatus est, atque ad Praeneste voiiit milliario (63) ab IJrbe octavo deciino. Mox terrore exercitus (34), qu! cum cousule sequebatur, in
OUTLINES OF ROMAN
w\V
Campaniam se reccpit. Legf.ti, ad Pyrrhum d3 captlvTs redimendls (174) miss!, honorifico ab eo suscepti simt ; captlvos sine pretio reddidit. ununi ex legatls, Fabricium sic admlratus est, nt el (46) quartam part em regn! (35) su! promitteret (199), si ad se translret (230); sed a Fab- ricio conterntus est.
8. Quum jam Pyrrhus ingent! Romanorum admlratione tenGretur (211), legatum (79) mlsit Clneam, praestantissi- mum virum (97), qul pacem peteret (190), ea conditione (56), ut Pyrrhus earn part em Italiae, quam armls (61) oc- cupaverat, obtineret (190). Romf.nl responderunt, eum cum Romania pacem habere (146) uon posse (149), nisi ex Italia recessisset (230). Cmeas quum rediisset (211), Pyrrho (48), eum interrogantl, qualis ipsl Jloma visa esset (215)/ respoudit, «5 (151) rtgum patriam vldisse (149.)
9. In alters proelio cum rege Eplrl commisso Pyrrhus vulnei'i'tus est, elephant! interfectl, vigint! millia hostium (35) caesa sunt. Pyrrhus Tarentum (29) fiigit. Inter- jecto anno (131), Fabricius contra eum missus est. Ad hunc medicus Pyrrhl nocte (54) venit, promittcns, se Pyrrhum veneno (61) occlsilrum (147), si mi.ntis sibi (233) daretur (230). Hunc (150) Fabricius vinctum reduc! jus- sit ad domiuum. Tune rex, admlratus ilium, dixisse fertur (236) ; file est Fabricius, qul diffivilius (77) ab konestute gnam sol a cursu sud avcrtl potest. Paulo post Pyrrhus, tertio etiam proelio tusus a Tarento re- A. c. cessit, et quum in Graeciam rediisset (211), apud 2V2. Argos, PeloponnesI urbem, interfectus est.
10. Anno (54) quadringentesimo nonagesimo
post Urbem conditam, Romanorum exercitus prl- A. c. mum in Sicilian! trajectirtint, regemque Syracusa- 263. rum Hieronem, Poeuosque, qu! multas clvitates in ea insula occupaverant, superaverunt. Quinto an- no hujus belli, quod contra Poenos gerebf*tur, prl- A. c. mum Roman!, C. Duillio et Cn. Cornelio Asina 260. Coss, (131), in mar! (68) dlniicaverunt. Duiilius
220 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
Carthaginienses vlcit, trlginta naves occupavit, quatuor- decirn mersit, septejn millia hostium (35) cepit, tria millia occidit. Xulla victoria RomaiiTs grfitior fait. Duillio concessum est (138), ut, qaum u coena redlret (224), pueri funalia gestautes et tlbicen eum comitarentur.
11. Panels armls interjectis (131) bellum in Afii- A. c. cam translatum est. Hamilcar, Carthuginiensittm 256. dux, pugna (61) naval! superatur ; nam, perditls sexaginta quatuor navibus (133), se recepit ; Ro- mani vigintl duas amlsernnt. Quum in African! vGnis- sent, Poenos in pluribus proelils vlcerunt, magnam vim hominum ceperunt, septuaginta quatuor clvitates in fidem acceperunt. Turn victl Carthaginienses pacem a Romanis petierunt (91). Quam (110) quum M. Atilius Regulus, llomanorum dux, dare (25) nollet (234) nisi durissimls conditianibus (56) Carthaginienses anxilium petierunt a Laced aemoniis. Ill Xanthippum misenmt, qu! Romanum exercitum magno proelio vlcit. Regulus ipse captus et in vincula conjectus est.
12. Non tamen ublque fortuna Carthaginiensibus (46) favit. Quum aliquot proeliis victl essent, Regulum roga- verunt ut Romam (29) proticisceretur, et pacem captlvo- rumque permutationem a RSmanls obtineret. Ille quura Romam venisset, inductus in senatum, dixit, se (151) de- siise (22V) Romanum (79) esse ex itt'i die, qua (54) in potestdtem Poenorum vvnisset (230). Turn Romanis sua- sit, ne pacem cum Carthaginiensibus facerent (192) : illos enim, tot casibus fractos, spem nullam nisi in pace habere (149) : tantl (249) non esse (149), ut tot millia captivo- rum (35) propter se unum et paucos, qui ex Romanis captl essent (230), redderentur. Haec sententia obtinuit. Regressus igitur in Africam crudelissimis supplicils ex- stinctus est.
13. Tandem C. Lutatio Catulo, A. Postumio
A. c. Coss. (131), anno bell! Punic! v!cesimo tertio, mag-
242. num proelium navale commissum est contra Lilv-
baeum, promontorium (95) Siciliae. In eo proelio
OUTLINES OP ROMAN HISTORY. 221
septuaginta tres Carthaginiensinm naves captae, centum vigintl qninqne demersae, trlgintfi duo millia hostium (35) capta, tredecim millia occisa sunt. Statim Carthagini- enses pacem petierunt (91), elsque pax tributa est. Cap- tlv! Romanorum (35), qui tenebantur a Carthaginiensibus (126), redditl sunt. Poem Sicilia (59), Sardinia et ceterls insulls, quae inter Italiam Africamque jacent, decesserunt, omnemque Hispaniam, quae citra Iberuin est, Roinunls (46) permlserunt.
LIBEK TERTIUS.
1. Anno qningentesimo duodetricesimo, ingentes Gallorum copiae Alpes transierunt. Sed pro Ro- A. o. manis tota Italia consensit : traditumque est, octin- 225. genta millia hominum ad id bellum parata (135) fuisse. Res prospere gesta est apud Clusium: quadra- gintfi millia hominum interfecta sunt. Aliquot annls (54) post pugnatum est (139) contra Gallos in agro Insubrum, fmltumque est bellum M. Claudio Marcello, Cn. Cornolio Sclpione Consulibus (131). Turn Marcellus regem Gallo- rum, Viridomanun, manu (61) sua occidit, et triumphans (128) spolia Galll, stlpitl (50) imposita, liumeris suls (94)- vexit.
2. Paulo post Punicum bellum renovatum est per Tlan- nibalem, Carthaginiensium ducem, quern pater Ilamilcar, novem annos (43) natum, arls (50) admoverat, ut odium perenne in Romanos juraret (190). Hie annum agens vicesimum aetatis, Saguntum, Hisp^niae civitatem, Ro- mums (46) amicam, oppugnare (146) aggressus est (136). HuTc (48) Roman! per leg^.tos denuntiavG- A. c. runt, ut bello abstineret (195). Qiil (1^0) quura 218. legates admittcre nollet (234), Roman! Carthagi-
nem (29) miserunt, ut mandaretur (139) HannibalT, nS bellum contra socios populi Roman! gereret (190). Dura responsa a Carthfiginiensibus reddita. Saguntinis interea fame victis (133), Romanl Carthaginiensibus (47) bellum indixerunt.
19*
222 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
8. Hannibal, fratre Hnsdrnbale in Hispilnia relicto (133), Pyrenaenm et Alpes transiit. Traditur in Italiam oeto- gintii millia peditum (35), et vigintl millia oquitnm, sep- . teni et triginta elephantos adduxisse (146). Interea mult! Ligures et Gall! Hannibal! (50) se conjunxerunt. Primus el occurrit P. Cornelius Sclpio, qui, proelio ad Ticlnum commisso, superatus est, et, vubiere accepts (133), in cas- tra rediit. Turn Senipronius Gracchus eonnixit ad Tre- biam amnem. Is quoque vin'citur (137). Multi popull se Hanniball dediderunt. Inde in Tusciam progressus (213) Flaminium Cos. ad Trasimenura lacuin superat (137). Ipse Flaminius interemtus, Romandrum vlgintl quinque millia caesa sunt.
4. Quingentesimo et tncesimo septimS ann^> post A. c. TJrbeni conditam L. ^Emilius Paullus et P. Teren- 216. tius Varro contra Hannibalem mittuntur (137). Quamquam intellectum erat, Hannibalem non a!i- ter vine! posse (145), quani mora, Varro tamen, morae (34) impatiens, apu 1 vTcum, qul Cannae appelUtur, in Apuli'i pugnfivit; ambf) consules victT, Paullus interemtus est. In efi pugnl consulares ant praetoril vlgintT, senl- toivs tngintl captl ant occTsi; militum (35) quadragintl millia ; equitum tria millia et quingentl perierunt. In his tantis malis (97) nemo tamen pacis mentionem facere di^- natiis est (136). Servl, quod numquam ante factuin (135), manamissl et milites (79) factl sunt.
5. Post earn pugnam multae Italiae clvitates, quae Ro- manls (46) paruerant, se ad Hannibalem transtulerunt. Hannibal RununTs obtulit ut captlvos redimerent (195) ; responsumque est (139) a Senatu, eos elves (150) non esse necessarios, qui armati cap! potuissent (231). Hos omnes ille ]>oste"i varils suppliciis interfecit, et tiv-s inodios aure- orum annulorum Carthzlginem (29) mlsit, quos manibus (59) equitum Rominorum, senatonim, et mllitum de- traxerat. Interea in Ilispania frater Ilannibalis, Hasdru- bal, qui ibi remanserat cum magno exercitfi, a duobus Sclpionibus vincitur (137), perditque in pugua triginta qiduque millia hominuni.
OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY. 223
6. Arm5 quarto postqufim (114) Hannibal in Italiam venerat, M. Claudius Marcellus Cos. apud Nolam, clvita- tem Campfmiae, contra Hannibalem bene pugnavit. Illo tempore Philippus, Demetril films, rex Macedoniae, ad Hannibalem legiitos mittit, elque auxilia contra Romanes pollicetur (137). Qul (HO) legat! quinn a Romams captl essent, M. Valerius Laevlnus cum navibus missus est, qul regem irnpedlret (190), quominus copias in Italiam traji- ceret (203). idem in Macedonian! penetrans regem Philip- pum vlcit.
7. In Sicilia quoque res prospere gesta est. Marcellus magnam hfijus insulae partem cepit, quam Poem occupa- verant ; Syracusas, nobilissimam urbem, expugnavit, et ingentem. inde praedam Romam (29) misit. Laevlnus in Macedonia cum Philippo et multis Graeciae populis ami- citiam fecit; et in Sicilian! profectus (213), Ilannonem, Poenorum (34) ducem, apud Agrigentum cepit ; quadra- ginta civitates in deditionem accepit, vlginti sex expug- navit. Ita omni Sicilia recepta (133), cum ingenti gloriii Romam regressus est (136).
8. Interea in Hispaniam, ubi duo Sclpiones ab Hasdru- bale (126) interfectl erant, missus est P. Cornelius Sclpio, vir Romanorum (35) omnium fere primus. Hie puer duo- devlginti annorum (38) in pugna ad Tlclnum patrem sin- gularl virtiite (55) servavit. Deinde post cladem Can- nensem multos nobilissimorum juvenum (41), Italiam de- serere cupientium (128), auctoritate (61) sua ab hoc con- silio deterruit. Vlginti quatuor annorum (38) juvenis in Hispaniam missus, die, quo venit, Carthaginem Novam cepit, in qua omne aurum et argentum et bell! apparatum Poen! habebant, nobilissiinos quoque obsides, quos ab His- panls acceperant. Hos obsides parentibus suis (235) red- didit. Quare o nines fere Hispaniae civitates ad eum uno animo (55) transierunt.
9. Ab eo inde tempore res Romanorum in dies laeti- ores factae sunt. Hasdrubal a fratre ex Hispania in Italiam evocatus, apud Senam, Piceni clvitatem, in insid-
224 OUTLIXES OF ROMAX HISTORY.
ias incidit, et strenue pugnans occTsus est. Plurimae autem civitates, quae in Bruttils ab Hannibale tenebantur, Romanis se tradidOnmt.
10. Anno decimS quarto postquam in Italiam A. c. Hannibal venerat, Seipio consul creatus et in AtH- 205. cam missus est. Ibi contra Hannonem, ducein
Carthaginiensium, prospere pugnat (137) totumque ejus exercitum delet. See-undo proelio undeeim miilia hominum occldit, et castra cepit cum quatuor millibus et quingentls militibus. Syphacem, Numidiae regem, qul se (94) cum Poems conjunxerat, cepit, eumque cum nobi- lissimls Numidls et inflnltis spolils Romam (29) mlsit.
Qua (110) re audlta, omnis fere Italia Hannibalem A. c. deserit. Ipse a Carthaginiensibus in African! re- 203. dire jubutur. Ita anno (54) decimo sexto Italia
ab Hannibale llberata est.
11. Post plures pngnas et pacem plus* semel A. c. frustra tentatam, pugna ad Zamam committitur, 202. in qua peritissimi duccs copias suas ad belluni
edacebant. Scipio victor recedit (137) ; Hannibal cum paucis equitibus evadit. Post hoc proelium pax cum Carthaginiensibus facta est. Scipio, quum Romam re- diisset (214), ingentl gloria (55) triumphavit, atque Afri- canus appellatus est. Sic finem accepit secundum Puni- cuin bellum post annum duodevicesiuiuni quam coe- peratf
LIBER QTTARTUS.
1. FinTto Punico bello (131), sequutum est Mace-
A. c. donicum contra Philippum regem. Superutus est
197. r6x a T. Quinctio Flaminio apud Cynoscephalas,
paxque el data est his legibus (133) ; ne Gmeciae
clvitatibus, quas .Romaiii contra eum dvfenderant (240),
* After the comparative adverbs, pfO-s, " more," amplius, •' more." mi- rw$, "less," the word qtv.im, "than," maybe either inserted or omitted. fi. e., a»/io duodcvlcesimo posfyuam coeperat.
OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY. 225
bettum inferret (236) / ut crtpflvos, et transfugas redderet; qidnqiwginta solum navus hablret ; reliquas Romania claret (25) / mille talenta praestdret, et obsidem daretfd- inm Dcnivtrium. T. Quinctius etiam Lacedaemonils in- tulit bellum, et clucem eorum Nabin vlcit.
2. Finite bello Macedonico sequutum est bellum Syriacum contrfi Antiochum regem, cum quo (98) A. c. Hannibal se junxerat. Missus est contra eum L. 191. Cornelius Sclpio Cos., CUT frater ejus Sclpio Africa- nus legatus (79) est additns. Hannibal navall proelio victus, Antiochus autem ad Magnesiam, Asiae clvitatcm, a Cornelio Scipione Cos. ingenti proelio fusus est. Turn rex Antiochus pacem petit (13V). Data est el hac lege (133), ut ex Eurdpa et Asia rectderet, atque intrd Tau- rtun S6 contineret, decem millia talentorum (35) et vigintl obsid^s praebvret, Hannibalem, concitorem belli dtderet. Sclpio Romam (29) rediit et ingenti gloria (55) triumpha- vit. Nomen et ipse ad imitationem fratris (34) Asiatic! accepit.
3. Philippo, rege Macedoniae, mortuo, filius ejus Per- seus rebellayit, ingentibus cdpiis paratls (133). Dux Ro- manorum, P. Licinius Consul, contra eum missus, gravl proelio a rege victus est. Rex tamen pacem petebat. Cui (110) Romani earn praestare noluerunt, nisi his con- ditionibus (133), ut se et suos (235) Romanls dederet (195). Mox JEmilius Paullus Cos. regem ad Pydnam supe- ravit, et vigintl millia peditum ejus (36) occldit. Equitatus cum rege fugit. Urbes Macedoniae om- A. c. nes, quas rex tenuerat, Romanls se dediderunt. 168. Ipse Perseus ab amicis desertus in Paulll potesta-
tem venit. Hie, multls etiam alils rebus gestls, cum in- genti pompa Romam rediit in nave Perse!, inusitiitae magnitudinis (38) ; nam sedecim remorum ordines hab- uisse dicitur. Triumphavit magnificentissime (73) in curru aureo, duobus filils (133) utroque latere (C3) ad- stantibus. Ante currum inter captlvos duo regis fllii et ipse Perseus duct! sunt.
4. Tertium deinde bellum contra Carthaginem suscep-
226 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
turn est, sexcentesimo quarto anno ab urbe condita, A. c. anno quinquagesiind aitero, postquam secuiulum 149. bell uni Punk-urn transactum erat. L. Manilas
CensGrmus et M. Manilas Coss. in African! trr.je- cerunt et oppugnrivenmt Carth.iginem. Malta ibi prae- clare gesta smit per ScipHnem, ScTpionis African! nepo- tem, qui tribunus in Africa mllitabat. Hujus npud omnes ingens met us et reverentia erat, neqne quidquam (263) magis Carlhfiginiensium daces vltfibant, quam contra, earn. proeliurn committere (145).
5. Quum jam magnum esset Sclpionis nomen, terti5 anno postquam Roman! in African! triijecerant, Consul
est creatus et contra Carthaginem missus. Is hanc A. c. urbem , a clvibus acerrime (Tl) defensam, cepit ac 146. diruit. Ingens ibi praedafacta plarimaque inventa
sunt, quae multarum civitatum excidils (61) Car- thago collegerat. Ilnec omnia Sclpio civitatibus Italiae, Siciiiae, Africae reddidit, quae sua (235) recognoscebant. Ita Carthago, septiiigeiitesimo anno postquam condita erat, deleta est. Sclpio 4iomen African! junioris accepit.
6. Interim in Macedonia quidam Pseudophilippus arma movit, et P. Juvencium, Romanorum ducem, ad interne-
vicit. Post euin Q. Caecilius Metellus dux a Ro-
manis contra Pseudophilippum mssus est, et, vTgnt! qninque millibus ex miiitlbus ejus (36) occ!s!s (133), Macedonian! recepit: ipsum etiam Pseudophilippum in potestatem suam redegit. Corinthiis quoque bellum in- dicturn est,nobilissimae Graeciae clvitat! (95), prop- A. c. ter injuriam RomauTs legatls (50) illatam. Ilanc
146. Mummius consul cepit ac diruit. Trcs igitur R6- mae (45) simul celeberrimi triumph! fuerunt ; Sc!p-
iohis ex Africa, ante cujus currum ductus est Andriscus, qui et Pseudophilippus dicitur; ]MummiI ex Corintlio, ante quern signa aenea et pictae tabulae et alia urbis cla- rissimae ornamenta praelata sunt.
7. Anno sexcentesimo sexto post Urbem condi- A. c. tarn Viriathus in Lusitania bellum contra Romanos
147. excitavit. Pastor pnnio fuit', mox latronum dux ;
OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY. 227
postremo tantos ad bellum populos concitavit, ut vindex llbertatis (34) Hispaniae existimaretur (199). Denique a snls (97) interfectus est. Quum interfectores ejus prae- mium a Caepionc Cos. peterent, responsum est (139), nunquam RomfmTs (46) placuisse, imperatorem a, mllitibus suis (235) interticl (149).
8. Delude bellum exortum est cum NumantTnTs, civi- tate (95) Hispaniae. Victus ab his Qu. Pompejus, et post eum C. Ilostllius Mancmus Cos., qui pacem cum iis fe- cit infamem, quani (150) populus et senatus jussit infringl, atque ipsum Mariclnum hostibus tradi. Turn P. Scipio Airicanus in Hispaniam missus est. Is primum militem ignavum et corruptum correxit ; turn multas Hispaniae civitates partim bello cepit, partim in deditionem accepit. Postremo ipsam Numantiam fame ad de- A. c. ditionem coegit, urbemque evertit; reliquam pro- 133. vinciam in fidem accepit.
9. P. Scipione ' NasTca et L. Calpurnio Bestia Coss. (131) Jugurthae, Numidarum regi, bellum illatum est, quod Adherbalem et Hiempsalem, Micipsae fllios, patru- eles suos, interemisset (209). Missus adversus eum Cos. Calpurnius Bestia, corruptus regis pecunia, pacem cum eo flagitiosissimam fecit, quae a senatu improbata est. Denique Qu. Caecilius Metellus Cos. Jugurtham varils proelils vlcit, elephantos ejus occldit vel cepit, multas clvitates ipsTus in deditionem accepit. El (50) successit C. Marius, qui bello (48) terminum posuit, ipsumque Jugur- tham cepit. Ante currum triumphantis (128) Marii Jugurtha cum duobus fllils ductus est vinctus, et A. c. mox jussu consulis in carcere strangulatus. 106.
LIBER QUINTUS.
1. Dum bellum in Numidia contra Juguvtham geritur, Cimbrl et Teuton! aliaeque Germanorum et Gallorum gcn- tes Italiae minabantur, atque Romanorum exercitus lu de- runt. Ingens fuit Romae (45) timor, ne iterum Gall! Ur-
228 OUTLINES OF ROMAX HISTORY.
bem occuparent. Ergo Marius Cos. creatus, elque bel- lum contra Cimbros et Teutonos dec-return cst ; belloque pr.'tracto (133), tertius el et qnnrtus consulatus delatus est. In duobns proelils cum Cimbrls ducenta millia hos- tium (35) cecldil, octoginta millia cGpit, eorumque ivgem Theutobochtim ; propter quod merit um absens quinto Consul (79) creatus e>t. Interea Cimbri et Teuton! quo- rum copia adhuc ini'inita erat, in Italian! transiC-- A. c. runt (91). Iterum a C. Mario et Qu. Catulo con- 101. tra eos dlmicatum est (139) ad Veronam. Cen- tum et quadraginta millia aut in pugna aut in fuga caesa sunt ; sexagintfi millia capta. Tria et triginta Cim- brls (51) signa siiblata sunt.
2. Sexcentesimo sexagesimo tertio anno ab Urbe A. c. condita in Italia gravissimum bellum exarsit.
90. Nam Plcentes, Mars! Pelignique, qu! multos an- nos (43) populo Romano (46) obedierant, aequa cum illis jura sibi dari (149) postulabant. Perniciosuni admodum hoc bellum fuit. P. Rutilius Cos. in eo occisus est ; pliires exercitus fusi fugatique. Tandem L. Corne- lius Sulla cum alia egregie ges it, turn Cluentium, hostium dncem, cum magnis copils ludit. Per biennium cum gravl utriusque partis calamitate hoc bellum tractum est. Ter- tio demum anno L. Cornelius Sulla el imposuit finem. Roman! tamen> id quod prius negaverant, jus clvitutis, bello fimto (131), sociis tribuerunt.
3. Anno Urbis conditae sexcentesimo sexagesi- A. c. mo quinto primum Romae (49) bellum civ!le exor-
88. turn est ; eodem anno etiam Mithridaticum. Cau- sam bello civill C. Marius dedit. Nam quum Sul- lae bellum adversus Mithridatem regem Pont! decretum esset (211), Marius e! (51) hunc honorem eripere conatus est. (136). Sed Sulla, qu! adhuc cum legionibus su!s in Italia, njqrabatur, cum exercitu Rdmam (29) venit, et ad- versariog cum interiecit, turn fugavit. Turn rebus Ro- mae (49) ut.cumque compositis, in Asiam profectus est, pluribusque proeljis ?ilithridateni coegit, ut pacern a Ro-
OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY. 229
manis peteret, et Asia, quam (104) invaserat, relicta, rcgnl su! flnibus (61) contentus esset.
4. Sed dum Sulla in Graecia et Asia Mithridatem vin- cit, Marius, qui fug-it us ftierat, et Cornelius Cinna, unus ex consulibus, belium in Italia repararunt, et ingress! Rr>m:im, nobilissimos ex senatu, et consulates viros interfecerunt ; inultos proscripserunt ; ipsTus Sullae domo eversa (133), fllios et uxorem ad fugaiii compulerunt. universus reli- quus senatus, ex Urbe fugiens, ad Sullam in Graeciam ve- nit, orans, ut patriae (50) subvenlret (192). Sulla in Ital- iam trajecit, hostiuin exercitus vicit, mox etiam Urbern ingressus est, quam caede (61) et sanguine civium reple- vit. Quatuor millia (150) inermium, qui se dediderant, interficl (237) jussit; duo millia equitum et senritorurn proscripsit. Turn de Mithridate triumphavit. Duo haec bella funestisama, Italicum, quod et sociale dictum est, et civile, consumserunt ultra centum et quinquaginta mil- lia hominum, viros consulares vTgintl quatuor, praetorius septem, aedllicios sexaginta, senutores fere ducentos.
LIBER SEXTUS.
1. Anno Urbis conditae sexcentesimo septuages- imo nono, Licinio Lucullo et M. Aurelio Cotta A. c. Coss., mortuus est Nlcomedes, rex Blthyniae et 74. testamento populum Romanum fecit heredem. Mithridates, pace rupta Asiam rursus voluit invadere. Adversus eum ambo Consules miss! variam habuere for- tunam. Cotta, apud Chalcedonem victus proelio, a rege etiam intra oppidum obsessus est. Sed quum se inde Mithridates Cyzicum (29) transtulisset (214), ut hac urbe captd totam Asiam invaderet, Lucullus el alter consul oc- currit (101), ac dum Mithridates in obsidione Cyzicl com- moratur, ipse eum a tergo obsedit, fameque consumtum multls proelils vicit. Postremo Byzantium (29) eum fu- gavit; naval! quoque proelio ejus duces oppressit. Ita una hieme et aestate a Lucullo centum fere millia mllitum regis exstincta sunt. 20
230 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
2. Anno Urbis sexcentesimo octogesimo novum A. c. in Italia belluni conimotum est. Septuaginta enim 73. quf.tuor gladLtores, ducibus (133) Spartaco, Crixo et Gui.MiiaO c ludo gladiat'trio, qu! Capuae (45) er.it, efFugerunt, et per Italiain vagantC-s paene nou levins bellum, quani Hannibal, moveriint. Xam contraxerunt exercitum fere sexagintl inillinm (38) armatorum (35), multosque daces et duos Romanos consules vicernnt. Ipsi victl sunt in Apulia a M. Licinio Crasso (126) Pro- consule, et, post multas calainitates Italiae, tertio anno (54) hnlc bello finis est iinpositus. r,
3. Interim L. Lucullus, bellnra Mithridaticnm perse- quiitus, regnuin Mithridatis invasit, ipsumque regera apud Cabira clvit.ltem quo ingentes copias ex omn! regnu ad- duxerat Mithridates, ingenti proelio superatum fugivit, et castra ejus dlripuit. Armenia quoque minor, quain tene- bat, eidem (51) erepta est. Susceptus est Mithridates a Tigruiie, Armeniae rege, qui turn ingenti gloria (55) im- perabat; sed hujiis quoque regnum Lucullus est ingressus (136). Tigranocerta, nobilissimam Armeniae civitatem, cepit; ipsum regem, cum magno exercitu venientem, it a vicit, ut robur militum Armeniorum deleret (199). Sed quum Lucullus fmem bello imponere pararet (211), suc- cessor el missus est.
4. Per ilia tempora piratae omnia maria infestabant it a, ut Romaiils, toto orbe (63) terrarum victoribus, sola navi- gatio tuta non esset (199). Quare id bellum Cn. Pompe-
jo decretum est, quod intra paucos menses incredi- A. c. bill le licit ate (55) et celeritate confecit. Mox el 66. delatum bellum contra regem Mithridatem et Tig- ranem. Quo (110) suscepto, Mithridatem in Ar- menia minore nocturno proelio vieit, castra dlripuit, et q ladraginta millibus ejus (36) occlsis, vlgintl tantum de exercitu suo perdidit et duos centuriones. Mithridates fagit cum uxore et duobus comitibus, neque multo post, Pharnacis filii sin seditione coactus, venenum hausit. Hunc vitae (33) finem habiut Mithridates, vir ingentis in-
OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY. 231
dustriae atque consilii (38). Regnavit annls* sexaginta, vixit septuaginta du5bus : contra Romanos beilum habuit annls quadragintu.
5. Tigrfin! delude Pompejus bcllum intnlit. Ille se el dedidit, et in castra Pompcjl venit, ac diadSma strain in qjus mambus coilocavit, quod el Pomp jj us reposuit. Parte (61) regn! eum multuvit et grand! pecunia. Tain alias etiam reges et populos superavit. Armenian! mino- rem Deiotaro (48), Galatiae regi, donavit, quia auxiiium contra Mithriaatera tulerat. SslencTani, vlcmam Anti- ochlae clvitatem, llbertate (61) donavit, quod regem Tig- ranein njn recepisset (209). Inde in Judaeam transgres- sus (213), Hierosolymani, caput gentis, tertio mense (54) cepit, duodecim millibus (133) Jadaeorum occisls, ceterls in fidem receptis. His gestls flnem antlquissima bello irnposuit. Ante triumphantis currum duct! sunt f ilil Mith- ridatis, filius Tigranis, et Aristobulus, rex Judaeorum. Praelata ingens pecunia, aim atque argent! (35) inf mitum. Hoc tempore nullum per orbeni terrarum grave beilum erat.
6. M. Tulli5 Cicerone oratore (95) et C. Anto- nio Coss. anno ab Urbe condita sexcentesimo no- A. c. n'igesimo L. Sergius Catillna, nobilissimi generis 63. (38) vir, sed ingenil pravissimT, ad delendam (176) patriam conjuravit cum quibusdam (261), clarls quidem, sed audacibus virls. A Cicerone urbe (59) expulsus est, socil ejus deprehensi et in carcere strangulatl sunt. Ab Antonio, altero consule, Catilina ipse proelio victus est et interfectus.
7. Anno urbis conditae sexcentesimo nonagesi-
mo quarto C. Julius Caesar cum L. Bibulo consul A. c. est fact us. Quum el Gallia decreta esset, semper 59. vincendo (173) usque ad Oceanum Britannicum pro- cessit. Domuit autem annis novem fere omnem_Galliam, quae inter Alpes, flujnen Rhodanum, Rhenum et Oceanura est. Britannls mox beilum intulit, quibus ante eum ne
*See note on page 212.
232 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
nomen quidem Romanorum cognitum er.it ; Germanos quoque trans RLenum aggressus (136), ingentibus proe- lils vlcit.
8. Circa eadem tempora M. Licinius Crassus contra
PartLos misses cst. Et quum circa Carras contra omina
et auspieia proclium commisisset, a Surena, Orodis
A. c. regis duce, victus et interfectus est cum filio, clf,ris-
53. simo et praestantissima juvene. Reliquiae exer-
citus per C. Cassium quaestorem servatae sunt.
9. Hinc jam bellum civile successit, quo (61) A. c. Roman! nominis fortuna mutata est. Caesar cnim, 49. victor e Gallia rediens, absens coepit poscere alte- rum consulatum; quern (110) quum aliqui (262) sine dubitatione duferrent, contradictum est (139) a Pomp- ejo et alils, jussusque est, dlmissis exercitibus, in Urbem redire. Propter hanc injuriam ab Arimino, ubi milites con- gregatos habebat, iniesto exercitu (55) Roinam (29) con- tendit. Consules cum Pompejo, senatusque omnis atque universa nobilitas ex urbe fugit et in Graeciam transiit ; et, dum senatus bellum contra Caesarem parabat, Lie, vacuam urbem ingressus, dictatorem se fecit.
10. Inde Hispanias petit (137), ibique Pompejl legiones superavit ; turn in Graecia adversum Pompejuin ipsmn dl- micavit. Primo proelio victus est et fugatus ; evasit ta- men, quia nocte interveniente Pompejus sequ! noluit ; dixitque Caesar, nee PompC-jum (150) scire vincere (140),
et illo tantum die (54) se potuisse (247) superait.
A. c. Deinde in Thessalia apud PLarsalum ingentibus
48. utrimque copils commissis dlmicaverunt. Nun-
quam adhuc Romanae copiae majores, neque meli5- ribus ducibus (133) convenerant. Pugnatum est (138) ingent! contentione (55) victusque ad postremum Pompe- jus et castra ejus direpta sunt. Ipse fugatus Alexandnam petit, ut a rege ^EgyptT, cui tutor a senatu datus fuerat, acciperet (196) auxilia. At Lie fortunam magis, quam amicitiaiii (82), secutus, occidit Pompejum, caput ejus et aimulum Caesarl mlsit. Quo (110)' conspecto, Caesar
OUTLINES OF ROMA^T HISTORY. 233
lacrymas fudisse dlcitur, tantl virl intuens caput, et gener! quondam suT.
11. Quum ad AlexandrTam vSnisset (214) Caesar, Pto- lemaeus el insidias parare voluit, qua do causa reg! bel- lum illatum est. Rex victus in Nilo periit, inventumquc est corpus ejus cum lorlca aureu. Caesar, Alexandria (61) potltus, regnum Cleopatrae dedit. Turn inde pro- feet us Pompeianarum partium reliquias est persequutus, belllsque clvllibus toto terrarum orbe (63) compositis (131), Romam redilt. Ubi quum insolentius (84) agere coepisset, conjuratum est (139) in eum a sexaginta vel amplius senatoribus equitibusque RomanTs. Praecipui fuerunt inter conjuratos Brut! duo, ex genere illlus Brut!, qui, regibus expulsls (131), primus Romae (45) consul fu- erat, C. Cassius et Servllius Casca. Ergo Caesar, quum in curiam venisset, vigint! tribus vulneribus A. c. confossus est. 44.
12. Interfecto Caesare, anno Urbis septingentesimo no- no, bella civilia reparata sunt. Senatus favebat Caesaris jiercussoribus, Antonius Cos. a Caesaris partibus stabat. Ergo turbata republica (133), Antonius, multls sceleribus commissis, a senatu hostis judicatus est. Fusus fuga- tusque Antonius, amisso exercitu, confugit ad Lepidum, qui Caesar! (46) magister equitum fuerat, et turn grandes copias militum habebat ; a quo susceptus est. Mox Oc- tavianus cum Antonio pacem fecit, et quasi vindicaturus (143) patris sul mortem, a quo per testamentum fuerat adoptatus, Romam cum exercitu profectus extorsit, ut (199) sibi juvenl vigintl annorum (38) consulutus daretur (25). Turn junctus cum Antonio et Lepido rempublicam armis tenere coepit, senatumque proscripsit. Per hos etiam Cicero orator (95) occisus est multlque all! no- biles.
13. Interea Brutus et Cassius, interfectores Caesaris, ingens bellum moverunt. Profectl contra eos Caesar Oc-
tavianus, qui postea Augustus est appellatus, et M. Anto- nius, apud Philippos, Macedoniae urbem
(95), contra eos 20*
234 OUTLINES OF ROMAN HISTORY.
pugnaverunt. PrTmo proelio victi snnt Antoiiius
A. c. et Caesar; periit tamen dux nobilitfttis Cassias;
42. secundo Brutum et infmltam nobilitatem, qnae
cum illls bellum susceperat, victam interfCcernnt.
Turn victores rempublicam ita inter se dlvlserunt, ut Oc-
tavianus Caesar Hispanias, Gallias, Italiam teneret; Aii-
tonius Orientem, Lej.idus Airicam acciperet.
14. Paulo post Antonins, repudiata sorore (133) ( ris OctavianT, Cleopatram, reginam JEgyptT, uxorem duxit. Ab hac incitatus iugens bellura commovit, dum Cleopatra cupiditate muliebri optat Romae (49) regnare. Vietus est ab Augusts naval! j^ugna clara et illustrT apud Ac- A. c. tium, qui locus in EpTro est. Hinc fugit in ^Egyp- 31. turn, et dCsperf.tls rebus, quum omnGs ad Angus- turn transirent, se ipse interemit. Cleopatra quo- que apsidem sibi (50) admisit, et veneno Cjus exstincta est. Ita bellis toto orbe (63) confectls (133) Oi-tavL.nus Augustus Romam (29) rediit anno (54) duodecimo quani consul fucrat. Ex eo hide tempore rempublicam per quadraginta et quatuor annos solus obtinuit. Ante enim duodecim annis cum Antonio et Lepido tenuerat. Ita ab initio principatas ejus usque ad finem qmuquagiuta sex annl fuere.
VOCABULARY.
ENGLISH-LATIN.
Abandon, (leave behind) relinqn-, 2.
rellqu-, 3. relielo. (desert) desti-
tu-, 2. — " — 3. desiitQto-. ability, ingenio-, n. iudoli-, f. nom.
s. indoles.
le able, poles-, 2. potu-. abode, sedi-, f. nom. s. scdes. about, circiter. above, super, (ncc. orabl.). abuse, opprobrio-, n. accomplish, perlic(i)-, 2. perfec-, 3. - perieeto-.
on-aocount-of, propter, (ace.). accuse, aceusa-, 2. accusav-, 3. ae-
c iisa to-. "be accustomed, sole- (semi-dep.\ 3.
soli to-, consuesc-, 2. cousuev-, 3.
consueto-. across, trans, (ace.), action, facto-, u. active, gnavo-.
admire, adinlra-, 3. admlrato-. admit, adrnitt-, 2. admis-, 3.* ad-
inisso-.
ad»rn, orna-, 2. ornav-, 3. ornato-. Gdorn-greatty, exorua-, 2. exoruav-,
3. exornato-. advance, proc3d-, 2. process-, 3.
pr.:-cesso-. perg-, 2. perrex-, 3.
perrecio-. progred(i)-, 3. progres-
so-.
advantage, utilitat-. adverse, adverxo-. adversity, re- adversa-, pi. advice, coasilio-, n.
advise, mone-, 2. monu-, 3. moni-
to-, suude-, (dat.) 2. suas-, 3. sua-
so-.
Aeduan, Aeduo-. afi'air, re-.
'• (business), negotio-, n. affrct, affic(i)-, 2. allcc-, 3. affecto-. ajfii')n. contirma-, 2. eontinuav-, 3.
contirmato-. afford, praebe-, 2. praebu-, 3. prae-
bito-.
African, Afro-. after, post, (ace.), afterwards, posted. again, r units.
ag.-tinst, contra, (ace.) in, (ace.) age, attat-.
" (a period) saeculo-, n. Agedicum, Agedico-, n. oyree, consenti-, 2. consens-, 3.
consenso-.
agriculture, agricultura-. aid, auxilio-. n. alarm, perrnove-, 2. permov-, 3.
permoto-. perturba-, 2. pertur-
blv-, 3. perturbato-. alarmed, perterrito-. be alive, vlv-, 2. vix-, 3.. victo-. all, otnui- alliance, societal-, allow, pat(i)-, 3. passo-. be allowed, (impers.) lice-, 2. lieu-,
3. licito-.
allure, allic(i)-, 2. allex-, 3. allecto-. ally, aocio-.
236
VOCABULARY.
alone, soto-, for declens. see § 162.
already, jam.
also, etiam.
alwaj's. semper.
ambassador, legato-.
among, apud, inter (ace.).
ample, amplo-.
ancient, antiquo-, prislino-.
anger, Ira-.
be angry, Irasc-, 3. Irato-.
animal, animat(i)-, n.
Antigonus, Anligono-.
anxious, anxio-.
any, ulbt-, for declens. see § 162.
appear, vide-, 3. vlso-.
appearance, f-pecie-.
appease, placa-, 2. placav-, 3. pla-
cato-.
apple, porno-, n. approacli, aslventu-. approach, appropinqna-, (dat.) 2.
appropinquiiv-, 3. appropinqua- te-, adi-, 2. adlv-, 3. adito-. approve, comproba-, 2. coruprobav-,
3. comprobato-. archer, sayittario-. Ariovistus. Ariovisto-. arisr. surg-, 2. surrex-, 3. surrecto-.
or(i}-, 3. orto-.
arm (of the body), brachio-, n. arms (of war), anno-, n. pL army, e&rcitu-.
" (in array), acie-. around, circum (ace.), arrival, advtntu-. arrogance, arro'jantia-. art, art(i)-, f. as, ut. ascend, escend-, 2. — " — 3. escen-
so-. ascertain, cognosc-, 2. cognov-, 3.
cognito-. be ashamed, (impers.) pude-, 2. pu-
du-, 3. pudito-. ashe-s, cintr-, m. nom. s. cinis. Asia. .-l5i'«-. ask (for a thing) pet-, 2. petlv-, 3.
petlto-.
osfc (a question) roga-, 2. rogav-, 3.
rogato-.
a«5sembly. conventu-. assert, affirma-, 2. afiBrmav-, 3. af-
lirmato-. assign, attribu-, 2. — f; — 3. attri-
buto-.
assist, juva-, 2. juv-, 3. juto-. assistance, aubsidiu-, n. assure, doce-, 2. docu-, 3. docto-. astonish, stupetac(i)-, 2. stupetec-,
3. stnpefacio-.
astrologer, mathematico-, m. Athens, Athena-, pL at length, ktndem. at once (together), simul.
" (instantly), statim. Atticus, Attico-.
attack, invad-, 2. invas-, 3 invaso-. attack, impetu-. attempt, conatu-. attend-to, stude- (dat.\ 2. studu-. attendant, comet-, c. attention, opera-.
augment, auge-, 2."aux-, 3. aucto-. auspice, auspicio-. n. authority, impcrio-, n. auxiliaries, uuxilio-, n. pL avaricious, avdro-. avenge, ulcisc-, 3, ulto-. averse, averso-.
arert. avert-, 2. — " — 3. averse-. avoid, vita-, 2. vltav-, 3. vltito-.
Bacenis, Baceni-.
back, ttrgo-, n.
bad, mitlo-.
baggage, impedlmento-, pi.
Balbus, BaUw.
band, tnanu-, f.
barbarian, barbaro-.
bark. o>rlec-. c.
bark; latra-, 2. latrav-, 3. latrato-.
barking, (noun) latrutu-.
barren, stcrili-.
VOCABULARY.
237
base, turpi-.
base ly, tarpiter.
baseness, tiirpitildon-.
battle, proelio-. n.
bear, perfer-, 2. pertul-, 3. perlato-.
P'it(i)-, 3 pa.sso-. beast, quadruped, c.
" of burden, jumento-. beat (conquer), pell-, 2. pepul-, 3.
pulso-.
beautiful, pulc.ro-. beautifully, pukre. because, quia. bee, api-, f.
before, (prep.) ante, (ace.), before, (subjunc.) antequam, prius-
quam.
beg, pet-, 2. petlv-, 3. petlto-. beggar, men'tlco-. fagin, inc-ip(i)-, 2. incep-, 3. incep-
to-. (no 1st stem) 2. coep-, 3.
coepto-.
beginning, initio-, n. behold, aspic(i)-, 2. aspex-, 3. as-
pecto-. conspic(i)-, 2. conspex-,
3. conspecU)-. Belgae, IMga-, pi. believe, cred-. 2. credid-, 3. credito-. belong, pertine-, 2. pertiuu-. beside, praeter (ace.). besiege, oppugna-, 2. oppugnav-, 3.
oppu°:nato-. best., optima-, betray, prod-, 2. prodid-, 3. prodi-
to-.
better, meli.or-. between, interface.). beyond, ultra, (ace.). bid, jube-, 2. juss-, 3 jusso-. bind, vinci-. 2. vinx-, 3. viacto-. bird, avi-, f. bite, morde-, 2. momord-, 3. raor-
so-.
black, nigro-. blame, reprehend-, 2. — " — , 3. re-
preheuso-. bliud, catco-.
block-up, obstru-, 2. obstrux-, 3. ob-
siructo-. blood, sanguin-, m. nora. s. san-
guis.
boar, apro-.
boast, gloria-, 3. gloriato-. body, corpos-. bold, audilc(i)'. boldly, audacter. boldness, audacia-. book, libra-, m. booty, praeda-. be born, nasc-. 3. nato-. bottom (lowest part), lino-, n. bough, ramo-, in. boundless, inflnlto-. bountifully, Iqrgiter. bow, arcu-. boy, puero-. brain, cerebro-, n. brave, forti-. bravely, fortiter. bread, pcini-, m. breadth, latitudon-. break, fra(n)g-. 2. freg-, 3. fracto-. break-apart, disjic(i)-, 2. disjec-, 3.
disjecto-. break-through, perfring-, 2. per-
freg-, 3. perfrncto-. breathe again, resplra-, 2. resplrav-,
3. resplrato-. bridge, p<mt(i)-, m. brigand, praedon-. brightness, splendor-, bring-to, after-, 2. attul-, 3. allato-. Briton, Britanno-. broad, lafo-. brother, fratr-. Brutus, Bruto-. build, aeditica-, 2. aedificav-, 3.
aedificato-.
building, aedificio-, n. burden, ones-, burn, (set on fire) incend-, 2. — "—
3. inceriso-. burn, (be hot) arde-, 2. ars-, 3. ar-
so-.
238
VOCABULARY.
burxf-in, irrump-, 2. irrup-, 3. ir-
riipi.o-. burxt-ouf, erump-, 2. erup-, 3 erup-
to-. burst-U rough* perrump-, 2. pen-up-,
3. perrnpto-. bury, sepeli-, 2 sepellv-, 3. sepul-
t«H.
business, negdtio-, n.
but, sed; a/item (never begins a
sentence.), but that, quin, butcher, truclda-, 2. trucldav-, 3.
trucldato-.
buy. em-. 2. em-. 3. empto-. buy-up, coem-, 2. coeui-, 3. coemp-
t<>-.
by. a, ab (abl.). by-far, lunge. by-night,
Catt, voca-, 2. vocav-, 3. vocato-.
'• (name) die-. 'J. dix-, 3. dicto-,
call-back, revoca-, 2. revocav-, 3.
revocato-. caU-<lotvn, devoca-, 2. devocav-, 3.
devocato-. caU-fogctJicr, convoca-, 2. convo-
cav-, 3. of >n vocato-. cali-upon, appella-, 2. appelluv-, 3.
appellato-. calm, plncvlo-. camp, ctititro-, n. pi. ca«. potes-. 2. potu-. capture, cj«p(i >-, 2. cep-, 3. capto-. Capua. Capua-. careful. carefully, carry, porta-, 2. portav-, 3. porta-
t<K
carry-across, transporta-, 2. trans- portav-. 3. tnin^port.Ito-.
carry-back, reporta-, 2. reportav-, 3. reportato-.
carry-down, defer-, 2. detul-, 3. d5-
l.ao-. carry-off, abrip(i)-, 2. abripu-, 3.
nl»repto . carry-tm (as war), ger-, 2. gess-, 3.
presto-. camj-itut, exporta-, 2. ex portav-,
3. exjMntato-. carry-t"gttker, confer-, 2. coiitul-,
3. collnto-.
Cartlia^e. Curthagon-, f.
cask. cad"-, m.
Catiline, Catillna-.
cattle, pews-.
cavnlry, tquitaiu-.
cave, xp< luttca-.
cause, musa-.
celebrate, nobilita-, 2. nobilitav-, 3.
riohiliiato-. centurion, centurion-. certain, cerio-.
" some, qun-dnm. change, muia-. 2. mutav-, 3. muta-
t<»-. chat-ye-forward. prccurr-. 2. — " —
or prociipurr-, 3. procurso-. charge, crlmen-. charge, manda-, (dal.) 2. mandav-,
3. mandato-. chariot, tssrdo-. n. charioteer, aurlga-. charm, il'cc-bra-. charm, delecta-, 2. delectav-, 3. de-
lectato-. dieat, frauda-, 2. fraudav-, 3. frau-
da to- chief, princcp-. chief-power, principatu-. childivn. iU>tio-, m. pL choice, voluiitat-. Cicero, Cirerdn-. circle, orbi-, in. circumstance, re-. citizen, civ/-, c. city, url(i)-, (. clear, ptrsjxcuo-. clear (*lrij>), uuda-, 2. nudav-, 3.
nudlto-.
VOCABULARY.
clemency, cl'mentin-.
cli.nb, ascend-, 2. — " — , 3. ascen-
SO-.
cloak, 'paenuti.-.
dot'iti, vesti-, 2. vestiv-, 3. vestlto. clothes, vsti-. f. cohort, c<>knrt(i)-, f. cold (a //.), frigido-. cold (no'in). frlyos-. collect, e3g-. 2. coeg-. 3. coacto-. colonist, coldno-. com/*, veui-, 2. veri-, 3. vento-. CO, tie-to jeiher, coaveui-, 2. coaven-,
3. convetito-. coining, advKfitu-. command, imperio-, n. commander, praefccto-. common, communi-. common-people, pleb-, f. in-common, communiter. comaion-vveahlj, re- publica-. communion, conjunction-. compact, coacto-. companion, comet-, c. compel, cog-, 2. coeg-, 3. coacto-. complain, quer-. 3. questo-. complain-bitterly, conquer-, 3. con-
que-4o-. complete, perfic(i)-, 2. perfec-, 3.
perfecto-.
completion, perfection-, compote, compon-, 2. composu-, 3.
composite-.
conceal, cola-, 2. celav-, 3. celato-. concerning, de (abl ). concourse, concursu-, condemn, damna-, 2. damnav-, 3.
damnato-. contluct, deduc-, 2. dedux-, 3. de-
ducto-.
confess, i'ate-, 3. fasso-. be confident, couf Id- (semi-dep.\ 3.
conflso-. confine, coerce-, 2. coe'rcu-, 3. coer-
cito-.
conrtagration, incendio-, n. congratulate, gratula- (dat.), 3. gra-
tulalo-.
Conon, Conon-.
conqtir.r, vine-, 2. vie-, 3. victo-.
conquered. vi<"t»-.
conqueror, victor-.
conscious, OftUKtOf.
consecrate, consecra-, 2. consecrav-,
3. consecriito-. consent, consensu-. consider, due-. 2. dux-, 3. ducto-. console, consola-. 3. consolato-. coi ispi ra cy, co • jaration-. consta n r., constan f(i)-. constrained, coacto-. consul, consul-. consulship, coiisuldtu-. consume, absQrn-, 2. absumps-, 3.
absumpto-. contend, decerta-, 2. dccertav-, 3.
decertato-. contend-, 2. — '' — ,
3. co ri ten to-, contention, contention-. contest, certamen-. continue, tene-, 2 tenn-, 3. tento-. con tin ued, conUnuato-. contract-with. (give out a contract),
loca-, (dtit) 2. locav-. 3. locato-. control, impera-, (dat.) 2. imperav-,
3. imperato-. Coriolanus, Coriolano-. corn, frumento-, farr-, n. corpse, cadaver-, n. cost, sta- (dat.), 2. stet-, S.stato-. conch, cublli-, n. council, concilio-, n. counsellor, advocato-. count, cense-, 2. censu-, 3. censo-. country, region-.
" ('>pp. to town), rus-, n.
" (native), patna-. cowardice, ignavia-. cowardly, i/navo-. Crassus, Crasso-.
critne, sceles-, facinos-, fldgitio-, n. cross, traiisi-, 2. trauslv-, 3. tran-
sito-.
crow, cornlc-, f. cruel, crud-li-. cruelly, crudeliter.
240
VOCABULARY.
crush, (prop, blot out), dele-, 2. de- lev-, 3. deleto-.
cultivate, col-, 2. colu-, 3. culto-.
cultivation, coition-.
culture, cultu-.
cup, cyatho-. m.
curt, mede- (dot.), (deponent, only imperC tenses).
custom, mos-. m.
cut-away, rescind-, 2. rescid-. 3. re- scisso-.
Cyrus, Cyro-.
Daily, quofididno.
danger, periculo-, n,
dangerous, periculoso-.
dare, aude-, 3. auso-. (semi-dep.)
Darius, Darlo-.
daughter, filia-.
at-dawn, prlma luce.
day. die-, m. also f. in sing.
at-day-break, prlma luce.
desid, mortuo-.
deadly, mortifero*.
dear, caro-.
death, mort(i)-, f.
deceive, fall-, 2. fefell-, 3. falso-.
declaim, declama-, 2. dtclamav-,
3. declamato-. declare, expon-, 2. exposu-, 3. ex-
posito-. deep, alto-, defend, defend-, 2. — "— , 3. de-
fenso-.
defender, defensor-. defile, angtistia-, pi. delay, cuncta-, 3. cunctato-. delay, mora-. deliberate, consulta-, 2. consultav-,
3. consultato-. delight, oblecta-, 2. oblectav-, 3.
oblectato-.
deliver-up, trad-, 2, tradid-, 3. tra-
dlto-. demon*/, postula-^ 2. postulav-, 3.
postulato-.
demand-back, repose-. Demosthenes, Demostheni-, (nom.
s. n<~s).
deny, nega-, 2. negav-, 3. negato-. depart, disced-, 2. discess-, 3. dis-
cesso-.
departure, projection-, dejwsit, depon-, 2. deposu-, 3. de-
po^ito-.
deposit, dcposito-, n. deprive, spolia-, 2. spoliav-, 3. ppo-
liato-. desert, deser-, 2. dSseru-, 3. deser-
to-.
.deserter, perfuga-. desei-ve, mere-, 3. merito-.* desire, cup(i)-, 2. cupiv-, 3. cnpito-. desire-btfore. praeopta-, (dat.) 2.
praeoptav-. 3. praeoptato-. desirous, cupido-. despise, contemn-, 2. contemps-, 3.
contempto-. destroy, perd-, 2. perdld-, 3- per-
dlto-. extstingu-, 2. exstinx-, 3.
exstincto-.
destruction, pernicie-, exitio-, n. detain, detine-, 2. detinu-, 3. de-
tento-. deter, deterre-, 2. deterru-, 3. de-
territo-. determine, constitu-, 2. — " — , 3.
constituto-. devote, addle-, 2. addix-, 3. addio
to-.
devour, vora-, 2. vorav-, 3. vorato-. dictator, dictator-. difference, discrlmen-. different, diverso-. diflBcult, difficili-. difficulty, difficultat-. with difficulty, aegre.
* This verb is also conjugated in the active voice, with 2. 7ncn*%
VOCABULARY.
241
dig, fodi-, 2. fod-, 3. fosso-.
dignified, gravi-.
diligence, dUigentia-.
diminish, minu-, '2. — " — , 3. mi-
11 uto-. direct, reg-, 2. rex-, 3. recto-, dlrig-,
2. direx-, 3. dlrecto-. in-all-directions, passim. director, rector-, disadvantageous, inlquo-. disagree, dissenti-, 2. dissens-, 3.
dissenso-.
disaster, incommodo-, n. discover, inveni , 2. inven-, 3. in-
vento-. reperi-, 2. repper-, 3. re-
perto-.
discussion, disputation-, disdain, fastldi-, 2. fastldlv-, 3. fas-
tldlto-.
disease, morbo-, m. disgraceful, turpi-. dismiss, dlmitt-, 2. dimls-, 3. dl-
misso-. displease, displice-, 2. displicu-, 3.
displicito-. dissemble, dissimula-, 2. dissimu-
lav-, 3. dissimulate-. dissent, dissenti-, 2. dissens-, 3. dis- senso-.
be-distant, abes-. 2. abfu-. distinguished, cgregio-, praeclaro-. distribute, distribu-, 2. — •' — , 3.
distribute', ditch, fossa-. divine, dlvino. Divitiacus, Dlviiinco-. do, ag-, 2. eg-, acto-. fac(i)-, fee-, 3.
facto-.
dog, cant-, c. doubt, dubita-, 2. dubitav-, 3. dubi-
tato-.
doubtftil, dubio-. drag, trah-, 2. trax-, 3. tracto-. draw (as water), hauri-, 2. haus-,
3. hausto-.
draw-together, contrah-, 2. contrax-, 3. coiitracto-. 21
draw-up, instru-, 2. instrux-, 3. in-
structo-. draw (a sword) destring-, 2. des-
trinx-, 3. destricto-. drawn up, instructo-. dread, vere-, 3 verito-. drink, bib-, 2. — "— . drive, pell-, 2. pepul-, 3. pulso-. drive-back, repell-, 2. reppul-, 3. re-
pulso-. drive-out, expell-, 2. expul-, 3. ex-
pulso-.
dry, sicca-, 2. siccav-, 3. siccato-. Dumnorix, Dumnorig-. duty, officio-, n. dwell-in, incol-, 2. incolu-.
Each, quo-que.
eagerly, cupide.
eagle, aquila-.
earn, mere-, 2. meru-, 3. merito-.
earnestly, magnopere.
most earnestly, vehementer.
earnestness, contention:
earth, terra-.
easily, j^-ile-.
easy, facili-.
eat, ed-, 2. ed-, 3. eso-.
educa'e, educa-, 2. educav-, 3. edu-
cato-.
effect, effic(i)-, 2. efi^c-, 3. efifecto-'. effort, molimento-. egg, ovo-, n. eighth, octavo-. either, aut. elder, major-. elegant, elegant(i)-. elegantly, polite. element, elemento-. eloquence, eloquentia-. eloquent, eloquent(i)-. else, olio-, for declens. see § 162. embark-on, conscend-, 2. — " — 3.
conscenso-. emttassy, legation-. emotion, perturbation-.
242
VOCABULARY.
empire, imperio-, n.
empty, inanl-.
encariip, consid-, 2. consed-, 3. con-
sesso-.
encourage, coliorta-, 3. oohortato-. end, fini-, m. rarely £ endtavor, cona-, 3. couato-. endowed, pratdito-. endure, sustiue-, 2. sustinn-, 3. sus-
tentx)-. perpet(i)-, 3. perpesso-. enemy (public), hosti-, c.
" (private), inimico-, ra. engage, confllg-, 2. conflix-, 3. eon-
flicto-.
engine, tormento-. enjoy, fru-, (obi), 3. fructo- or fru-
ito-
Ennius, Ennio-. enough, satis. enraged, Irato-. enrol, conscrib-, 2. conscrips-, 3.
conscripto-. enter, subi-, 2. subiv-, 3. subito-.
ingred(i)-, 3. ingresso-. entice, pellic(i)-r 2. pellex-, 3. pel-
lecto-.
entrance, introitu-. enumerate, enumera-, 2. enumerav-,
3. enumerato-. envy, invide-, (dot.) 2. invid-, 3. in-
vlso-.
envy, inridta-. equal, adaequa-, 2. adaequar-, 3.
adaequftto-. error, error-. eruption, eruption-, escape, effug(i)-, 2. eflug-. especial, pr^ecipuo-. Evander, Evandro-. even, etiam. evening, vespero-, m, event, caau-. ever, unquam. everlasting, sempitemo-. every, (all), omni-.
" (each), quo-que, every-day, quotidie. on-e very-side, undique.
every -year, quotannis.
evidence, indicio-, n.
evil, molo-, n.
examine, explora-, 2. explorav-, 3.
explorato-. specula-, 3. specu- la to-.
excellence, praeslantia-. excellent, excellent(i}-, praestant(i)-. excellently, egregie. except, nisi; praeter, prep. ace. exchange, commuta-, 2. couimutav-,
3 commutato-. excite, excita-, 2. excitav-, 3. exci-
tato-. execute, administra-, 2. adminis-
trav-, 3. administrato-. exhort, cohort-, 3. cohortato-. exile, exsitio-, n. live- in-exile, exsula-, 2. exsulav-, 3.
exsulato-. expect, exspecta-, 2. exspectav-, 3.
exspectato-. expense, commcatu-. • expire, exsplra-, 2. exsplrav-, 3.
ex pint to-, exploit, fadnos-. export, exporta-, 2. exportav-, 3.
ex portal o-. expose, objic(i)-, 2. objec-, 3. objec-
to-.
express^ eloqu-, 3. elocuto-. eye, oculo-, in.
Face, vultu-.
fact, re-.
faculty, facultat-. •
fail, dees- (dat.), 2. dt-fu-. dC-fic(i)-.
2. defec-, 3. defecto-. fair, pulcro-. faith, iifr..
faithless, infidcli-. fall-down, dCcid-, 2. — " falling, caduco-. false, fako-.
VOCABULARY.
24?
fame, fama-.
famous, praecld.ro-.
far, long.?.
far (off), procul
fur and wide, l/lte.
farmer, agricola-.
last, cel<-riti'.r.
lather, putt'-.
father-in-law, socero-.
fa.ult, cidpa-.
furor, fave-, (dat.), 2. fa,v-, 3. fauto.
favoiable. secundo~.
tear, timor-, metu-.
fear-, time-, 2. tinm-.
fear-greatly, pertimesc-, 2. perti-
mu-.
feel, senti-, 2. sens-, 3. senso-. fellow-soldier, comniilitoii-. feitile, fera(c)i-. few, pauco-. very few, perpnuco-. fewness, paucitat-. fidelity, fide-. field, agro-. fierce, fcroc(i}-. fi<-ry, iyiteo-. fight, pugna-, 2. pugnav-, 3. pug-
nato-. fight- it-out, decerta-, 2. decertav-,
3. deceitato-. fill, com pie-, 2. complev-, 3. com-
pleto-.
find, reperi-, 2. repper-, 3. reperto-. tin.irer, diyiio-, m. finish, contic(i)-, 2. corifec-, 3. con-
fecio-. fini, 2. fluiv-, 3. firuto-. fire, i'jni-, in.
" (conflagration) incendio-, n. firm, fir mo-. %
first, prlmo-. fii'st (ado.\ prlmum. fish, pisca-, 3 piscato-. fisherman, piscator-. fir,, tipto-. five, (i<dnque. five-hundred, quingento-. fix, constitu-, 2. — " — , 3. consti-
tuto-.
fixed, certo-.
fl itter}r, assentation-.
flee, fng(i)-, 2. tug-, 3. fugito-.
flee-away, aufug(i)-, 2. aufug-.
fleet, clatiisi; f.
flesli, caron-, f. (o left out except in
num. s.) flight, fuga-. flock, i/reg-, m. flourish, Ho re-, 2. flora-. flow-in, iuflu-, 2. influx-, 3. influxo-. flower, y?^-.
_/?//, vola-, 2. volav-, 3. voliito-. fly-away, avola-, 2. avolav-, 3.
avolato-. fiy~f)ff, evola-, 2. evolav-, 3. evo-
lato-. fly-tngether, convola-, 2. convolav-,
3. convolato-. foal, equulo-. fudder, pahuln-. n. get-fvddtr, pubula-, 3. pabulato-. follow, sequ-, 3. seciito-. follow-closely, subsequ-, 3. subse-
cuto-.
food, cibo-, m. foolish, stulto-. fool is! i ly. stulte. foot, ped-, m. nom. s. pcs. foot-soldier, pedet-. forbid, veta-, 2. vetu-, 3. vetito-. force, vlx(i)-, f. irreg. forces, cOpia-, pi. foresee, praevide-, 2. praevld-, 3.
praevlso-. foretell, praedlc-, 2. praedix-, 3.
praedicto-.
forget, obllvisc-, (gen.), 3. obllto-. former, prior-, superior-.
" (yonder) illo-. formerly, olim. forswear, pejera-, 2. pejerav-, 3.
pejerato-. fort, caslello-, n. fortification, munition-. fortified, munltn-. fortify, communi-, 2. communiv-,
3. couiiuuiilto-.
244
VOCABULARY.
fortunate, fortunate-, fific(i)-.
fortune, fo*tuna-.
forum, f<>ro-, n.
foundation, fu.ndam.ento-.
four, quutuor.
fourth, quarto-.
free, llbero-.
frenzy, furor-.
friend, am.co-.
friendship, amlcitia-.
frighten, terre-, 2. term-, 3. ter-
rito-.
frightened, territo-. from, a, ab (abl.). in -front, ad verso-. fruit, fructu-. fruitful, after-, fu gi 1 1 v e, /«# /ftro-. full, plcno-. future, futu.ro-.
Gabii, Gabio-, m. pi. gaii,-possession-(£ poti-, (g'en. or
ofti.) 3. potito-. gait, inces*u~. Gallic, G<i!U"o-. game, /z?£/o-. in. garden, horto-, m. garrison, praesidio-, n. gate, pftrta-. Gaul (country), Gattia-. Gaul (people), Gallo-. general, iinpKrator-. generally, plerunique. generosity, llberalitdt-. generous, liberal i-. German, Germano-. get-together, com para-, 2. compa-
rav-, 3. comparato-. gift, dono-j n. girl, puella-.
g ve, da-, 2. ded-, 3. dato-. give-back, redd-, 2. reddid-, 3. red-
dito-
give-up, prod-, 2. prodid-, 3. prod-
ito-.
give (thank*), ag-} 2. eg-, 3. acto-. gladly, liltenter.
go, i-, 2. Iv-, 3. ito-.
go-across, trausi-, 2. transiv-, 3.
transito-.
go-aicay, abi-, 2. abiv-, 3. abito-. go-forward, progred(i)-, 3. prugres-
so-. go-out, exced-, 2. excess-, 3. ex-
cesso-. egredi-, 3. egresso-. exi-,
2. exiv-, 3. exito-. go-to, pet-, 2. petlv-, 3. petito-. goat, capro-. God. deo-.
gods-below, infero-, m. pL gold, auro-, n. good, bono-. goods, bono-, n. pi. g<x>d-will. benevolentia-. goose, anser-, m. govern, reg-, 2. rex-, 3. recto-, im-
pera-, (dat.)t 2. imperav-, 3. im-
perato-. go\vn, toga-. gradually, paulatim. grammar, grammalica-. grant, couced-, 2. coucess-, 3. con-
cesso-.
grass, gramen-. great, mat/no-. greatly, wide. very-greatly, maxime. greatness, inagnitudon-, amplilu-
don-.
Greece, Graecia-. greedy, avido-. * Greek. Grecian, Graio-. green, viridi-. grief, dolor-. grieve, maere-. ground, humo-, t grove, nemos-. guard, cust&l-, c. guard, custodi-, 2. custodiv-, 3. cus-
todito-.
VOCABULARY.
2-15
guest, hnspet-, m. guide, due-.
Habit, consuetudon-.
halt, consist-, 2. constit-, 3. consti-
fcCK
Hamilcar-, Ilamilcar-. hand, manu-. f. Hannibal, Hannibal-, happen, accid-, 2. — u — . happiness, fdlcitat-. happy, beato-. harangue, contiona-, 3. contiona-
to-.
harbor, porter. hard, duro-. hardly, vix.
hare, lepos-, tn. n. s. lepus. du-harm-to, noce-, (e?a£), 2. nocu-,
3. noc-ito-. haste, /extinction-, hasten (go), contend-, 2. — " — 3.
contento. make haste, propera-, 2. properav-,
3. properaio-. . hasten (prepare quickly), matura-,
2. maturav-, 3. maturate-, hastily, raptim. hatred, odio-,.n.
have, habe-, 2. habu-, 3. habito-. liead, capul-, n. heaUh, xalui-.
heap, strui-, f. nom. s. struts, hear, audi-, 2. audlv-, 3. audlto-. liearer, auditor-. lieart, cord-, n. hearth, fucn-, m. heavy, gravi-, lieir, hered-, c. help, juva-, 2. jQv-, 3. juto-. helper, adj'itrlc-. Helvetii, IMvetio-, m. pi. hem-in, contine-, 2. continu-, 3.
con ten to-, heuce, hinc. 21*
herald, praecon-.
Hercules, Hcrculi-, nom. s. Hercu- les.
herd, armento-.
here, hie.
hesitation, dubitatidn-.
hide, ttrgos-.
hig'li, «tto-.
on-hijfh, sublime.
higher, superior-.
highest, fiummo-.
hill, colli-, m.
hinder, impedi-, 2. impedlv-, 3. im- pedito-.
hinder (prevent), prohibe-, 2. pro- hibu-, 3. prohibito-.
hither (adj.), citeridr-.
hive, alveari-, n.
7toW, tene-, 2. tenu-, 3. tento-. habe-, 2. habu-, 3. habito-.
home, domu-, f. irreg.
at-home, cfow*.
Homer, Homtro-.
honey, r/ieW-, n.
honor, (character) honestat-. " (glory), decos-.
honorable, honesto-.
liope, spe-.
hope, spera-, 2. sperav-, 3. spera- to-.
horn, cornu-, n.
horse, equo-.
horse-soldier, equet-.
hostage, obsed-, c.
hostile, hostlli-.
hour, hora-.
lypuse, domu-, f. irreg.
how, quomodo.
huge, ingent(i)-.
human, hamano-.
humanity, humanitdt-.
humor. fi'Stlvitdt-.
hundred, centum.
hungry, jejuno-.
hunt, vena-, 3. venato-.
hunter, vendtor-.
huntress, vendtrlo.
246
VOCABULARY.
hurl, conjic(i)-, 2. conjee-, 3. con- jecto-. mit(t)-, 2. mis-, 3. misso- husbanduian, ayricola-.
Idle, ignavo-, inert(i)-.
idleness, inertia-,
if, si.
ignorance, ignoration-.
ignorant, ignaro-.
bc-ignorani, ignora-, 2. ignor&v-, 3.
ijrnorato- iUuminate, illustra-, 2. illustrav-, 3.
illustrate-, illustrious, claro-. very- illustrious, praeclaro-. image, iniagon-. simulacro-, n. initiate, imita-, 3. imitato-. immediately, slatim. immortal, immortali-. impart, imperti-, 2. impertlv-, 3.
im pert! to-. impede, impedi-, 2. impedlv-, 3. im-
pedlto-. impd impell-, 2. impul-, 3. impul-
so .
impend, immine-. impious, impio-. intplire, implora-, 2. implorav-, 3.
implGrato-. import, impoita-, 2. importuv-, 3.
imjiortato-. impose., impon-, 2. imposu-, 3. im-
posito . in, tn, (abl.).
increase, au?e-, 2. aux-, 3. aucto-. incredible, incredilili-, indeed, quidem. indicate, iudica , 2. indicav-. 3. in-
dicato-.
indignity, indignitat-. iudwe, adduc-, 2. addux-, 3. ad- due lo-.
industrious, industrio-. in tii my, iiifamia-. iufautry, peditdtu-.
inform, certior-fac(\)-t 2. fee-, 3.
fncto-.
inhabitant, incnla-. injure, uoce- (dot.}, 2. nocu-, 3. no-
cito-.
injurious detrlmentdso-. injury, injuria-. injustice, inlquitnt-. injiocrent, initocent(i)-. inquire, quaer-, 2. quaesiv-, 3.
quaeslto-. instantly, extemplo. insult, coittumelia-. into, in (aec.). intrust, committ-, 2. commis-. 3.
commisso-. permitt , 2. permls-,
3. permisso-. invent, iuveui-, 2. inven-, 3. iuven-
to-. investigate, investlpa-, 2. investi-
gav-, 3. investigaio-. island, insula-.
Javelin, p'.lo-, n.
join, conjuug-, 2. conjunx-, 3. con-
juncto-. join (buttle), committ-, 2. commis-,
3. commisso-. joy, gavdio-, n. joyful, lueto-. judge, praetor-, judec-. judge, judica-, 2. judicav-, 3. ju-
dicato-.
judgment, jndicio-, n. juiy-man, judec-. just, ju*to~. justice, justitia-.
Keen, fieri-.
keep, conserva-, 2. conservav-, 3. conservato-.
VOCABULARY.
247
keep-back, reserva-, 2. reservav-, 3.
reservato-. ktep-ojf, prohibe-, 2. prolribu-, 3.
proliibito-. keep-possession-of, obtiue-, 2. obti-
nu-, 3. obtento. keep-silence, tace-, 2. tacu-, 3. ta-
cito-.
fall, occld-, 2. — " — , 3. occlso. ^kind, beitigno-. kindness, beneficio-, n., officio-, n.,
gratia-. king, reg-. kingdom, regno-, n. knee, genu-, n. know, sci-, 2. sciv-, 3. sclto-. knowledge, acientia-. known, noto-.
Labor, labor-.
Lacedaemonian, Lacedaemonio-.
lake, lacu-.
lament, deplora-, 2. deplorav-, 3.
deplorato-. land (district), region-.
" (the earth), tellas-, C
" (field), d'jro-, m. Za?i«i (troops), expon-, 2. exposu-,
3. exposito-. large, amplo-, magno-. last, ultimo-, extreme-. lately, nuper.
Latin, Latino, in Latin, Laiine. latter, /io-. law, leg-, f. lay-oxide, dep5n-, 2. deposu-, 3. de-
posito-. lay-ivaste, vasta-, 2. vastav-, 3.
vastato-. depopula-. 3. depopu-
lato-.
lead, due-, 2. dux-, 3. ducto-. lead-away, abduc-, 2. al^dux-, 3.
abducto-. lead-across, transduc-, 2. transdux-,
3. transducto-.
lead-lack, reduc-, 2. redux-, 3. re-
ducto-. lead-down, dediic-, 2. dedux-, 3.
dcducto-.
lead-out, edQc-, 2. edux-, 3. educto-. lead-round, circumduc-, 2. circum-
dux-, 3. circumducto-. lead-together, conduc-, 2. condux-,
3. conducto-. lead-up, addQc-, 2. addux-, 3. ad-
ducto-.
leader, due-, c. leap-down, desili-, 2. desilu-, 3. de-
BllltO-.
learn, disc-, 2. didic-.
4< (ascertain) cognosc-, 2. cog-
nov-, 3. cognito-. learned, docto-. learnedly, docte. least, (adv ), minime. leave, relinqu-, 2. rellqu-, 3. relicto-. leave-off, omitt-, 2. omis-, 3. ouiis-
so-.
left, sinistro-. legion, legion-. Lemannus, Lemanno-. length (of time], diuturnitat-. Len talus, Lentulo-. less (adv.), minus, lessen, miiiu-, 2. — " — 3. minute-, lest, ne. kt-go, dlmitt-, 2. dlmis-, 3. dlmis-
so-.
let-slip, omitt-, 2. omis-, 3. omisso-. letter, epistola-. level, atquo-. liberty, llbertat-. lie, jace-, 2. jacu-, 3. jacito-. lieutenant, legato-. life, vita-.
light (of weight] levi-. light, liic-, f., lumen-. like, simiti-.
line (o/ march), agmen-. line (of battle)^ acic-. lion, Zeow-. little paulo-, n " (adv.), paulo.
248
VOCABULARY.
live, viv-, 2. vix-, 3. victo-.
load, ones-.
lofty, celso-.
long, lungo-.
long (of time), diuturno-.
loug " (adv.), din.
longer " (adv.), diutius.
loose, solv-, 2. — " — , 3. soluto-.
lose, amitt-, 3. amis-, 3. aniisso-.
loss, detrlmento-.
love, ama-, 2. amav-, 3. amato-. di-
lig-, 2. dllex-, 3. dilecto-. love, amor-. lover, amdtir-. lower, inferior-. lust, libldon-, f. lying, mendac(i)-.
Mad,
madness, amentia-.
magistrate, magistrate-.
maid-servant, famida-.
make, fac(i)-, 2. fee-, 3. facto-.
make-Jiaste, propera-, 2. properav-,
3. properato-. man, homon-,c., viro-. man (as a ship), comple-, 2. com-
plev-, 3. complete-. manage, administra-, 2. admiuis-
trav-, 3. administrate-, mane, juba-.
manner, mos-, m., modo-, m. many, mvllo-. of-marble. marmoreo-. march, itiner-, n. nom. and ace.
sing. iter.
march, itcr iac(i)-, 2. fee-, 3. facto-. march-in, ingred(i)-, 3. iugresso-. mare, equa-. marsh, palud-, f. mart, mercdtura-. marvellous, mlrifico-. master, domino-. master, (as teadier), magistro-. matron, mdtr-.
matter (business), re-. meadow, prato-, n. meuns, fucultat-.
" (manner), modo-, in. by-uo-means, minime. meanwhile, interea. measure-out, meti-, 3. menso-. meeting, contion-. memory, mtmoria-. mend, resarci-, 2. none, 3. resarto-. mtution-aluud, praedica-, 2. praedi-
cav-, 3. praedicato-. merchant, mercator-. merciful, cUment(i)-. mercifully, clfmenter. message, nuntio-, m. messenger, nuntio-, m. midnight, media-noct-. mild, nuti-.
military-command, imperio-, n. military-service, militia-. milk, fact-, n.
mina (sum of money), mina-. mind, ment(i)-, t miserable, mi;>erdbili-. missile, ttlo-, n.
mix, rnisce-, 2. miscu-, 3. misto-. modesty, pudor-. moisten, hurnecta-, 2. hdmeetav-,
3. humectato-. money, ptcunia-. month, mensi-, m. monument, monumento-. more, plus-.
" (adv.), magis. in-the-morning, rudnc. mother, mdtr-.
move, move-, 2. mov-, 3. moto-. more-back, remove-, 2. remov-, 3.
remdto-.
mountain, mont(i)-, m. mount-up, succtd-, 2. success-, 3,
succeso-.
'mourn, luge-, 2. lux-, 3. lucto-. much (adj.) multo-.
" (adv.) multum. multitude, multtdudon-.
VOCABULARY.
249
Name, nomina-, 2. nominav-, 3. nominate-, die-, 2. dix-, 3. die- to-.
narrate, narra-, 2. narrav-, 3. nar- rato-.
. narrow, angusto-.
nation, gent(i}-, f.
nature, itdtura-.
navigation, navigation-.
near, apud, ace., prope, ace.
be-ntar, ades-,- 2. adfu-.
nearest, proximo-.
neck, cervic-, f.
neglect, neglig-, 2. neglex-. 3. neg- lecto-.
negligence, neglig entia-.
n egl ige n t, negiigen t(i)-.
neighbor, flnitimo-.
neighbor! \\gjlnitiino-.
neither, nee; neque.
Nero, Ntron-.
net. ret/,-, n.
never, 'iiunquam.
nevertheless, tamen.
new, novo-.
next, posfcro-.
night, noc1(i)-, f.
nightingale, luscinia-.
no (none), nullo-.
no-one, nemon-, c.
noble, nSbili-.
noise, strepitu-.
none, nullo-.
nor, nee; negwe.
not, wew.
not-yet. nondum.
note, voc-. f.
nothing, m'/i«7.
novelty, novilM-.
nourish, al-, 2. aln-, 3. alito-.
now, nunc, jam.
number, nu/nero-, m.
nurse, nutrlc-.
nymph, nympha-.
Obey, pare-, (dai.\ 2. paru-, 3. pa- rito-.
object, recusa-, 2. recusav-, 3. recu-
sato-. observe, animadvert-, 2. — " — 3.
animadverso-. observe-thoroughly, perspic(i)-, 2.
perspex-, 3. perspecto-. obtain, adipisc-, 3. adepto-. oflence, offemion-. officer, pruefecto-. oti'spring, proli-, f. nom. s. proles. often, saepe. old, vetes-.
old-man, sen-, nom. s. senex. old-age, senectul-. omen, omen-. once, semel.
one, uiio-. for declens. see § 162. only, solum. onset, coacursu-.
open, aperi-, 2. aperu-, 3. aperto-. open, aperto-.
opinion, opinion-, scntentia-. opportunity, facultat-. or, vel; aui; an. orator, orator-. oratory, ord'idn-, order, jube-, 2. juss-, 3. jusso-. im-
pera- (dat.), 2. iinperav-, 3. im-
perato-.
in-order-that, ut. Orgetorix, Orgttorig-. other, alio . see § 162.
" (<>f two), altero-. see § 162. otherwise, secus. our, nostro-. out-of, e, ex, (abl.). be-over, pra-ees- (dat.\ 2. praefu-. overcome, supera-, 2. superav-, 3.
supera to-.
overtake, consequ-, 3. consecuto-. overthrow, evert-, 2. — '• — 3. ever-
so-. overwhelm, opprim-, 2. oppress-, 3.
oppresso-.
owe, dGbe-, 2. debu-, 3. debito-. be-owing-to, sta-, 2. stet-, 3. stato-. ox, bo v-, nom. s. bos.
250
VOCABULARY.
Pain, dolor-.
pardon, iguosc- (dat.), 2. ignov-, 3.
ignoto-.
parent, parent(i)-. part, pait(f)-, f. pass-l/y, praetermitt-, 2. praeter-
mis-, 3. praetermisso-. passion, cupidiiat-. past, praeferito-.
pay, pend-, 2. pepend-, 3. penso-. pay-back, repeud-, 2. — " — 3. re-
penso-.
peace, pac-, f. people, populo-, m. perceive, aspic(i)-, 2. aspex-, 3. as-
pecto-. intellig-, 2. intellex-, 3.
intellecto-. perform, perfic(i)-, 2. perfec-, 3.
pertecto-. perhaps, fvrtasse. period, tempos-.
perish, peri-, 2. periv-, 3. perito-. perpetrate, perpetra-, 2. perpetrav-,
3. perpetrate-. persevere, persevera-, 2. perseve-
rav-, 3. perseverato-. Persian, Persa-, (noun), Persico-,
(adj.). persuade, persuade- (dat), 2. per-
suas-, 3. persuaso-. phalanx, phalany-, f. philosopher, philosopho-, m. philosopln', philotsophia-. pierce, transfig-, 2. transfix-, 3.
transfixo-.
pike, javelin, pilo-, n. Piso, Plsdn-.
pitch, pon-, 2. posu-, 3. posito-. pity, miser icordia-. cause-pity, misere- (impers.), 2. mi-
seru-, 3. niiserito-. place, faco-, m. also n. in pi. place, pon-, 2 posu-, 3. posito-. place-upon, impou-, 2. iiuposu-, 3.
irn posito-. placed, posito-. plain, campo-, m. plan, consilio-, n.
platform, suggestu-.
plead, ag-, "2. eg-, 3. acto-. die-, 2.
dix-, 3. dicto-. plead; ng, diction-. pleasant, jucundo-. please, delecta-, 2. delectav-, 3. de-
lectato-.
with pleasure, libenter. plebeian, plebcio-. Pliny, Ptinio-. plot, dolo , m.
plowjh, ara-, 2. arav-, 3. arato-. pluck, carp-, 2. carps-, 3. carpto-. plunder, dlrip(i)-, 2. dlripu-, 3. di-
repto-.
poem, poemat-, n. poet, poeta-. point-out, ostend-, 2. — " — 3. os-
tetiso-.
polish, poli-, 2. poliv-, 3. pollto-. Pompey, Pumpeio-. Pontus, Ponto-, m. poor, pauper-. port, (harbor), portu-. • possess, posside-, 2. possed-, 3. pos-
possession, possession-.
posterity, poster itat-.
power, potestat-.
powerful, pottnt(i}-.
practice, exercitation-.
praetor, praetor-.
praise, laud-, f.
praise, lauda-, 2. laudav-, 3. laud- ato-.
praise-highly, collauda-, 2. collau- dav-, 3. collaudato-.
praiseworth}r, laudabili-.
prayer, prec-, f.
prefer, antepon-, (dat. and ace.). 2. anteposu-, 3. anteposito-. prae- fer-, (dat. and ace.), 2. praetul-, 3. praelato-.
prejiare, para-, 2. parav-, 3. para- to-.
present, praesent(i)-.
be-present, ades-, 2. adfu-.
presently, mox.
VOCABULARY.
251
preserve, serva-, 2. servav-, 3. ser-
vato-. press-hard, prem-, 2. press-, 3. pres-
so-. press-down, deprim-, 2. depress-, 3.
depresso-. prettj'-, puicro-. prevait-with, permove-, 2. permov-,
3. permoto-. price, pretio-, n. pride, superbia-. priest, sacerdot-, c. prison, career-, in. prisoner, captlvo-, m. private, private-, proceed-ayaiiist, vindica-, 2. vindi-
cav-, 3. vindicate-. procure, com para-, 2. comparav-,
3. comparato-.
produce, em'c(i)-, 2. effec-, 3. effecto-. profit, fructu-. be-prq/itable, prodes-, (dat.), 2. pro-
lu-.
prolong, due-, 2. dux-, ducto-. promise, promitt-, 2 promls-, 3.
promisso-. pollice-, 3. pollicito-. prop, fulci-, 2. t'uls-, 3. fulto-. prophet, vdti-, c. uom. s.vatcs. propose, prorson-, 2. proposu-, 3.
proposito-. prosperous, secundo-. prostrate, prostern-, 2. prostrav-,
3 prostrato-. protection, praesidio-, n. " (honor) fide-, provide-for, prospic(i)-, (dat.) 2.
pi-ospex-, 3. prospecto-. province, prdti/icia-. prudent, priidvnt(i)-. public, pu/iliro-. Punic, Pa/tico:
punish, puni-, 2 punlv-, 3. punito-. punisliinent, svpplicio-, n. for-Uie-purpose, causa. (after a
genii.)
pursue, secta-, 3. sectato-. pursuit, studio-, n. push, pell-, 2. pepul-, 3. pulso-.
push-out, expell-, 2. expul-, 3. ex-
puiso-. push-to, appell-, 2. appul-, 3. ap-
pulso-. put, pon-, 2. posu-, 3. posito-.
" (to flight) da-, 2. ded-, 3. datQr. put-back, repon-, 2. reposu-, 3. re-
posito-. put-down, depon-, 2. deposu-, 3.
deposito-. put-forth, propon-, 2. proposu-, 3.
proposito-. put-upon, impera-, (dat.) 2. impe-
rav-, 3. imperato-.
Queen, reglna-. quickly, celeriter. quickness, celeritat-.
Raft, rati-, f.
raise, toll-, 2. sustul-, 3. sublato-.
rampart, vallo-, n. also m.
rank, ordon-, m.
rarely, raro.
rash, temerario-.
rashly, teutere.
rather, potius.
reach, atting-, 2. attig-, 3. attacto-.
" (catch) consequ-, 3. cousecu-
to-.
read, leg-, 2. leg-, 3. lecto-. reason, ration-, receive, accip(i)-, 2. accep-, 3. ac-
cepto-. receivt-information, cognosc-, 2.
cognov-, 3. coguito-. recent, receni(i)-. recently, nuper. recognize, agnosc-, 2. agnov-, 3. ag- ^
nito-. recollect, reminisc-, (dep. gen.)
252
VOCABULARY.
recover, recip(i)-, 2. recep-, 3. re- cepto-.
have-recourse, confug(i)-, 2. confiig-.
reduce, redig-, 2. redeg-, 3. redacto-.
reflect, cogita-, 2. cogitav-, 3. cogi- tate-.
refresh, recrea-, 2. recreav-. 3. re- create-.
refuse, denega-, 2. deuegav-, 3. de- negato-.
refute, convinc-, 2. convic-, 3. con- victo-.
regain, recupera-, 2 recuperav-, 3. recuperate-.
rejoice, gaude-, (semi-dep.) 3. ga- viso-.
relation, propinquo-, m.
remain, mane-, 2. mans-, 3. man- so-, reniane-, 2. remans-, 3. re- manso-.
remaining, reliquo-.
Rerai, Remo-, pL
remove, remove-, 2. remov-, 3. re- mote-, amove-, 2. amov-, 3. a- moto-.
repair, refic(i)-, 2. refec-, 3. refecto-.
repent, poeuite-, (imptrs.) 2. poe- uitu-.
reply, responde-, (dat.) 2. respond-, 3. response-.
report, uuntia-, 2. nuntiav-, 3. nun- tiato-.
report, fama-.
repose, repon-, 2. reposu-, 3. re- posito-.
reproach, contumtlia-.
republic, re- publica-.
request, pet-, 2. petiv-, 3. petito-.
resist, resist-, (dat.) 2. restit-, 3. res- tito-
resolv-, statu-, 2. — " — , 3. statute-.
resource, op-, f. pL
rest, quiet-, f. " (remainder) reliquo-. n.
restrain, tvi jpera-, (dat. or ace.) 2. temp'. !uv*, 3, temperate-.
result,
retain, retine-, 2. retiuu-, 3. reteu- to-.
retard, tarda-, 2. tardav-, 3. tarda- to-.
retire, reced-, 2. recess-, 3. recesso-.
retreat, receptu-.
rdrtat, reced-, 2. recess-, 3. reces- so-.
return, redi-, 2. rediv-, 3. redito-. revert-, (act. and dep ) 2. — '• — , 3. reverse-. (The imperf. lenses are usually made iu the depon- ent form, the perfect ones in the active.)
return, reditu-.
reverence, reverentia-.
revile, vitupera-, 2. vituperav-, 3. vituperate-.
revolt, defic(i)-, 2. defec-, 3. defec- to-.
reward, praemio-, n.
Rhine, Jihino-, m.
rich, dlitt-.
riches, dlvitia-, pi.
ridge, jugo-, u.
riglit (adj.), rtcto-. " (ot hands) dextro-.
right (noun), jus-, n.
rightly, rtcte.
ripe, maturo-.
river, fluvio-, m., flumen-, amni-, m.
road, via-.
robber, latron-.
Roman, Romano-.
Rome. Roma-.
roof, tecto-, n.
room, spatio-, n.
rough, horrido-.
round, (prep.) circum, (ace.)
rouse, excita-, 2. excitav-, 3. exci- tato-.
rout, profllga-, 2. profligav-, 3. pro- fligaie-.
reyal, regio-.
ruinous, pestifero-.
rule, imptrio-. n.
VOCABULARY.
253
rule, guberna-, 2, gubernav-, 3.
gubernato-. rumor, rumor-.
run, curr-, 2. cucurr-, 3. curso-. run-down, decurr-, 2. — " — or de-
cucurr-, 3. decurso-. run-together, concurr-, 2. — '' — or
concucurr-, 3. concurso-. run-to-meet, occur- (dat.), 2. — " — .
3. occurso-.
Sad, tristi-.
safe, salvo-.
safety, salut-.
set-sail, solv-, 2. — " — , 3. soluto-.
sailor, nauta-.
for-the-sake, causa (after gen.)
Sal lust, Sallustio-.
sally, eruption-.
same, eo-dtm.
to-the-same-place, eod&m.
Sardinia, Sardinia-.
savage, saevo-.
say, die-, 2. dix-, 3. dicto-.
scarcely, vix.
scatter, sparg-, 2. spars-, 3. sparse-.
school, schola-.
Scipio, Sclpion-.
scout, expldralor-.
sea, mart-, n.
sea-coast, ora- maritima-.
seat, sedlli-, n.
second, alter o-,
secondly, ddnde.
secretly, clam.
secure, coufirma-, 2. confirmav-, 3.
confirmato-. security, praesulio-, n. sedition, sedition-, see, vide-, 2. vid-, 3. vlso-. ste-diatinctly, cern-, 2. crev-, 3. cre-
to-.
seed, semen-, seek, quaer-, 2. quaeslv- 3. quae-
sito-. 22
seek, (go to), pet-, 2. petiv-, 3. peti-
to-.
seem-jit, vide-, 3. vlso-. seize (snatch), corrip(i)-, 2. corripu-,
3. correpto-. seize (take possession), occupa-, 2.
occupav-, 3. occupato-. select, delig-, 2. deleg-, 3. delecto-. sdl, vend-, 2. vendid-, 3. vendito-. senate, senafu-. senator, senator-, send, nni(t)-, 2. mis-, 3. misso-. send-across, transmitt-, 2. trans- mis-, 3. transmisso-. send-for, arcess-, 2. arcesslv-, 3. ar-
cessito-. send-forward, praemitt-, 2. praemls-
3. praemisso-. send-out, emitt-, 2. einls-, 3. emis-
so-.
sense, sensu-. senseless, excord-. separate, sejung-, 2. sejunx-. 3. se-
juncto-.
Sequani, Scquano-, pi. seriously, graviter. servt-for, inservi- (dat.), 2. inservlv-,
3 inservito-. set-against, oppon- (dat.) 2. opposu-,
3. opposito-. set-free, llbera-, 2. llberav-, 3. llber-
ato-. set-off, excol-, 2. excolu-, 3. excul-
to-.
set-out, proficisc-, 3. profecto-. set-over, praetic(i)- (dat.), 2. praefec-,
3. praefecto-. set-on-fire, incend-, 2. — " — 3. in-
censo-. set-up, constitu-, 2. — " — 3. con-
stituto-.
setting (of the sun), occasu-. seventh, sepiimo-. severe, gravi-. severely, graviter. shake, quat(i)-, 2. none, 3. quasso-. sharne, pudor-. sharp, acuto-.
254:
VOCABULARY.
shatter, affllg-, 2. afflix-, 3. afflic-
to-.
sJiear, tonde-, 2. totond-, 3. tonso-. shed, prufund-, 2. proiud-, 3. pro-
fuso-.
sheep, ovi-, f. sheep-told, ovUi-, n. shtlttr, teg-, 2. tex-, 3. tecto-. shepherd, pastor-. shield, cltpeo-, m., scuto-, n. shine, colluce-. ship, navi-, £ shore, lltos-. shout, clamor-, show, monstra-, 2. monstrav-, 3.
monstrato-. shower, imbri-, m. shudder, horre-.
shut, claud-, 2. clans-, 3. clause-. shut-in, iuclud-, 2. inclus-, 3. inclu-
Sicily, Sicih'a-. Sicilian, Siado-. side, laies-.
" (quarter), par*®-, £ on-all-sides, und-qve. siejre. oppugndtion-. sight, consptctu-. signal, signs*-, n. silence, silentio-, n. silver, argcuto-. similar, simili-. siiuilariu*, similitudon-. sin, pcccdlo-, n.
sm, pecca-, 2. peccav-, 3. peccato-. since (subjunc.), cwm. «t*/5r, can-, 2. cecin-, 3. canto-, singular, singulari-. sink, merg-, 2. mere-, 3. merso-. sister, soror-. situated, posito-. six. sex.
sixteen, scderim. size, amputation-. skilful, ptr'do-. skill, ptrltia-. skin, pdli-, f.
slaughter, dfidi-, f. nom. s. duties.
strugi-, f. nom. s. stragi-s. slave, strvo-, m. be-a-slavt. servi-, (cto^.) 2. servlv-,
3. servito-. slavery, seitilut-. slay, occid-, 2. — " — , 3. OCCIPO-.
interfic(i)-, 2. interlec-, 3. iuter-
fecto-.
sleep, somno-, m. sleep, dorini-, 2. dormlv-, 3. dor-
mlto-.
slinger, funditor-. slothful, pigro-. slowness, tarditat-. small, parvo-. smoke, fumo-, m. snake, angui-, c. snare, insidia-, pi. snatch. rap(i)-, 2. rapu-, 3. rapto-. so, sic, torn, ita. so-far, tantum. so-great, tanto-. society, socictat-.
Socrates, Socrati-. nom. s. Socrates. soft, moUi-.
soften, molli-, 2. molllv-, 3. mollito-. Soldier, milet-. some, aliquo-.
" (opp. to " other"), oZib-.
" (ceitaiu), quo-dam. son, filio-. son-in-law, genero-. song, cantu-. soon, c»to.
as-soon- as, simulatque. sorrow, dolor-, be-sorry, dole-, 2. dolu-, 3. dolito-.
poenite- (impcrs.), 2. poenitu-. soul, animo-, m. sound, (adj ) sano-. Spain, Hispdnia-. spare, pare- (</a<.), 2. peperc-, 3.
pai~so-.
Sparta. Sparta-, speak, loqu-, 3. locuto-. spear, hasta-. speecli, oration-.
VOCABULARY.
spike, cuspid-, f.
spur, caltar(i)-. n.
Stability, stabilitat-.
stag, cervo , ni.
stand one's-yround, consist-, 2. con-
stit-, 3. constito-. state, clvitut-. station oneself, consist-, 2. constit-,
3. constito-.
stay, mane-, 2. inans-, 3. nianso-, still, etiamnum. sting, aculco-, m. stone, lajrid-, m. storm, hiem-, f. storm (a city), expugria-, 2. expug-
nav-, 3. expugnato-. story (tale), kistoria-. story (floor), tabuldto-. strait, frelo , n.
stranger, hospet-, m., pcregrino-, m. strength, vZi-(i')-, f. irreg. robor-, n. strttch-, tend , 2. te tenet , 3. tento-. strictly, accurate, strip, orba-, («6/.), 2. orbav-, 3. or-
bato-.
strive, contend-, 2. — " — , 3. con- ten to-.
study, stude-, (dat), 2. studu-. subdue, subig-, 2. subeg-, 3. sub-
acto-. submit, obtempera-, (dat.), 2. ob-
temperav-, 3. obtemperato-. succeed, succed-, (uat.\ 2. success-,
3. successo-. such (of quality), tali-.
" (of size), tanto-. sud de 1 1 , repentino'. suddenly, subito, repente. suffer, perl'er-, 2. pertul-, 3. perla-
to-.
sufficiently, satis. suitable, idonto-. sum-ol-money, pecunia-. sun, sol-, m. sup, coeria-, 2. coenav-, 3. coena-
to-. support, susj;ine-, 2. sustinu-, 3.
sus tento-.
be-sure, confld- (semi-dep.\ 3. con-
f'lso-.
surpass, antecell-. surrender, ded-, 2. dedid-, 3. dedi-
to-. surround, cing-, 2. ciux-, 3. cinc-
to-.
suspicion, suspicion-, sustain, sustine-, 2. sustinu-, 3.
sustento-.
swallow, hirundon-, f. swan, cygno-, m. sway, tempera-, 2. tempera v-, 3.
temperiito-. sweet, suavi-, dulci-. sweetly, suuvittr. swift, veloc(i)-. swim -across, trana-, 2. trilnav-, 3.
tranato-. sword, gladio-, m.
" (iron), ferro-, n. system, dtscipllna-.
Take, cap(i)-, 2. cep-, 3. capto-.
take-away, toll-, 2. sustul-, 3. sub- lato-.
take-by-storm, expugna-, 2. expug- nav-, 3. expugnato-.
take-possession-of, occupa-, 2. occu- pav-, 3. occupato-.
take-one1 S'Stai.ion, consist-, 2. con- stit-, 3. constito-.
tame, doma-, 2. domu-, 3. domito-.
tarry, mora-, 3. morato-.
tax, vectlgdl(i)-, n.
teach, doce-, 2. docu-, 3. docto-.
tear, lacera-, 2. lacerav-, 3. lacera- to-.
tear-aftunder, discind-, 2. discid-, 3. discisso-.
tear-in-pieces, dirip(i)-, 2. diripu-, 3. dlrepto-.
tear-off, derip(i)-, 2. deripu-, 3. de- rep to-.
tempest, tempestat-.
256
VOCABULARY.
ten, decem.
terrify, lerre-, 2. terru-,3. territo-.
territories, flni-, m. pL
than, quam.
thanks, gratia-, pL
that, itlo-, toto-. see p. 76.
Themistocles, Theniittodi-, n. s. -les.
thence, inde.
there, ibi.
thick, den so-.
tliiet;/Sr-t c,
thigh, fen'tor-, n.
tli in, te)tui-.
thing, re-.
<%»'«<& (oppose), puta-, 2. putav-, 3.
putato. tti«A- (estimate), existiraa-, 2. exis-
timav-, 3. existimato-. think (consider), cogita-, 2. cogitav-,
3. cogitato-. third, tertio-. thirteen, trtdecim. thirty, trig into,. this, ho-, see p. 72. thither, eo.
thouglitless, imprudent(i)-. thousand, mittc. iu pL milii-, n. threat, mina-, pi. three, ?/•<"-. thresliold, llmen-. through, j>er (ace). throw, j»c(i)-, 2. jec-, 3. jacto-. faruw-uway, abjic(i)-, 2. abjec-, 3.
abjecto-. throw-down, dejic(i)-, 2. dejec-, 3.
dejecto-. tide, atstu-. time, tempos-. at-ilie-same-time, simuL for-soine-iime, altyuatiuliu. timid, tt-mido-. together, si mid. to-day, hodie. to-morrow, eras. torch, fac-, f. torment, crucia-, 2. cruciav-, 3. cru-
ciato-. touch, tang-, 2. tetig-, 3. tacto
touch-ttpon, atting-, 2. attig-, 3 at-
tacto-.
towards, ad (ace.), tower, turri-, f. town, opjtido-, n. townsman, oppida.no-. traitor, prodiior-. tran*2*trt, trajic(i)-, 2. trajec-, 3.
trajecto-. traveller, viator-, tracti-se, evad-, (all.), 2. eras-, 3.
evaso-.
treasury, aerdrio-, n. trtat, ag-, 2. eg-, 3. acto-. treaty, fotdes-. tree, arltor-, f. Treviri, Treriro-, pi. tribe, populo-, m. tribune, tribuno-. tribute, sl'tptrtdio-, n. troop, turtua-. trouble, incummodo-, n. true, very-. <ru*«f crtd- (tfatX 2- credid-, 3.
credito-. trust (be sure), conf Id-, (temi-dep.),
3. con I Iso-. truth, ftro-, n. turn, vert-, 2. — " — , 3. verso-.
convert-, 2. — " — , 3. converso-. twenty, v'lyinti. two, duo-, (irreg.).
Ulysses, Ulyssi-, nom. s. Ulysses.
unavenged, iuulto-.
uuceitain, inctrto-.
uncouth, inndto-.
undefended, indefenso-.
under, yub (ace. or abl.)
undermine, subru-, 2. — " — , 3.
subruto-. understand, intellig-, 2. intellex-, 3.
intellects-. undertake, suscip(i)-, 2. suscep-, 3.
suscepto-.
VOCABULARY.
257
undertaking, incepto-, n. uneasy, sollicito-. unencumbered, expedite-. unexpectedly, imprdvlso. unfortunate, misero-. unite, conjung-, 2. conjunx-, 3.
conjuncto-. unless, nisi. unmusical, dbsono-. unskilled, imperlto-. unworthy, indigno- (abl.). upon (against), in (ace.), upright, probo-. urge-on, incita-, 2. incitav-, 3. in-
citato. impell-, 2. iuipul-, 3.
impulse-.
use, Qt-, (abl), 3. uso-. useful, utilir. useless, inutili-. utmost, ultimo-, utter, pronuntia-, 2. pronuntiav-, 3.
prouuutiatc™.
Valor, virtut-.
in-vain, frustra.
valle}r, valli-, f.
valuable, pretidso-.
verse, versu-.
very-few, perpauco-.
Vestal, Vestali-.
Vesuvius, Vesiivio-, m.
cause-vexation, pige-, (impers.) 2.
pigu-, 3. pigito-. vice, vitio-, n. victorious, victor-. victory, victoria-. village, vlco-, m, violence, vls(i)-, f. (Irreg.). Virginius, Virginio-. virgin, virgon-. virtue, virtut-. visit (with\ affic(i)- 2. afffec-, 3
aflecto-.
visit (see), vis-, 2. — " — , 3. viso-. 22*
voice, voc-, f. Volscian, Volsco-.
Wage, infer-, 2. intul-, 3. illato-.
wagon, carro-, m.
wait-far, exspecta-, 2. exspectav-,
3. exspectato-. wakefulness, vigilantia-. wall, muro-, m. wander, erra-, 2. errav-, 3. errato-.
vaga-, 3. vagato-. want, desldera-, 2. deslderav-, 3
desiderate-, want, inopia-. war, bello-, n. ward-off, defend-, 2. — " — , 3. de-
fenso-.
warlike, beUicoso-. warn, mone-, 2. nionu-, 3. monito-. waste (wear away), ter-, 2. triv-, 3.
trito-.
watch, vigilia-. water, (ti/ua-. wave, fluctu-. way, via-. weak, imbccillo-. weakness, injirmitdt-. wealthy, dlvtt-.
wear-away, ter-, 2. triv-, 3. trito-. wear-out, connc(i)-, 2. coiifec-, 3.
confecto-. weary, fatlga-, 2. fatlgav-, 3. fatl-
gfito-.
weary, fesso-.
cause-weariness, taede-, 2. taedu-. weep, tie-, 2. flev-, 3, fleto-. weight, pondes-. wliat, quo-. when, quum, quando. whence unde. where, ubi. wherry, lintri-, f. whether, utrum. which, quo-.
" (of two), utro-.
258
VOCABULARY.
•while, dum.
whithersoever, quocunque.
who. quo-.
whole, toto-. for declens.see § 162.
why, ciir.
wicked, itnprobo-.
wickedness, pravitdt-.
wide. lalo-.
widel}', kite.
wife, uxor-.
wild-beast, /era-.
will, voluntilt-.
willingly, ultra.
wriud, vento-, ra.
wine, vino-, n.
wing (of an army), comu-, n.
winter-quarters, Jaberno-, n. pi.
winter, hierna-, 2. liiemav-, 3. hi-
emato-.
wise, sapie.nt(i}-. wish, vol-, 2. volu-. witli (along: with), cum, (abl.) wiihin, intrd (ace.), without, sine (al»L). witness (set), specta-, 2. spectav-,
H. specta to-, wolf, /«^>o-, n. woman, inulier-. wonderful, iiuro-. wood, silvu-. wooden, ligneo-. word, verlto-, n. dicto-, n. work, opes-. workman, fabro-.
world, mundo-, m.
worth, prtti'o-, n.
" (merit), dignitat-. worthy, digiio-, (abl.). wround, vulnts-. wound, vulnera-, 2. vulnerSv-, 3.
vulnerato-.
wrounded, vulnerato-, saucio-. wretched, misej-o-. write, scrll)-. 2. scrips-, 3. scripto-. writer. scr>pt</r-. writing, scr.pto-, n. wroug, iujaria-.
Tear, anno-, ra.
yoke, jugo-, n.
yoke-toytthtr, conjnga-, 2. conju-
gav-, 3. coiijugau>-. yonder, illo-. see p. 76. young, jurf.ni-. younger, junior-. young-man, adolescent(i)-. your, tuo~. youth, juveni-, c.
Zeal, studio-, n.
VOCABULARY.
LATIN-ENGLISH.
A. short for Aulo-.
a, ab. abs, (abl.), away from, by.
abduc-, lead away ; 2. ubdux-, 3.
abducto-. —
abes-, be away; 2. abfu-, abi-, go-away; 2. ablv-, 3. abifo-. abig-, drive away; 2. abeg-, 3.
aback*-. abjic(i)-, throw away ; 2. abjcc-, 3.
addiic-, lead to ; 2. addux-, 3.
abscind-, cut off ; 2. abscid-, 3. a&- K&&0-.
-, .Keep away; 2. abstinu-,
absent(i)-, absent.
absum-, consume; 2. dbsumps-, 3.
absunlc;-, absurd.
ac, art«(.
A oca-, a woman's name.
acccd-, approacli ; 2. access-, 3. ac-
accend-, set on fire; 2. — " — , 3.
acctnso-j
accld-, happen; 2. — " — . accip(i)-, receive; 2. acccp-, 3. ac-
accurr-, run up to; 2. — " — , or
accucurr-, 3. accurso-. aciti-, ////e 0/ ittW/d. acri-, A;e-ew. ac liter, keenly. acuto-, altar p. ad, (ace.) to, near to. adaequa-, be equal to ; 2. adaequav-,
3. adaaqudto-. add-, add ; 2. tuMd-, 3. addilo-.
ades-, be near* 2. adfu-.
adhibe-, apply , invite: 2. adhibu-,
3. adhibito-.
adhorta-, encourage; 3 . adhortato-. adhiic, hitherto. ac?/-, go to ; 2. acZlv-, 3. adito-. adim-, take away ; 2. adem-, 3.
odvmpto-.
adipisc-, gain ; 3. adepto-. aditu-, approach. adjunf/-, unite ; 2. adjunx-, 3. ao*-
aditiinistra-, manage; 2. adminis-
trav-, 3. udministrato-. aduilra-, wonder-at: 3. admlrafo-. admiration-, wonder. [«o-.
wlniitt-, admit; 2.<tdmis-, 3. adutis- admoilura, exceedingly. admov'-, bring-near; 2. admov-,
3. admoto-. adoksc-, grow up; 2. adolev-, 3.
adopta-, adopt; 2. adoptav-, 3. ao*-
adori-, attack; 3 adorto-. adst/i-, stand near; 2. adstit-. advent-, arrive; 2. adoen-, 3. ao7-
adventu-, arrival.
adversario-, enemy.
ad verso-, iu-froid; adverse.
ad versus or adversurn, (ace),
against. adeoca-, call-up; 2. advocav-, 3.
advocato-.
260
VOCABULARY.
advola-, fly to ; hasten ; 2. advoldv-,
3. ad void to-. aed(ficu~, build; 2. aedificav-, 3.
utdificdto-.
aediticio-, n. luilding. aedllicio-, one who has been aedile. Aeduo-, Aeduan. aegre, with difficulty. Aemilio-, a Roman clan-name. Aenea-, Aeneas. aeneo-. of -copper. aequitat-, evenness ; justice. aequo-, level, even. aes-, n. &>}>per. aestu-, tide. aetat-, aye.
a/er-. carry to ; 2. attul-, 3. allato-. a/ic(i)-, aflect ; 2. offec-, 3. a/tcto-. atlixo-, constantly-present. afflicto-, damaged. Africa-, Africa. ag-, act ; spend (time) ; conduct ;
pay (thanks): 2. eg-, 3. acto-. agger-, m. mound. aggrtd(i)-, attack ; apply oneself
to; 3. aggrtsso-. agmen-, marching line, agita-, harass, agitate; 2. agitdv-,
3 wjilato-.
agricola-, husbandman. agricultura-, agriculture. agro-, m. field, di- (defective), say. al , nourish ; 2. alu-, 3. alito-. ala-, winy.
All>a-, a town near Home. Albano-, Alban. albo-, white. Alesia-, Aks?a. Alexandria-, a city in Egypt. Alexjindro-. Alexander. alibi, elsewhere. alieno-, belonging to another. aliqumido. once. aliquu-, some. aliquot, some. alio-, oilier ; some. aliter, otherwise.
A Ilia-, a river near Pome.
alUc(i)-, allure; 'l.allex-. 3. allecto-.
all«qu-. address ; 3. allocuto-.
Alpi-, /. pi. Aljis.
alte, highly, deeply.
aliero-, the otfu.-r ; the second; the
one party. altiludon-, height. alto-, high. alveari-, n. beehive, ama-, love; 2 amav-, 3. aniato-. amabili-, lovely. ainator-, lover. ambo-, (irreg.), both. amlco-. friend ; friendly. amicitia-, friendslnp. amilt-, lose; 2. amis-, 3. amisfo-. ainni-, m. rittr. amor-, love, amplia-, enlarge; 2. ampliav-, 3.
amplidlo-. amphtudon-, size. amplius, more. arnplo-, large. Amulio-, Amulius. an at-, duck. Anchisa-, Anchises. Anco-, Ancus. angui-. c. snake. angustia-, pi. straits. angusto-, narrow. Anien-, m. the river Anio. ammadvrrtri observe; 2. — " — ,
3. animadverso-. aniinal(i)-. n. animaL aninio-, m. t>ouL annulo-, m. ring. anno-, m. year. an DUO-, yearly. ante, (ace.), before. antequatn, bejore that, ant-pdn-, prefer; 2. anteposu-. 3.
anttj'osito-.
Antiochla-, the capital of St^ria. antlquo-, ancient. Antonio-, Antony. aperi-, open ; 2. aperu-, 3. aptrto-. aperte, openly.
VOCABULARY.
2G1
aperto-, open.
api-, /. bee.
apparatu-, stock; store.
appfire-, appear ; 2. appdru-, 3.
(ippdrito-. appdla-, name ; 2 appettdv-, 3. ap-
pelldto-. appel-, drive to; 2. appul-, 3. ap-
appet-, seek for ; 2. appetiv-, 3. op-
^t/o-. appropinqua-, approach ; 2. appro-
pinqudv-, 3. appropinquate-. apro-, ioiid-boar} apto-, _/i^.
apnd. riear, among. Apulia-, Apulia. aqua-, water. aquila-, eagle.
ara-, plough ; 2. ardv-, 3. ardto-. ara-, a/<ar.
arbitra-, think ; 3. arbitrate-. arbitrio-, n. will, choice. arbos , /. tree. arc>-, keep off; 2. arcu-. arc(i)-, /. citadel, arceas-, send for ; 2. arcesslv-, 3.
Ardea-, a town near Rome, arde-, be-on-fire ; 2. ars-, 3. arso-. arjfento-, silver. Ar^o-, n. m. in pi Argon. Arlrnino-, n. a town in U/nbria. armJlto-, armed. Armenia-. Armenia. armento-, herd. arm ilia-, armlet. armo-, n. pi. arms. art(i)-, /. art. artiticioso-, artistic. Arunt-, a maris name. Arverno-, m. pi. a Gallic tribe. Ascanio-, the son of Aeneas. Asia-, Asia.
asperna-, disdain-, 3. asperndto-. aspid-, /. viper.
assigna-, ascribe; 2. assigndv-, 3. assigndto:
asylo-, n. sanctuary.
at, but.
atque, and.
atroc(i)-, fierce.
attente, attentively.
atter-, rub, wear-away ; 2. attrlv-,
3. attrifo-. atting-, touch upon; 2. attig-, 3.
attacto-. attribu-, assign ; 2. — " — , 3. attri-
buto-.
auct.or-, author. auctoritat-, influence. audiic(i)-, bold. audricia-, boldness. audacter, boldly.
aude-, (semi-dep.) dare : 3. auso-. audi-, hear ; 2. audlv-, 3. audllo-. avfer-, carry-off'; 2. abstul-, 3. ab-
IdtO-.
aufug(i)-, flee-away ; 2. aufug-.
auge-, increase ; 2. aux-, 3. aucto-.
augurio-, n. augury.
Augusto-, Augustus.
Aulo-, a Roman first name.
aureo-, golden.
Aurelio-, a Roman clan-name.
auriga-, charioteer.
auri-, /. ear.
auro-, n. gold.
auspicio-, n. auspice.
aufc, either, or.
autem, but.
auxilio-, n. help, aid.
" pi. auxiliary troops. avaritia-, avarice. Aventino-, Aventine hill, avert-, turn away; 2. — " — , 3.
averso-. avi-, /. bird. avo-, grandfather, dvola-, fly away; 2. avoldv-, 3.
dvoldto-.
Bacillo-. n. staff. Baleari-, Balearic. barbaro-, m. barbarian.
262
VOCABULARY.
bellicose-, warlike.
beilo-, n. war.
Bellovaco-, m. pi. a Gallic tribe.
bene, ?/>//,
beiifticio-, n. kindness.
benigne, kindly.
betiigno-, kind.
Id-, drink : 2. — " — .
blduo-. n. iv:o days' space.
bieimio, n. twoytars' sj'ace.
Bifliynia-, part "/Asia Minor.
bonu-, good.
bono-, n. pi. goods.
bov-, c. ox, cow.
brae! no-, n. arm.
brevi-, short.
brevl, in a abort time.
Britannia-, Brilain.
Britanno-, m. pi. Britons.
Hruto, Bruius.
Brutlio-, m. pi. a part of Italy.
Byzautio-, n. now Constantinople.
C. short for C»\o-. Cabico-, •//. 2)1* a town of Pontus. cadaver-, n. corpse. ca</-, fall ; 2. ctcid-, 3. caso-. cado, ni. ca#k. cadCieo-, perishable, coed-, Jell, slay ; 2. cecid-, 3,'caeso-. caedk /. n. s. caedes, daughter. Caio-, a Roman first nam*. a\ ] a i n i la t-, -m < -\fvrtune. calcTir(i)-, n. spur, cale-, be hot; 2. calu-. Cain rlo-, c. ramel. Cainillo-. a Roinan general. Campania-, part of Italy. canipo-, m. plain. cani-, c. dt>g.
car/-, sing ; 2. cecin-, 3. canto-. Canna-, pi. a village of Apiuia. can tu-, so ag. capro-, rfli.. goat. .
caj'tss-, undertake; 2. capes-slv~, 3. capesslto-.
cap(i)-, tfike, : 2. ccp-, 3. capfo-
Capitulio-, Capitol.
cajita-, catch at; 2. captiiv-, 3. cup-
ifiio-.
en [ > 1 1 v a - , a fern alt prisoner. capiivo-, m pii&ointr. Capua-, n city in Campania. capui-. n. head ; capital; civil rights. career, m. prison. cariiat-, ojjection. carmen-, s»ng. CarnQii-, pi. the Carnutts. cnr(o)\\-. f. flesh. car| ento-, curriagf. carp-, plnck ; 2. carps-, 3. carptn-. Can a-, pi. a city of Mesopotamia. carro-, m. wagon. Cai tlulgon-, / Carthage. Caithfiginieiisi-, Carthaginian. ciiro-, dcur. cantiga-, reprove, chastise; 2. cas-
tlytv-, 3. cott-guto-. cast ro-, n. pi. < urnp. ftisu-, occurrence, -misfortune. catena-, chain. Caudlna-, of-Caud-wn. causa-, lnw-suit' rta.-vn. causa. ./(.'/• the sake, (alter a penit.) caie-. guaid against; 2. cue-, o.
canto-.
ccla-, conceal; 2. cclav-. 3. ctlalo-. cdtbra- celebrate ; 2. ceicLruv-, 3.
celtbrato-.
celebri-, crowded: famous. celeritat-. ynirkntss. celei iter, quickly. eel so-, lofty. cense-, be of opinion ; 2. censu-, 3.
G0MCK
censu-, registration.
centum, hun/lrtd.
centurion-, centurion.
cent-, see distinctly ; 2. crev-, 3.
crtto-.
certamen-, contest. certior- fac(i)-, inform; 2. fee-, 3.
cervo-, w. stag.
VOCABULARY.
2G3
cf-tero-, other.
cibo-, m. food.
Ci in1 )ro-, pi. a tribe of north- Ger-
'ina is.
Clnea-, Cinea*.
dug-, sin-round; 2. cinx-, 3.cincto~. ciiC.l, (ace ), about. circiter, about. cireum, (ace.), around. circu nda~. surround; 2. circumded-,
3. circuiitdido-. circunidiic-, lead around ; 2. cir-
cumdujc-, 3. circum<tuct<>-. circum-<ta-, stand around ; 2. cir-
cumMet-.
citerior-, on the hither side. cilo, S'>on.
citra. (aec.) on this side. clvi-, c. citizen. civlli-, cioil. civil at-, state. • cludi-, / wsm. s. cladea, rout. clam, necrttly. clamor-, shout.'
claro-, clear, evident, illustrious. class!-, /. fleet.
da ad-, sliut; 2. daus-, 3. clauso-. Claudio-, a Roman clan-name. clC-monfc(i)-, mere fid. cleineuter, mercifully. cleuientia-, clemency. Cleopatra-, a quetn of Egypt. clipeo-, m. shield. cloaca-, sewer. Clasio-, n. Glusium. Cu. short for Cneio-. Cueio-, a Roman first name. Coclet-, Copies. coelesti-, heavenly. coelo-, n. m. in plur., heaven. coem-, buy up; 2. coem-, 3. coemp-
coer-
coena-, dinner.
2. c»ep-, begin ; 3. coepto-.
coerce-, coniiue ; 2. coercu-, 3.
cito-.
cog-, constrain; 2. co^g-, 3. coaclo-. cogitation-, consideration.
cognition-, examination.
cognomen-, surname.
coy now-, learn; 2. cognov-, 3. cog-
nito-. cohibt-, check; 2. cohibu-, 3. co-
hil>/w-.
coliort(i)-, / cohort, cot-, cultivate; '2. colu-, 3. cult.n-. CollJtlno-, the husband of Lucrctia. collauda-, praise-highly ; 2. codau-
da»-, '6. collauddto-. collega-, m. colleayue. colli-, m. hilt, coliig-, collect ; 2. collcg-, 3. collec-
to-.
colloca-, place; 2. coltocav-, 3. col- local o-.
colloqu-, converse with ; 3. col'ocuto-. colGno-, colonist, combur-, burn up ; 2. combuss-, 3.
comliusto-.
comet-, c. companion, com'ta-, accompany; 3. comitdfo-. commtmorn-, mention; 2. com-
mtmordv-, 3. commemorato-. corn men to-, Jiction. co i n m i 1 i t on -, fello w- soldier. C(nnminus, clo*e at hand, commiti-, commit; commence; 2.
commls-, 3. commfeso-. commura-, tarry; 3. commorato-. commove-, move, excite ; 2. com-
mdv-, 3. commoto-. communi-, ibrtit'y strongly; 2. com-
mti/ilv-, 3. cominunUo-. communi-, common, compara-, get together; 2. com-
pardv; 3. compar&to-. compell-, force, constrain ; 2. com-
pal-, 3. conipulvo-. compensa-, compensate; 2. com-
peiiSdV-, 3. compensat's-. comperi-, ascertain ; 2. comper-, 3.
comptrto-. comple-, till; 2. complcv-, 3. com-
pleto-.
complect-, embrace ; 3. complexo-. complur(i)-, pi. several.
264
VOCABULARY.
comport-, put together; settle; 2.
coinposu-, 3. composite-. comporta-, carry together ; 2. com-
portav-, 3. comportdte-. comprehend-, arrest; 2. — " — , 3.
comprehenso-. conn-, attempt: 3. condto-. coiiatu-, endeavor. conced-, grant: 2. concess-, 2. con-
cesso-. concilia-, win over; 2. conciliav-,
3. conciliate-. concilio-, n. assembly. concita-, arouse ; 2. concitav-, 3.
concitato.
concitor-, stirrer vp. conclama-, shout together ; 2. con-
clantav-. 3. concldmate-. conclusion-, rounding. coiicurr-, run together; 2. — " — ,
or concucurr-, 3. concurso-. concursu-, concourse. cond-, found ; 2. condid-, 3. condiio-. condition-, condition. conduc-, lead together; hire; take
a contract for; 2. condux-, 3.
conducto-. confer-, carry together; betake;
2. coniul-, 3. collate-. contt'Stim, immediately. coiijic(i)-, finish ; wear out ; 2. corc-
fcc-, 3. confecto-. conjirma-, establish ; 2. confirmav-,
3. coiifirmato-.
ctmfite,-, confess; 3. confesso-. conjiig-, engage in battle; 2. con-
fl'X-, 3. conflicto-. coufod(i)-, stab; 2. confod-, 3. con-
confug(t)-, flee for refuge ; 2. cora-
/«^-- conyrtga-, assemble ; 2. congregdv-,
3. congregate-. conjlc(i)-, throw; 2. conjee-, 3. corc-
conjug-, c. consort.
conjuny-, unite ; 2. conjunx-, 3. COTI-
.; w TIC to-. consctnd-, embark in ; 2. — " — , 3.
conxcenso-. comcrlb-, enroll ; 2. conscrips-, 3.
conseitesc-, grow old ; 2. consenu-. constnti-, agree; 2.consens-, 3. co/i
consequ-, overtake ; 3. consecuto-. constr-, join together ; 2. consent-,
3. constrto-. conscrca-, preserve ; 2. conservdv-,
3. cowseruafo-. conservatric-, preserver. conoid-, sit down ; encamp; 2. con-
serf-, 3. consesso-. consilio-, ?i. counsel; meeting ; wis-
dom. consist-, be at rest, be firm; 2. con-
stit- 3. const ite-. corispectu-, ^/<<. compic(i)-, behold ; 2. conspex-, 3.
conspica-, perceive; 3. conspicdto-.
constant(i)-, ./?r?n.
constitu-, place ; fix ; resolve ; 2.
— " — , 3. constitute-. consuesc-, become acustomed; 2.
consuev-, 3. consucto-. consul-, consul.
consular!-, one who has been consul consul-, (dat.) take measures; 2.
consulu-, 3. consulto-. consum-, consume, spend; 2. co?i-
sumps-, 3. consumpto-. consurg-, rise together; 2. consur-
rex-, 3. consurrecto-. contamina-, pollute ; 2. contami-
nav-, 3. contaminate-. contemn-, despise; 2. conkmps-, 3.
coxjrtra-, conspire; 2. conjurav-,
3. ccnjurato-. conjuration-, conspiracy.
contend-, stretch; hasten ; contend;
2. — " — , 3. contente-. contention-, exertion; contest. contento-, contented (abL)
VOCABULARY.
265
tontine-, keep in; 2. continu-, 3.
contento-.
contion-, assembly. contra, (ace.) against: opposite. coii'radlc-, speak against; 2. con-
tradix-i 3. contradicto-. contrah-, draw together; 2. con-
<roa;-, 3. contracto-. contrario-, contrary. coiivalesc-, regain health; 2. con-
valu-. convdl-, pluck up; 2. — " — , 3.
convulao-. convtni-, come together ; meet
with; 2. conven-, 3. convento-. conveutu-, assembly; assize. cotivoca-, call together ; 2. convo-
cav-, 3. convocdto-. convola-, fly-together ; 2. convoldv-,
3. convolato-. copia-, 2>£. forces. co I'd-, n. fteartf. Corinthio-, of- Corinth. Coriutho-, /. a c#y o/ Greece. Coriolo-, m, jp/. a town ofLatium. Cornelio-, a Roman clan-name. cornu-, n. horn; wing of an army. corpos-, body. corrig-, improve ; 2. correx-, 3. cor-
recto-. corrump-, corrupt; 2. corrup-, 3.
corruptO".
corrupto-, corrupted. corvo-, m. raven. cos. sh ort for consul-, sing. coss. short for consul-, plur. eras, to-morrow. crebro-, frequent. crea-, create; elect; 2. creav-, 3.
creato-. cred-, trust-, (dat.) ; believe ; 2. cre-
dit-, 3. credito-. Cremera-, a river tn Etruria. crimen-, charge. crucia-, torture ; 2. cructov-, 3. crzt-
crudeliter, cruelly.
Cuba-, lie down ; 2. cu&w-, 3.
to-.
cublli-, n. couch. cultu-, culture.
cum, (abl.) along with. conj. both, cumula-, heap up, load; 2. cumu-
lav-, 3. cumulate-. cunctatiCn-, detay. cup(i)-, desire; 2. cttplv-, 3. cuplto-. cnpide, eagerly. cupiditat-, lust, passion. cupido-, eager. cura-, care, cur a-, care for ; cure ; cause ; 2.
cwrav-, 3. curato-. Curi-, m. joZ. a Sabine town. curia-, ward; senate-house. Curiatio-, an Alban family-name, curr-, run ; 2. cucurr-, 3. cur so-. curru-, chariot. cursu-, running ; course. cuspid-, /. spike. custod-, c. guard, custodi-, guard ; 2. custodlv-, 3. cus-
tddlto-.
cyatho, m, cup. Cynoscephala-, pi. a village in
Thessaly. Cyzico-, m. a town in Asia Minor.
Damna-, condemn; 2. damnav-, 3. damnato-.
da-, give; put; 2. ded-, 3. dato-.
Dario-, a name of Persian kings.
de, (abl) down from : about: con- cerning : agreeably to.
de improviso, unexpectedly.
debe-, owe; 2. debu, , 3. debito-.
debilita-, weaken ; 2. debiliiav-, 3. debilitato-.
deced-, depart; die; 2. decess-, 3.
cruciatu-, torment. crudeli-, 23
decem, ten. decemviro-, decemvir.
2G6
VOCABULARY.
decern-, be convinced ; decree;
contend ; 2. decrcv-, 3. decrtto-. decernendo-, n. deciding. dtcid-, fall down; 2. — •' — . decimo-, tenth. dttip(i)-, deceive ; 2. decep-, 3. de-
cepto-. decurr-, run down ; 2. — " — , or
decucurr-, 3. decurso-. ded-, give up ; 2. dedid-, 3. dediio-. dedecos-, disgrace. dedition-, surrender. di'liic-, lead down; conduct; 2.
dedux-, 3. deducto-. dees-, be wanting (da*.) ; 2. rfe/k-. defection-, revolt defend-, defend; ward off; 2.
— " — , 3. defense-. defensor-, defender. defer-, confer ; 2. detul-, 3. deldto-. deinde, next, hereupon. dejic(i)-, throw down; drive down;
2. dijec-, 3. dejecta-.
dek-, blot out; destroy; 2. delev-,
3. dtfcto-.
delecta-, delight; charm; 2. delec-
tdv-, 3. delectdto-. delectu-, kvy. delicia-, pi. pleasures. drtiy-, choose; 2. efe/^-, $.dcleeto-. deliga-, bind, fasten; 2. deligdv-,
3. deligdto-. demerg-, sink; 2. dcmers-, 3. efe-
Demetrio-, a Macedonian prince.
demoli-, demolish ; 3. demollto-.
demum, at length.
denique, at length.
denso-, thick.
dfnuntia-, announce ; 2. denunti&v-,
3. denuntiato-. depell-. drive down ; expell ; 2. de-
put-, 3. depuko-. depon-, put down ; deposit ; 2. de-
posu-, 3. dcposito-. dcpopula-, pillage ; 3. depopuldto-. df-prehend-, seize; 2. — " — , 3. de-
prthenso-.
deprim-, press down; 2. dipress-,
3. dfpref>so-. dcrip(i)-, snatch away; 2. dcripu-
3. derepto-. descrlb , mark out; arrange; 2.
dcscn'ps-, 3. descripto-. dtser-, aV^andon ; 2. deseru-, 3. <fc-
desili-, leap down; 2. desilu-, 3.
-7'n-, cease ; 2. dmt;-, desist-, leave off; 2. dtsM-, 3. dts~
titO:
despera-, despair ; 2. desperav-, 3.
dt*pcralo-. dettrre-, deter; 2. deterru-, 3. <&-
detrah-, draw down; tear off; 2.
dctrax-. 3. d&racto-. detrimeiito-, Zt/ss. Deo-, (?orf. devasta-, lay waste; 2. dcvastav-,
3. devastate-. divine-, conquer entirely ; 2. dcv'ic-,
3. devtcto-. devoca-, call down ; 2. dcvocav-, 3.
devolv-, roll down ; 2. — " — , 3.
dextra-, right hand.
dextro-, on the right hand.
diademat-, n. diadem.
die-, speak; say; plead; call; 2.
dix-, 3. dicto-. dictator-, dictator. diction-, pleading. dicto-, n. ward. die-, m. (also f. in sing.) day. drfficili-, difficult. difficultat-, difficulty. diffid- (semi-dep.) distrust (rfof.);
3. difflso-. digito-, m. finger. digna-, deern worthy (abl.) 3. dig-
nato-.
dignitat-, dignity. digno-, wirrtity (abl.) dllig-, love ; 2. dllex-, 3. dlkcto-.
VOCABULARY.
267
dlligent(i)-, diligent, careful.
dlligenter, carefully.
dlligentia-, diligence.
dimica-, tight, struggle; 2. dlmi-
cav-, 3. dlmic&to-. dlmitt , send different ways; dis-
miss; 2. dlmls-, 3. dlmitso-. dlrip(£)-, plunder, pillage; 2. dl~
ripu-, 3. dlrrplo-. dlru-, demolish ; 2. — " — , 3. dlru-
to-. disced-, depart; 2. discess-, 3. dis-
cesso: discind-, tear asunder; 2. discid-,
3. ditcisao-. discipulo-, m. /?up^. dixc-, learn ; 2. didic-. discrlmen-, d./erence : hazard, divp6n-, place at intervals : arrange ;
2. disposu-, 3. disposito-. dispute-, discuss; 2. disputdv-, 3.
distnbu-, distribute; 2. — " — , 3.
dition-, dominion.
dltior-, richer.
dltissimo-, richest.
diu, for along time.
diurno-, daily.
diutius, for a longer time.
diuturnitat-, long duration.
diuturno-, long-lasting.
diverse-, different.
dlvet-, rich.
divid-, divide; 2. divls-, 3. diviso-.
dlvlno-, div.ne.
dlvitia-, pi. riches.
Dlvitiaco, a Gallic chief.
doce-, teach, inform ; 2. docu-, 3.
docto-.
docte, learnedly. docto-, karntd> doctor-, teacher. doctrlna-. teaming. dt »!<>-, m. craft, trick. dolor-, pain, grief. doma~, subdue, tame; 2. domu-, 3.
doinito-.
domestico-, domestic.
domination-, dominion.
domitiatric-, mistress.
domino-, master, lord.
domo-, & d(»mu-, /. house.
dona-, present; 2. donav^ 3. do-
nafo-.
donee, until. done-, n. gift, dormi-, sleep ; 2. dormlv-, 3. dor-
mlto-. dubita-, doubt, hesitate; 2. dubi-
tav-, 3. dubtlato-. dubitation-, hesiiation. due-, c. leader. due-, lead; draw out; protract;
marry (a wile) ; 2. dux-, 3. duc-
tO:
ducento-, two hundred.
Duillio-, a Roman clan-name.
dulcedon-, sweetness.
dulci-, sweet.
duiu, while, until.
Dumnorig-, a Gallic chief.
duo-, two (irreg.).
duodecim, tivelve.
duodecimo-, twelfth.
duodetiicesii 1 10-, twenty-eighth.
duodevicesimo-, eighteenth.
duodevlgintl, eighteen.
duplec-, double.
dura-, last, continue; 2. durav-,
3. durato*. duro-, hard.
e, ex, (abl.\ out of, from.
Eburon-, pi. a Gallic tribe.
ecquando, when — ever ?
ed-, eat; 2. ed-, 3. eso-.
educ-, lead out; 2. edux-, 3. educ-
to-. Sduca-, bring up; educate; 2. cdu-
Cav-, 3. educalo-. effug(i)-, flee away, escape ; 2. ef-
fug-.
268
VOCABULARY.
e/und-, pour out ; 2. fffud-, 3. ef-
fuso-.
Egeria-, the name of a nymph. e</rn/(i)-, go out; 3. igrtsau-. egregie, txcelitnlly. ejic(i)-, cast out; wreck; 2. ejec-,
3. fjtcto-.
elab-, slip away; 3. elopso-. elal&ra-, labor earnestly ; 2. elabo-
rav-, 3. ikiborato-. eleplianto-, m. elephant. eltc(i); entice out; 2. ettctt-, 3. eZt-
CttO:
eloqnentia-, eloquence.
em-, buy ; 2. rra-, 3. empto-.
emigia-, depart from ; '2. tmigrav-,
3. eniigrato-. emitt-, send out, let go; 2. erols-,
3. emisso-. gmoluniento-, profit. enini, /o/-. never begins a sentence, eo, thtlher ; by no much. eodem, to tht same place. >;plro-, /. a country N. W. of Greece. epistola-, letter. equH-, mare. equesiri-, equestrian. equet-, horseman, knight, equifa-, ride; 2. tquilav-, 3. equita-
1o-.
equitatu-. cavalry. equo-, horse. eqmilo-. foal ergo, Uiertfore,
er/</-, raise; 2. erex-, 3. erecto-. enp(i)-, snatch out, tear away; 2.
£rtpw-, 3. irtplo-. erudi-, inform, teach ; 2. erudlv-,
3. erudlto-. trump , burst out; 2. crflp-, 3.
erupto-.
erupLion-, sally ; eruption. «,•-, be; 2. fu~. esccndr, climb, mount; 2. — " — ,
3. esctnso-.
essedo-, n. war-chariot, et, and; both. etiam, also; even.
etiamnum, even now, stitt. Etriiria-, a country of Italy. evad-, escape; 2. ivas-, 3. (va*o-. etagv-, spread out; 3. ivaguto-. e-veiitu-, result. evtrt-, overthrow; 2. — " — , 3. ever-
so-. evoca-, call forth; 2. evocav-, 3.
evocato-. evola-, fly off; 2. evolav-, 3. evola-
to-. exardesc-, take fire, break out ; 2.
exars-, 3. txarso-. cxcid-, withdraw from ; 2. excess-,
3. cxcesso-. exctll-, surpass; 2. exccttu-, 3. ea>
CC/50-.
excellent(i)-, surpassing.
excidio-, w. overt/trow.
excita-, rouse; 2. excitdv-, 3. exci-
tato-.
exemplo-, n. example, precedent. extrct-, practise ; 2. exercu-, 3. ex-
erdto-.
exercitu-, army. exhauri-, exhaust, weaken ; 2. ex-
it aus-, 3. exhaust"-. exi-, go out; 2. txlv-, 3. «c/to-. #c/</-, drive out; 2. exe^-, 3. cajoc-
to-.
exilio-, n. eaife. eximio-, extraordinary. exitstima-, think, judge; 2. exis-
timdv-j 3, Kcistimato-. exitio-, n. ruin. exori-, rise ; 3. ey&rto-. exorna-, adorn greatly ; 2. exornav-,
3. exornato-. expedi-, disengage, make ready;
2. typed lv-, 3. expedlto-. expedlto-, unencumbered. expell-, drive out ; 2. expul-, 3. ca>
expcrgisc-, awake; 3. experrecto-. exptt-, exact, demand ; 2. expttlv-,
3. txpttlto-. eyplica-, unfold ; 2. explicu-, and <*x-
plicav-, 3. explicito- aud explicate-.
VOCABULARY.
269
explora-, examine; 2. explorav-,
3. ex{)ldrato-. explorator-, scout, expdii,-, place out, disembark; 2.
exposu-, 3. exposito-. exporta-, export ; 2. exportav-, 3.
exp&rtalo-. expugna-, take by storm ; 2. expug-
ndi'-, 3. expugndto-. exsilio-, n. banishment. exsptcta-, expect, wait for; 2. ex-
sprctav-, 3. exspectdto-. exspectation-, expectation. exstiugn-, extinguish, destroy; 2.
ex*tirix-, 3. exslincto-. exsul-, exile. exsula-, be in exile ; 2. exsulav-, 3.
extemplo, forthivith.
extiinesc-, fear greatly ; 2. extimu-.
extorque-, extort ; 2. extors-, 3. e#-
extrerno-,
outermost.
Fabio-, a Roman clan-name. Fabricio-, a Roman clan-name. fabro-, workman. fabula-, tale, story. fac(i)-, niirike ; 2. fee-, 3. facto-. facile, easily. facili-, eflwy. fnciiios-, action. facto-, n. dted. ffijro-, /. beech tree. Falerio-, m. pi. a town in Etruria. Falisco- pi. the people of Fal ril. fall.-, deceive; 2.frftll-, 3. falso-. ialso-, false. fan i a-, futiie, report. lanii-, /. n. s. fames, hunger. fnmilia-, family ; sect. farniliaritat-, intimacy. famula-, handmaid. farr-, n. corn. 23*
fatiga-, tire, weary; 2. fatigav-,
3. fallgato-.
Faustulo-, a man's name. fave-, favor (dat.), 2. fav-, B.fauto-. favor-, good-will. ffeli-, / «. s. teles, cat. ff-llc(i)-, happy, fortunate. fellcitat-, happintss. fellciter, happily. fernina-, female, woman. fern or-, n. thigh for-, carry; bear; tell; report; 2.
tul-, 3. lato-. ferac(i)-, fruitful. fere, almost. fero-, wild. feroc(i)-, bold, fierce. ferro-, n.iron; sword. fesso-, weary. festo-, n. festival. Ji-, become ; liappen ; 3. facto-, see
§ 237.
fid-, (semi-dep.) trust (<1at.} 3. fiso-. fide-, faith ; c> edit ; protection ; sub-
jection.
Me\\-, faiftful. fidi-, /. pi. musical strings. fiji'Qra-, figure, shape. fllia-, daughter. filio-, son.
fing-, contrive; Z.finx-, S.ficto-. fini-, finish; 2. flniv-, S.flnltu-. fini-, m. rarely f. end, limit.
" m. pi. territories. finitimo-, neighboring. firma-, strengthen ; 2. firmav-, 3.
Jirmato-. firrne, Jinnly. flayita-, demand earnestly; 2.fld-
yitav-, 3. flayitaio-. flfiffi tioso-, infamous. Flaminio-, a Roman clan-name.
fleet-, bend; persuade; 2. flex-, 3.
fletu-, weeping.
flu re n t(i )-, flourishing.
flos-, m. flower.
270
VOCABULARY.
fiucta-, wave.
flumen-, river.
fluvio, m. river.
/<*/(*)-, dip ; 2. fod~, 3. fosso-.
foedes-, treaty.
f« >edo-, foul ; base.
forma-, shape ; beauty.
fort-, /. chance, luck.
forii-, brave.
fortiier. bravely.
forth udou-, bravery.
foituna-, fortune.
foro-, n. forum, market-place.
fossa- ditch.
fra(n)g-, break ; 2. freg-, 3. fracto-.
fratr-, brotfitr.
fraud-./, deceit, guile.
frauda-, cheat; 2. fraudav-, 3.
frigido-, coW.
front(i)-, / forehead; front ; face.
fructu-, fruit, profit.
frumentario-, relating to corn.
frumento-, corn, grain.
f rustra, in vain.
fujfji-, flight
fuga-, put to flight ; 2. fugav-, 3.
fugdto-. fug(i}-, flee, avoid; 2. fug-, 3. fu-
gito-.
fugient(i)-. fleeing. fujritlvo-, fugitive. fulci', prop up ; 2. fuls-, 3. fulto-. fulmen-, 1hund&l«>U. funali-, n. curd; torch. /«(n)rf-, pour ; shed ; rout ; 2. fud-,
3. /ww-.
funditor-. sh'nger. Jung-, discharge (abl); Z.functo-. funesto-, deudly. fur-, c. thief.
fu rcula-. //7-A; ; narrow pas*. Furio-, a Komon clan-name. futuro-, abmtt to be. Gabio-, m. pi. a town of Lotium. Gjilatia-, a country of Asia Minor. Pallia-, Gaul (the country). Gallo-, Gaul (the people).
palllna-, hen.
gaudt-, (semi-dep.) rejoice ; 3. guvl-
so-.
gaudio-, w. joy. gen lino-, twin. genero-, sott-in-law. genes-, race, kind, sort. geut(i)-, / clan; nation. genu-, n. knee. geometria-, gtometry. gtr-, bear ; carry on ; 2. gess-, 3.
get>to-.
Germiino-, German, gesta-, carry ; 2. geatav-, 2. gestato-. gesto-, carried on ; ptrformtd. gign-, beget; bring forth; 2. genu-,
3. genito-.
gladiator-, gladiator. gladiatorio-, gladiatorial. gladio-, m. sword. gloria-, glory. gnavo-, industrious. gradu-. step. gramen-, grass. grammatica-, grammar. grandi-, great. gratia-, pi. thanks. grato-, plta*ing. gravi-, weiyhty ; serious. graviter, heavily, severely. greg-, m. flock,
Habe-, have, hold; consider; 2. habu-, 3. habi'o-.
hal»ili-, handy; t<uitfible.
habifa-, dwell ; 2. habitav-, 3. hab- itato-.
haere-, stick, cling to ; 2. hoes-, 3. haeso-.
Plamilear-, a Carthaginian general.
Hannibal-, a Cart/taginian gtntrai
hasta-, t=ptar.
haud, not.
hauri-, draw (water, &c.); swal- low; 2. haus-, 3. hausto-.
VOCABULARY.
271
Helve I io-, pi. tJw people of Helvetia,
(Switzerland), lie red-, c. heir.
Herennio-, a Samnite general. liibenio, n. pi. winter-quarters. li ic, litre.
liiein-, /. winter] storm, hiema-, pass the winter; 2. hiemdv-,
3. hieniato-.
Hierosoljrmo-, n. pi. Jerusalem. hinc, hence ; on this side ; after
this.
hirundon-,/ swallow. Hispariia-, Spain. ho-, titis; the latter. hodie, to-day. homon-, c. man. horiestat-, honor; character. honesto, honorable. honor-, respect, honor; high office. honoritice, honorably. hora-, hour; time. Horatio-, a Roman clan-name. horto-, m. garden. hospet-, m. stranger. hosti-, c. enemy. hostlli , hostile. Hostllio-, a Roman clan-name. hue, hither. humano-, human, humecia-, moisten; 2. humectdv-,
3. humectdtO'. humero-, m. shoulder. huraili-, low.
/-, go ; 2. IV-, 3. i'o-.
Ibero-, the river Ebro, in Spain.
ibi, thvre.
ic*, strike; ratify; 2. — '• — , 3.
icto-.
ictu-, blow. idoneo-, suitable. i<«;itur, therefore. ignaro-, ignorant.
ignavo-, idle. ig'neo-, fiery. igni-, m.fire. ignora-. be ignorant; 2. igndrav-,
3. ignorato-. ignoration-, ignorance, ignosc-, pardon, (dal.) 2. igndv-, 3.
ignoto-.
illo-, that, yonder; the former. illustri-, illustrious. imbri-, m. shower. imitation-, imitation. immani-, savage, immine-, impend, immortali-, immortal. impatient(i)-, impatient, impcdi-, hinder; 2. impedlv-, 3.
impedlto-.
impedlmento-, pi. baggage, impell-, impel; 2. impul-, 3. im-
pulso-.
impende-, be imminent. impera-, put upon ; command; (dat.)
2. imperav-, 3. imperato-. imperato-, n. command. imperator-, general. imperatorio-, belonging to a general. imperio-, n. supreme authority ; em- pire.
impetu-, attack, impon-, place upon ; impose (dat.) ;
2. imposu-, 3. imposito-. imporla-, import; 2. importdv-, 3.
imporldto-. imprim-, impress; 2. impress-, 3.
impresso-. improba-, reject ; 2. improbdv-, 3.
improbdto-. improbo-, wicked. improviso-, unforeseen. itnprudent(i)-, imprudent. impunitat-, impunity. in, into (ace.), in, on (abl.). inani-, empty; useless, incend-, set on tire; 2. — " — , 3.
incenso-.
incendio-, n. conflagration. incerto-, uncertain.
272
VOCABULARY.
inchoa-, begin ; 2. inchodv-, 3. in-
chodto-. incid-, fall in (with); 2. — "— , 3.
incaso-. incita-, urge on; 2. incitav-, 3. tn-
incitato-,
includ-, shut in; 2. indus-, 3.
/-, dwell in ; 2. incolu-. incola-, inhabitant. incolumi-, *o/e. incoramodo-, w. Zo.<?.5. incredibili-, incredible. inde, thence. indlc-, declare; 2. tncfac-, 3. «n-
dicto-. indica-, disclose ; 2. indicav-, 3. tV
in dies, daily.
indue-, lead in, introduce ; 2. t'n-
dwa>, 3. inducto-. industria-, activity. inermi-, unarmed. infanii-, infamous. infant(i)-, infant. infecto-, unfinished. infer-, bring in ; 2. intul-, 3. ittato-. inferior-, lower. inferno-, low, infernal. infesta-, infest; 2. infestdv-, 3. in-
festdto-.
infesto-, hostile. infideli-, faithless. infimo-, lowest. infinito-, immense. inf inlto-, n. immense quantity. infring-, break; enfeeble; 2. in-
freg-, 3. infracto-. ingenio-, n. character. ingent(i)-, huge.
ingenuo-, free-horn ; honorable. inyrtd(i)-, enter ; advance ; 3. in-
gresso-.
ini-, go into ; 2. iriiv-, 3. inito-. iniruico-, hostile; memy. inique, untqually, unjustly. inlquo-, unequal; disadvantageous.
initio-, n. beginning. injuria-, icrong, injury. injusto-, unjust. innocent(i)-, harmless. inopia-, want, indigence, insequ-, follow upon ; 3. insecuto-. insidia-, pi. amlnt^h; plots. insigni-, distinguished. insipiept(i)-, unwise. insolent(i)-, arrogant. insolenter, arrogantly. insomni-, without-deep, sleepless, institu-, resolve ; appoint ; 2. — ''-*-.
3. instituto-. instru-, arrange; contrive; 2. in-
strux-, 3. instructo-. Insubr-, Insubrian.
insula-, island.
de integro, anew.
intellig-, understand; 2. intelkx-,
3. intellecto-. in ten to-, attentive.
inter, (ace.) between, among.
intercip(i}-, intercept; carry off; 2. intercfp-, 3. intercepto-.
interdum, sometimes.
interea. meanwhile.
interl'ectOr-, murderer.
inttrfic(i)-, slay; 2. interfec-, 3. in- terfecto-.
interim, meanwhile.
interim-, destroy ; 2. interim,-, 3. inlerempto-.
interjecto-, interposed.
intermitl-, interrupt, omit; 2. in- termls-, 3. intermisso-.
interneeion-, extermination.
interregno-, n. interregnum.
interroga-, ask; 2. interrogdv-, 3. intcrrogato-.
interveni-, come between, occur ;
2. interval-, 3. intervento-. intra, within (ace.).
intra-, enter; 2. ir<trdv-, 3. intrdto-. intue-, behold ; 3. intuito-. inusitato-, unusual invdd-, go into; invade; 2. invas-,
3. invaso-.
VOCABULARY.
273
inveni-, discover, find; 2. invcn-,
3. invento-. invicern, mutually. invlso-, hated. ipwo-, self, very. Ira-, anger. Irato-, angry, irride-, laugh at; 2. irrls-, 3. irrl-
so-.
isto-, #totf (near you). ka, £7iws. so. Italia-, Itnly. Italico-, Italian (adj ). Italo-, Italian, (noun), itaque, therefore. itiner-, n. road, march, n. and a. 5.
iter. iterutn, a second time.
Jure-, lie; l.jacu-, B.jacito-. jac(i)-, tli row; 2.jfc-, S.jacto-. jacula-, hurl; B.jaculato-. jam, now. Janiculo-, n. a hill on the west side
of Rome. j~juno-, hungry.
joi-o-, m. (also n. in pi.) joke, jest. Jov-, Jupiter, n. s. Jupiter. jube-, hid; 2.juw-,3.jusso-. jucundo-, pleasant. Judaea-., Judea. j udec-, jury-man ; judge, judica-, judge; Z.judicav-, 3. judi-
cato-.
judicio-, n. judgment. jugo-, n. yoke.
Jugurtha-, a king of Numidia. j amen to-, beast of burden, jung-, join, unite; Z.junoc-, 3.junc-
to-.
JQiiio-. a Roman clan-name. junior-, younger.
jiira-, swear; 2.jurav-, S.jurato-. jus-, n. right, laio. jussu, by order. justo-, just, upright. «
juva-, aid; 2.juv-, B.juto-. juveni-. young ; a youth. Juvencio-, a Roman general. juxta, near to (ace.) equally.
L. short for Lucio-.
lab-, slip, fall; 3. lapse-.
Labieno-, one of Caesar's officers.
labor-, labor.
labora-, labor; be afflicted; 2.
labdrav-, 3. labordto-. Lacedaemonio-, Lacedaemonian. lacryma-, tear. lact-, n. milk. lacu-, m. lake. laeto-, joyful. lapid-, in. stone. largiter, in abundance. late, widely. lates-, side.
La tine, in a Latin way. Latino-, Latin; Latinus. La tin-, n.part of Italy. latitudon-, breadth. lato-, broad. latratu-, a barking. latron-, robber. land-, /. praise, lauda-, praise; 2. laudav-, 3. lau-
ddto-
laudabili-, praiseworthy. Lavlnia-, a woman's name. Lavinio-, n. a town of Lalium. leg-, /. law ; condition, leg-, gather; select; read; 2. leg-,
3. lecto-.
legation-, embassy. legato-, lieutenant; ambassador. legion-, legion. legionario-, legionary. lepos-, m. worn. s. lepus, hare. letali-, deadly. levi-, light; insignificant. libenter, willingly, llbera-, set free; 2. llberdv-, 3. H-
berato-.
274
VOCABULARY.
libere, freely.
libero-, free.
libero-, TO pi. children.
llbertat-. liberty.
libro-, m. book.
lice-, be allowed ; (impers.) 2. lieu-,
3. lidto-. ligneo-, of wood. Lijjus-. Ligurian. Lilyhaeo-. «. Hie western promontory
of Sicily. limen-, threshold Lingon-, pi. a Gallic tribe. lingua-, tongue. lintri-,/ wherry. literario-. literary. litera-, ;*/. a letter; literature. lit os-, shore. loca-, give out a contract for: 2.
locav-, 3. locato-. loco-, m. (also n. in pi.) place ; sta-
tion.
longe,/ar. longo-, long. lorlca-, breast-plate. luc-,/. 1/0M.
Lucio-. a Roman first name. Lucretia-, o ivoma^s name. Lucullo-, a Roman general. liido-, w. ^aw« ; school. liige-, mourn ; 2. lux-, 3. lumen-, Z/^/<<. lupa-, she-wolf.
luscinia-, nightingale. Lusitania-, Portugal lustra-, review; 2. luslrdv-, 3. lus-
trato-. Lutatio-, a Roman dan-name.
>1. short for Marco-.
Macedonia-, a country north of
Greece.
Macedonia)-, Macedonian. maeror-, sorrow. maesto-, sorrowful. magis, more.
-, master.
magistratu-, magistrate.
Magnesia-, a city of Asia Minor.
magnifier*-, magnificent.
magnitudon-, grtatntss.
magno-, great.
magnopere, exceedingly.
major-, greater.
major-, m. pi. ancestors.
maledico-, scurrilous.
malo-, bad.
malo-, n. an evil.
man da-, enjoin (dat.) ; 2. mandav-, 3. manduto-.
mandato-. n, direction.
mane, in the morning.
inane-, remain ; 2. mans-, 3. man- so-.
Man Ho-, a Roman clan-name.
manu-, /. hand; band.
inanitmitt-, emancipate ; 2. manu- mis-, H. manumitmo-.
Ma reel lo-, a Roman family name.
Marco-, a Roman first name.
mari-, n. sta.
Mario-, a Roman dan-name.
maritima-, maritime.
marito- husband.
Marso-, « mountain-tribe of Italy.
Mart-, Mars, god of war. ' materia-, timber.
matr-, mother.
matrimonio-, n. marriage.
mairona-, matron.
maiura-, hasten; 2. maturav-, 3. mdturato-.
mature, speedily.
maturo-. ripe; speedy.
medico-, m. physician.
medio, middle.
Meld.v, pi. Vie Meldi.
melior-, better.
mell-, n. honey.
membra-, n. limb.
memor-, mindful.
memora-, mention ; 2. memorav-, 3. memorato-.
memorabili-, memorable.
VOCABULARY.
275
memona-, memory.
mendlco-, m. beggar.
Menenio-, a Roman clan-name, is
mensi-, m. month.
nient,(i)-, /. mind.
mention-, mention.
mercator-, merchant.
mere-, earn ; (act. and dep.) 2. me-
ru-, 3. merito-.
merg-. sink ; 2. mers-, 3. merso-. merldiano-, in mid-day. merito-, n. merit; kindness. messi-, /. harvest met.i-. measure; 3. m,enso-. Metio-, an Alban general, metu-, fear ; 2. — "— , 3. metuto-. metu-, fear, migra-, depart ; 2. migrdv-, 3. mi-
ijrdto-.
mllet-, soldier, inilita-, serve as a soldier ; 2. mlli-
tdv-, 3. militdto-. militari-, military. militia-, military service. mille(indecl.) thousand, milli-, n.pl.
thousands.
milliario-, n. milestone. v<ina-, threaten (dat.) ; 3. min&to-. mi.iistro-, m. servant. minor-, less, smaller, minus, less, minu-, lessen ; 2. — " — , 3. minu-
to-.
mlra-, admire ; 3. mlrdto-. mlrabili-, admirable. miro-, wonderful, misce-. mix ; 2. miscu-, 3. mixto-. rnistra-, deplore ; 3. miseralo-. misere-, pity ; (act. and dtp. also
impers.) 2. miseru-, 3. miserito-. misero-, wretched. Mitliridati-, king of Pontus. n. s.
— tes. miti-, mild.
mii(t)-, send ; 2. mis-, 3. misso-. moderftto-, in due measure. modio-, m. a measure; peck. modo, at one time — at another. moeui-, n. pi. walls.
moeror-, sorrow.
molli-, flexible ; tender.
molli-, make mild; 2. molllv-, 3.
molllto-. mone-, warn, advise; 2. monu-, 3.
monito- monstra-, show; 2. monstrav-, 3.
monstrato-.
mont(i)-, m. mountain, mora-, delay; 3. moralo-. mora-, delay. rnorbo-, m. disease. mor(i)-, die; 3. mortuo-, morde-, bite ; annoy ; 2. momord-,
3 morso-.
Morino-, pi. a Gallic tribe. mort(i)-, / death. mortali-, mortal. mortuo-j dead. mos-, m. custom. Mosa-, the river Meuse. move-, move ; 2. mdv-, 3. moto-. mox, soon,
Mucio-, a Roman clan-name. muliebri-, womanish. mulier-, woman, multa-, punish ; fine ; 2. multdv-,
3. multato-.
multitudon-, multitude. multo-, much; many. multo, by much. Mummio-, a Roman general. munes-, gift, muni-, fortify; 2. munlv-, 3. munl-
to-.
munifieo-, bountiful. munition-, fortification. m unlto-, fortified. murmur-, n. a murmuring. muro-, m. wall, muta-, change ; 2. mutav-, 3. mu-
tato-.
Nabi-, (also Nabld-) tyrant of Sparta.
2T6
VOCABULARY.
nam. for.
nancisc; get; find; 3. nacto-.
narra-, tell ; 2. narrav-, 3. narra- te-.
narration-, narrative.
nnsc-, be born ; 3. note-.
nation-, nation.
natu, in birth.
natura-, nature.
nauta-, sailor.
navali-, naval.
navi-, /. ski}).
navicula-, 600*.
navigation-, voyage.
ne, lest, that — not.
nee, neither, nor.
necessario-, necessary.
neeesse, necessary.
neeessitat-, necessity.
nega-. deny, refuse; 2. negav-, 3. negate-.
negotio-, n. affair, business.
ntmon-, iio one.
nemos-, grove.
nepot-, grandson.
Neptuno-, Neptune, god of the sea.
neque, neither, nor.
Nicomedi-, king of Bitiiynia, n. s. — des.
Digro-, black.
nihil, notiiing.
Kilo-, the river Nile.
nimium, too much.
nisi, unless.
niv-, /. nom. s. nix, snow.
nobili-, noble.
nobilitat-, nobility.
noce-, harm (dot.}; 2. nocu-, 3. no- cito-.
noct(i)-, /. night
noctu, by night.
nocturno-, nightly.
nolr, be unwilling; 2. ntlu-.
nomen-, name.
nomina-, name; 2. noininav-, 3. nominate-.
non, not.
Honagesimo-, ninetieth.
uondnm, not yet
nonnullo-, some.
nono-, ninth.
nostro-, our.
nota-, note ; observe ; 2. notdv-, 3.
notato-. noto-. knotcn. novem, nine. novissimo-, rearmost novo-, new. nub-, veil ; marry (a husband) (dat.) ;
2. nups-, 3. nupta-. nnllo-, none.
Kuma-, the second king of Eome. Kumantia-, a city in Spuin. Numantino-, pL the people of Nu-
mantia.
numen-, divinity. numero-, m. 'number. Kumitor-, Numiter. Knmida-, Numidian. Kuuiidia-, Numidia. nunc, now. nuncupa-, name ; 2. nuncupdv-, 3.
nuncupdto-. nunquam, never, nuntia-, report ; 2. nuntiav-, 3. nun-
tiote-.
nuntio-, 77i. messenger; message. nuper, lately, nutri-, nourish; 2. nutrlv-, 3. 720-
trite-.
nutric-, nurse. nympha-, nymph.
Ob, on account of (ace.).
obidi-, obey (dat) ; 2. obcdlv-, 3
obedlte-.
obedient(i)-. obedient, obequita-, ride towards ; 2. obequi-
tav-, 3. obequitato-. obi-, go towards; encounter; die;
2. oblv; 3. obite-. obliga-, bind down ; oblige ; 2. 06-
ligav; 3. obligate-.
VOCABULARY.
oUlvisc-, forget ; (gen.) 3. dbllto-.
oblito-, forgttfal.
oblivion-, forget fulness.
obru-, overwhelm ; 2. — " — , 3. ob-
ruto-. » obsecra-, beseech; 2. obsecrdv-, 3.
obsecrdto-. obsed-, c hostage, obside-, blockade; 2. obscd-, 3. ob-
sesso-.
obsidion-, siege. oUempera-, comply with (dat.) ; 2.
obtemperdv-, 3. obten>perdto-. obtesta-, conjure; 3. oblesldto-. oblitie-, retain ; gain ; prevail ; 2.
obtinu-, 3. obttnlo-. obviam, in the way. occasion-, Jit occasion, occlil-, kill ; 2. — " — , 3. occlso-. occulta-, conceal ; 2. occultdv-, 3.
oixultato-. occulte, s-crdly. occupa-, seize ; take possession of;
2. occupav-, 3. occupato-. occur-, run to meet, meet (dat.)]
2. — " — , oroccucurr-, 3. occurso-. oceano-, m. ocean. Octaviano-, the first Roman em~
peror.
octavo-, eighth. oc tin gen to-, eight hundred. octo, eight. octoginta, eighty. octogesimo-, eightieth. oculo-, m. eye. 2. 6d-, hate, odio-, n. hatred.
o/er-, offer ; 2. obtul-, 3. oblato-. officio-. n. duty.
olim, in yonder time; formerly. omen-, omen, omitt-, leave off; 2. omls-, 3. omis-
so-.
omni-, all. omnlno, wholly. onerario-, fit for burden. ones-, burden.
op-, /. power ; in plur. wealth. 24
opes-, work.
opinion-, opinion.
oppidano-, townsman.
oppido-, n. town.
oppon-, set against (dat.) ; 2. op-
posu-, 3. opposite-. opportuno-, opportune, suitable. opprim-. overwhelm; 2. oppress-,
3. oppr&iso-. oppugna-, assault ; 2. oppugnav-,
3. oppugnato-. oppugnation-, storming. opta-, desire ; 2. optav-, 3. optdto-. optimo-, best. option-, choice. ora-, coast.
ora-, pray ; 2. orav-, 3. ordto-. oration-, speech. orator-, orator. orbi-, m. world. ordina-j arrange; 2. ordinav~, 3.
ordon-, m. row, rank.
Orgetorig-, a Helvetian chief.
ori-, arise; 3. orto-.
Orient-, m. the East.
orna-, adorn ; 2. ornav-. 3. ornate-.
ornarnento-, ornament.
ostend-, point out, show ; 2. — " — ,
3. ostenso- or ostento-. Ostia-, ajpwn at the mouth of the
Tiber.
ostio-, n. entrance; mouth. otioso-, disengaged, idle. 6vi-, /. sheep. ovlli-, n. sheepfold. ovo-, n. egg.
P. short for Public-.
pfibulo-, n. fodder.
pac-, /. peace.
Pado-, the river Po.
paene, almost.
paenula-, cloak.
pago-, m. canton, district.
pani-, m. bread.
Paplrio-, a Roman clan-name.
278
VOCABULARY.
para-, prepare; provide; l.parav-,
'2. paratit-.
para to-, prepared, ready. pure-, spare (<&//.); 2. peperc-, 3.
parcitn- or parso-. pare-, obey (dat.) ; 2. paru-, 3. pdr-
ito-.
parent(i)-, parent. P'ir(i)-, bring forth ; 2. peper-, 3.
pariet-,m.w;aK(of a house), nom. s.
part(i)-, /. port ; side ; pi party.
partim, partly.
parutnper, a little while.
parvo-, little.
passim, in various places.
passu-, puce.
pastor-, .shepherd.
pate-, be open, be plain ; 2. pa~
tu-. paltfac(i)- throw open ; Z.palefic-,
3. ptitejat-to-. paterno-, fatherly. pu t( i )-, su ft'e r ; 3 . passo-. pair-, fatittr; senator. patria-, native country. patriinonio-, n. patrimony. patrueli-, in. cousin. paucitat-, fewness. PJIUCO-, few. pauliliiin, by degrees. paulo-, n. a little. ' pauper-, poor. paupertat-, poverty. pavor-. panic. pecutiia-, sum of money. peeos-, small cuttle. ped-, m. nom. .s. pes, foot. pedi*t-, foot'Snldier. peditatu-, infantry. Ptliirtio-, pi a tribe in Italy. pdl-, push ; drive ; Z.pepul-, 3. pul-
SO-.
pelli-./. skin.
ptllic(i)-, allure ; 2. pellex-, 3. pel-
lecto-. Peloponneso-, the Morea.
pend-, weigh ; pay ; 2. pepend-,
3. penso-. penetra-, penetrate ; 2. penetrav-,
3. ptndrdto-. pe 1 1 i t u s, th orough ly. per. through (ace.). perug-, rany through, complete;
2. pcreg-, 3. peiacttt-. percurr-, run through; 2 — " — ,
or perrucurr-, 3. ptrcurso-. percussor-, assassin. percut(i)-, strike ; 2. percuss-, 3.
pen/not*-. pent-, destroy; lose; 2. perdid-,
3. perdito-.
peiduc-, lead through ; 2. perdux-,
3. perducto-. perenni-, constant. pcrfer-, endure ; 2. pertul-, 3. per-
lato-. perfic(i)-t finish , 2. perfec-, 3. per-
fecto-.
perri»l:a-, treachery. perluga-, deserter. perg-, go on ; Z.perrex-, 3. perrec-
to-. perhorresc-, fear greatly; 2.
peri-, perish ; 2. periv-, 3.
to-.
periculo-, n. danger. perlculoso-, dangerous. peritia-, skitt. peri to-, skilled. permane-, remain; 2. permans-, 3.
ptrmauso-. permisct-, mix together; 2. per-
misf.u-, 3. permixto-, permiit-, permit ; give up; 2. per-
mis-, 3. pemnisto-. permoto-, alarmed. permove-, prevail upon ; alarm : 2
permov-, 3. pernioto-. permuta-, exchange ; 2. permutdv ,
3. permiitdto. permutation- change. pernicie-, destruction. pernicioso-, destructive.
VOCABULARY.
279
perrump-, burst through ; 2. per-
rup-, 3. perrupto-. Perseo-, a king of Macedonia. persequ-, pursue ; 3. persecute-. perspic(i)-, observe thoroughly; 2.
perspex-. 3. perspecto-. persuade-, persuade (dal.) ; 2. per-
6-was-, 3. persadso-. perlerre-, alarm ; 2. perterru-, 3.
perterrito-, alarmed.
pertimesc-, fear greatly; Z.pertimu-.
pertiniieia-, obstinacy.
pertarba-, disturb ; 2. perlurbdv-,
3. perturbdior. perveni-, reach ; 2. perven-, 3. jper-
2>e£-, go to : seek ; beg ; 2. petlv-,
S.petito-.
Phar.salo-, /. a city in Thessaly. Phitippo-, a king of Macedonia. Philip DO-, m. pi. a city of Mace-
donia.
philos'iphia-, philosophy. pbtluHOpho*, m. philosopher. Pieeuo-. n. Picenum, a part of Italy. I'Icent(i)-, pi. the people of Picenum. pit- Uil-, piety. pigro-, slothful. plleo-, m. cap. p;lo-, n. javelin.
ping-, paint; 2. pinx-, S.picto-. plrilta-, pirate. piscator-, fisherman. pldca-, „ appease ; subdue ; 2. pld-
cdv-, 3. piacdto-. place-, please (dat.)', be deter-
mined ; 2. placu-, 3. placilo-. plaeido-, calm, peaceful. pleb-, /. the common people. plero-que, pi. most men. piGruiuque, generally. plurimo-, very many. plus-, more ; several. poena-, punishment. Poeno-, Carthaginian. poeta-, poet. •yoii-, polish ; 2. pollv-, 3. pollto-.
pollice-, promise ; 3. pollicito-.
pom pa-, procession.
Pompeio-, a Roman general.
pdn-, place ; 2. posy-, 3. posito-.
pondes-, weight', importance.
pont(i)-, TO. bridge.
Poiitio-, a Samuite general.
Poii to-, m. a country of Asia Minor.
popida-, lay waste ; 3. populato-.
populo-, m. people.
Porsena-, a king of Etruria.
porta-, gate.
porta-, carry ; 2. portdv-, 3. por-
tdto-. portend-, foretell ; 2. — " — , 3. por-
tento-.
portu-, harbor, pose-, demand; 2. poposc-. posside-, possess ; Z.possed-, B.pos-
post, after, behind, (ace.)
postea, afterwards.
posthabe-. esteem less; 2.posthabu-t
3. posthabito-. post-qua in, after that. postero , next. postero-, m. pi. posterity. po.streuio-, last. po*tuli-, demand; 2. postuldv-, 3.
postulate-.
Postumio-, a Roman clan-name, potes-, be able ; 2. potu-. potent(i)-, powerful. potestat-, power, poti-, become master of, (gen. or
aid,}; 3. potito-. potius, rattier. potissimum. chiefly. prae, before (abl.). praeacuto-, pointed at one end. praebe-, oiler; furnish; exhibit; 2.
praebu-, 3. praebito-. praeced-, go before ; 2. praecess-,
3. praecesso-.
praecepto-, n. instruction. praeceptor-, teacher. praecip(i)-, teach; command; 2,
praecep-, 3. praecepto-.
280
VOCABULARY.
praecipita-, cast headlong ; Z.prae-
cijiitdv-, 3. praecipitato-. praecipuo-, especial, chief. praeclare, exctttentty. praeda-, booty. praedica-, declare aloud ; 2. prae-
dicav-, 3. praedicato-. praees-, be over (dat.) ; 2. praefu-. praetecto-, commander. praejtr-, bear iu front; prefer; 2.
praetul; 3. praelato-. pntejic(<)~, 'place over (dot.)] 2.
prarftc-, 3. pratfecto-. praemio-, n. reward. praemitt-, send before; 2. proe-
witA--, 3. praem.is.~o-. praeparation-, preparation. pruepdn-, place over (dat.)- 2.
pruepoGu-, 3. praepositu-. praernpto-, abrupt. praesidio-, n. protection ; garrison ;
fort. prae*ta-, show ; furnish ; 2. prae-
atit-, 3. pruestito-. praesiaut(i)-, excellent praeier, beyond, bcsule (ace.). praeteri-, jiass by; 2. praetetiv-, 3.
pro, before, instead of, on account
praeterquam, except. praetor-, praetor, judge. praetGrio-, of praetorian rank. praevide-, see beforehand; 2. prae-
vld-, 3. praeviao-. prato-, ». meadow. pravo-, depraved. pi-ec-, / j»-«yer. prem-, press; 2. press-, 3. jpres-
so-.
pretio-, n. price. pretioso-, valuable, primo-, first. primum, firstly.
quain piiminii, as soon aspossibk. princep-, chief. pri nci patu-,yirs^ place. prius, btfore. priusquam, sooner than. privalo-, private.
probe, icelL
probiiat-, if tegrity.
probo-, upright.
procid-, go forward ; 2. process-. 3.
proclivi-, prone.
proconsul-, proconsul.
procul, atadistunce.
prdcura-, attend to ; 2. procuruv-,
3 procurdto-. prod-, give up, betray; 2. prddid-,
3. prodtto-. prOiks-, be profitable to (oZa/.) ; 2.
prodi-, go forward ; 2. prodlv-, 3.
prodigio-, n. prodigy.
proditor-, traitor.
produc-, lead forth ; 2. produx-, 3.
proelio-, n. battle.
prqficisc-, set out, march ; 3. pro-
jecto-.
profug(i)-, flee away ; 2. prof fig-. p)ogred(i)-, go forward, advai.ce;
3. progre*$o-. prohibe-, keep off; check; 2. pro-
hibu-, 3. prohibito-. proli-,/. no/u. 5. proles, offspring.
promise ; 2. prOims-, 3.
promontorio-, n. headland. propaga-, propagate; extend; 2.
propayav-, 3. propagato-. propera-, hasten; 2. properav-, 3.
propon-, set forth, propose ; 2.
posu-, 3. prdposdo-. propter, n^-ar; o/i account of (ace.). proscrlb- proscribe ; 3. proacrips-,
3. proficripto-. prostqu-, pursue, follow ; 3. prose-
cuto-.
prospere, prosperously. prot<pic(i)-, provide for (dat.) ; 2.
prospex-, 3. prospecto-.
VOCABULARY.
281
protrah-, protract, defer; 2. pro-
trax-j 3. protracto-. provincia-, province, provoca-, challenge ; 2. prdvocav-,
3. provocato-. provocation-, a challenge. proximo-, nearest, next. prudent(i)- prudent. prudenter, prudently. prudentia-, prudence. publico-, public. Publicola-, a man's name. prop.
people's friend. Publio-, a Roman first name, pude- (impers.), cause shame ; 2.
pudu-, 3. pudito-. pueila-, girl. puerlli-, boyish. puerltia-, boyhood. puero-, boy. pugna-, battle, pugna-, fight ; 2. pugnav-, 3. pug-
nato.
pulcre, beautifully. pulcro-, beautiful, puni-, punish ; 2. pumv-, 3. puni-
to-.
Punico-, Carthaginian. pupillo-, a ward, pula-, suppose; 2. putav-, S.puid-
to-.
Pj'dna-, a city in Macedonia. Pyrenaeo-, m. pi. the Pyrenees. Pyrrho-, a king of Epirus.
Q. short for Quinto-. quadraj?esimo-, fortieth. quadraginta. forty.
quatr-, seek ; 2. quaesiv-, 3. quae-
slto-.
quaestor-, quaestor. quali-, of what kind, as. quam, how; as; than. quamdiu, oniony as. quanquam, although. 24*
quanto-. how great; as.
quare, wherefore.
quarto-, fourth.
quasi, as if.
quat(i)-. shake; 2. none; 3. quas-
so-.
quatuor, four. .
quiituordeciin, fourteen. que (enclit.), and. quer-, complain ; 3. questo~. quia, because. quidern, indeed. quiet-, / rest. quit-to-, quiet.
Quinctio-, a Roman clan-name. quindecim, fifteen. quing-entesiino-, five-hundredth. quiugento-, five hundred. quinquagesimo-, fiftieth. quinquaginta, fifty. quinque, five, quiuto-, fifth.
Quinto-. a Roman first name. quinto, for the fifth time. Quirit(i)-, m. Roman. quo, whither ; by how much. quo-, who, what. quocumque, whithersoever. quod, because. quo-dam, certain; some. quo-nam, who? which f quo-quam, any single one. quomodo, how. quondam, formerly. quo-que, each. quoque, also. quot, how many. quotannls, every year. quotldie, daily. quum, when; since.
Eamo-, m. bough.
rap(i)-, seize ; 2. rapu-, 3. rapto-.
rapido-, rapid.
raptim, hastily.
282 VOCABULARY.
raptor-, robber. reliquo-, remaining. rati-,/ boat. remans; remain behind; 2. re- re-, thing, circumstance; event. mans; 3. renianso-. rebella-, renew war; 2. rtbdldv-. Bemo-, brother of Ruin ulus.
3. rtbellatu-. lU-mo-, pi. a people of Gaul.
recta4-, retire; 2. recess-, 3. recesso-. re mo-, in. oar.
recent(i)-, recent, fresh, reviove-, remove; 2. remov; 3. re-
receptu-, retreat, molo-.
rtdp(i) , Uike back ; betake ; re- rtnwu; renew ; 2. renovdv-, 3. re- ceive ; 2. recfp-, 3. receplo-. novdto-. recogiiosf; call to niiud; 2. recog- renuntia-, bring word back; 2. ?-g-
iidV; 3. re&ignito-. iiuntidv-, 3. reiiuntinto-.
recrea-, refresh ; 2. recredv; 3. r«- rcpara-, repair, retit; renew; 2.
credto-. repardv-, 3. reparato-.
recte, rightly. repell-, thrust back ; 2. repwZ-, 3.
redd-, give back; render; 2. red- repulso-.
did-, 3. reddUo-. repente, suddeitly.
red-; return; 3. redlv-, 3. redito-. repentlno-, sudden,
redig-, reduce ; 2. redeg; 3. redac- replt; till ; 2. rtpltv-, 3. replcfo-.
to-. repon-, put back ; 2. repoau-, 3. re-
redim,; buy back; 2. redem-, 3. pfisito-.
redempto-. reporta-, carry back ; 2. reportuv-,
reduc-, lead back ; 2. redux-, 3. re- 3. reportdto-.
ducto-. repose-, demand back.
refer-, bring back ; requite ; re- re- pnblica , the state.
port; 2 retul-, 3. rdutv-. rrpudia-, divorce; 2. repudidv-, 3.
reji>(i); repair; 2. re/iec-, 3. re/e* repudiate-.
to-. repulso-, driven back,
reflu-. flow back ; 2. reflux-, 3. re- rtsarci-, mend ; 2. none, 3. resar-
fluxo-. to-.
refug(i); flee back ; 2. reffig-. rescind-, break down ; 2. rescid;
rtg-, rule ; 2. 7'ea>, 3. recto-. 3. rtsciw-.
reg-, A-?W^. resist-, stand -etill ; resist (dat.)\ 2.
reglna-, <^»ie^n. re*tit-, 3. restito-.
regio-, 7<n/oZ. resjionde-, answer (cto£); 2. ras-
region-, country; district. pond-. 3. r*sponso-.
regna-, reign ; 2. reynuv-, 3. re^n5- response-, n. answer.
to-. rtttitu; restore ; 2. — " — , 3. resti-
regno-, n. kingdom ; reign. tuto-.
rtgrtd(i)-, stop back ; retire ; 3. re- reli-. net.
grrssv-. rtliiic; hold back, keep ; 2. retinu-,
Eegulo-. a Roman general 3. reteato-
rejic(i}-, throw back ; 2. rejec-, 3. reveni-, come back ; 2. revin-, 3.
rrjecto-. rtvento-.
religion-, religion. reverentia-, reverence,
relinqu; leave behind; 2. reZl^w-, rtvert-, return; 2. — "— , 3. rever-
3. relicto-. so-.
reliquia-, pi. remnant. Rheuo-, Rhine.
VOCABULARY.
283
Rhodano-, Rhone.
ripa-, bank.
robor-, n. oak; strength.
roga-, ask ; 2. roguv-, 3. rogaio-.
Roma-, Rome.
Romano-, Roman.
Roinulo, the founder of Rome.
ru(m,)p-, burst; break; 2. rup-, 3.
rujito-. ru-, rush ; 2. — " — , 3. ruito-, or
ruto-.
rursus, again, rus-, n. the country. rustico, rural.
Sabino-, pi. an Italian tribe.
sacerdot-, c. priest.
sacro-, n. sacrifice.
saepe, often.
saevi-, act cruelly; 2. saevlv-, 3.
saevlto-.
saevo-, cruel, savage. sagiitario-, archer. Saguntlno-, pi. the people of Sa-
gim um.
Sati'iinto-, n. a town in Spain. Balut-. safety, salata-, pay one's respects to; 2.
salatdv-, 3. salatdto-. Samult(i)-, pi. an Italian tribe. sane, in truth.
sanguin-. m. nom.s. sanguis, blood. sano-, sound
sap(i)~, be wise ; 2. saplv-. sapient(i)- wixe.
Sardinia-, the island of Sardinia. salellet-, r. life-guard. satis, enough. S.'itunio-, a heaihen gnd. saucio-, wounded; damaged. saxo-, n. rock. Scaevola-, a man's name. prop.
kft-Jt anded. scelerdto-, polluted, sceles-, crime. Bcelesto- vicious.
schola-, school.
set-, know; 2. sew-, 3. sclto-.
scieti t ia-, knowledge.
ScTpioti-, a Roman family name.
scrlb-, write ; 2. scrips-, 3. scripto-.
scrlba-, m. secretary.
sciito-, n. shield.
se-. him (her, if) sdf, themselves.
seced-, withdi'aw ; 2. secess-, 3. se-
cesso-.
secuudo-, second; favorable. seil. but.
sede-, sit ; 2. sed-, 3. sesso-. sedecim, sixteen.
sedi-,/. nom. s. sedes, seat; home. sedlli-, n. seat. sedition-, insurrection. Seleucia-, a city of Syria. semper, always. sen-, nom. s. seriex, old man. Sena-, a town in the N. E. of Italy. senator-, senator. senatu-, sewite. senectut-, old age. senrentia-, opinion. senti-, feel; perceive; 2. sens-, 3.
separatini, separately.
svpdi-, bury ; 2. sepellv-, 3. sepulto-.
septein. seven.
septimo-, seventh.
septingentesimo-, seven hundredth.
septuagesimo-, seventieth.
septuagiuta, seventy.
se>iu-, follow; 3. secuto-.
Sjquar:o-, pi. a Gallic tribe.
sermon-, discourse.
Sertono-, a Roman commander.
serva-, keep ; 2. servav-, 3. serva-
to-. servi-, be a slave; 2. servlv-, 3.
sei'vlto-.
Servio-, the sixth king of Rome. servitut-, slavery. servo-, m. slave.
sese, a strengthened form o/se, ace. sex, six. sexagesimo-, sixtieth.
284
VOCABULARY.
sexaginta, sixty. sexeentesimo-, six hundredth,
sexto-, sixth.
Si, iff.
sic, so, thus.
5icm-, dry up; 2. siccav-, 3. siccdto-.
sicc<>-, rfry.
Sicilia-, Sicily.
Siculo, Sicilian.
8\c.ml.ju>it as.
significa-, intimate ; 2. significav-,
3. siynificato-. signo-, ?i. 5/y/i; standard. silva-, tt'ood. siniiii-. ZiA*:. similitudon-, likeness. siuiul, ai tf«e sa/?<e time. siinulac, a* soon as. sine, without (abl.). singular!-, 6t«^fe ; extraordinary. sinistro-, on the. left hand', unlucky. Siren-, f Siren, n. s. Siren. siti-, be thirsty ; 2. sifiv-, 3. sitlto-. socero-, fatlier-in-law. social i-, social. societal-, alliance. socio-, ally. sol-, ra. Me sun. swfe-, (semi-dep.), be accustomed;
3. 5^/iYo-. solo-, alone. solum, only, solv-, loose ; set sail ; 2. — " — , 3.
soluto-.
somnio-, n. dream. sono-, m. sound.
soror-, sister. [name.
Sp. s/i0r//0rSpurio-, a Roman first spalio-, n. space; course. spe-, h»pe.
spet-ie-, view ; appearance, specta-, l>e a spectator of; 2. spec-
tdv-, Z.spectatu-. speluuea-, cave.
spera-, hope ; 2. sperav-, 3. sperato-. spcrn-, despise; 2. sprev-, 3. spreto-. spolia , plunder ; 2. spolidv-, 3.
spolio-, n.
spotidr.-, engafre, promise; 2. spo-
pond-^ 3. sponso-.
sta-, stand; cost; 2. sfeJ-, 3. stato-. statim, immediately. station-, outpost, guard. statu-, set up ; resolve ; 2. — " — ,
3. slatiiio-. statua-, statue. sterili-. barren. stern-, strew, spread ; 2. strav-, 3.
strato-.
stipet-, m. s'ake, pole. stipendio-, n. pay for service. strangula-, strangle ; 2. stranguldv-,
3. ttrangulato-. strenue, actively. strenuo-, active. strepitu-, noise. stride-, roar, creak; 2. strid-. strui-,/. now. s. struts, htap. stude-, be eager; pay attention to
(</•/*.) ; 2. studu-. studio-, n. zeal, study. smite, fontisklg. stulto-, fixilish. . stupefac(i)-, astound; 2. stupefec-,
3. stuprfacbt-. sudde-, advise (dot.)-, 2. suas-, 3.
suavi-. sweet.
sub, under.
subdolo-, crafty.
suiduc-, withdraw; 2. subdux-, 3.
subes-, be near; 2. subfu-.
subi , go under, enter ; 2. sublv-,
3. sulnttt-. subig-, subdue; 2. subcg-, 3. sub-
acto-.
subsidio-, n. succor. sulivetii-, succor (dot.) ; 2. subven-,
3. sulvento: suc-cessor-, successor. suca d-, succeed to (dat.) ; 2. ««>
cess-, 3. successo-. succumb-, give way; 2.
3. succubito-.
VOCABULARY.
285
Sulla-, a Roman general.
sum-, take ; 2. sumps-, 3. sumpto-.
summo-, highest.
guo-. his (her, its, their) own.
super, above, ace. or abl.
superbia-, pride.
superbo-, proud.
superior-, higher; former.
supera-, overcome ; 2, superav-, 3. suptrato-.
supcres-, be above ; remain ; sur- vive (dat.) ; 2. superfu-.
superstition-, superstition.
superveni-, come upon; 2. super- ven-, 3. supervtnto-.
supplicio, n. punishment.
suppdn-, put beneath ; 2. supposu-, 3. suppusito-.
suscip(i)-, undertake ; receive; 2. suscep , 3. suscepto-.
sustiiie-, sustain; 2. sustinu-, 3. suslento-.
Syphac-, a king of Numidia.
Syracusa-, pi. Syracuse.
Syriaeo-, Syrian.
T. short for Tito-, tabula-, plank ; picture. tabulato-, n. floor. talento-, n. talent. tali-, such. tarn, so.
tiimdiu, so long a time. tamen, nevertheless, yet. tandem, at length. ta{n)g-, touch ; 2. tetig-, 3. tacto-. tanto-, so great, so much. tantum, only, tantummodo, only. tarditat-, slowness. Tarent.ino-, of-Tarentum. Tarento-, n. a city in the S. of Italy. Tarptia-, a woman's name. Tarpeio-mout-, the hilt of the Capitol. Tarquiuio-, the name of two Roman kings.
Tauro-, m. a mountain range in
Asia Minor. tecto-, n. roof, teg-, cover; 2. tex-, 3. tecto-. telo-, n. missile. tern ere, rashly.
tempestat-, time; age; storm. templo-, n temple. tempos-, lime, tend-, stretch; 2. tetend-, 3. tento-
or tenso-.
tene-, hold ; 2. tenu-, 3. tento-. tenero-, tender, tenta-, try; examine; 2. tentav-,
3. tentato-. tenui-, thin.
Terentio-, a Roman clan-name. tergo-, n. back. tergos-, hide.
tennino-, m. boundary ; end. terno-, three apiece. terra-, earth; land, terre-, frighten; 2. terru-, 3. terrir
to-.
terrestri-, earthly-. territorio-, n. territory. terror-, fear, alarm. tertio-, third. testamento-, a will. testi-, c. witness.
Tliessalia-, a part of northern Greece. Teutono-, pi. a tribe of Germans. Tiberi-, the river Tiber. tlblcen-, m. flute-player. Tlclno-, the river Ticino. Tigraui-, a king of Armenia, n. *.
-nes.
time-, fear; 2. timu-. timido-, timid. timer-, fear.
Tito-, a Roman first name. toga-, robe, toll-, raise up ; 2. sustul-, 3. subla-
to-.
tona-, thunder; 2. tonu-, 3. tonito-, tonde-, shear ; 2. totond-, 3. tonso-. tonitru-, m. thunder. tormeuto-, military engine.
286
VOCABULARY.
torqui-, c. collar.
tot, so mony.
toto-, whole.
trab-./ beam.
tracta-, treat; 2. tractav-, 3. trac-
tato-. trad-, deliver up; relate; 2. trd-
did-, 3. trdd.to-. trddfic-, lead across; pass; 2 <ra-
rfttZ , 3. tradu-'t-f-. trah-, draw; protract; 2. <r«x-, 3.
trC<jic(i)-, transport; cross; 2. frd-
jfc-, 3. trojecto: trans, across (ace.) transfer-, carry across ; 2. transtul-,
3. tra/tslatO: trantfig-, pierce; 2. transfix-, 3.
transfiijra-. c. deserter. traiifigred(i)-, go across ; 3.
iransi-, go across; 2. tfranslt;-, 3.
transito-. transi'y-, spend, finish ; 2. transeg-,
3. transacto~. trunstti-, leap across ; 2. transilu-,
or Iransillv-.
traiismatino-, beyond sea. tratismitt-, send across; 2. trans-
mis-. 3. transniisso-. tranana-, swim across ; 2. fraw$-
ndu-, 3. Iransnato-. trawpvrta-, cj«rry across; 2. trans-
portdv-, 3. transjxtrtato-. Trasimeno-, w. a /a^e in N. Italy. Trebia-, a river in N. Italy. trecentesimo-, three hundredth. trecenUK three hundred. tredecim, thirteen. trtpida-i l>e alarmed; 2. trepidav-,
3. trepidato-. trepido-, fall of alarm. Troviro-, pi. a Gtrman tribe. tri-, three. tribu-, bestow ; 2. — "— , 3. tribu-
to-. tribuno-, 77i. tribune.
tributo-, n. tribute.
trices! mo-, thirtieth.
triduo-, n. space- of three days.
trijjreiniiio-. thrtt born at a birth.
tri<;iiita, thirty.
trino-, in sets oj tJiree.
triqnetro-, triangular.
tristi-, sad.
triunipha-, triumph ; 2. triumphal)-,
3. ti'iuitiptnlto-. tri urn pi 10-, TO. triumph. Tn ja-, Titty. TrCjano-, Trojan. true-. Ji rce. tue-, look at ; defend ; 3. tuito- or
tilto-.
Tullio-, a. Roman dan-wine. Tullo-, the second king cf Home. turn, then; c<>nj. and also. tuninlo-, mound; toiub. tumultu-, uproar. tiio-, thy, y»ur. turlm.-. confuse, alarm ; 2. turbdv-,
3. turbdto-. turma-, tro»p. turpi-, ugly; disgraceful. turpiter, busdy. turpitudon-, disgrace. turri-. /. tower. Tuscia-, Etruria. Tusculo-, n. a town of Latium. tuto-, sofe. tutor-, guardian. tyrauno-, tyrant.
fiber-, n. breast ; fertility.
ubi, when ; where.
Ubio-, pi. a Gallic tribe.
ubiqne, everywhere.
vl>:isc-, avenpe ; punish ; 3. ulto-.
ullo-, any single.
ulterior-, further.
ultimo-, furthest, last.
ultra, beyond (»cc.).
ultro, beyond; spontaneously.
VOCABULARY.
287
umbroso-, shady.
una, together.
unda-. wave.
unde, whence.
undeciiii, eleven.
xi n de 1 1 Gnajfes i m o, eigh ty-n in th.
undOquinqiiaginta, forty-nine.
uudetiicesimo-, twenty-ninth.
undevicSsimo-, nineteenth.
undique,/rurn (on) all sidts.
ungui-, m. nail, claw, talon.
universe-, whole, all together.
uiio-, one-
unquam, ever.
uib(i)-. /. city ; Rome.
urbario-, belonging to the city.
usque, continually.
ut, as. whan ; in, order that; so that.
utctinque, somehow or other.
ut- help oneself, use (at/.); 3. uso-.
Ctili-. useft.1
uiiliut-, profit.
utrinque. on both sides.
utro-qae. both ; each.
utrum, whether.
uxor-, wife.
Vacuo-, unoccupied.
vado-, n. shoal water.
vaga-, wander about; 3. vagato-.
va>ntu-, wailing, cry.
valde, very much.
Valerio-, a Roman clan-name.
valetudon-, health.
valli-, /. valley.
vallo-, n. (also m.) rampart.
varie, variously.
vario-, various, diverse.
vaata-, lay waste; 2. vastdv-, 3.
vaslato-,
vati-, c. nom. s. vatgs, prophet. veotio:al(i)-, n. tax. vehementer, greatly.
veh-, carry ; 2. vex-, 3. vecto-. Veient(i)-, or Veientauo-, pi. the
people of Veii. vel, either, or. veloc(i)-, swift. veiiatur-, hunter.
vend-, sell ; 2. vendid-, 3. vendito-. veneno-, n. poison. Veneto-, pi. a German tribe, veni-, come; 2. ven , 3. vtnto-. ventr-, m. bdly. vento-, m. wind, verbera-, strike, whip ; 2. verberav-,
3. verberuto. verbo-, n. word. vero-, true.
Verona-, a city of N. Italy, versa-, turn otien; 2. verav-, 3.
versato-. versn-, line*
vert-, turn ; 2. — " — , 3. verso. vesper or vespero-, m. evening. Vesta-, a bealken goddess. Vestali, Vcvtal, consecrated to Vesta. vest!-, /. garment, vesti-, clothe ; 2. vestlv-, 3. vesllto-. vestimento-, clothing. vestfo-, your.
vtta-, forbid ; 2. vetu-, 3. vetito-. vetes , old.
Veturio-, a Roman clan-name. via-, way, road. viator-, traveller. vicesimo-, twentieth. vlco-, m. village. victor-, conqueror. victoria-, victory. victo-, conquered.
vide-, see ; appear ; 2. vld-, 3. vlso-. vige-, flourish ; 2. vigu-. vigilia-, watch. vlginti, twenty, vine-, conquer; prevail; 2, vie-,
3. victo-.
vinci-, bind; 2. vinx-, 3. vincto-. vincto-, bound. viiiculo-, n. bond, chain. viiidec-, c. defender.
288
VOCABULARY.
vindica-, avenge ; proceed against ;
2. vindicav-, 3. vindicate-. vino-, n. wine.
viola-, violate, outrage; 2. violav-,
3. violato-. viridi-, green. virga-, twiy, rod. Yirginio-, a Roman dan-name. virgon-, virgin.
viro-, man.
virtiit-, manliness; virtue.
vis(i)-, /. (irreg.) force; strength; a
large quantity. vita-, life.
vita-, avoid ; 2. vitdv-, 3. vltdto-. vitio-, n. fault^ vice, vlv-, live; 2. vix-t 3. victo-. vivo-, living. vix, scarcely. vOc-, /. vr/tc0.
voca-, call ; 2. vocav-, 3. vocato-. vol-, wish, be willing; 2.
Yol sco-, pi. a Latin tribe.
volucri-, c. bird.
Volunntia-, a woman's name.
voluntat-, will; dioice.
voluptat-, pleasure.
vora-, devour ; 2. vorav-, 3. vorato-.
wlnera-, wound; 2. vulnerav-, 3.
vulnerato-.
vulnerato-, wounded. v u 1 n es-, wound. vultu-, face.
Xanthippo, a Spartan commander,
Zama-, a village of Numidia.
289
CORRIGENDA.
p. 24, line 11 from bottom; for 15 read 16.
p. 47, vocab. ; for deprive read deliver.
p 55, line 4 from bottom; for 206 read 204.
p. L_'3. sent. 7 ot ex 162; /';r quomodo rearf qnomodo.
p. 140, hue 4 of ex. 191 ; for sun-set mu/sun .set.
L;«st line ot ex. 191 ; for in-one-day r^ofl iu-otie day.
p. 143, line 7 from bottom; for 2d and 3d read 1st and 2d.
p. 177, line 12 from top; for ferrerls read femjria.
p. 193, line 6 from cop ; fur uisi read iiisi.
25
290
SYNOPSIS OF THE FOUR
IMPERFECT TENSES.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Active person-endings.
|
Sing. |
riur. |
|||||
|
Conju- |
Yerb- |
Tense- / — |
* x |
t |
—* ^ |
|
|
gation. |
si em. |
stem. 1 |
2 3 |
1 |
2 3 |
|
|
t. |
r i |
a ma-* |
o |
-s t |
-mus |
-tis nt |
|
1 < |
2 |
inone- |
" |
tt ti |
tt |
it it |
|
1 |
I 3 |
audi- reg- |
|
is it |
imu |
itis *4 |
|
r i |
ama- |
aniaba- m |
-s t |
-nws |
-tia nt |
|
|
Sa |
! 2 |
mone- |
iiiom'ba- " |
tt tt |
" |
it |
|
£ |
\ 4 |
audi- |
!iu'lir-i»a- " |
t: tt |
« |
tt tt |
|
I 3 |
reg- |
regeba- " |
it tt |
it |
It it |
|
|
^ |
r i |
ama- |
amab- o |
is it |
imus |
itis unt |
|
at t |
1 2 |
uione- |
innneb- " |
ti (t |
tt it |
|
|
t- • |
I 4 |
audi- |
audie-| m |
-s t |
-mus |
-tis nt |
|
Ph |
I 3 |
reg- |
rege-f ** |
ii U |
u |
|
|
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. |
||||||
|
Active |
person-endings. |
|||||
|
Sing. |
riur. |
|||||
|
Conju- |
Yerb- |
Trmn |
_j^ |
JL |
||
|
gation. |
srem. |
Stem. 1 |
2 |
3 1 |
2 3 |
|
|
g |
r i |
ama- |
ame- m |
-s |
t -mus |
-tis nt |
|
1 |
2 |
mone- |
monea- " |
tt |
U .4 |
44 |
|
8 |
4 |
audi- |
audia- " |
« |
to It |
« |
|
fi |
I 3 |
reg- |
rega- " |
u |
tt ii |
tt |
|
r i |
ama- |
amare- " |
u |
it tt |
tt |
|
|
s |
2 |
mone- |
monere- " |
u |
ti tt |
it |
|
ST |
4 |
audi- |
audlre- " |
u |
it It |
" |
|
. 3 |
reg- |
regere- « |
tt |
u "u |
" |
* A of the stem is lost in tho firs persons sing, before the endings o and or. t The t, of thb t*.-nse-s>teiii is changed to a iu the first person singular, active an,, passive.
201
REGULAR LATIN CONJUGATIONS
Passive person-endings.
Sing.
Plur.
|
1 |
2 |
3 1 |
2 |
3 |
|
or |
-ris or -re |
-tur -mur |
-mini |
ntur |
|
tt |
it |
it tt |
" |
" |
|
« |
it |
tt tt |
« |
untur |
|
" |
eris or ere |
itur imur |
iminl |
u |
|
r |
-ris or -re |
-tur -mur |
•mini |
ntur |
|
it |
tt |
tt t; |
M |
it |
|
(( |
u |
it it |
it |
u |
|
« |
u |
u tt |
" |
K |
|
or |
eris or ere |
itur imur |
imini |
untur |
|
tt |
it |
tt t. |
«' |
»• |
|
r |
•ris or -re |
-tur -mur |
-mini |
ntur |
|
it it |
||||
|
Passive person-endings. |
||||
|
Sing. |
Plur. |
|||
|
1 |
2 |
3 1 |
2 |
3 |
|
r |
-ris or -re |
-tur -mur |
-mini |
ntur |
|
it |
u |
tt it |
it |
" |
|
it |
It |
U (I |
u |
u |
|
it |
« |
tl l( |
it |
" |
|
u |
«i |
(1 It |
it |
K |
|
u |
tt |
u u |
u |
(1 |
|
M |
u |
li it |
a |
U |
|
tt |
u |
U M |
u |
U |
202
SYNOPSIS OF THE FOUR MOOD.
Active person-endinprs.
Sing. Pb/r.
|
gatiuu. si.-m. 2 32 3 ^ C 1 a ma- — * > -It- 2 UK me- — * ' " g ) 4 audi- — * P-i (^ 3 reg- e ite |
||
|
IP lit |
a ma- -to -to -tote moiie- " amli- " reg- ito ito itote |
rto unto |
|
PERFECT TENSES. |
||
|
INDICATIVE MOOD. |
||
|
Active: made from the 2d stem. |
||
|
Tense Siny. Plur. |
||
|
123 12 |
3 |
|
|
PRESENT |
2 amav- I istl it imus istis |
enint or tro |
|
PAST |
" amSvera- m -s t -mus -tis |
nt |
|
FUTURE |
" amaver- o is it imus itis |
int |
|
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. |
||
|
PRESENT |
2 amav- amaveri- m -sf t -musf -tisf |
nt |
|
PAST |
" amavisse- " " " " " |
M |
* The rlfiMi ( — 1 ineins that the s f?n-vi>wi-1 i< ma-lc ]<>n^.
t These «-nJin^s du not alicmjs muke the stuui-vowcl \»n£ in ibis tense.
REGULAR LATIN CONJUGATIONS.
293
2 -re
Passive person-eudings.
Sing. Plur.
•>• , N t •> —
3
2 -mini
ere
-tor
it
itor
imml
-tor ii
a
itor
ntor untor
XOTE. — The perfect tenses of all verbs being. made alike, a single example will suffice.
Passive : made with the 3d stem.
|
Sing. |
P/wr. |
||||||
|
1 |
1 sum |
2 es |
3 est |
1 |
1 sumus |
2 estis |
3 suut |
|
«! |
£ |
||||||
|
£ |
c |
||||||
|
cs |
t |
||||||
|
^ |
eram |
eras |
erat |
oT |
erSmus |
eratia |
erant |
|
& |
1 . |
||||||
|
1— . £ |
ero |
eria |
erit |
• |
erirnus |
eritia |
erunt |
|
fe |
% |
||||||
|
f |
S |
||||||
|
ICt |
£ |
||||||
|
s |
sim |
sis |
sit |
03 |
simus |
sltia |
sint |
|
essem |
essos |
esset |
essemus |
essetis |
essent |
||
|
25* |
294 SYNOPSIS OF THE FOUR
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Conjugation.
1 1 ama-
|
IMPERFECT |
t ! |
1 uione- 1 audi- 1 reg- |
|
PERFECT |
• |
2 amav- |
|
FUTURE |
3 amato- |
|
|
PARTICIPLES. |
||
|
IMPERFECT |
{ ' 3 |
1 ama- 1 moue- 1 audi- 1 reg- |
Active.
-re u
II
ere -isse amaturo-csse
ent(i)- L 3 1 reg-
PERFECT
FUTURE nacually made by changing o of the 3d stem to vro-.
SUPINES.
ACCUSATIVE made by changing the o of the 3d stem to urn. ABLATIVE " " " " " u.
GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
1 ama- 1 inone- 1 audi- 1 reg-
. ndo- endo- or undo-
U tl
RFGULA'R LATIN CONJUGATIONS.
Passive, -rl u
I
3 amato- amato-esse
amutum Irl
3d stem.
The preceding synopsis of the conjugation of the regular Latin verb is inserted here more with a view of assisting teachers readily to make themselves masters of the system of the book, than for the sake of pupils, who will, it is hoped, have learned thoroughly all these facts in their proper places. It may, however, be convenient for them too, to see all the parts of the verb here put together.
It is to be understood that endings preceded by a dash, as -re, make the stern-vowel, to which they are attached, long.
U. C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES
YB 00428
160
36178 M87S
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
raft